Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Reference Guide
© 1995-2004, SolidWorks Corporation COMMERCIAL COMPUTER
300 Baker Avenue SOFTWARE - PROPRIETARY
Concord, Massachusetts 01742 USA U.S. Government Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure
All Rights Reserved by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR
U.S. Patents 5,815,154; 6,219,049; 6,219,055; 6,603,486; 52.227-19 (Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights),
6,611,725 and certain foreign patents. U.S. and foreign patents DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and
pending. Commercial Computer Software Documentation), and in the
SolidWorks Corporation is a Dassault Systemes S.A. license agreement, as applicable.
(Nasdaq:DASTY) company. Contractor/Manufacturer:
The information and the software discussed in this document are SolidWorks Corporation, 300 Baker Avenue, Concord,
subject to change without notice and should not be considered Massachusetts 01742 USA
commitments by SolidWorks Corporation. Portions of this software are copyrighted by and are the property of
No material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by Electronic Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries,
any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the copyright© 2004
express written permission of SolidWorks Corporation. Portions of this software © 1988, 2000 Aladdin Enterprises.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a Portions of this software © 1996, 2001 Artifex Software, Inc.
license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the Portions of this software © 2001 artofcode LLC.
terms of this license. All warranties given by SolidWorks
Corporation as to the software and documentation are set forth in Portions of this software © 2004 Bluebeam Software, Inc.
the SolidWorks Corporation License and Subscription Service Portions of this software © 1999, 2002-2004 ComponentOne
Agreement, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or Portions of this software © 1990-2004 D-Cubed Limited.
its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or
amendment of such warranties. Portions of this product are distributed under license from DC
Micro Development, Copyright © 1994-2002 DC Micro
SolidWorks® is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. Development, Inc. All rights reserved
SolidWorks 2004 is a product name of SolidWorks Corporation. Portions © eHelp Corporation. All rights reserved.
FeatureManager® is a jointly owned registered trademark of Portions of this software © 1998-2004
SolidWorks Corporation. Geometric Software Solutions Co. Limited.
Feature Palette™, PhotoWorks™, and PDMWorks™ are Portions of this software © 1986-2004
trademarks of SolidWorks Corporation. mental images GmbH & Co. KG
ACIS® is a registered trademark of Spatial Corporation. Portions of this software © 1996
FeatureWorks® is a registered trademark of Geometric Software Microsoft Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Solutions Co. Limited. Portions of this software © 2001, SIMULOG.
GLOBEtrotter® and FLEXlm® are registered trademarks of Portions of this software © 1995-2004
Globetrotter Software, Inc. Spatial Corporation.
Other brand or product names are trademarks or registered Portions of this software © 2003-2004, Structural Research &
trademarks of their respective holders. Analysis Corp.
Portions of this software © 1997-2004 Tech Soft America.
Portions of this software © 1999-2004
Viewpoint Corporation.
Portions of this software © 1994-2004, Visual Kinematics, Inc.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG
group.
All Rights Reserved
Contents
ii
Default Templates .....................................................................................................................................................2-52
Creating Additional Template Tabs ..........................................................................................................................2-52
Setting Default Material Properties ..........................................................................................................................2-53
Open ..........................................................................................................................................................................2-53
Opening Documents from Part or Assembly Windows ...........................................................................................2-54
Multi-Threaded Retrieval .........................................................................................................................................2-55
SolidWorks Documents in Windows Explorer .........................................................................................................2-55
Drag and Drop Files to a SolidWorks Document .....................................................................................................2-56
Web Folders Overview ....................................................................................................................................................2-57
Web Folders Overview .............................................................................................................................................2-57
Web Folders - Saving and Opening Files .................................................................................................................2-57
Change URL .............................................................................................................................................................2-58
Copy Referenced Files to Server ..............................................................................................................................2-58
Selection ...........................................................................................................................................................................2-59
Highlighting ..............................................................................................................................................................2-59
Select .........................................................................................................................................................................2-60
Select Partial Loop ....................................................................................................................................................2-61
Select Chain ..............................................................................................................................................................2-62
Select Other ..............................................................................................................................................................2-63
Midpoint Selection ....................................................................................................................................................2-63
Selection Filter ..........................................................................................................................................................2-63
Selection Filter Hot Keys ..........................................................................................................................................2-63
Box Selection ............................................................................................................................................................2-64
Loop Selection ..........................................................................................................................................................2-65
Tangent Selection .....................................................................................................................................................2-65
Select through Transparency ....................................................................................................................................2-66
Viewing Models ...............................................................................................................................................................2-67
Applying Color and Optic Properties .......................................................................................................................2-67
Draft Quality HLR/HLV ...........................................................................................................................................2-68
Shaded and Dynamic Previews ................................................................................................................................2-68
Hidden Lines Removed ............................................................................................................................................2-69
Hidden Lines Visible ................................................................................................................................................2-69
Applying, Creating, and Editing Materials ...............................................................................................................2-69
Materials - Supported Graphics Cards ..............................................................................................................2-71
Materials - General Information ........................................................................................................................2-71
Materials - Visual Properties .............................................................................................................................2-71
Materials - Physical Properties ..........................................................................................................................2-72
Materials - Crosshatch .......................................................................................................................................2-72
RealView Graphics ............................................................................................................................................2-72
Perspective ................................................................................................................................................................2-72
Modify Perspective ...................................................................................................................................................2-73
Creating a Section View ...........................................................................................................................................2-73
Section View PropertyManager ................................................................................................................................2-74
Shaded .......................................................................................................................................................................2-74
Shaded With Edges ...................................................................................................................................................2-75
Shadows ....................................................................................................................................................................2-75
Orientation ................................................................................................................................................................2-75
Add a Named View ..................................................................................................................................................2-77
Textures ....................................................................................................................................................................2-77
Wireframe .................................................................................................................................................................2-78
Manipulating Models .......................................................................................................................................................2-78
Middle Mouse Button Functions ..............................................................................................................................2-78
Pan ............................................................................................................................................................................2-79
Rotate View ..............................................................................................................................................................2-79
Previous View ...........................................................................................................................................................2-80
Zoom to Fit ...............................................................................................................................................................2-80
Zoom to Area ............................................................................................................................................................2-80
Chapter 3 Sketching
Sketching in SolidWorks ...................................................................................................................................................3-1
Sketch ................................................................................................................................................................................3-2
Sketch on the Face of a Part ..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Starting a New 2D Sketch ..................................................................................................................................................3-3
Starting the Sketch .............................................................................................................................................................3-4
Starting the Sketch .............................................................................................................................................................3-5
Working in a Sketch ..........................................................................................................................................................3-5
Opening a New Sketch ......................................................................................................................................................3-6
Inferencing Pointers and Lines ..........................................................................................................................................3-6
Sketch Modes .....................................................................................................................................................................3-7
Autotransitioning ...............................................................................................................................................................3-8
Silhouettes ..........................................................................................................................................................................3-8
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting in Sketches ........................................................................................................................3-8
Modify Sketch ...................................................................................................................................................................3-9
Edit Sketch .......................................................................................................................................................................3-10
Exit Sketch .......................................................................................................................................................................3-11
iv
Derived Sketch .................................................................................................................................................................3-11
Sketch Plane References ..................................................................................................................................................3-12
Edit Sketch Plane .............................................................................................................................................................3-12
Shaded Sketch Plane ........................................................................................................................................................3-12
Reference Plane Normal to Edge .....................................................................................................................................3-13
Sketch Tools .....................................................................................................................................................................3-13
Align Grid .................................................................................................................................................................3-13
Automatic Inferencing Lines ....................................................................................................................................3-14
Automatic Solve .......................................................................................................................................................3-14
No Solve Move .........................................................................................................................................................3-15
Move or Copy PropertyManager ..............................................................................................................................3-15
Check Sketch for Feature Usage ...............................................................................................................................3-16
Allowed Contour Types ............................................................................................................................................3-16
Circular Sketch Step and Repeat ..............................................................................................................................3-17
Constrain Spacing and Fixed Options ......................................................................................................................3-19
Constrain All .............................................................................................................................................................3-19
Contour Selection .....................................................................................................................................................3-19
Close Sketch to Model ..............................................................................................................................................3-21
Construction Geometry .............................................................................................................................................3-21
Convert Entities ........................................................................................................................................................3-22
Detach Segment on Drag ..........................................................................................................................................3-22
Extend Entities ..........................................................................................................................................................3-22
Face Curves ..............................................................................................................................................................3-23
Intersection Curve .....................................................................................................................................................3-24
Linear Sketch Step and Repeat .................................................................................................................................3-25
Fixed Spacing in Linear Sketch Step and Repeat .....................................................................................................3-26
Constrain Angle in Linear Sketch Step and Repeat ..................................................................................................3-26
Mirror Entities ..........................................................................................................................................................3-27
Move, Rotate, Scale, or Copy ...................................................................................................................................3-27
Offset Entities ...........................................................................................................................................................3-30
Override Dims on Drag/Move ..................................................................................................................................3-30
Sketch Chamfer ........................................................................................................................................................3-31
Sketch Fillet ..............................................................................................................................................................3-31
Sketch Fillet PropertyManager .................................................................................................................................3-32
Split Entities ..............................................................................................................................................................3-32
Trim Entities .............................................................................................................................................................3-32
Dimensions and Relations ................................................................................................................................................3-33
Dimensions ...............................................................................................................................................................3-33
Horizontal Dimension .......................................................................................................................................3-34
Vertical Dimension ............................................................................................................................................3-34
Lock Dimensions ...............................................................................................................................................3-34
Point-to-Point Dimensions ................................................................................................................................3-35
Point-to-Point Dimensions ................................................................................................................................3-35
Arc Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................3-35
Arc Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................3-35
Circular Dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................3-36
Circular Dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................3-36
Angular Dimensions Between Two Lines .........................................................................................................3-37
Angular Dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................3-37
Angular Dimensions Between Three Points ......................................................................................................3-37
Dimensions Between Arcs or Circles ................................................................................................................3-38
Autodimension ..........................................................................................................................................................3-39
Geometric Relations .................................................................................................................................................3-40
Automatic Relations .................................................................................................................................................3-40
Add Relations/Properties PropertyManager .............................................................................................................3-41
Sketch Relations .......................................................................................................................................................3-42
Sketch Relations Callouts .........................................................................................................................................3-43
vi
Dimensioning a 3D Sketch .......................................................................................................................................3-75
Virtual Sharps - 3D Sketch .......................................................................................................................................3-75
3D Arc PropertyManager .........................................................................................................................................3-75
Chapter 4 2D to 3D Conversion
2D to 3D Conversion Overview ........................................................................................................................................4-1
2D to 3D Toolbar ...............................................................................................................................................................4-4
Importing Drawings into Part Documents .........................................................................................................................4-4
Extracting Sketches ............................................................................................................................................................4-5
Aligning Sketches ..............................................................................................................................................................4-6
Extruding in 2D to 3D ........................................................................................................................................................4-7
Cutting in 2D to 3D ............................................................................................................................................................4-8
Additional Conversion Tools ...........................................................................................................................................4-10
Repair Sketch ............................................................................................................................................................4-10
Create Sketch from Selections ..................................................................................................................................4-10
Chapter 6 Features
Features Overview .............................................................................................................................................................6-1
Features Toolbar ................................................................................................................................................................6-2
Feature Previews ................................................................................................................................................................6-4
Chamfers ............................................................................................................................................................................6-7
Deform ...............................................................................................................................................................................6-8
Deform ........................................................................................................................................................................6-8
Deform Curve to Curve ..............................................................................................................................................6-9
Deform Feature Using Curve to Curve ...............................................................................................................6-9
Deform Feature Curve to Curve Options ..........................................................................................................6-12
viii
Countersink ................................................................................................................................................6-85
Dynamic Changes with Countersink Holes ...............................................................................................6-86
Hole ............................................................................................................................................................6-86
Dynamic Changes with Regular Holes ......................................................................................................6-87
Tap ..............................................................................................................................................................6-87
Dynamic Changes with Tap Holes .............................................................................................................6-88
Pipe Tap ......................................................................................................................................................6-88
Dynamic Changes with Pipe Tap Holes .....................................................................................................6-89
Legacy ........................................................................................................................................................6-89
Lofts .................................................................................................................................................................................6-90
Loft Overview ...........................................................................................................................................................6-90
Loft Features .............................................................................................................................................................6-91
Loft with Thin Feature ..............................................................................................................................................6-94
Loft Thin Feature Samples .......................................................................................................................................6-95
Loft with Non-Planar Profile ....................................................................................................................................6-95
Loft with Split Line ..................................................................................................................................................6-96
Loft with Guide Curve and Planar Profile ................................................................................................................6-97
Loft with Guide Curve and non-Planar Profile .........................................................................................................6-99
Recommendations for Lofts with Guide Curves ....................................................................................................6-101
Loft Side Tangency .................................................................................................................................................6-101
Loft with Centerline ................................................................................................................................................6-101
Loft with Start and End Tangency Control .............................................................................................................6-103
Add Loft Section .....................................................................................................................................................6-104
Loft Synchronization ..............................................................................................................................................6-106
Patterns and Mirroring ...................................................................................................................................................6-108
Pattern and Mirror Overview ..................................................................................................................................6-108
Patterns of Patterns .................................................................................................................................................6-109
Curve Driven Pattern Overview .............................................................................................................................6-110
Curve Driven Pattern ..............................................................................................................................................6-110
Linear Pattern ..........................................................................................................................................................6-114
Circular Pattern .......................................................................................................................................................6-119
Sketch Driven Patterns ...........................................................................................................................................6-121
Table Driven Patterns .............................................................................................................................................6-123
Save Table Pattern Coordinates .......................................................................................................................6-125
Load Table Pattern Coordinates ......................................................................................................................6-125
Mirror Pattern .........................................................................................................................................................6-125
Control and Modify Patterns ..................................................................................................................................6-126
Geometry Pattern .............................................................................................................................................6-127
Vary Sketch .....................................................................................................................................................6-128
Pattern Deletion ...............................................................................................................................................6-128
Seed Feature ....................................................................................................................................................6-129
Mirror Feature .........................................................................................................................................................6-129
Revolves .........................................................................................................................................................................6-132
Revolved Boss/Base ...............................................................................................................................................6-132
Revolve Features ....................................................................................................................................................6-132
Ribs ................................................................................................................................................................................6-135
Rib Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................6-135
Rib - Linear and Natural Type ................................................................................................................................6-138
Rib Feature ..............................................................................................................................................................6-139
Scaling ............................................................................................................................................................................6-141
Shapes ............................................................................................................................................................................6-142
Shape Feature ..........................................................................................................................................................6-142
Shape Feature Controls Tab ....................................................................................................................................6-144
Shells ..............................................................................................................................................................................6-145
Shell Features ..........................................................................................................................................................6-145
Shell with Multi-Thickness Faces ..........................................................................................................................6-146
Shell Feature Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................6-147
x
Select Detailed Preview ...................................................................................................................................6-215
Wrap ...............................................................................................................................................................................6-216
Chapter 7 Parts
Overview and Editing Parts ...............................................................................................................................................7-1
Parts Overview ............................................................................................................................................................7-1
Edit Definition ............................................................................................................................................................7-1
Properties of Features and Faces ................................................................................................................................7-2
Dynamic Feature Editing ............................................................................................................................................7-3
Copying Features ........................................................................................................................................................7-4
Color of Parts ..............................................................................................................................................................7-4
Material Properties and Appearance of Parts .............................................................................................................7-5
Appearance and Material Properties ...........................................................................................................................7-6
Edit Color ....................................................................................................................................................................7-7
Entity Property ............................................................................................................................................................7-8
Advanced Properties ...................................................................................................................................................7-9
Multibody Parts ................................................................................................................................................................7-10
Multibody Overview .................................................................................................................................................7-10
Multibody Parts Versus Assemblies .........................................................................................................................7-10
Modeling Techniques ...............................................................................................................................................7-11
Body Intersection ...............................................................................................................................................7-11
Bridging .............................................................................................................................................................7-12
Local Operations ...............................................................................................................................................7-12
Symmetry Modeling ..........................................................................................................................................7-13
Tool Body Modeling .........................................................................................................................................7-14
Controlling Parts ..............................................................................................................................................................7-14
Parent and Child Relations .......................................................................................................................................7-14
Equations ..................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Edit and Delete Equations .................................................................................................................................7-15
Operators and Constants ....................................................................................................................................7-16
Equation Comments and Status .........................................................................................................................7-16
Shared Values ...........................................................................................................................................................7-17
Measure .....................................................................................................................................................................7-18
Measurement Options ...............................................................................................................................................7-19
Dependency Editing ..................................................................................................................................................7-20
Suppress and Unsuppress Features ...........................................................................................................................7-21
Derived Parts ............................................................................................................................................................7-21
Insert Part ..................................................................................................................................................................7-22
Mirror Part ................................................................................................................................................................7-22
Derive Component Part ............................................................................................................................................7-23
Split and Save Bodies ...............................................................................................................................................7-23
Edit Derived Parts .....................................................................................................................................................7-26
Create Assembly .......................................................................................................................................................7-27
Resolve Ambiguity ...................................................................................................................................................7-27
File Management with External References .............................................................................................................7-28
Feature Statistics .......................................................................................................................................................7-28
Model Geometry Overview ......................................................................................................................................7-29
Selected Items Check Entity .....................................................................................................................................7-29
Checking Model Geometry .......................................................................................................................................7-30
Checking a Planar Surface ........................................................................................................................................7-30
Checking Part Faces or Edges ..................................................................................................................................7-31
Check Entity .............................................................................................................................................................7-31
Finding the Minimum Radius of Curvature ..............................................................................................................7-31
Interrupt Regeneration ..............................................................................................................................................7-32
Send To .....................................................................................................................................................................7-32
Chapter 9 Assemblies
Assemblies .........................................................................................................................................................................9-1
Design Methods .................................................................................................................................................................9-1
The FeatureManager Design Tree in an Assembly ...........................................................................................................9-2
Component Icons in the FeatureManager Design Tree .....................................................................................................9-3
Viewing Mates ...................................................................................................................................................................9-3
Adding Components to an Assembly ................................................................................................................................9-4
Insert Components ......................................................................................................................................................9-4
Adding Components from an Open Document Window ...........................................................................................9-5
Adding Components from Windows Explorer ...........................................................................................................9-5
Adding Components from Internet Explorer ..............................................................................................................9-5
Adding Components by Dragging and Dropping .......................................................................................................9-5
Inferencing to the Assembly Origin ...........................................................................................................................9-6
Deleting Components from an Assembly ..........................................................................................................................9-6
Saving an Assembly and Its Components .........................................................................................................................9-6
Saving an Assembly in Various Ways ...............................................................................................................................9-7
Replace Components .........................................................................................................................................................9-7
xii
Reload Documents .............................................................................................................................................................9-8
Edit Referenced File Locations ..........................................................................................................................................9-8
Replace Mated Entities ......................................................................................................................................................9-8
Assembly Statistics ............................................................................................................................................................9-9
Component Properties ........................................................................................................................................................9-9
Assembly Instance Color .................................................................................................................................................9-10
Arranging Components ....................................................................................................................................................9-10
Assembly PropertyManager .....................................................................................................................................9-10
Positioning Components in an Assembly .................................................................................................................9-10
Fixing the Position of a Component .........................................................................................................................9-11
Moving a Component ...............................................................................................................................................9-11
Rotating a Component ..............................................................................................................................................9-12
Assembly Mates ........................................................................................................................................................9-13
Mate PropertyManager ......................................................................................................................................9-13
Standard Mates ..................................................................................................................................................9-14
Standard Mates by Entity ..................................................................................................................................9-15
Mate Alignment .................................................................................................................................................9-17
Mate Reference ..................................................................................................................................................9-17
Mategroups ........................................................................................................................................................9-18
Modifying a Mating Relationship .....................................................................................................................9-19
Angle Mate ........................................................................................................................................................9-19
Coincident Mate ................................................................................................................................................9-20
Concentric Mate ................................................................................................................................................9-20
Distance Mate ....................................................................................................................................................9-21
Parallel and Perpendicular Mates ......................................................................................................................9-21
Tangent Mate .....................................................................................................................................................9-22
Cam-Follower Mates .........................................................................................................................................9-22
Gear Mates .........................................................................................................................................................9-23
Limit Mates .......................................................................................................................................................9-23
Symmetry Mate .................................................................................................................................................9-24
SmartMates ...............................................................................................................................................................9-25
Geometry-Based Mates .....................................................................................................................................9-25
Feature-Based Mates .........................................................................................................................................9-26
Pattern-Based Mates ..........................................................................................................................................9-26
Adding SmartMates While Moving Components .............................................................................................9-27
Deleting a Mating Relationship ................................................................................................................................9-28
Suppressing a Mating Relationship ..........................................................................................................................9-28
Mate Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................................................9-28
Conflicting Mates ..............................................................................................................................................9-29
Design Errors and Mating .................................................................................................................................9-30
Errors in Solving Mates .....................................................................................................................................9-31
In-Context Mating Conflicts ..............................................................................................................................9-31
Mates to Dangling Geometry ............................................................................................................................9-31
Mating Conflicts with Sketch Relations ............................................................................................................9-32
Physical Simulation ..................................................................................................................................................9-33
Linear or Rotary Motors ....................................................................................................................................9-33
Linear Springs ...................................................................................................................................................9-34
Gravity ...............................................................................................................................................................9-35
Recording and Replaying a Simulation .............................................................................................................9-35
Sub-assemblies .................................................................................................................................................................9-36
Working with Sub-assemblies ..................................................................................................................................9-36
Forming a New Assembly from Existing Components ............................................................................................9-37
Dragging Components to Edit the Assembly Structure ............................................................................................9-37
Assembly Structure Editing ......................................................................................................................................9-38
Changing the Order of Components .........................................................................................................................9-39
Inserting a New Sub-assembly .................................................................................................................................9-39
Dissolving a Sub-assembly .......................................................................................................................................9-39
xiv
Component Selection by Properties ..........................................................................................................................9-67
Advanced Hide/Show Components ..........................................................................................................................9-67
Advanced Component Selection ...............................................................................................................................9-68
Saving and Reloading Selection Criteria ..................................................................................................................9-68
Displaying Assemblies .....................................................................................................................................................9-69
Exploding an Assembly View ..................................................................................................................................9-69
Assembly Exploder ...........................................................................................................................................9-69
Exploding and Collapsing an Exploded View ...................................................................................................9-70
Alternative Method for Editing an Exploded View ..........................................................................................9-71
Explode Line Sketch ..........................................................................................................................................9-71
Jog Line .............................................................................................................................................................9-71
Image Quality in Assemblies ....................................................................................................................................9-72
Color and Appearance in Assemblies .......................................................................................................................9-72
Annotations in Assemblies .......................................................................................................................................9-73
Preventing Interference Between Components ................................................................................................................9-74
Interference Detection ..............................................................................................................................................9-74
Collision Detection ...................................................................................................................................................9-74
Physical Dynamics ....................................................................................................................................................9-75
Dynamic Clearance ...................................................................................................................................................9-76
Smart Fasteners ................................................................................................................................................................9-77
Smart Fasteners Overview ........................................................................................................................................9-77
Smart Fasteners PropertyManager ............................................................................................................................9-78
Smart Fasteners Bolts and Screws ............................................................................................................................9-79
Smart Fasteners Nuts ................................................................................................................................................9-81
Smart Fasteners Washers ..........................................................................................................................................9-82
Unsupported Hole Types ..........................................................................................................................................9-83
Editing Smart Fasteners ............................................................................................................................................9-85
Smart Fasteners Hardware Stacks ............................................................................................................................9-86
Drag-and-Drop Editing of Smart Fasteners ..............................................................................................................9-87
Smart Fasteners Part Numbers ..................................................................................................................................9-88
Mark Up-to-date .......................................................................................................................................................9-88
Configuring Bolt Patterns in Smart Fasteners ..........................................................................................................9-89
Smart Fasteners Defaults ..........................................................................................................................................9-90
Chapter 10 Configurations
Configurations Overview .................................................................................................................................................10-1
ConfigurationManager .....................................................................................................................................................10-1
Show Preview ..................................................................................................................................................................10-2
Configurations and In-context Components ....................................................................................................................10-2
Configure Document ........................................................................................................................................................10-3
Configure Document for View / Configurations .............................................................................................................10-3
Manual Configurations ....................................................................................................................................................10-4
Creating a Configuration Manually ..........................................................................................................................10-4
Add Configuration/Configuration Properties ...........................................................................................................10-4
Properties for Newly Inserted Items .........................................................................................................................10-5
Derived Configurations ............................................................................................................................................10-6
Activating a Configuration .......................................................................................................................................10-8
Configurable Items for Parts .....................................................................................................................................10-8
Sketch Dimensions in Configurations ...............................................................................................................10-8
Sketch Planes in Configurations ........................................................................................................................10-9
Sketch Relations in Configurations ...................................................................................................................10-9
End Conditions in Configurations ...................................................................................................................10-10
Configurable Items for Assemblies ........................................................................................................................10-10
Modifying a Configuration Dimension ..................................................................................................................10-11
Editing a Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................10-11
Special Assembly Configurations ...........................................................................................................................10-12
Component Configurations in an Assembly ...........................................................................................................10-12
Chapter 11 Drawings
Drawings Overview .........................................................................................................................................................11-1
Getting Started in Drawings ............................................................................................................................................11-2
Setting Options for Drawing Documents .................................................................................................................11-2
Creating a Drawing ...................................................................................................................................................11-3
Sheet Format/Size .....................................................................................................................................................11-3
Sheet Properties ........................................................................................................................................................11-4
Multiple Drawing Sheets ..........................................................................................................................................11-4
Sheet Formats, Sheets, and Views ............................................................................................................................11-5
Customizing Sheet Formats ......................................................................................................................................11-5
Saving Sheet Formats ...............................................................................................................................................11-6
Linking Notes to Document Properties ....................................................................................................................11-7
The Drawing Window ..............................................................................................................................................11-8
Views of Parts and Assemblies ................................................................................................................................11-8
View Boundaries ......................................................................................................................................................11-9
Scales in Drawings ...................................................................................................................................................11-9
Dimension Type .....................................................................................................................................................11-10
xvi
Crosshatch in Drawings ..........................................................................................................................................11-10
2D Sketching in Drawings ......................................................................................................................................11-10
Quality in Drawings ................................................................................................................................................11-11
Convert to Draft Quality .........................................................................................................................................11-12
Sending Drawing Documents Electronically ..........................................................................................................11-12
Types of Drawing Documents .......................................................................................................................................11-13
Drawing Documents ...............................................................................................................................................11-13
Detached Drawings .................................................................................................................................................11-13
Working in Detached Drawings .............................................................................................................................11-14
Lightweight Drawings ............................................................................................................................................11-16
Standard Drawing Views ...............................................................................................................................................11-17
Standard Drawing Views ........................................................................................................................................11-17
Standard 3 View .....................................................................................................................................................11-17
Standard 3 View PropertyManager .................................................................................................................11-19
First Angle and Third Angle Projection ..........................................................................................................11-19
Model View ............................................................................................................................................................11-19
Model/Predefined/Empty View PropertyManager .................................................................................................11-21
Relative to Model View ..........................................................................................................................................11-22
Relative View PropertyManager in Drawings ................................................................................................11-23
Relative View PropertyManager in Models ....................................................................................................11-24
Drawing View Orientation ..............................................................................................................................11-24
Predefined Views ....................................................................................................................................................11-24
Empty Views ..........................................................................................................................................................11-25
Derived Drawing Views ................................................................................................................................................11-26
Derived Drawing Views .........................................................................................................................................11-26
Projected View ........................................................................................................................................................11-26
Projected View PropertyManager ...........................................................................................................................11-27
Auxiliary View .......................................................................................................................................................11-28
Auxiliary View PropertyManager ..........................................................................................................................11-29
Detail View .............................................................................................................................................................11-30
Detail View PropertyManager .........................................................................................................................11-31
Modifying a Detail View .................................................................................................................................11-32
Detail Circle Styles ..........................................................................................................................................11-33
Crop View ...............................................................................................................................................................11-33
Broken-out Section .................................................................................................................................................11-34
Broken-out Section PropertyManager ....................................................................................................................11-35
Broken View ...........................................................................................................................................................11-35
Broken View Break Line Styles .............................................................................................................................11-37
Section Views in Drawings ....................................................................................................................................11-37
Section View PropertyManager ......................................................................................................................11-38
Modifying Section Views ................................................................................................................................11-40
Section Views of Assemblies ..........................................................................................................................11-40
Section Scope ..................................................................................................................................................11-41
Troubleshooting Section Views ......................................................................................................................11-41
Modifying Section Line Properties .................................................................................................................11-42
Aligned Section View .............................................................................................................................................11-42
Alternate Position View ..........................................................................................................................................11-43
Alternate Position PropertyManager ......................................................................................................................11-44
Position Schematic PropertyManager .....................................................................................................................11-44
OLE Items in Drawings ..........................................................................................................................................11-45
Drawing View Update ............................................................................................................................................11-45
Drawing View Alignment and Display ..........................................................................................................................11-45
Drawing View Alignment and Display ..................................................................................................................11-45
Manipulating Views ................................................................................................................................................11-46
Drawing View Properties ................................................................................................................................11-46
Multiple Views PropertyManager ...................................................................................................................11-47
Updating Views ...............................................................................................................................................11-47
Chapter 12 Detailing
Detailing Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................12-1
Detailing Overview ..................................................................................................................................................12-1
Setting Detailing Options .........................................................................................................................................12-1
Inserting Model Items ...............................................................................................................................................12-1
Insert Model Items ....................................................................................................................................................12-2
Inserting Annotations into Drawings ........................................................................................................................12-3
Inserting Dimensions into Drawings ........................................................................................................................12-3
Inserting Reference Geometry into Drawings ..........................................................................................................12-4
Favorites ...................................................................................................................................................................12-4
Add or Update a Favorite .........................................................................................................................................12-6
Dimensions in Drawings ..................................................................................................................................................12-6
Dimensions Overview ..............................................................................................................................................12-6
Setting Dimensions Options .....................................................................................................................................12-7
Dimension PropertyManager ....................................................................................................................................12-8
Symbol ....................................................................................................................................................................12-10
Dimension Properties .............................................................................................................................................12-10
Value ...............................................................................................................................................................12-11
Name ...............................................................................................................................................................12-11
Full Name ........................................................................................................................................................12-11
Units ................................................................................................................................................................12-11
Font ..................................................................................................................................................................12-12
Arrow Style .....................................................................................................................................................12-12
Arrows .............................................................................................................................................................12-12
Display as inspection dimension .....................................................................................................................12-12
Read only .........................................................................................................................................................12-12
Dimension Precision .......................................................................................................................................12-12
Dimension Display ..........................................................................................................................................12-13
Driven ..............................................................................................................................................................12-13
Display with parentheses .................................................................................................................................12-13
Display as dual dimension ...............................................................................................................................12-13
Display with solid leader .................................................................................................................................12-13
Use document's second arrow .........................................................................................................................12-13
Display second outside arrow .........................................................................................................................12-14
Display as chain dimension .............................................................................................................................12-14
Diameter dimension ........................................................................................................................................12-14
xviii
Foreshortened radius .......................................................................................................................................12-14
Dimension to inside of arc ...............................................................................................................................12-15
Display as linear dimension .............................................................................................................................12-15
First arc condition, Second arc condition ........................................................................................................12-15
Layer ................................................................................................................................................................12-15
Dimension Units/Chamfer Dimension Units ..........................................................................................................12-16
Dimensioning to Midpoints ....................................................................................................................................12-16
Reference Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................12-16
Parentheses .............................................................................................................................................................12-17
Baseline Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................12-17
Ordinate Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................12-17
Horizontal Ordinate Dimensions ............................................................................................................................12-19
Vertical Ordinate Dimensions ................................................................................................................................12-19
Parallel Dimensions ................................................................................................................................................12-19
Chamfer Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................12-20
Dimension Leaders/Text .........................................................................................................................................12-21
Leader/Text Display for Chamfer Dimensions .......................................................................................................12-21
Moving and Copying Dimensions ..........................................................................................................................12-22
Aligning Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................12-22
Align Dimensions Parallel/Concentric ...................................................................................................................12-23
Align Collinear/Radial Dimensions ........................................................................................................................12-24
Dimension Extension Lines ....................................................................................................................................12-24
Modify Text of Dimension .....................................................................................................................................12-26
Modify Dimension ..................................................................................................................................................12-26
Specify Configurations ...........................................................................................................................................12-27
Increment ................................................................................................................................................................12-27
Hide/Show Annotations ..........................................................................................................................................12-27
Dimension Tolerance ..............................................................................................................................................12-28
Fit Tolerances .........................................................................................................................................................12-29
Annotations ....................................................................................................................................................................12-31
Annotations Overview ............................................................................................................................................12-31
Annotations Options Overview ..............................................................................................................................12-31
Annotation Properties .............................................................................................................................................12-32
Multiple Annotations ..............................................................................................................................................12-33
Aligning Annotations ..............................................................................................................................................12-34
Multi-jog Leaders ...................................................................................................................................................12-35
Notes .......................................................................................................................................................................12-36
Hyperlinks in Notes .........................................................................................................................................12-37
Note PropertyManager ....................................................................................................................................12-38
Note Properties ................................................................................................................................................12-39
Multiple Leaders .....................................................................................................................................................12-41
Link to Property ......................................................................................................................................................12-41
Balloons ..................................................................................................................................................................12-42
Balloon PropertyManager .......................................................................................................................................12-44
Stacked Balloons ....................................................................................................................................................12-44
Stacked Balloon PropertyManager .........................................................................................................................12-46
AutoBalloons ..........................................................................................................................................................12-46
AutoBalloon PropertyManager ...............................................................................................................................12-47
Center Marks ..........................................................................................................................................................12-48
Center Mark PropertyManager ...............................................................................................................................12-50
Centerline Annotations ...........................................................................................................................................12-51
Hole Callouts ..........................................................................................................................................................12-52
Hole Callout Variables ...........................................................................................................................................12-53
Cosmetic Threads ...................................................................................................................................................12-54
Cosmetic Thread PropertyManager ........................................................................................................................12-55
Surface Finish Symbols ..........................................................................................................................................12-56
Surface Finish PropertyManager ............................................................................................................................12-57
Chapter 13 Import/Export
Importing and Exporting Files .........................................................................................................................................13-1
Importing/Exporting SolidWorks Documents .................................................................................................................13-2
Importing Documents ......................................................................................................................................................13-3
xx
Importing Geometry .........................................................................................................................................................13-3
Editing Imported Features ................................................................................................................................................13-4
Open - Match Faces and Edges of Imported Features .....................................................................................................13-5
Import Diagnosis ..............................................................................................................................................................13-5
Import Diagnosis PropertyManager .................................................................................................................................13-6
General Import Options ...................................................................................................................................................13-7
STL and VRML Import Options ......................................................................................................................................13-8
Exporting Documents and Setting Options ......................................................................................................................13-9
ACIS Export Options ................................................................................................................................................13-9
DXF/DWG Export Options ....................................................................................................................................13-10
eDrawings Export Options .....................................................................................................................................13-11
IGES Export Options ..............................................................................................................................................13-11
Surface Representation ...........................................................................................................................................13-12
Parasolid Export Options ........................................................................................................................................13-13
STEP Export Options .............................................................................................................................................13-13
STL Export Options ................................................................................................................................................13-14
TIFF Export Options ...............................................................................................................................................13-15
VRML Export Options ...........................................................................................................................................13-15
Exporting Multibody Documents ..................................................................................................................................13-16
Print3D ...........................................................................................................................................................................13-16
File Types .......................................................................................................................................................................13-17
ACIS Files (*.sat) ...................................................................................................................................................13-17
Autodesk Inventor Files ..........................................................................................................................................13-17
CADKEY Files .......................................................................................................................................................13-17
CATIA Graphics Files ............................................................................................................................................13-18
DXF 3D Files ..........................................................................................................................................................13-18
DXF/DWG Files (*.dxf, *.dwg) .............................................................................................................................13-19
DXF/DWG View Only ....................................................................................................................................13-20
DXF/DWG View Only PropertyManager .......................................................................................................13-21
Inserting DXF/DWG Files ..............................................................................................................................13-21
Copying and Pasting from AutoCAD to SolidWorks .....................................................................................13-22
Imported DXF/DWG Entities ..........................................................................................................................13-22
DXF/DWG Mapping .......................................................................................................................................13-23
eDrawings ...............................................................................................................................................................13-24
Saving Drawing Sheets in eDrawing Files .............................................................................................................13-25
Saving Configurations in eDrawing Files ...............................................................................................................13-26
Highly Compressed Graphics Files ........................................................................................................................13-26
HOOPS Files ..........................................................................................................................................................13-27
IGES Files (*.igs, *.iges) ........................................................................................................................................13-27
IGES Entity Types ..................................................................................................................................................13-28
IGES Levels ............................................................................................................................................................13-29
IGES 3D Curves .....................................................................................................................................................13-29
JPEG Files ..............................................................................................................................................................13-29
Mechanical Desktop Files .......................................................................................................................................13-29
Parasolid Files (*.x_t, *.x_b) ..................................................................................................................................13-33
PDF Files ................................................................................................................................................................13-33
Pro/ENGINEER Files .............................................................................................................................................13-33
Importing Pro/ENGINEER Part Files Into SolidWorks .........................................................................................13-34
Importing Pro/ENGINEER Assembly Files Into SolidWorks ...............................................................................13-35
Exporting SolidWorks Documents as Pro/ENGINEER Files ................................................................................13-36
Solid Edge Files ......................................................................................................................................................13-36
STEP Files (*.step) .................................................................................................................................................13-37
STL Files (*.stl) ......................................................................................................................................................13-37
TIFF Files (*.tif) .....................................................................................................................................................13-38
Inserting TIFF Files ................................................................................................................................................13-38
Unigraphics II Files ................................................................................................................................................13-39
VDAFS Files (*.vda) ..............................................................................................................................................13-39
xxii
Importing a Sheet Metal Part to SolidWorks ..........................................................................................................15-17
Comparing Sheet Metal Design Methods ......................................................................................................................15-18
Comparing Sheet Metal Design Methods ...............................................................................................................15-18
Design a Sheet Metal Part from a Solid ..................................................................................................................15-18
Design a Part from a Solid, Then Convert it to Sheet Metal ..................................................................................15-19
Design a Sheet Metal Part from the Flattened State ...............................................................................................15-20
Design a Part from the Flattened State, Then Convert it to Sheet Metal ................................................................15-20
Reasons to Build a Part, then Convert it to Sheet Metal ........................................................................................15-21
Combining the Different Sheet Metal Design Methods .........................................................................................15-21
Other Sheet Metal Topics ..............................................................................................................................................15-22
Bend Allowance and Bend Deduction ....................................................................................................................15-22
Bend Allowance and Bend Deduction Options ...............................................................................................15-22
Bend Allowance and Bend Deduction ............................................................................................................15-22
K-Factor ...........................................................................................................................................................15-23
Bend Table Overview ......................................................................................................................................15-23
Bend Table - Text File .....................................................................................................................................15-24
Bend Table - Excel Spreadsheet ......................................................................................................................15-24
Bend Allowance Value ....................................................................................................................................15-25
Bend Deduction Value ....................................................................................................................................15-25
Using Forming Tools with Sheet Metal ..................................................................................................................15-25
Forming Tools .................................................................................................................................................15-25
Creating Forming Tools ..................................................................................................................................15-25
Creating Openings on Forming Tools .............................................................................................................15-27
Create a Positioning Sketch for Forming Tool ................................................................................................15-27
Working with Palette Items and Folders .........................................................................................................15-27
Applying Forming Tools to Sheet Metal Parts ................................................................................................15-28
More Sheet Metal Topics ........................................................................................................................................15-28
Using Auto Reliefs ..........................................................................................................................................15-28
Changing Auto Reliefs ....................................................................................................................................15-29
Edit Auto Reliefs .............................................................................................................................................15-29
Edit All Auto Reliefs .......................................................................................................................................15-29
Rip ...................................................................................................................................................................15-30
Bends ...............................................................................................................................................................15-31
Edit Bends .......................................................................................................................................................15-31
Reorder Bends .................................................................................................................................................15-31
Flattening Sheet Metal Bends ..........................................................................................................................15-32
No Bends .........................................................................................................................................................15-32
Sheet Metal - Default Bend Parameters ..........................................................................................................15-32
Mirroring Sheet Metal Parts ............................................................................................................................15-33
Cut Across Sheet Metal Bends ........................................................................................................................15-34
Normal Cut ......................................................................................................................................................15-35
Break Corner/Corner-Trim ..............................................................................................................................15-35
Jog ....................................................................................................................................................................15-36
Lofted Bend .....................................................................................................................................................15-38
Bend Deviation ................................................................................................................................................15-39
Creating Sheet Metal Parts with Cylindrical Faces .........................................................................................15-40
Creating Drawings of Sheet Metal Parts .........................................................................................................15-41
Flat Pattern .......................................................................................................................................................15-42
Merge Faces .....................................................................................................................................................15-43
Simplify Bends ................................................................................................................................................15-43
Corner Treatment .............................................................................................................................................15-43
Add Corner-Trim .............................................................................................................................................15-44
Creating a Sheet Metal Flat Pattern Configuration .........................................................................................15-44
Unfold/Fold .....................................................................................................................................................15-45
xxiv
1
SolidWorks 2004 Reference Guide
John J. McEleney
CEO, SolidWorks Corporation
Scope
The information in the Reference Guide comes from the SolidWorks Online Help for SolidWorks 2004
Service Pack 1. The Reference Guide does not include information on the add-ins such as the PhotoWorks software or
the eDrawings software.
The purpose of the Reference Guide is to provide a linear, easily printed version of the SolidWorks Online Help.
SolidWorks Corporation is responding to your enhancement requests for a way to easily print the help, quickly return
to previous topics, and mark pages for later reference. Please note:
• The text in the Reference Guide matches the text in the SolidWorks Online Help; it has not been rewritten
for printed format. The text might seem awkward at times because it originates from context-sensitive help.
• The order of the topics in the Reference Guide might seem awkward at times. SolidWorks Corporation made
its best attempt to arrange the topics of the SolidWorks Online Help in the most logical order.
• Some page breaks may come at awkward times. A decision was made to forfeit some ideal placement of
page breaks in favor of fewer pages in the book.
• All Related Topics buttons in the SolidWorks Online Help were deleted from the Reference Guide.
Conventions
The Reference Guide uses the following font and icon conventions:
• bold - Indicates a user interface element such as a menu item, tooltip, title of a dialog box, and so on.
• - Represents a note or a tip. It is not a link; the information follows the icon. Notes and tips provide time-
saving steps and helpful hints.
• hyperlinks - Indicates a hyperlink to another section of the Reference Guide. You can click hyperlinks in the
.pdf file to be taken to another section. Hyperlinks do not change to cross-references with a page number in
any printed versions of the book.
Resources
Some of the resources provided by SolidWorks Corporation to aid you in learning the software are:
• Quick Tips - Pop-up messages that appear while you create SolidWorks documents. These messages give
hints and options based on the current SolidWorks mode.
Access: Click Help, Quick Tips.
• Introducing SolidWorks book - Discusses basic concepts and terms used throughout SolidWorks. The
book uses a bathroom vanity to illustrate various tools and functions in the software.
Access: Click Help, Introducing SolidWorks, or read the printed manual that is shipped to new customers.
• What's New book - Highlights the new functionality with step-by-step examples for many of the new
functions.
Access: Click Help, What's New Manual, or read the printed manual that is shipped to subscription
customers.
• Online Tutorial - Includes step-by-step examples that teach the functionality of the SolidWorks product and
its add-ins.
Access: Click Help, Online Tutorial.
• Moving from AutoCAD - Assists AutoCAD users in learning some of the differences between SolidWorks
and AutoCAD.
Access: Click Help, Moving from AutoCAD.
• Glossary - Contains definitions of solid modeling and SolidWorks-specific terms.
Access: Click the Glossary tab in the SolidWorks Online Help.
• Design Portfolio - Showcases parts created with SolidWorks, provides a high level overview of design
intent, and presents potential design implementations.
Access: Click Help, Design Portfolio.
• Release Notes - Contains information about new and changed functionality at every Service Pack.
Access: Click Help, SolidWorks Release Notes.
1-2
2
SolidWorks Fundamentals
SolidWorks Fundamentals
• Basic Concepts
• The FeatureManager Design Tree
• Opening New Documents and Using Templates
• Opening Existing SolidWorks Documents
• What's Wrong?
• Shortcut Menus
• View Modes
• Selection Methods
• Print and Print Preview
• SolidWorks Service Packs
• Converting Older SolidWorks Files to SolidWorks 2003
• Getting Help and Visiting the SolidWorks Web Site
• Using the Macro Tools
• Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
• SolidWorks Application Programming Interface (API)
Basic Concepts
Document Windows
In the SolidWorks application, each part, assembly, and drawing is referred to as a document, and each document is
displayed in a separate window. (Each drawing document can contain multiple drawing sheets, though.)
• You can have multiple part, assembly, and drawing document windows open at the same time. Also, you can
have multiple views of the same document visible at the same time.
• To arrange the windows, you can drag them by their title bars, and you can resize them by dragging a corner
or border. Also, from the Window menu, you can select Cascade, Tile Vertically, or Tile Horizontally.
2-2
• To organize your SolidWorks window, you can minimize open documents. Click Minimize in the upper
right corner of the document border. An icon appears in the lower part of the SolidWorks window. If the icon
is not visible, it may be behind another open document. Resize any open documents as necessary. Click
Window, Arrange Icons to arrange them at the bottom of the SolidWorks window.
• Click Window, Close All to close all open documents. You are prompted to save any unsaved documents.
Cascade
Arranges all SolidWorks document windows so they overlap with all their title bars visible.
Arrange Icons
Lines up all minimized document icons in evenly spaced rows at the bottom of the SolidWorks window.
Close All
Closes all open documents. If a new or changed document has not been saved, the program asks you to confirm
whether you want to save the document or rebuild the part.
New Window
Creates a new window for viewing the active part, assembly, or drawing.
PropertyManager Overview
More functions now use the PropertyManager instead of dialog boxes, which allows your graphics to be displayed
instead of hidden by dialog boxes.
Description
The PropertyManager contains the following items:
Undo buttons.)
• Group Boxes. Contain Group Box title , buttons and
label icons
• Group Box Open and Group Box Closed icons
• Selection Boxes. Available for making selections in the graphics
area or in the FeatureManager design tree. When active they are
pink. When you click an item in the selection box, the selected
item is easier to identify in the graphics area, because the
highlighted edges are bolder:
Color Schemes
You can apply pre-defined color schemes to the PropertyManager.
The colors in PropertyManager Color and PropertyManager Skin may change according to the
color you selected in Current Color Scheme.
4. Click OK.
When you display the PropertyManager, the new color scheme appears.
2-4
Entering Values and Accepting or Cancelling Commands
When you have the PropertyManager displayed, there are several ways to enter values and accept commands.
Original part with Press Enter and the preview Press Enter again and the part
Set Depth to updates. updates to show the new
Depth set to 10. 30, but do not press value.
Enter.
1. In the Extrude PropertyManager, under Direction 1, set Depth to 30, but do not press Enter.
The preview does not change because you have not yet accepted the new value.
2. Press Enter.
The preview now updates to show the new Depth because you accepted the new value.
3. At this point, if you want to cancel the Extrude command and retain the original depth, press Esc. However,
you want to accept the new value.
4. Press Enter again.
The Extrude command is accepted. The part updates to show the new value, and the PropertyManager
closes.
Split Bar
The split bar separates the PropertyManager from the graphics area. If
you drag the split bar back and forth, it snaps into position at the
optimum width for displaying the PropertyManager. When you create
new documents, the split bar opens at the optimum width. You can
drag the split bar to resize the windows, as necessary.
Callouts
Callouts are text-filled boxes that appear in the graphics area when you use certain tools. Callouts help you easily
distinguish between different entities. For example, these callouts show the sweep profile and the sweep path. You
can drag these callouts to reposition them, but you cannot use them to change any properties of the entity to which
they refer
Some callouts, such as those for chamfers, display figures that you can edit to manipulate the size of the entity.
In this example, you can edit the callout in the graphics area.
Handles
Handles allow you to dynamically click, move, and set certain parameters without leaving the graphics area. The
handle color is set in Tools, Options, System Options, Colors, in the System colors box. Active handles are the
Highlight color. Inactive handles are the Inactive Entities color.
Handles span the length of extrusions. Drag the handle to the desired extrude depth, and the handle spans that length.
You can also drag the pointer (instead of the handle) to the desired extrude depth. Click the handle, then drag the
pointer in either direction
One handle has one arrow head, and the other handle has two arrow heads, to help you see which direction the handle
applies to.
2-6
Drag and Drop
• Moving and copying features. You can move or copy features by dragging them in the model.
While holding down the Shift key, drag the feature to a different location. Release the mouse button to drop the
feature on a planar face of the model.
Example:
To move more than one feature at a time, hold down the Ctrl key as you select the features, then hold down the
Shift key while you drag the features.
Point at a planar face on the feature and hold down the Ctrl key while you drag the feature. Drop the copy on a
planar face of the model.
You can also use the Copy and Paste tools on the Standard toolbar.
Shortcut Menu
You have access to a variety of tools and commands on the shortcut menu while you work in the SolidWorks
software. When you move the pointer over geometry in the model, over items in the FeatureManager design tree, or
over the SolidWorks window borders, right-click to access a shortcut menu of commands that are appropriate for
wherever you clicked.
Shortcut menus include:
• Headings to denote sections of the menu.
• User-defined names if you apply custom names
to features, components, and so on.
• Groups of related menu items.
This menu is for customization purposes only. You cannot run a command from this menu.
2. To add menu items, select the empty check boxes. To delete menu items, clear the selected check boxes.
3. Click anywhere outside of the menu to save your changes, or press Enter. To cancel your changes, press
Esc.
To restore the shortcut menus to default values or to show all menu items:
1. Click Tools, Customize, or right-click over the toolbar area (not the CommandManager) and select
Customize.
Click the same buttons under Menu customization to update SolidWorks menus.
3. Click OK.
2-8
You can access the "more commands menu" by selecting the double-down arrows in the menu. When you click
the double-down arrows, the shortcut menu expands to offer more menu items.
The double-down arrows appear after you have executed at least one command in the menu. If you have not
executed a command in the menu, or if the menu contains fewer than 12 items, the double-down arrows do not
appear.
The shortcut menu provides an efficient way to work without continually moving the pointer to the main pull-down
menus or the toolbar buttons. For instance, with the shortcut menu, you can:
• Select a tool without moving your pointer to the toolbar
• Open and close sketches
• Change or view the properties of an item
• Rename a feature or dimension with the Properties dialog box
• Hide or show a sketch, plane, axis, or assembly component by right-clicking an item in the FeatureManager
design tree or in the graphics area
• Temporarily roll a model back to an earlier state by right-clicking any feature in the FeatureManager design
tree and selecting Rollback
• Open an assembly component for editing
• Access the dimension tools and an annotations menu when in a drawing
• Access the toolbars list when you click a SolidWorks window border
Accepting Features
You have several streamlined ways to accept features you create. After creating a preview of a feature, you can:
• Right-click when the pointer changes to to accept the preview, or click to return to the preview
without accepting the values.
Confirmation Corner
Another way to accept features is to use the Confirmation Corner. You can:
• Click the OK or Cancel icons that
appear in the Confirmation Corner of
the SolidWorks graphics area.
To turn off the Confirmation Corner, click Tools, Options, General, System Options, and clear Enable
Confirmation Corner.
PropertyManager
In an active PropertyManager, you can:
Pop-up Tooltips
Pop-up tooltips guide you when building models. Pop-up tooltips appear with an informational message, then
disappear after a few seconds. Here are some examples of pop-up tooltips:
Help
If you have questions while you use SolidWorks, you can find answers in several ways:
• SolidWorks User Interface
Use the following tools to get help with items in the SolidWorks window:
o PropertyManagers and dialog boxes. In an active PropertyManager or dialog box, click Help
o What's This. Click What's This on the Standard toolbar, then click a FeatureManager design
tree, ConfigurationManager, PropertyManager, or toolbar item for help on that item.
o Tooltips. Provides information about tools on toolbars, PropertyManagers, and dialog boxes. When
you pause the pointer over a tool for a brief time, a tooltip appears to display the name of the tool.
o Status Bar. Provides a brief description in the Status Bar at the bottom of the SolidWorks window
as you move the pointer over a tool or click a menu item.
• SolidWorks Online User's Guide
Provides assistance while you work. To access this resource, click Help on the Standard toolbar, or
click Help, SolidWorks Help Topics. The help also contains a glossary of terms.
2-10
• Quick Tips
Displays a set of pop-up messages that appear while you create SolidWorks documents. Quick Tips give
hints and options based on the current SolidWorks mode. Most of the messages have hyperlinks; click a
hyperlink to see the associated item in the SolidWorks window. To access this resource, click Help, Quick
Tips.
Quick Tips are not available when the Online Tutorial is active.
• About SolidWorks
Displays information about the SolidWorks software. To access this resource, click Help, About
SolidWorks. In the dialog box, click Connect to get information from the SolidWorks Web site. For
information about add-in applications you installed, click Help, About <application_name>.
• Partner Solutions
Provides access to the SolidWorks Solution Program Partner Web site. To access this resource, click
Help, Partner Solutions.
What's Wrong?
Icon Description
Indicates an error with the model. This icon appears on the document name at the top of the
FeatureManager design tree, and on the feature that contains the error.
Indicates an error with a feature. This icon appears on the feature name in the FeatureManager design
tree.
Indicates a warning underneath the node indicated. This icon appears on the document name at the top
of the FeatureManager design tree, and on the parent feature in the FeatureManager design tree whose
child feature issued the error.
Indicates a warning with a feature. This icon appears on the specific feature in the FeatureManager
design tree that issued the warning.
If a document or feature has both an error and a warning, the icon is displayed.
The Rebuild Errors dialog box automatically appears when the error is first generated.
2-12
Print
Page Setup
Allows you to change printer settings.
o Set each drawing sheet individually. Specify the settings for each sheet in the drawing
by selecting a drawing sheet in Settings for.
In subsequent files that you print, the SolidWorks software remembers the last
setting you selected.
• Resolution and Scale. Set the scale for the printed document.
o Same as window (parts and assemblies only). Prints the current view of the graphics area.
o Scale to fit (drawings only). Prints the drawing sheet to fit the paper size.
o Scale. Prints the document at a scaled value (in percent) that you specify.
o High Quality (drawings only). The SolidWorks software determines the optimum
resolution for the printer and paper size combination, generates the raster output and prints
it accordingly.
When you select High Quality, click File, Print, Properties to set any advanced
properties for the selected printer. If there are options for improved raster output, selecte
them to get the highest quality printed output.
• Paper. Select:
o Size. Sets the paper size on which you want to print the document.
o Source. Sets the printer tray where the paper is located.
• Drawing Color. Select one of the following:
o Automatic. Sends color information if the printer or plotter driver reports that it is capable
of printing color. Otherwise, the SolidWorks software sends black and white information.
o Color / Gray scale. Sends color data to the printer or plotter regardless of the capabilities
that the printer or plotter driver reports. Black and white printers generally print colored
entities in gray scale or dithered with this option. Use this option where a color printer or
plotter prints in black and white with the Automatic setting.
o Black and white. Sends all entities to the printer or plotter in black and white regardless
of the printer or plotter color capabilities.
• Orientation. Select:
o Portrait. Prints the document with a vertical page orientation.
o Landscape. Prints the document with a horizontal page orientation.
3. Click OK.
Line Weights
You can set the line weights in an active document that work best with your printer or plotter. These settings are saved
for all open SolidWorks documents.
To set line weights:
1. Click File, Print.
2. In the dialog box, under System Options, click Line Weights.
3. In the Line Weights dialog box, type a value for the line weights (Thin, Normal, Thick, and five additional
line thickness settings).
If you use specific Line Thickness values in a SolidWorks drawing, the lines print according to
the settings in the Line Weights dialog box.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK to close the Print dialog box and print the document.
2-14
Margins
You can set values for the top, bottom, left, and right margins for the printed document. These settings are saved for
all SolidWorks documents.
Printing Drawings
You can print or plot an entire drawing sheet, or just a selected area of the sheet. You have the option to print in black
and white (the default) or in color. You can specify different settings for individual drawing sheet.
For basic information about printing and plotting any SolidWorks document, see Print.
Print Selection
Lets you specify an area of the drawing sheet to print.
2-16
4. Drag the selection frame to position it over the area you want to print. You can pan or zoom the view while
the selection frame is displayed.
Print Preview
Previews the image of the active document before you send it to the printer.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard shortcut keys are available for every menu item. Look for the underlined letters on the main menu bar.
If you do not see the underlined letters on the main toolbar, press Alt.
Press Alt and the underlined letter to display the menu. For example, press Alt+F to display the File menu.
Also, look for the underlined letter for each of the menu items. When the menu is displayed, pressing an underlined
letter activates the related command. For example, press Alt+F to display the File menu, then press C to close your
files. Some commands also have shortcut keys that are displayed on the menu beside the command. For example, the
combination Ctrl+N opens a new file.
2-18
This table lists commonly used default keyboard shortcuts:
Action Key Combination
Model Views
Rotate the model:
• horizontally or vertically Arrow keys
• horizontally or vertically 90 degrees Shift+Arrow keys
• clockwise or counterclockwise Alt+ left or right Arrow keys
Pan the model Ctrl+Arrow keys
Zoom in Z
Zoom out z
Zoom to Fit f
Previous View Ctrl+Shift+Z
View Orientation
View Orientation menu Spacebar
Front Ctrl+1
Back Ctrl+2
Left Ctrl+3
Right Ctrl+4
Top Ctrl+5
Bottom Ctrl+6
Isometric Ctrl+7
Selection filters
Filter Edges e
Filter Vertices v
Filter Faces x
Toggle Selection Filter toolbar F5
Toggle selection filters (on/off) F6
File menu items
New SolidWorks document Ctrl+N
Open document Ctrl+O
Open From Web Folder Ctrl+W
Make Drawing from Part Ctrl+D
Make Assembly from Part Ctrl+A
Save Ctrl+S
Print Ctrl+P
Additional keyboard shortcuts
Access online help when in a PropertyManager or dialog box F1
Rename an item in the FeatureManager design tree (this F2
works for most items)
Rebuild the model Ctrl+B
Force rebuild the model and rebuild all of its features Ctrl+Q
Redraw the screen Ctrl+R
Cycle between open SolidWorks documents Ctrl+Tab
Line to arc/arc to line (sketch mode) a
Undo Ctrl+z
Cut Ctrl+ x
Copy Ctrl+ c
Paste Ctrl+ v
Delete Delete
Next window Ctrl+F6
Close window Ctrl+F4
Additionally, you can customize the keyboard shortcut keys to suit your style of working.
Send Mail
Sends the current SolidWorks document to another system using your electronic mail application.
If you choose to send the assembly or drawing and referenced documents, you do not have to send all of the
referenced files. You can click:
• Attach. Attaches the selected reference document to the mail message. (The paper clip icon is
added.)
• Remove. Removes the selected reference document from the mail message. (The paper clip icon is
replaced.)
• Attach All. Attaches all of the reference documents to the mail message. (The paper clip icon is
added.)
If an assembly document has lightweight components, this dialog box does not appear.
3. Click OK.
4. Type your mail password, the mailing address, and any other information required by your mail application.
2-20
Toolbars
Toolbars
Displays or hides toolbars. See the following:
2D to 3D Font Sketch
Align Layer SolidWorks Office
Annotation Line Format Spline Tools
Assembly Macro Standard
Curves Mold Tools Standard Views
Dimensions/Relations Reference Geometry Surfaces
Drawing Selection Filter Tools
Explode Sketch Sheet Metal View
Features Simulation Web
Weldment
Toolbars for installed add-in products are available. These are available only if you select the toolbar from the View,
Toolbars menu.
You can use flyout toolbars to save space in the graphics area. When you click a flyout button , the toolbar
associated with the flyout button appears.
You can add flyout buttons to any toolbar, including the CommandManager.
To move a toolbar:
Click the start or edge of the toolbar and drag.
If you drag a toolbar to an edge of the SolidWorks window,
the toolbar docks to the edge automatically.
- or -
If you drag a toolbar away from the window edge, it becomes
a floating palette.
If you accidentally move a toolbar and you want to move it back to its original position, double-click the toolbar
title.
2D to 3D Toolbar
The 2D to 3D tools help you convert a 2D drawing to a 3D part. Some of the tools can be used in any sketches.
Front. The selected sketch entities become the front view in converting to a 3D part.
Top. The selected sketch entities become the top view in converting to a 3D part.
Right. The selected sketch entities become the right view in converting to a 3D part.
Left. The selected sketch entities become the left view in converting to a 3D part.
Bottom. The selected sketch entities become the bottom view in converting to a 3D part.
Back. The selected sketch entities become the back view in converting to a 3D part.
Align Toolbar
The Align toolbar provides tools for aligning annotations such as Notes, Geometric Tolerance Symbols, and so on.
See Aligning Annotations.
Leftmost
Rightmost
Uppermost
Lowermost
Center Horizontal
Center Vertical
Compact Horizontal
Compact Vertical
2-22
Annotations Toolbar
The Annotations toolbar provides tools for adding notes and symbols to a drawing, part, or assembly document.
Only those annotations that are appropriate for the active document are available; the other tools are displayed in
gray.
Note
Surface Finish
Geometric Tolerance
Balloon
AutoBalloon
Stacked Balloon
Weld Symbol
Datum Target
Insert Block
Model Items
Center Mark
Centerline
Hole Callout
Cosmetic Thread
Multi-jog Leader
Hole Table
Bill of Materials
Revision Table
Design Table
Assembly Toolbar
The Assembly toolbar controls the management, movement, and mating of components.
Insert Components
New Part
New Assembly
Hide/Show Components
Change Transparency
Edit Component
Smart Fasteners
Mate
Move Component
Rotate Component
Replace Components
Exploded View
Interference Detection
Simulation Toolbar
CommandManager
The CommandManager is a context-sensitive toolbar that dynamically updates based on the toolbar you want to
access. By default, it has toolbars embedded in it based on the document type.
When you click a button in the control area, the CommandManager updates to show that toolbar. For example, if you
click Sketches in the control area, the Sketch toolbar appears in the CommandManager.
Use the Command Manager to access toolbar buttons in a central location and to save space for the graphics area.
2-24
To access the CommandManager:
1. Click Tools, Customize.
2. In the dialog box, on the Toolbars tab, select Enable CommandManager.
3. Click OK.
When you add a button to the control area of the CommandManager, the button appears in the current document
type only. For example, if you add the Reference Geometry button to the control area of the CommandManager while
in a part document, it does not appear in the CommandManager for an assembly document.
Curves Toolbar
The Curves toolbar provides tools for creating and using curves.
Project Curve
Split Line
Composite Curve
Smart Dimension
Horizontal Dimension
Vertical Dimension
Baseline Dimension
Oridinate Dimension
Chamfer Dimension
Autodimension
Add Relation
Display/Delete Relations
Scan Equal
Align Ordinate
Constrain All
Drawing Toolbar
The Drawing toolbar provides tools for aligning dimensions and creating drawing views.
Align Collinear/Radial
Align Parallel/Concentric
Hide/Show Annotations
Detail View
Section View
Projected View
Standard 3 View
Auxiliary View
Named View
2-26
Relative View
Predefined View
Empty View
Update View
Crop View
Broken-out Section
Area Hatch/Fill
Route Line
Jog Line
Features Toolbar
The Features toolbar provides tools for creating model features. The set of features icons is very extensive so not all
of them are included on the default Features toolbar. You can customize this toolbar by adding and removing icons to
suit your working style and frequent tasks. See Customize Toolbars for more information.
Extruded Boss/Base
Revolved Boss/Base
Sweep
Loft
Thicken
Extruded Cut
Revolved Cut
Swept Cut
Lofted Cut
Thickened Cut
Fillet
Chamfer
Rib
Scale
Shell
Draft
Simple Hole
Hole Wizard
Dome
Shape
Deform
Wrap
Move/Size Features
Suppress
Unsuppress
Linear Pattern
Circular Pattern
Mirror Feature
Split
Combine
Join
Delete Solid/Surface
Imported Geometry
Insert Part
Move/Copy Bodies
Library Feature
2-28
Font Toolbar
You can specify the font, font size, font style, and justification for selected notes, dimensions, and geometric
tolerances. You can also reset the font properties to the document defaults.
The Font toolbar is active only when notes, dimensions, or geometric tolerances are selected. Balloon text and view
labels (Section View, Detail View, and so on) are notes and can be formatted with the Font tools.
To specify a font:
1. Select notes, dimensions, or symbols to format. Hold down Ctrl to make multiple selections.
2. Select from the following font properites:
• Font. Select a font type from the list of font sets available on your system.
• Font Size. Select the point size to use. The corresponding font size in the document’s default unit
of measure is displayed in the next box. (The measurement corresponds to the actual height of the
tallest character in the font set.)
• Font Style. Click the icons for Bold, Italic, or Underline, or a combination of these.
• Justification. Click the icons for Left Justify, Center Justify, or Right Justify to justify Note
text.
Layer Toolbar
The Layer toolbar contains a list of layers in the active drawing and a tool for specifying the properties of layers.
Layer Properties
Layer Properties
Line Color
Line Thickness
Line Style
Hide Edge
Show Edge
Macro Toolbar
The Macro toolbar controls macro recording, playback, and editing.
Run Macro
Stop Macro
Record\Pause Macro
New Macro
Edit Macro
Scale
Parting Lines
Ruled Surface
Parting Surfaces
Tooling Split
Cavity
Draft
Split Line
Offset Surface
Ruled Surface
Radiate Surface
Planar Surface
Knit Surface
Draft Analysis
Undercut Detection
2-30
Reference Geometry Toolbar
The Reference Geometry toolbar provides tools for creating and using reference geometry.
Plane
Axis
Coordinate System
Point
Mate Reference
Insert Bends
Flatten
No Bends
Rip
Base-Flange/Tab
Miter Flange
Fold
Unfold
Sketched Bend
Edge Flange
Closed Corner
Hem
Break-Corner/Corner-Trim
Jog
Lofted-Bend
Simulation Toolbar
The Simulation toolbar contains the tools for using Physical Simulation.
Calculate Simulation
Reset Components
Replay Simulation
Linear Motor
Rotary Motor
Linear Spring
Gravity
Sketch Toolbar
The tools on the Sketch toolbar affect the entire sketch, rather than individual sketch entities.
The Sketch toolbar controls selection, sketch creation, sketch modification, and the sketch grid.
2-32
SolidWorks Office Toolbar
The SolidWorks Office toolbar allows you to activate any add-in application included in the SolidWorks Office
package.
The SolidWorks Office toolbar is unavailable if you did not install SolidWorks 2004 with a SolidWorks Office
registration code.
PhotoWorks release 2
SolidWorks Animator
eDrawings
3D Instant Website
SolidWorks Toolbox
SolidWorks Utilities
FeatureWorks
Spline Point
Simplify Spline
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar controls file management and model regeneration.
New
Open
Save
Print Preview
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Undo
Redo
Rebuild
Redraw
Edit Color
Edit Material
Edit Texture
Web Toolbar
Help
What's This?
Save
Saves the active document to disk.
To save a document:
Save As
Saves the active document to disk with a new name or saves it in a different format for export to another application.
Use the locations sidebar to help navigate to the location where you want to save your document. The
locations sidebar is available in certain operating systems only.
2-34
• Save eDrawing data. Saves the document with eDrawings data so you can open the document in
the eDrawings Viewer.
If you selected Save eDrawings data in SolidWorks document in Tools, Options, System
Options, General, you can override this option when you save your document. To override this
option, clear Save eDrawing data.
• References. Displays a list of the documents referenced by the currently selected assembly or
drawing. You can edit the locations of the listed files.
• Down arrow (next to the Save button). Accesses Add to Favorites to create a shortcut to the
selected document in your Favorites folder.
5. Click Save.
The document is saved in the location you specified.
Cut
Removes the selected items and places them on the Microsoft Windows Clipboard.
To cut:
1. Select the item(s) to cut.
Copy
Copies one or more selected items to the Microsoft Windows Clipboard.
To copy:
1. Select one or more items to copy.
Paste
Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the current sketch, part, assembly, or drawing document.
Delete
Removes one or more selected items.
To delete an item:
1. Select one or more items to delete.
2. Click Delete on the Standard toolbar, click Edit, Delete or press Delete.
If you selected more than one item in step 1, click Yes to All to delete all of the items.
Undo
Reverses recent changes you have made, when possible.
1. Click Undo List (to the right of the Undo button) to see the list of actions that are available to undo. The
most recent actions are at the top of the list.
2. Select any action on the list. The action you selected and all actions above it on the list are reversed.
Redo
Reverses recent Undo commands you have made, when possible. Redo is available only for sketches in part and
assembly documents.
1. Click Redo List (to the right of the Redo button) to see the list of Undo actions that are available to
redo. The most recent actions are at the top of the list.
2. Select any action on the list. The action you selected and all actions above it on the list are redone.
Rebuild
Rebuilds the model with any changes that you made.
Redraw
Refreshes the screen, but does not rebuild the part.
2-36
Color And Optics PropertyManager
Use the Color And Optics PropertyManager to apply color and optical properties to selected entities in a model.
Selection
• Selection filters. Helps you select geometric entities in the model.
Favorite
• Current Color. Displays the currently selected color in the swatch.
• Select or Create a Swatch. Displays pre-defined swatches included with the SolidWorks software.
• Add Current Color to Swatch . Adds the selected color to a custom swatch.
• Remove Current Color from Swatch . Removes the selected color from a custom swatch.
Color Properties
• Current Color. Displays the current color of the selected entity.
• Pick a Color. Displays all colors in the color palette.
Optical Properties
• Transparency. Controls the degree to • Specularity. Controls the intensity of the light
which light passes through the model. on the surface. Specularity is dependent on the
position of the light source and the position of the
viewer.
• Ambience. Approximates the intensity of • Shininess. Controls the reflectivity of the light.
a light source illuminating a surface from all
directions without attenuation or shadowing.
• Diffusion. Controls the intensity of the • Emissivity. Controls the intensity of radiated
light on the surface. Diffusion is dependent on light.
its angle to a light source but independent of
the position of the viewer.
Configurations
• This configuration
• All configurations
• Specify configuration
The Material icon appears in the FeatureManager design tree regardless of whether you applied a material
to a part.
Materials
• Select a Material Database. Displays pre-defined material libraries included with the SolidWorks software,
or displays custom material libraries.
• Remove Material. Deletes the material from the model.
• Create/Edit Material. Creates a new material or edits an existing material.
Visual Properties
• Advanced graphics. Allows you to display the model in RealView or Standard graphics.
• RealView. Applies a 3D material to the model that dynamically changes when you rotate the model.
RealView display applies only if you have a supported graphics card.
• Standard. Applies a 2D texture to the model. You can control the:
Physical Properties
Displays the physical properties associated with the selected material.
2-38
Texture PropertyManager
Apply textures to geometric entities in a model. The Texture PropertyManager controls:
Selection
• Selection filters. Helps you select geometric entities in the model. The available selection filters are:
Texture Selection
• Texture File Locations. Displays pre-defined texture libraries included with the SolidWorks software, or
displays custom texture libraries.
• Texture Tree. Displays 2D texture files.
• Last 10 Used Textures. Displays the last 10 textures you used.
Texture Properties
• Texture Preview. Displays a preview image of the selected texture.
Configurations
• This configuration
• All configurations
• Specify configuration
• Click Web Toolbar on the Standard toolbar to display the Web icons.
• Click Web Toolbar again to hide the Web toolbar when it is not needed.
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Isometric
Trimetric
Dimetric
Normal To -- a view that is perpendicular to the
selected plane or planar face
Surfaces Toolbar
The Surfaces toolbar provides tools for creating and modifying surfaces.
Extruded Surface
Revolved Surface
Swept Surface
Lofted Surface
Offset Surface
Radiate Surface
Knit Surface
Planar Surface
Extended Surface
Trimmed Surface
Filled Surface
Mid-Surface
Replace Face
Delete Face
Untrim Surface
2-40
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar provides tools for measuring and defining the mass properties of models and for creating equations.
Measure
Equations
Mass Properties
Design Table
Feature Statistics
Deviation Analysis
View Toolbar
The View toolbar controls:
View Orientation Hidden Lines Removed
Pan Curvature
Web Toolbar
The Web toolbar provides support for working over the Internet.
Stop Current Jump
Reload\Replace
Insert Hyperlink
Reload Documents
Allows you to Reload documents. This is useful if you have read-only access to a document and you want to reload
the latest version with any changes made by a colleague.
To reload a document:
1. Click File, Reload in a part or assembly document, or right-click a component in an assembly and select
Reload.
2. Select Open as read-only if you do not want to save any changes to the file.
NOTE: If you have write-access to a sub-assembly then you reload it as read-only, you still have write-
access to the individual components of the sub-assembly. You must reload each of the sub-assembly
components as read-only to relinquish write-access privileges.
3. Click OK.
See also Replace Components.
Insert Hyperlink
Creates a hyperlink to a document on the Internet, your local network, or on your own hard drive. When you select a
hyperlink, the associated document or Web site opens.
2-42
Weldments Toolbar
The Weldments toolbar provides tools for creating weldment parts.
Weldment
Structural Member
Gusset
End Cap
Fillet Bead
Trim/Extend
• View all surface bodies that the document contains in the Surface Bodies folder .
• Add your own custom folders, and drag features into the folders to reduce the length of the
FeatureManager design tree.
• Move between the FeatureManager design tree, the PropertyManager, the ConfigurationManager, and
Add-In tabs by selecting the tabs at the top of the left pane.
NOTES:
• By default, component names and component
descriptions are the same. You must specify a new
component description in the component part file so it Component description
appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
2-44
Show Component's Configuration Name
In part, assembly, and drawing documents, you can display component configuration names in the FeatureManager
design tree.
By default, configuration names and descriptions are the same. You must specify new configuration
descriptions so they appear in the ConfigurationManager.
• A symbol to the left of an item’s icon indicates that it contains associated items, such as sketches. Click
to expand the item and display its contents.
To collapse all expanded items at once, right-click the document name at the top of the tree, and select Collapse
Items.
• Sketches in the FeatureManager design tree are preceded by (+) if they are over defined; they are preceded
by (–) if they are under defined; they are preceded by (?) if the sketch could not be solved. (There is no
prefix if the sketch is fully defined.)
• Features are preceded by the rebuild symbol if a change has been made that requires the rebuild of the
part.
• Assembly components in the FeatureManager design tree are preceded by (+) if their position is over
defined; they are preceded by (–) if their position is under defined; they are preceded by (?) if their position
could not be solved; they are preceded by (f) if their position is fixed (locked in place).
• Assembly mates are preceded by (+) if they are involved in over defining the position of components in the
assembly; they are preceded by (?) if they could not be solved.
• In an assembly, each instance of the component is followed by a number in angle brackets <n> that
increments with each occurrence.
• The state of external references is displayed in the FeatureManager design tree, as follows:
o If a part or feature has an external reference, its name is followed by –>. The name of any feature
with external references is also followed by –>.
o If an external reference is currently out of context, the feature name and the part name are followed
by ->?
o The suffix ->* means that the reference is locked.
o The suffix ->x means that the reference is broken.
Parent/Child Relationships
Displays the parents and children of a selected feature, sketch, axis, plane, curve, or surface.
A parent feature is an existing feature upon which others depend. For example, an extrude is the parent feature to a
fillet that rounds its edges.
When new features are built upon other features, their existence depends upon the previously-built feature. The new
feature is called a child feature. For example, a hole is the child of the solid in which it is cut.
2-46
Rollback Bar
Temporarily reverts the model to an earlier state, suppressing recently added features. You can add new features or
edit existing features while the model is in the rolled-back state.
You can use the rollback bar to roll back to absorbed features, roll forward, roll to previous, or roll to the end of
models.
You can also use the shortcut menu to roll a model back to an earlier state. Right-click any feature in the
FeatureManager design tree and select Rollback.
To enable this use of the arrow keys, click Tools, Options, System Options, FeatureManager, and
select Arrow key navigation.
4. To roll forward again, drag the rollback bar to the bottom of the FeatureManager design tree.
Icons in the FeatureManager design tree are gray and unavailable when they are rolled back.
1. In the FeatureManager design tree, click the to expand the absorbed features within the parent feature.
2. Right-click an absorbed feature, and select Rollback.
A message appears that tells you the absorbed feature will be temporarily unabsorbed for editing purposes.
3. Click OK.
4. Drag the rollback bar below the feature you selected in step 2.
The feature is unabsorbed and ready for editing.
1. Place the pointer at the top of the FeatureManager design tree until it changes to .
2. Drag the bar down below the last item in the FeatureManager design tree.
3. Release the mouse to display a duplicate FeatureManager design tree, below the first.
4. Select the tabs that are appropriate for the panels that you want to display: PropertyManager,
ConfigurationManager, FeatureManager design tree, or the panel of a third party application.
1. Place the pointer at the top of the duplicate FeatureManager design tree until it changes to .
2. Drag the bar up until it meets the top of the original FeatureManager design tree.
3. Release the mouse to close the display of the duplicate FeatureManager design tree.
2-48
Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree
The flyout FeatureManager design tree allows you to view both the FeatureManager design tree and the
PropertyManager at the same time.
The flyout FeatureManager design tree automatically appears when a PropertyManager is active. To expand the
flyout FeatureManager design tree, you can:
• Click next to the document name in the flyout FeatureManager design tree
• Click the PropertyManager title
The flyout FeatureManager design tree is transparent so you can see the model underneath it.
FeatureManager Options
Lets you set the default system options related to the FeatureManager design tree.
To set the default FeatureManager design tree options:
1. Click Tools, Options.
2. On the System Options tab, click FeatureManager.
3. Change the settings listed below and click OK to accept the changes. Click Reset All to return to the
installed system defaults, or click Cancel to discard the changes and exit the dialog box.
FeatureManager Options
• Scroll selected item into view. Specifies that the FeatureManager design tree should automatically scroll to
display the feature icon that is related to the selected items in the graphics area.
If you have a very complex part or assembly, you may want to turn this option off. Then, when you want the
FeatureManager design tree to scroll to a feature you can right-click the feature and select Go To Feature
(in Tree).
• Name feature on creation. When you create a new feature, the feature name in the FeatureManager design
tree is automatically selected and ready for you to enter a name of your choice.
• Arrow key navigation. Lets you use the arrow keys to traverse the FeatureManager design tree, and expand
or collapse the design tree and its contents, as follows
o Up arrow - Scrolls up the design tree
o Down arrow - Scrolls down the design tree
Add Folders
In part or assembly documents, you can add folders to the FeatureManager design tree. You can rename new folders
and drag additional features into the new folders. This reduces the length of the FeatureManager design tree.
When you select a folder that you added in the FeatureManager design tree, the features in the folder are highlighted
in the graphics area. Similarly, when you select a feature in the graphics area that is in a folder you created, the folder
is highlighted and expands to show the highlighted feature in the FeatureManager design tree.
You can insert features into folders by one of two ways: automatically or manually.
You can place any set of continuous features or components into an individual folder. You cannot use Ctrl to
select non-continuous features. This maintains parent-child relationships. You cannot add new folders to existing
folders.
2-50
To create a new folder and insert features automatically:
In the FeatureManager design tree, right-click a feature and select Add to New Folder.
A new folder appears in the FeatureManager design tree. The feature you right-clicked is now in the new
folder. You can rename the folder and drag additional features into the folder.
To create a new folder and insert features manually:
In the FeatureManager design tree, right-click a feature and select Create New Folder.
A new folder appears in the FeatureManager design tree. You can rename the folder and drag additional
features into the folder.
When you manually drag a feature onto a folder name, the pointer changes to .
1. Click New on the Standard toolbar, click File, New, or click New Document in the Welcome to
SolidWorks 2004 dialog box.
2. The New SolidWorks Document dialog box has two versions. Click the appropriate button for the version
you want to access:
• Novice. Uses a simpler version of the dialog box, which provides explanations of part, assembly,
and drawing documents. If you have the Online Tutorial active, then open a new document, a
tutorial template opens. The tutorial template uses the appropriate units, view orientations, and so
on, for the tutorial lessons.
• Advanced. Uses a modified version of the dialog box that shows template icons on various tabs.
When you select a document type, a preview of the template appears in the Preview box.
In the Advanced version, you can:
o Add your own tabs for storing templates.
o Click the tutorial tab to access the tutorial template.
o Click List Details to display information about each item in the window, including
columns for file size and date modified.
3. Click the type of document you want to open.
4. Click OK.
Default Templates
You can specify the folder and template file for automatically created parts, assemblies, and drawings. For example,
when you import a file from another application or create a derived part, the default template is used for the new
document.
3. To change the folder for one of the template types, click the browse button next to the path display
window.
In the New SolidWorks Document dialog box, select the new default template, then click OK.
If you need to add a template that does not appear in this dialog box, add the template location with the File
Locations option.
4. Select one of the following options:
• Always use these default document templates
• Prompt user to select document template
5. Click OK.
To create a new tab on the advanced version of the New SolidWorks Document dialog box:
1. In Windows Explorer, create a new folder in the location that you want.
For example, you could put a set of templates that you designed in a special folder called:
<install_directory>\data\templates\My Special Templates
2. In the SolidWorks software, click Tools, Options, System Options, File Locations.
3. Select Document Templates in Show folders for.
4. Click Add and browse in the Browse For Folder dialog box to find the location of the folder you created in
step 1.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK again to close the System Options - File Locations dialog box.
7. Create a new template and, using Save As, browse to the folder you created in step 1 and name the new
template.
After you save a template to the new folder, a new tab appears in the advanced version of the New
SolidWorks Document dialog box that is named after the folder you specified.
2-52
Setting Default Material Properties
You can set the following default material properties for your part or assembly document templates:
• Ambient. How light is reflected and scattered by other objects
• Diffuse. How light is scattered equally in all directions on the surface
• Specularity. How surfaces exhibit highlights
• Shininess. How solid objects alternate between a glossy, reflective surface and a dull, matte surface
• Transparency. How much light passes through the surface
• Emission. How light projects from the surface
Open
Opens an existing part, drawing, or assembly document. Also used to import files from other applications.
To open an existing part, assembly, or drawing document:
1. Click Open on the Standard toolbar, click File, Open, or press Ctrl+O.
2. In the dialog box, select a file type in Files of type.
3. Browse to select the part, drawing, or assembly document, or the file from another application that you want
to open.
NOTES:
• The Description label displays a description if you added one to the model.
• Use the locations sidebar to help navigate to the location where you want to open your document.
The locations sidebar is available in certain operating systems only.
If you are opening files from a previous release of SolidWorks, the file may open more slowly than you
would like. The Conversion Wizard converts the files so they open more rapidly.
2-54
Multi-Threaded Retrieval
Documents saved in recent SolidWorks releases are retrieved in multi-threaded mode. (Documents saved in releases
prior to SolidWorks 98 cannot be retrieved in multi-threaded mode.)
When you retrieve a large part, drawing, or assembly document, the document immediately displays in a view-only
state while the actual document and all its components are retrieved in the background. During the view-only state,
you can use all functions supported in the SolidWorks Viewer (Zoom, Rotate, and so on), but you cannot switch to
another document or start to open another document. After the retrieval is complete, SolidWorks changes to the
normal edit state.
Thumbnail images are available only if you use Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows Server 2003.
Additionally, Type, Size, Last Saved By and Number of sheets are shown automatically. You cannot save this
information in the Summary Information dialog box.
2-56
Web Folders Overview
4. Click the arrow in the URL box, and select the URL of the web folder on the server.
NOTE: If the web server requires a password, the Enter Network Password dialog box appears. Enter the
User Name and Password, then click OK.
The web folder opens, and the default folders are displayed.
5. Double-click the web folder where you want to save the file.
6. Click Save.
• If you are saving a part or drawing document, it is saved to the web folder.
• If you are saving an assembly document, the Copy Referenced Files To Server dialog box
appears. Set the desired options, then click OK to save the referenced files to the web folder.
NOTE: When working with part and assembly documents, certain SolidWorks operations generate a Save As dialog
box. You cannot save a document to a web folder from the Save As dialog box.
2. Click the arrow in the URL box, and select the URL of the web folder on the server.
If the web server requires a password, the Enter Network Password dialog box appears. Enter the User
Name and Password, then click OK.
The web folder opens, and the default folders are displayed.
3. Double-click the web folder that contains the file.
All files in that folder appear in the dialog box window.
4. Select the desired file and click Open.
The file opens in SolidWorks.
Change URL
With the Change URL dialog box, you can change where on the web server you save referenced files.
3. Click the arrow in the URL box, and select the web folder where you want to save the files.
If the web server requires a password, the Enter Network Password dialog box appears. If it does not
require a password, go to step 5.
4. Type the User Name and Password, then click OK.
The web folder opens, and the default folders are displayed.
2-58
5. Double-click the web folder where you want to save the file.
6. Click Save.
The Copy Referenced Files To Server dialog box appears with the following information:
• Current Reference. The current path to the assembly components.
• Copy the referenced files to. The new path to the web folder where you want to copy the assembly
component.
• Retain Folder Structure check box. Select to retain the same folder structure in the web folder as
shown under the Current Reference list.
7. The following buttons are available:
• Select All. Click to select all files listed under Current Reference. Selected files show a check
mark next to them. Only selected files are copied to the web folder.
• Deselect All. Click to clear all selected files listed under Current Reference.
• Change URL. Click to display the Change URL dialog box, which is used to change the location
of referenced files that you are saving to a web folder.
NOTE: At least one file under Current Reference must be selected to use the Change URL
dialog box.
8. Click OK.
The referenced files are saved to the web folder.
Selection
Highlighting
Selected Items
Items that you select are highlighted in a solid style font.
Edges that you select highlight as thick solid lines. Edges of faces that you select highlight as thin solid lines.
To set the highlight color for faces that you select while in Shaded With Edges or Shaded view mode:
In Shaded With Edges or Shaded view modes, you can control the color used to highlight faces that you
select.
1. Click Tools, Options, System Options, Colors.
2. Click Selected Item 1 in System colors, then click Edit.
3. Select a color from the Color palette or click Define Custom Colors and define a new color, then click OK.
4. Click OK again to close the System Options - Colors dialog box.
To turn this option off, click Tools, Options, System Options, General, and clear Use shaded face
highlighting. Selected faces in Shaded With Edges and Shaded view modes are then highlighted as thin
lines.
Dynamic Highlighting
When you move the pointer over an edge or a face, edges highlight as thick solid lines; edges of faces highlight as
thin solid lines. This is the same highlighting functionality as for selected items.
In drawings, edges dynamically highlight as thin phantom lines and edges of faces dynamically highlight as thin
dashed lines.
Dynamic highlighting is turned on as the default. To turn off dynamic highlighting, click Tools, Options,
System Options, Display/Selection and clear Dynamic highlight from graphics view.
Select
Select lets you select sketch entities when you are working in a sketch. In a sketch or drawing document, use
Select to:
• select sketch entities
• drag sketch entities or endpoints to reshape the sketch
• select a model edge or face
• drag a selection box around multiple sketch entities
• select a dimension to drag to a new location
• double-click a dimension that you want to modify
To select items:
2-60
To box-select:
Depending on the type of document you are in, you can drag a selection rectangle around the items you want
to select. All items that are completely inside the selection rectangle are selected. The following table shows
which items are selected when you box-select in a specified document:
To use Select Partial Loop with solid bodies, the selected edges must be on the same face.
2. Press Ctrl select the second edge, and do either of the following:
• Position the pointer left of the midpoint to create a chain that moves left.
• Position the pointer right of the midpoint to create a chain that moves right.
Select Chain
You can select a chain of entities attached to the selected entity in both directions until a branch is encountered.
2-62
Select Other
Selects items that are hidden by other items.
Midpoint Selection
You can select the midpoint of an entity to create other entities such as planes or axes.
To select a midpoint:
Right-click an edge, then click Select Midpoint.
The midpoint appears as a circle on the edge.
Selection Filter
Use a Selection Filter to help you select specific items in the graphics area or the drawing sheet area. For example,
you can set a Selection Filter to filter only model faces. When you select items in the model, only faces can be
selected. Selection Filters make it easy to identify the specified items when the pointer passes over them.
To toggle the display of the Selection Filter toolbar, click Toggle Selection Filter Toolbar on the Standard
toolbar, or press F5.
• The first three buttons on the Selection Filter toolbar allow you to specify the behavior of the Selection
Filter:
Toggle Selection Filters. Turns selected filters on or off. You can also press F6.
Box Selection
You can select all entity types in parts, assemblies, and drawings by dragging a selection box. You can select multiple
groups of entities by pressing the Ctrl key while dragging multiple box selections.
The default geometry type selected is as follows:
• Part documents - edges
• Assembly documents - components
• Drawing documents - sketch entities, dimensions, and annotations
You can set up different selection types with the selection filters. In drawings, hidden edges and faces are not
selected.
1. Drag a selection box around the left face. The edges of the left face are highlighted.
2. Press Ctrl and drag to select the right The left side edges remain selected. The
side of the part. right side edges are highlighted and added
to the selection.
NOTE: To enable selection of hidden edges, click Tools, Options, System Options, Display/Selection. Under
Selection of hidden edges, select the Allow selection in wireframe and HLV modes and Allow selection in
HLR and shaded modes check boxes, as desired.
2-64
Loop Selection
You can select a loop of connecting edges using the right mouse button, and then apply a feature such as fillet or
chamfer to the selection. Hidden edges are selected in all view modes.
To do a loop selection:
1. Right-click the edge as 2. Click Select Loop. 3. Click the handle to change the
shown. The edges of the entire outer loop loop selection to the edges of the
The edge becomes of the front face become other connecting face.
highlighted and the highlighted. The handle indicates The edges of the top face become
shortcut menu appears. the face whose edge is loop highlighted. The handle changes
selected. to indicate the new face whose
edge is loop selected.
Tangent Selection
You can select a group of tangent curves, edges, or faces, with the right mouse button. You can then apply a feature,
such as fillet or a chamfer, to the selection. Hidden edges are selected in all view modes.
To do a tangent selection:
1. Right-click the face as shown.
The face becomes highlighted and the
shortcut menu appears.
NOTES:
• For purposes of selection, transparent means more than 10 percent transparent. Entities less than 10 percent
transparent are considered opaque.
• If the entire model is transparent, (or opaque), use Select Other to select an object.
Keyboard Shortcuts
You can use keyboard shortcuts to change which entities the pointer selects first:
• To select geometry on a transparent entity with an opaque object behind it, press Shift when selecting.
• To select the part you are editing through an opaque component, press Tab when selecting.
2-66
Viewing Models
1. Click Edit Color on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit, Appearance, Color.
2. Set the properties in the Color And Optics PropertyManager as necessary.
3. Click OK .
To add a custom color swatch to the PropertyManager:
1. Click Edit Color on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit, Appearance, Color.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Favorite:
3. Click OK .
In drawing documents, the following functionality is not available with Draft Quality HLR/HLV:
To change the display of Hidden Lines Removed and Hidden Lines Visible to faster mode:
Click Draft Quality HLR/HLV on the View toolbar, or click View, Display, Draft Quality HLR/HLV.
Shaded Previews
2-68
Dynamic Previews
When you create or edit a feature that supports dynamic previews, you see a dynamic preview in the graphics area of
how the model changes when you move the pointer. At first, a shaded preview appears. Click a handle of the shaded
preview, then drag the pointer to see the dynamic preview.
Click the handle, as shown Drag the pointer to see the dynamic preview
Click Hidden Lines Visible on the View toolbar, or click View, Display, Hidden Lines Visible.
You can display hidden edges as either solid or dashed lines. To change the display style, click Tools,
Options, System Options, Display/Selection.
You can apply a material to a part, and create or edit a material with
the Materials Editor PropertyManager. The material and its
properties propagate to COSMOSWorks, COSMOSXpress,
PhotoWorks release 2, mass properties and material properties.
1. In an open part, click RealView Graphics on the Standard toolbar, or click View, Display, RealView
Graphics.
If you do not have a supported graphics card, RealView Graphics is unavailable. You do not need to
use RealView Graphics to apply a material to a part.
2. Click Edit Material on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit, Appearance, Material.
3. Set the properties in the Materials Editor PropertyManager as necessary.
4. Click OK .
The material is applied to the part, and the material name appears in the FeatureManager design tree next to
the Material icon .
When you create a material, you derive the properties from a SolidWorks default material, then change the
properties as necessary to create a different material.
1. In an open part, click Edit Material on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit, Appearance, Material.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Materials:
a. Click an item in Select a Material Database to specify the material library where you want to
create a material.
b. Expand a material classification, then select a material.
c. Click Create/Edit Material.
3. Set the properties as necessary on the General Information, Visual Properties, Physical Properties, and
Crosshatch tabs.
4. Click OK.
You cannot edit SolidWorks default materials. You can, however, edit materials that you created.
1. In an open part, click Edit Material on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit, Appearance, Material.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Materials:
a. Click a database you created in Select a Material Database to specify the material library that
contains the material you want to edit.
b. Select a material that you created.
c. Click Create/Edit Material.
3. Set the properties as necessary on the General Information, Visual Properties, Physical Properties, and
Crosshatch tabs.
4. Click OK.
2-70
To delete a material from a part:
1. In a part with a material applied to it, click Edit Material on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit,
Appearance, Material.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Materials, click Remove Material.
3. Click OK .
The material is removed from the part and the material name is removed from the Material icon in the
FeatureManager design tree.
Database Selection
Displays the material libraries:
• Solidworks Materials. A pre-defined library that contains SolidWorks materials. You cannot create or edit
materials in this library.
• <New Material Database>. Creates a new material database.You must create a new material database to
create or edit a material.
If you select <New Material Database>, the Save As dialog box appears where you set the location of
the new database.
Material Classification
Displays the material classes in your custom material databases.
Material Name
Displays the material names in your custom material databases.
RealView Graphics
Lists all of the 3D materials used to display models using RealView Graphics. Although you can select a material
from this list, it does not appear if you do not have a supported graphics card.
Texture
Lists all of the 2D textures available in the Texture PropertyManager.
PhotoWorks Material
Lists all of the materials available in PhotoWorks release 2, if you have the add-in product. When you render a model,
this material is propagated to PhotoWorks release 2.
Color
Lists all of the colors used in the Color And Optics PropertyManager.
Material Properties
Displays the physical properties for the material. You can change the Value only. If you enter a unit for Value, the
units update according to the units you set in the Document Properties - Units dialog box.
Materials - Crosshatch
The Crosshatch tab controls the following properties when you create or edit a material:
Crosshatch
• None. No crosshatch is associated with the material.
• Solid. A solid black crosshatch is associated with the material.
• Hatch. A crosshatch with Scale and Angle is associated with the material. The Pattern list displays
available crosshatches.
RealView Graphics
Perspective
Displays a perspective view of the model. A perspective view is the view normally seen by the eye. Parallel lines
recede into the distance to a vanishing point.
You can create a Named View in a drawing of a perspective view of a model.
2-72
Modify Perspective
Perspective is related to the size of the object being observed and the distance of that object from the observer. You
can modify the perspective by specifying the Object Sizes Away value in the Perspective PropertyManager. The
smaller the value, the greater the amount of perspective distortion.
2. Under Observer Position, type a value in the Object Sizes Away box.
3. Click OK .
A section view displays a view of the model cut through the part
or assembly.
When you create a section view, then toggle the view off and on,
the section view state is retained.
1. In a part or assembly document, click Section View on the View toolbar, or click View, Display,
Section View.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Section 1, set the properties in the Section View PropertyManager as
necessary.
3. To create additional section views, select Section 2 and Section 3, then repeat step 2. You can use the same
planes to create additional section views.
4. Click OK .
• Planes. Selects the Front Plane , Top Plane , and Right Plane that you can use to create the
section view.
• Reference Section Plane/Face. Displays the plane or face to create the section view. Reverse Section
• Offset Distance .
Section 3
This section appears after you select Section 2. Use Section 2 and Section 3 to create additional section views in the
model.
Options
• Save View. Saves the section view as a named view in the Orientation dialog box.
If you insert a saved section view in a drawing, only the view orientation and perspective view data
are shown. The actual section view is not visible.
Shaded
2-74
Shaded With Edges
Shadows
Displays a shadow under the model. When shadows are displayed, the light appears from the top-most part of the
model in the current view. The shadow does not dynamically change positions when you rotate the model.
NOTE: When you have shadows enabled, system performance is slower during dynamic view operations (zoom,
pan, rotate, and so on).
To turn on shadows:
Click Shadows In Shaded Mode on the View toolbar, or click View, Display, Shadows In Shaded Mode.
NOTE: To change the placement of the shadow, turn Shadows In Shaded Mode off, rotate the model, then turn the
shadows on again.
Orientation
Rotates and zooms the model or drawing to a preset view. You can select from the standard views (Normal To,
Front, Back, Isometric, and so on for a model, Full Sheet for a drawing) or add your own named views to the list.
You can return your model or drawing to a previous view by clicking Previous View , on the View toolbar. You
can undo the last 10 view changes.
To select a view:
Click Standard Views on the Standard toolbar, and select a view orientation.
2-76
To change the orientation of the standard model views in the Orientation dialog box:
1. In the Orientation dialog box, double-click one of the named views to select the new orientation. For
example, if you want what is currently the Left view to become the front view, double-click Left.
2. Click (do not double-click) the name of the standard view you want to assign to the current orientation of the
model. For example, click Front if you want the current view to become the front.
3. Click Update Standard Views . This updates all of the standard views so they are relative to the
selected view.
4. Click Yes to confirm the update.
To return all standard model views to their default settings in the Orientation dialog box:
Textures
1. In a part or assembly document, click Edit Texture on the Standard toolbar, or click Edit,
Appearance, Texture.
2. Set the properties in the Texture PropertyManager as necessary.
3. Click OK .
When you create a custom texture, you can also apply the texture to a material when you create or edit
a material.
Wireframe
Displays all the edges of the model.
Manipulating Models
Three-button Mouse
If you use a three-button mouse, you can dynamically use the following view commands:
• Pan all document types - Hold down Ctrl and drag with the middle mouse button. (In an active drawing, you
do not need to hold down Ctrl.)
• Rotate part or assembly - Drag with the middle mouse button.
• Zoom all document types - Hold down Shift and drag with the middle mouse button.
• The middle mouse button acts the same as the left mouse button if one of the dynamic view commands
If you open the part or assembly in View-Only mode or in the or in SolidWorks Viewer, you can only rotate the
part or assembly with the middle mouse button if it was saved with Fast HLR/HLV , Shaded With Edges ,
or Shaded mode.
2-78
Wheel-type Mouse
If you use a wheel-type mouse, you can zoom in to the position of the pointer instead of the center of the graphics
area by spinning the wheel backwards. This is the default behavior. If the pointer is outside of the graphics area, the
center of the model zooms into view.
While rolling the mouse wheel, you must keep the pointer on the area where you want to zoom.
To turn this function off, click View, Modify, Zoom About Screen Center. Zoom the view in or out by spinning the
wheel forward or back. The model zooms to the center of the screen. This can also be combined with the middle
mouse button rotate command by holding down the wheel while you spin it. To use the wheel to pan the view, hold
down Shift while you spin the wheel.
If you select an entity by pressing down and releasing the mouse wheel, you can then rotate the model around the
selected entity by holding down the mouse wheel while moving the mouse.
Often the settings for the wheel override the SolidWorks software settings. To change this, SolidWorks
recommends that you turn off the wheel when using the SolidWorks software. This is done in the Windows Control
Panel for the mouse. If this fails, check with the manufacturer for a new driver or for issues concerning the current
mouse drivers.
Pan
Scrolls the part, assembly, or drawing in the document window.
Rotate View
Rotates the model view.
When you rotate a part or assembly with high-quality transparency, the application dynamically switches to a low-
quality transparency, enabling you to rotate the model faster. Once you complete the rotation, the model switches
back to high-quality transparency. This is especially important if your part or assembly is complex.
Optionally, you can choose to retain high-quality transparency while rotating or moving the model with the rotate or
pan tools. Depending on your graphics card, this option may result in slower performance.
TIP: To set the type of transparency, click Tools, Options, and on the System Options tab, select Performance.
Select the appropriate transparency options.
Previous View
After moving your model to one or more views, you can return your model or drawing to a previous view. You can
undo the last 10 view changes.
Zoom to Fit
Zooms in or out so you can see the entire model, assembly, or drawing sheet.
Click Zoom to Fit on the View toolbar, or click View, Modify, Zoom to Fit.
Zoom to Area
Zooms in to an area that you select by dragging a bounding box.
1. Click Zoom to Area on the View toolbar, or click View, Modify, Zoom to Area.
2. Point at one corner of the area you want to enlarge.
2-80
Zoom In/Out
Zooms in and out.
To zoom in or out:
1. Click Zoom In/Out on the View toolbar, or click View, Modify, Zoom In/Out.
2. Press the mouse button and drag up (toward the top of the screen) to zoom in, or drag down to zoom out.
TIP: Press z to zoom out or Shift+Z to zoom in.
NOTE: If you have a wheel-type mouse, you can zoom in to the position of the pointer instead of the center of the
graphics area by spinning the wheel backwards. This is the default. If the pointer is outside of the graphics area, the
center of the model zooms in to view. You do not need Zoom In/Out enabled when you use the wheel to zoom. To turn
this function off, click View, Modify, Zoom About Screen Center. The model zooms to the center of the screen.
While rolling the mouse wheel, you must keep the pointer on the area where you want to zoom.
Zoom to Selection
Zooms in on a portion of the model, assembly, or drawing that you select.
To zoom to selection:
1. Click an entity to which you want to zoom, or hold Ctrl and click several entities.
2. Click Zoom to Selection on the View toolbar, or click View, Modify, Zoom to Selection.
The view is zoomed in to the selected entity.
Customizing SolidWorks
• Click Grid/Snap on the Sketch toolbar. The Options dialog box appears with the Grid/Snap page of
the Document Properties tab active.
Document Templates
Templates are documents (part, drawing, and assembly documents) that include user-defined parameters. When you
open a new part, drawing, or assembly, you select a template to use for your new document.
Templates allow you to maintain as many different documents for parts, drawings, or assemblies as you need. A
template can be a part, drawing, or assembly document that you saved as a template. For example, you can create:
• A document template using millimeters and another template using inches
• A document template using ANSI and another template using ISO dimensioning standard
You can organize your document templates by placing them on different tabs in the New SolidWorks Document
dialog box.
TIP: If you use small units of measure such as angstroms, nanometers, microns, mils, or microinches, you might
want to create specific templates as the basis for documents that use the units. The templates could include settings
for such Document Properties as:
• grid spacing
• extension line and break line gap
• dimension offset distance and break dimension gap
• note bent leader length
• balloon bent leader length
• arrow size and section view arrow size
• text scale and text display size
• material density
To create a template:
2-82
Customize Commands
Adds, removes, and rearranges command buttons to customize your toolbars.
You can:
• add command buttons and place them on more than one toolbar
• remove command buttons that you never use
• rearrange command buttons on toolbars, or move command buttons from one toolbar to another
To... Then...
Add a command button or place it on more than In the Customize dialog box, click and drag a button
one toolbar to any toolbar.
Remove a command button from a toolbar In the SolidWorks window, click and drag the button
from the toolbar to the graphics area.
Rearrange a command button on a toolbar In the SolidWorks window, click and drag the button
from the toolbar to another area of the toolbar.
Move a command button from one toolbar to In the SolidWorks window, click and drag a button
another from one toolbar to a different toolbar.
5. Click OK.
b. Select the items you want to appear on the page (Page Numbers , Number of Pages ,
Customize Keyboard
Customizes your keyboard to suit your style of working with SolidWorks.
If you create a bitmap for a macro button, the bitmap must meet these requirements:
• Dimension = 16 x 16 pixels
• Color = 16 colors
• Background color = white
b. Under Buttons, drag the Macro button to any toolbar in the SolidWorks window.
3. In the Customize Macro Button dialog box:
a. Under Appearance:
i. Click Choose Image.
ii. In the Icon path dialog box, select a bitmap image (*.bmp), then click Open.
The SolidWorks software provides bitmap images to use as custom buttons. These are
located in <install_dir>/data/user macro icons.
Select Preview to see the image in the Icon path dialog box.
iii. If necessary, type a Tooltip and Prompt message, which provides a brief description of the
function of the tool on the status bar.
2-84
b. Under Action:
You must have a SolidWorks document active when creating custom macro buttons.
2. Right-click the customized macro button in the toolbar that you want to edit.
3. In the Customize Macro Button dialog box, edit the macro as necessary, then click OK.
4. Click OK again to close the Customize dialog box.
Customize Menus
Customizes a SolidWorks menu to suit your style of working.
This menu is for customization purposes only. You cannot run a command from this menu.
2. To add menu items, select the empty check boxes . To delete menu items, clear the selected check boxes
.
3. Click anywhere outside of the menu to save your changes, or press Enter. To cancel your changes, press
Esc.
To set SolidWorks menus or shortcut menus to default values or to show all menu items:
1. Click Tools, Customize, or right-click any toolbar (not the CommandManager) and select Customize.
2. On the Menus tab, click the appropriate buttons to Rename a menu item, Remove or Add a menu item, or
Reset All menus to their original state.
Customization options:
Categories. Select the menu to change.
Commands. Select the command to add, rename, relocate, or remove.
Change what menu. Displays the code name of the selected menu.
Position on menu. Lets you select a menu position, including Auto, At Top, or At Bottom.
Name of command. Displays the code name of the selected command.
Description. Displays the description of the selected command.
3. Click OK.
Customize Options
If you customized SolidWorks menus or shortcut menus, you can set them back to default values or show all menu
items.
To set SolidWorks menus or shortcut menus to default values or to show all menu items:
1. Click Tools, Customize, or right-click any toolbar (not the CommandManager) and select Customize.
Customize Toolbars
Customizes, displays, or hides toolbars.
You can position toolbars and set their visibility based on the document type (part, assembly, or drawing). You can
also set which toolbars are visible for when there are no documents open. The SolidWorks software remembers which
toolbars to display and where to display them for each document type.
For example, with a part document open, you can choose to display only the Standard and Features toolbars.
Whenever you create or open any part document, only these toolbars are displayed. Meanwhile, for an assembly
document, you can choose to display only the Assembly and Selection Filter toolbars. Whenever you create or open
an assembly document, only these toolbars are displayed.
2-86
5. Click:
• OK to accept the changes.
• Reset to undo the changes and return to previous settings
• Cancel to discard the changes and close the dialog box.
You can move toolbars as desired. Toolbars can be either docked in one of the toolbar areas or floating.
To move a toolbar:
Click the start or edge of the toolbar and drag.
If you drag a toolbar to an edge of the SolidWorks window,
the toolbar docks to the edge automatically.
- or -
If you drag a toolbar away from the window edge, it
becomes a floating palette.
Skins
SolidWorks offers sample skins for your use. The sample skins are
located in <install_dir>\data\skins. You can also create customized skins
with editing software, then add your customized skins to the skins folder.
3. Click OK.
When you activate the PropertyManager, the skin appears.
You can use any color (including true colors), resolution, or size setting.
The image is tiled, so it is best to use tilable images when applying textures as the background.
The “__” is a double underscore. Also, the button name must be ok, cancel, help, pin, back,
next, preview, or undo. The pin button name refers to the Keep Visible button.
• Display States. You must display the button in four states: off, on, mouse over, and unavailable.
Here is an example using the Cancel button:
• Pixel Size. Each individual button state must be 32 by 32 pixels. Therefore, each group of four
buttons must be 32 pixels high and 128 pixels wide. Here is an example of the pixel size using the
Cancel button.
• Colors. The buttons can have a color palette of 2, 8, 16, or 256 colors. True colors are not
supported.
• Transparency. To set any part of the button skin bitmap file to transparent, set the RGB color for
that area to 255, 0, 255. Transparent areas display the color and design used in the background skin
bitmap file. Here is an example using the OK button:
2-88
SolidWorks Tools
Add-Ins
Lets you integrate other compatible software applications with your installed SolidWorks software. The add-in
software applications must be installed on your computer.
To use another software application along with SolidWorks:
1. Click Tools, Add-Ins.
The list of installed, compatible software appears in the dialog box.
2. Select one or more applications that you want to use.
3. Click OK.
Some add-in applications provide a tab at the
top of the FeatureManager design tree panel.
The tab contains information related to the These tabs include the SolidWorks Animator tab at
specific add-in. the far right.
You can also add an add-in application's toolbar to the SolidWorks window.
Conversion Wizard
When you open a SolidWorks document from an earlier version, it may take more time than you are used to
experiencing. After the document has been opened and saved, subsequent opening time returns to normal.
The SolidWorks Conversion Wizard automatically converts all of your SolidWorks documents from an earlier
version to the current SolidWorks format. Depending on how many files you have, the conversion process may take a
while, but once it is done, the documents open more rapidly.
Once a document is converted, you can no longer open the file in the older SolidWorks version.
To access the Conversion Wizard, click the Microsoft Start button, then click Programs, SolidWorks 2004,
SolidWorks Tools, Conversion Wizard.
The Conversion Wizard has the following options:
• Create a backup for files to convert. Backs up all of your files before the conversion. If you choose to back
up your SolidWorks files, the Conversion Wizard copies the files to a sub-folder named Solidworks
Conversion Backup. The wizard asks you for the location of the files to be converted, and leads you
through the process.
• Include subfolders. Converts all SolidWorks documents in the main folder and its subfolders.
• Visibility:
o Run SolidWorks in background. The SolidWorks software runs while the files are being
converted, but it is invisible to the user.
o Show SolidWorks window. The SolidWorks software runs while the files are being converted, and
is visible to the user.
• Save pre-2003 drawings with "Automatic update of BOM". Sets the option, Automatic update of BOM,
which automatically updates a drawing's Bill of Materials when changes are made to the model for all
drawings created prior to SolidWorks 2003.
• Convert drawings to Detached Drawings format automatically. Converts all converted drawing
documents to Detached format.
• Ignore files with missing references. Documents dependent on missing reference files are not converted.
• Backup Folder:
o Path. Displays the location where the backup files are saved. Click Browse to change the location.
At the end of the conversion process, two report files exist in the folder to which you directed the conversion:
• Conversion Wizard Log.txt. Contains a list of files that converted.
• Conversion Wizard Failed.txt. Contains a list of files that did not convert.
Manufacturing Network
The Manufacturing Network is an online directory of SolidWorks-enabled service vendors. This directory lists
contract design and manufacturing companies who can help reduce your product's time to market. Each company in
the directory is a SolidWorks user; there is no need to translate SolidWorks documents to an intermediate file format.
The Manufacturing Network is free of charge.
NOTE: You need an Internet connection to access the Manufacturing Network.
2-90
Moving from AutoCAD
Moving from AutoCAD supports users in the transition from 2D AutoCAD to 3D SolidWorks. It compares terms
and concepts, explains SolidWorks approaches to design, and provides links into SolidWorks Help, tutorials, and
other resources.
Quick Tips
Quick Tips are a set of pop-up messages that appear while you create SolidWorks documents. These messages give
hints and options based on the current SolidWorks mode. Most of the messages have hyperlinks; click the hyperlink
to see the associated item in the SolidWorks window.
Quick Tips are not available when the Online Tutorial is active.
There are four icons associated with the Quick Tips status. These appear in the lower-right corner of the SolidWorks
window:
Icon Status
Available, but not currently displayed
Currently displayed
Not available
Temporarily disabled
Quick Tips are mode-specific. For example, if you have Quick Tips displayed when you have a part document
open, then you click , Quick Tips are no longer displayed in part modes. However, if you open an assembly
document, Quick Tips reappear.
SolidWorks API
The SolidWorks Application Programming Interface (API) is a COM programming interface to the SolidWorks
software. The API contains hundreds of functions that you can call from Visual Basic (VB), Visual Basic for
Applications (VBA), VB.NET, C++, C#, or SolidWorks macro files. These functions provide the programmer with
direct access to SolidWorks functionality.
To access the API help, click Help, SolidWorks API and Add-Ins Help Topics.
There are tips, code fragments, and examples of API functions on the SolidWorks Web page:
www.solidworks.com/api.
New Macro
You can create a new macro from the Macro toolbar or from a menu item. Creating a new macro is different from
recording a macro. When you create a new macro, you program the macro directly from your macro editing
application. When you record a macro, you create the macro from within the SolidWorks software.
1. Click New Macro on the Macro toolbar, or click Tools, Macro, New.
The New Macro dialog box appears.
2. Type a File name.
3. Click Save.
Your macro editing application opens where you can create a new macro.
Record/Pause Macro
You can record operations performed with the SolidWorks user interface and replay them with SolidWorks macros. A
macro contains the equivalent calls to the API functions that were made when the operations were performed with the
user interface. A macro can record your mouse clicks, menu choices, and keystrokes to play back later.
You can create a new macro without recording one first.
To record a macro:
1. Click Record\Pause Macro on the Macro toolbar, or click Tools, Macro, Record.
2. Perform the steps you want to record.
3. When you are done, click Stop Macro on the Macro toolbar, or click Tools, Macro, Stop.
4. In the dialog box, type a name for File name and click Save. (The .swp extension is automatically added to
the filename.)
2-92
Edit Macro
Edits or debugs a macro that you recorded previously.
To edit a macro:
1. Click Edit Macro on the Macro toolbar, or click Tools, Macro, Edit.
If you have previously edited macros, you can select the macro directly from the menu when you click
Tools, Macro. This menu lists the last nine edited macros.
2. In the dialog box, select a macro file (.swp) and click Open.
You can also edit .swb files. When you run or edit an .swb file, it is automatically converted to a .swp
file.
3. Edit the macro. (For details, use the help in the macro editor.)
Run Macro
Opens a dialog box that lets you select the macro you want to run.
To run a macro:
1. Click Run Macro on the Macro toolbar, or click Tools, Macro, Run.
The Run Macro dialog box appears.
2. Locate the macro (.swp) file you want to run and click Open.
NOTE: You can also open .swb files.
Stop Macro
Stops recording the macro and opens a dialog box so you can save the macro.
1. While you are recording a macro, click Stop Macro or Tools, Macro, Stop.
The Save As dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the macro and click Save to save it. (The .swp extension is automatically added to the
filename.)
- or -
Press Cancel to cancel the macro.
If Macros is not listed, you must create a macro folder and record a macro in your SolidWorks
installation directory, as described in the first procedure.
3. Select the name of the macro in Commands. The macro is in the form:
<macro_name>:<module_name>.<method_name>.
The macro description appears in Description.
4. Type a value for Press new shortcut key to assign a shortcut key to the macro, and click Assign.
The shortcut key name appears in Current keys.
5. Click OK.
If Macros is not listed, you must create a macro folder and record a macro in your SolidWorks
installation directory, as described in the first procedure.
3. Select the name of the macro in Commands. The macro is in the form:
<macro_name>:<module_name>.<method_name>.
The macro description appears in Description.
4. Select the menu and sub-menu, if necessary, where you want to add the new menu item for your macro in
Change what menu.
5. Select a position for the new menu item in Position on menu.
6. Type a command name for Name of command.
7. Click Add, then click OK.
VBA
Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is the engine that records, runs, or edits macros in SolidWorks. Recorded
macros are saved as .swp VBA project files.
You can read and edit .swb and .swp (VBA) files with the VBA editor. When you edit an existing .swb file, the file
automatically converts into a .swp file. You can export a module to a file that you can use in other VB projects.
You can use VBA to create forms and to provide more user interaction with your recorded macros. For more
information on VBA, look to the Help menu in the VBA editor.
2-94
Object Linking and Embedding - OLE
Object
You can embed an OLE object from another program into the active SolidWorks document. You can either open
another program from within SolidWorks and create a new object, or you can insert an existing file.
Select the object and click Delete , click Edit, Delete, or press the Delete key.
TIP: You can undo the deletion of any OLE object that is inserted into a SolidWorks drawing, assembly, or
Display Content
Displays the contents of an OLE object embedded in your SolidWorks document.
If the Object menu item is not displayed in the Edit menu, you may need to add it to the menu.
Display as Icon
Displays an embedded OLE object as an icon.
If the Object menu item is not displayed in the Edit menu, you may need to add it to the menu.
2-96
Reset Size
Restores an embedded OLE object to its original height and width.
2-98
3
Sketching
Sketching in SolidWorks
Most SolidWorks features begin with a 2D sketch. For information about using sketches to create solid model
geometry, see Features Overview.
You can also create 3D sketches with SolidWorks. In a 3D sketch, the entities exist in 3D space; they are not related
to specific sketch planes.
The sketch topics include:
• Starting a new 2D sketch
• Accessing and using the sketching tools
• Taking advantage of inferencing
• Deriving a new sketch from another
• Dimensioning the sketch and adding and deleting geometric relations
• Fully defining sketches
• Sketching on the face of a part
• Selecting a starting plane for a sketch
• Deciding how complex the sketch should be
• Creating a 3D sketch
You can toggle the display of sketches. The sketch entities in the graphics area are hidden or shown when you click
View, Sketches. (All sketches must be closed.)
Sketch
1. In a new part document, click a sketch tool on the Sketch toolbar, such as Rectangle .
- or -
You can also select a plane from the flyout FeatureManager design tree.
The message Editing Sketch appears in the status bar at the bottom of the SolidWorks window. If you
turned on the sketch grid, the grid appears in the graphics area.
3. If you clicked Sketch in step 1, click a tool on the Sketch toolbar to create the sketch.
4. Create the sketch, and dimension the sketch entities.
5. Click Exit Sketch on the Sketch toolbar, click Insert, Exit Sketch, or click a sketch-based feature on
the Features toolbar (Extruded Boss/Base , for example) to create a feature from the sketch.
• Click Sketch on the Sketch toolbar, or click Insert, Sketch. Select an existing sketch to edit.
- or -
• Right-click a sketch in the FeatureManager design tree, or right-click a sketch entity in the graphics area,
and select Edit Sketch.
3. If you clicked Sketch in step 1, click a tool on the Sketch toolbar to create the sketch.
4. Create the sketch, and dimension the sketch entities.
5. Click Exit Sketch on the Sketch toolbar, click Insert, Exit Sketch, or click a sketch-based feature on
the Features toolbar (Extruded Boss/Base , for example) to create a feature from the sketch.
3-2
Sketch on the Face of a Part
To create new features on a part, you sketch on the face of the part where you want to locate the feature.
2. Click a sketch tool on the Sketch toolbar, click Sketch , or click Insert, Sketch.
The following happens:
When you open a new part document, first you create a sketch. You can start by selecting:
• A sketch entity tool (line, circle, and so on) or the Sketch tool
• A plane
To start a sketch with a sketch entity tool or with the Sketch tool:
1. Click a sketch entity tool (line, circle, and so on) on the Sketch toolbar.
- or -
2. Select a plane.
The plane rotates to the Normal to orientation.
3. Create a sketch with the sketch entity tool, or select a tool on the Sketch toolbar and create a sketch.
Select a plane in the FeatureManager design tree and click Sketch on the Sketch toolbar.
The plane is displayed in Normal to orientation.
• If your first sketch is a left or right view, select the Right Plane.
• You do not have to use one of the default planes for your first sketch; you can create a new plane at any
angle. The orientation of views is still determined by the default planes, however.
• You can reorient the part (to change Front to Top for example) with Update Standard Views in the
Orientation dialog box.
3-4
Starting the Sketch
A Complex sketch
B Simple sketch
Add fillet features
Working in a Sketch
Status Bar
The following information is in the status bar at the bottom of the sketch window:
• The coordinates of the pointer’s location when sketching an entity.
• The state of the sketch: Over Defined, Under Defined, or Fully Defined. See Sketch Geometry Status.
• The text, "Editing Sketch." This makes it obvious that you are in sketch mode if the sketch grid is off while
you are working.
• A description of a menu item or button when the pointer is over an item. This description is on the left side
of the status bar.
Sketch Origin
The sketch origin is displayed in red in an open sketch. Use the sketch origin to help you understand
the coordinates of the sketch.
Every sketch in the part has its own origin, so there usually are multiple sketch origins in a part. When a
sketch is open, you cannot turn off the display of its origin.
You must select a plane on which to create a new sketch. You can create a sketch on any of the default planes (Front
Plane, Top Plane, or Right Plane), a created plane, a flat surface, or a face of a solid object.
While sketching, notice that the appearance of the pointer changes to provide feedback about the pointer’s current
task, position, and the geometric relations that are automatically applied.
3-6
• When you select the various sketch or dimension tools,
the pointer carries an appropriate symbol with it.
Shown are the Rectangle, Circle, Spline, Point, Trim,
Extend, and Dimension pointers, but there are many
others.
As you sketch, the SolidWorks software monitors your activity and provides inferencing lines to help you work more
efficiently. While sketching, notice that dashed inferencing lines align the pointer with lines or points that you have
already sketched and with existing model geometry.
TIP: Brown inference lines indicate that a relation is added automatically; blue inference lines indicate that no
relation is added. However, if the inference line is blue and the pointer for a sketch entity (such as a line) includes the
H (horizontal) or V (vertical) symbol, a relation is created.
Sketch Modes
There are two modes for sketching in 2D: click-drag or click-click. SolidWorks responds to your cues to determine
the mode as follows:
• If you click the first point and drag, you are in click-drag mode.
• If you click the first point and release the pointer, you are in click-click mode.
When you sketch entities in click-click mode and end a line or arc on the endpoint of an existing sketch
entity, the tool stays active but does not show a preview from the last location.
Autotransitioning
You can transition from sketching a line to sketching a tangent arc, and vice versa, without selecting the arc tool.
You can also toggle between line and arc with the A key.
1. Click Line on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Line and sketch a line.
2. Click the endpoint of the line, then move the pointer away.
The preview shows another line.
3. Move the pointer back to the endpoint, then away again.
The preview shows a tangent arc.
4. Click to place the arc.
5. Move the pointer away from the arc endpoint.
The preview shows a line. You can draw a line or change to an arc as in Step 3.
To toggle between line and arc without returning to the endpoint, press A.
Silhouettes
You can select the silhouette edge of a rounded surface, such as a cylinder. Use the silhouette edge with the Convert
Entities, Offset Entities, Smart Dimensions, or Add Relations tools. You can also select and reference silhouette
vertices to add dimensions or relations.
Silhouette edges are included in box-select operations.
To set silhouette edge visibility, click Tools, Options, System Options, Display/Selection, and select
Dynamic highlight from graphics view.
2. Select the highlighted edge.
To copy one or more sketch entities, select the entities, then click Edit, Copy, or press Ctrl+C. Click
in the graphics area, then click Edit, Paste or press Ctrl+V. The center of the sketch entities is placed where
you clicked.
3-8
• Move a sketch within the same sketch. Hold down Shift while dragging the sketch.
• Move a sketch between different documents (the second document must have an open sketch). Hold down
Ctrl and drag the sketch into the second document. Release Ctrl, hold down Shift, and drop the sketch.
Modify Sketch
Use the Modify Sketch tool to move, rotate, or scale an entire sketch. To move, rotate, scale, or copy individual
sketch entities, use the Move or Copy Entities, Rotate or Copy Entities, or Scale or Copy Entities tools.
To move a sketch:
1. Open a sketch or select a sketch in the FeatureManager design tree, and click Modify Sketch on the
Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Modify.
2. In the dialog box:
• To move the sketch geometry incrementally, under Translate, type a value for X value and Y value
and press Enter.
• To move a specified point of the sketch to a specific location, under Translate, select Position
selected point and click a point in the sketch. Type a value for X value and Y value and press
Enter.
The Modify Sketch tool translates the entire sketch geometry in relation to the model (including
the sketch origin). The sketch geometry does not move relative to the origin of the sketch.
- or -
• To move a sketch in the graphics area, use the pointer:
3. Click Close.
To rotate a sketch:
1. Open a sketch or select a sketch in the FeatureManager design tree, and click Modify Sketch on the
Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Modify.
2. In the dialog box:
• Type a value for Rotate to set the rotation value and press Enter.
- or -
• Rotate a sketch in the graphics area with the pointer:
o Press the right-mouse button to rotate the s ketch around the black origin.
o Point at the center point of the black origin to display a point symbol . Click and drag
the center of rotation independently of the sketch, then rotate the sketch around the black
origin.
You cannot move a sketch that has multiple external references. When a sketch has multiple
external references, the pointer has a ? on the left button.
3. Click Close.
To scale a sketch:
1. Open a sketch or select a sketch in the FeatureManager design tree, and click Modify Sketch on the
Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Modify.
2. In the dialog box, under Scale About, select:
• Sketch origin. Applies a uniform scale about the origin of the sketch.
- or -
• Moveable origin. Scales the sketch about the moveable origin.
3. Type a value for Factor, and press Enter.
Edit Sketch
To edit a sketch:
1. Right-click one of the following:
• the sketch in the FeatureManager design tree
• a feature built from the sketch, either in the graphics area or in the FeatureManager design tree
• a sketch entity in the graphics area
For features built from multiple sketches (such as lofts and sweeps), right-click the sketch in
the FeatureManager design tree.
2. Select Edit Sketch.
3. To close the sketch when you are finished editing, right-click in the sketch and select Exit Sketch.
You can also edit an existing sketch by clicking Sketch , then selecting the sketch to edit.
3-10
Exit Sketch
Derived Sketch
Derives a sketch from another sketch that belongs to the same part, or derives a sketch from another sketch in the
same assembly.
When you derive a sketch from an existing sketch, you are assured that the two sketches will retain the characteristics
that they share in common. Changes that you make to the original sketch are reflected in the derived sketch.
When you delete a parent feature that has child features built from sketches, you have the option to keep the child
features and have the sketch plane references dangle. You can dangle a sketch plane reference by editing the sketch
plane definition and removing the plane definition.
The child must be a sketch-based child, and the sketch must be dependent on the parent.
2. Press the Delete key.
3. In the dialog box, clear Also delete all child features, then click Yes.
The dialog box warns that the plane is missing for the sketch used to create the child feature.
4. Click Close.
In the FeatureManager design tree, the part icon, the child feature, and the sketch used to create the child
feature display warning icons that indicate the sketch plane is dangling.
You can use the Edit Sketch Plane command to replace the reference plane.
Plane/Face .
3. Click OK .
When you are editing a sketch in Shaded With Edges or Shaded mode, you can display the sketch plane as a shaded
plane.
If the display is slow due to the shaded plane, it may be because of the Transparency options. With some
graphics cards, the display speed improves if you use low transparency. To set a low transparency, click Tools,
Options, System Options, Performance and clear High quality for normal view mode and High quality for
dynamic view mode.
3-12
Reference Plane Normal to Edge
Select edge Plane with origin at Sketch on plane Extruded cut normal to
endpoint of edge plane
Sketch Tools
Align Grid
Aligns the sketch grid with the model edge that you select.
2. Move the pointer over the entity you want to infer to.
The color of the pointer changes to orange once the inferencing lines are active for the entity.
Automatic Solve
Specifies whether SolidWorks should automatically do the computation to solve the sketch geometry of your part as
you create it.
3-14
No Solve Move
No Solve Move lets you move sketch entities without solving the dimensions or relations in the sketch.
If dimensions or relations exist between the selected entities and other sketch entities or model geometry, a warning
message appears. The message asks if you want to delete the constraints caused by the dimensions or relations:
• If you click Yes, the constraints are deleted, and the entities are moved.
• If you click No, the constraints are not deleted, and the selected entities are copied to the location to which
you moved them.
Operation
Move, Rotate, or Scale. Determines the operation you want to perform. This is pre-selected depending on which tool
you clicked. For example, if you clicked Move or Copy Entities , then Move is selected.
Keep relations (available when Move or Rotate is selected). Maintains relations between sketch entities. When
cleared, relations are broken only between selected entities and those that are not selected; relations among the
selected entities are maintained.
Scale Factor (available when Scale is selected). Specifies the scale factor for the selected entities. The scale
factor increases arithmetically (not geometrically).
Base Point
Base point . Defines the point from which the items are moved, scaled, or rotated. Click in the graphics area or
specify coordinates to define the base point.
Destination . Defines the point to which the items are moved. Click in the graphics area or specify coordinates
to define the destination point.
End X coordinate . Determines the X destination coordinate.
End Y coordinate . Determines the Y destination coordinate.
Single Open Base Extrude Thin, Base Revolve Thin, Boss Extrude Thin, Boss Revolve Thin, Cut
Extrude, Cut Extrude Thin, Cut Revolve Thin, Loft Guide, SheetMetal Base Flange,
Surface Loft Section, Sweep Path Or Guide, Sweep Section
Single Closed Cut Extrude Thin, Loft Guide, Loft Section, Surface Loft Section, Sweep Path Or Guide
Multiple Disjoint Base Extrude, Base Extrude Thin, Base Revolve, Base Revolve Thin, Boss Extrude, Boss
Closed Extrude Thin, Boss Revolve, Boss Revolve Thin, Cut Extrude, Cut Revolve, Cut Revolve
Thin, SheetMetal Base Flange, Sweep Section
General Mold Parting Surface, Rib, SheetMetal 3D Bend, Surface Extrude, Surface Revolve,
Surface Sweep Section, <none>
(The contour is checked for errors that are common to all contour types.)
3-16
Sketch Contour Single Open
Single open contours can be used for extrudes, revolves, sections, paths, guides, and sheet metal. Typical open
contours are sketched with lines or splines.
You can also select the entities after you click Circular Sketch Step and Repeat.
The names of the selected sketch entities appear under Items to repeat.
3. Under Arc, set:
• Radius. Measures the distance from the center of the pattern to a center point or vertex on the
selected entities. If you select Fixed, the Radius is displayed as an explicit value when the pattern
is complete.
• Angle. Measures the angle from the center of the selected entities to the center point or vertex of
the pattern.
You can drag one of the selection points to set the radius and angle and the spacing between instances.
7. Select a number in Instances and press Delete to delete that instance in the pattern. The number then
appears in Instances deleted. To return the instance to the pattern, select the number in Instances deleted
and press Delete.
8. Click OK.
3-18
Constrain Spacing and Fixed Options
Circular Sketch Step and Repeat Pattern
• Select the Constrain spacing check box to constrain the Total Angle between pattern instances in the
circular pattern. After the pattern is created, you can change the angle (or spacing) by double-clicking the
dimension and using the Modify dialog box. (This option is only available if the Equal check box is not
selected.)
• The Fixed option is related to the Radius value. If you select the Fixed check box, the result is as follows:
o The radius is displayed as an explicit dimension.
o You can control the radius by double-clicking the dimension and using the Modify dialog box.
Constrain All
Sets constraints on the sketch entities of an unconstrained imported .DXF or .DWG drawing.
Contour Selection
Select sketch contours and model edges, and apply features to them. This allows you to use a partial sketch to create
features.
2. Select a contour.
A tooltip appears when a contour cannot be selected for one of the following reasons:
• The part has too many edges.
• Edges are created on offset planes.
• Edges are chamfered.
• Edges are filleted.
Sketch used for revolve surface Same sketch reused for surface extrude
Sketch used for sweep thin feature Same sketch used for boss extrude thin feature
3-20
Close Sketch to Model
Closes a sketch with an open profile, using existing model edges.
7. Click OK .
Construction Geometry
You can convert sketch entities in a sketch or drawing to construction geometry. Construction geometry is used only
to assist in creating the sketch entities and geometry that are ultimately incorporated into the part. Construction
geometry is ignored when the sketch is used to create a feature. Construction geometry uses the same line style as
centerlines.
Convert Entities
You can create one or more curves in a sketch by projecting an edge, loop, face, curve, or external sketch contour, set
of edges, or set of sketch curves onto the sketch plane.
To convert an entity:
1. In an open sketch, click a model edge, loop, face, curve, external sketch contour, set of edges, or set of
curves.
2. Click Convert Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Convert Entities.
The following relations are created:
o On Edge. Created between the new sketch curve and the entity, which causes the curve to update if
the entity changes.
o Fixed. Created internally on the endpoints of the sketch entity so the sketch remains in a "fully
defined" state. This internal relation is not displayed when you use Display/Delete Relations.
Remove the Fixed relation by dragging the endpoints.
Detach Segment On Drag does not delete relations. Delete relations before you drag an entity to
detach. See Sketch Relations PropertyManager.
Extend Entities
You can add to the length of a sketch entity (line, centerline, or arc). Typically, you use Extend Entities to extend a
sketch entity to meet another sketch entity.
1. In an open sketch, click Extend Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Extend.
3-22
Face Curves
You can extract iso-parametric (UV) curves from a face or surface. Applications of this functionality include
extracting the curves for imported surfaces and then performing localized cleanup using the face curves.
You can specify a mesh of evenly spaced curves or a position that creates two orthogonal curves.
Mesh Position
Each curve created by this process becomes a separate 3D sketch. However, if you are editing a 3D sketch when you
invoke the Face Curves tool, all extracted curves are added to the active 3D sketch.
1. Click Face Curves or Tools, Sketch Tools, Face Curves, then select a face or surface.
- or -
Select a face or surface, then click Face Curves or Tools, Sketch Tools, Face Curves.
A preview of the curves appears on the face. The curves are one color in one direction and another color in
the other direction. The colors correspond to the colors in the Face Curves PropertyManager. The name of
• Position Vertex - select a vertex or point to specify the intersection of the two
curves. This vertex cannot be dragged.
3. Under Options, select or clear:
o Constrain to model - when selected, the curves are updated if the model changes.
o Ignore holes - useful for imported surfaces with internal gaps or loops. When selected, the curves
are generated across holes as though the surface were intact. When cleared, the curves stop at the
edges of holes.
4. Click OK .
The curves appear as 3D sketches in the FeatureManager design tree.
NOTE: If surface edge information cannot be matched, edge curves cannot be generated. The error message
states: "Failed to create X out of X face curves. Please consider using convert entities." You can generate the
missing curves by opening a 3D sketch and using the Convert Entities sketch tool.
Intersection Curve
Intersection Curve opens a sketch and creates a sketched curve at the following kinds of intersections:
• A plane and a surface or a model face
• Two surfaces
• A surface and a model face
• A plane and the entire part
• A surface and the entire part
You can use the resulting sketched intersection curve in the same way that you use any sketched curve, including the
following tasks:
• Measure thickness at various cross sections of a part. (See steps below.)
• Create sweep paths that represent the intersection of a plane and the part.
• Make sections out of imported solids to create parametric parts.
To use the sketched curve to extrude a feature, the sketch that opens must be a 2D sketch. Other tasks can be
performed using a 3D sketch.
• To open a 2D sketch, select the plane first then click Intersection Curve.
• To open a 3D sketch, click Intersection Curve first then select the plane.
1. With a part open, click Intersection Curve on the Sketch toolbar, or Tools, Sketch Tools, Intersection
Curve.
3. Rotate the part, then click the opposite (inside) face of the part.
You can also select the part in the FeatureManager design tree. A sketched spline appears on every face
where the plane intersects.
3-24
4. Click Tools, Measure and measure the distance between the two sketched splines.
2. With the sketch entities selected, click Linear Sketch Step and Repeat on the Sketch toolbar, or click
Tools, Sketch Tools, Linear Step and Repeat.
You can also select the sketch entities after you click Linear Sketch Step and Repeat.
The names of the selected sketch entities appear in Items to repeat.
3. Under Direction 1, set:
• Number. Total number of pattern instances, including the original sketch.
• Spacing. Distance between pattern instances. If you select Fixed, the Spacing value is displayed as
an explicit value when the pattern is complete.
• Angle. Angle of rotation for the pattern.
4. If you type values for Number, Spacing, or Angle, (instead of clicking the buttons) you must click
Preview to see a preview of the pattern. You can then adjust any of the values and click Preview again.
You can also change the Spacing and Angle by dragging the selection point in the pattern preview.
5. To create a pattern in two directions, repeat step 3 and set values for Direction 2. In two-directional patterns,
you can select Constrain angle between axes.
6. Select a position (column, row) in Instances and press Delete to delete that instance in the pattern. The
position appears in Instances deleted. To return the instance to the pattern, select the position in Instances
deleted and press Delete.
7. Click OK.
3. Change the Number of instances in one or both directions, and click OK.
Additionally, you can modify the pattern in the following ways:
• Drag a point or vertex on one of the pattern instances.
• Change the angle of the pattern by double-clicking the angle and changing its value in the Modify
dialog box.
• Add dimensions and change their values using the Modify dialog box.
• Add relations to the pattern instances.
• Select and delete individual pattern instances.
4. Exit the sketch to complete the new pattern feature.
3-26
Mirror Entities
You can mirror sketch entities around a centerline.
When you create mirrored entities, the SolidWorks software applies a symmetric relation between each
corresponding pair of sketch points (the ends of mirrored lines, the centers of arcs, and so on). If you change a
mirrored entity, its mirror image also changes.
1. In an open sketch, click Centerline on the Sketch toolbar and sketch a centerline.
2. Select the centerline and the items you want to mirror.
3. Click Mirror Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Mirror.
2. Click Mirror Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Mirror. Symmetry symbols
The Move or Copy operations do not create relations. To create relations, you must add relations.
1. In an open sketch, click Move or Copy Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools,
Move or Copy.
2. To copy the sketch entities, in the PropertyManager, under Operation, select Copy, and set the Number of
Copies to create.
3. Select the sketch entities or annotations to move. In parts and assemblies, you can select any annotations that
can be cut, copied, and pasted. In drawings, you can select all annotations.
The pointer changes to , which indicates that the entities are ready to move. If you selected the entities
before you clicked Move or Copy Entities, this pointer does not appear; go to step 5.
4. In the graphics area, right-click.
If Keep Visible is selected, the pointer changes to (if Copy is selected) or (if Copy is
cleared).
• Move the pointer away from the destination point. The pointer changes to , and you can move
additional sketch entities.
1. In an open sketch, click Rotate or Copy Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools,
Rotate or Copy.
2. To copy the sketch entities, in the PropertyManager, under Operation, select Copy, and set the Number of
Copies to create.
3. Select the sketch entities or annotations to rotate. In parts and assemblies, you can select any annotations that
can be cut, copied, and pasted. In drawings, you can select all annotations.
The pointer changes to , which indicates that the entities are ready to rotate. If you selected the entities
before you clicked Rotate or Copy Entities, this pointer does not appear; go to step 4.
4. In the graphics area, right-click.
When you drag the pointer, angle snap increments vary depending on the
distance of the pointer from the base point.
Exact angle values are displayed when you inference to model geometry.
3-28
7. Right-click to accept the rotation and to close the PropertyManager.
- or -
If Keep Visible is selected, click and drag the pointer to rotate the same sketch entities or to rotate
additional copies of the sketch entities. When you right-click to accept the rotation, Angle is set to 0.
1. In an open sketch, click Scale or Copy Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools,
Scale or Copy.
2. To copy the sketch entities, in the PropertyManager, under Operation, select Copy, and set the Number of
Copies to create.
• set the Scale Factor , then change the Number of Copies , the Scale Factor updates to
accommodate the copies specified.
3. Select the sketch entities or annotations to scale. In parts and assemblies, you can select any annotations that
can be cut, copied, and pasted. In drawings, you can select all annotations.
The pointer changes to , which indicates that the entities are ready to scale. If you selected the entities
before you clicked Scale or Copy Entities, this pointer does not appear; go to step 5.
4. In the graphics area, right-click.
If Keep Visible is selected, Scale Factor is set to 1.0, and you can continue to scale sketch
entities. Click OK to close the PropertyManager. (If Scale Factor is not set to 1.0, click OK twice
to close the PropertyManager.)
Offset Entities
Use the Offset Entities tool to create sketch curves offset from one or more selected sketch entities, edges, loops,
faces, curves, set of edges, or set of curves by a specified distance.
The selected sketch entity can be construction geometry. The offset entities can be bidirectional.
The SolidWorks software creates an on-edge relation between each original entity and the corresponding sketch
curve. If the original entity changes, then the offset curve also changes when you rebuild the model.
2. Click Offset Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Offset Entities.
3. In the PropertyManager, under Parameters, set:
When you click in the graphics area, the Offset Entity is complete. Set the Parameters before you
click in the graphics area.
• Offset Distance . Set a value to offset the sketch curve by a specified distance. You can also
hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer in the graphics area to see a dynamic preview.
When you release the mouse button, the Offset Entity is complete.
• Reverse. Changes the direction of a one-directional offset.
• Select chain. Creates an offset of all contiguous sketch entities.
• Bi-directional. Creates offset entities in two directions.
3-30
Sketch Chamfer
The Sketch Chamfer tool applies a chamfer to adjacent sketch entities in 2D and 3D sketches. This tool is available
for both 2D and 3D sketches. The Chamfer tool on the Features toolbar chamfers entities such as edges in parts.
To create a sketch chamfer:
1. In an open sketch, click Sketch Chamfer on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools,
Chamfer.
2. In the PropertyManager, set the Chamfer Parameters as necessary.
3. In the graphics area, select the two sketch entities to chamfer. To select the sketch entities, you can:
• Hold Ctrl and select two sketch entities.
• Select a vertex.
The chamfer is applied immediately.
4. Click OK to accept the chamfer, or click Undo to remove the chamfer. You can undo a sequence of
chamfers in reverse order.
o Direction 1 Angle is applied from the first sketch entity toward the second.
• Distance-distance
o Equal distance check box selected. Distance 1 is applied to both sketch entities.
o Equal distance check box cleared. Distance 1 is applied to the first sketch entity selected.
Sketch Fillet
The Sketch Fillet tool trims away the corner at the intersection of two sketch entities to create a tangent arc. This tool
is available for both 2D and 3D sketches. The Fillet tool on the Features toolbar fillets entities such as edges in parts.
1. In an open sketch, click Sketch Fillet on the Sketch toolbar, or Tools, Sketch Tools, Fillet.
2. Set the properties in the Sketch Fillet PropertyManager.
3. Select the sketch entities to fillet. (You can select non-intersecting entities. The entities are extended, and the
corner is filleted.) To select the sketch entities, you can:
• Hold Ctrl and select two sketch entities.
• Select a corner.
4. Click OK to accept the fillet, or click Undo to remove the fillet. You can undo a sequence of fillets in
reverse order.
Fillet Parameters
• Radius . Controls the fillet radius.
Consecutive fillets with the same radius are not dimensioned individually; they have an automatic
Equal relation with the first fillet in the series.
• Keep constrained corners. Maintains the virtual intersection point if the vertex has dimensions or relations.
When cleared, and if the vertex has dimensions or relations, you are asked if you want to delete those
geometric relations when the fillet is created.
• Undo. Undoes the last fillet. You can undo a sequence of fillets in reverse order.
Split Entities
You can split a sketch entity to create two sketch entities. Conversely, you can delete a split point to combine two
sketch entities into a single sketch entity. Use two split points to split a circle, full ellipse, or a closed spline.
You can dimension to a split point. Also, you can insert parts at split points in a routing assembly.
To split a sketch entity:
1. In an open sketch, click Split Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Split
Entities.
Trim Entities
Use Trim Entities to:
• Trim a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or centerline to its intersection with a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline,
or centerline.
• Delete a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or centerline.
• Extend a sketch segment until it is coincident with another entity.
3-32
To delete a sketch entity:
1. In an open sketch, click Trim Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Trim.
2. Move the pointer over a sketch until the sketch segment that you want to trim (delete) is highlighted in
red, then click.
The segment is deleted up to its intersection with another sketch segment (line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or
centerline) or model edge.
The entire sketch segment is deleted if it does not intersect with any another sketch segment.
To extend a sketch entity:
Drag the endpoint of a sketch entity until it is coincident with another entity. You cannot use Trim Entities
to extend a sketch segment unless there is another entity to which you can extend the segment.
Dimensions
You dimension sketch entities and other objects with the Smart Dimension tool. The type of dimension is
determined by the items you click. For some types of dimensions (point-to-point, angular, circular), where you place
the dimension also affects the type of dimension that is added.
You can drag or delete a dimension while the Smart Dimension tool is active.
1. Click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools, Dimensions, Smart.
The default dimension type is Parallel.
Optionally, you can choose a different dimension type from the shortcut menu. Right-click the sketch, and
select More Dimensions. Choose from Horizontal, Vertical, Ordinate, Horizontal Ordinate, or Vertical
Ordinate. If you are editing a drawing view, you have additional choices of Baseline and Chamfer.
2. Select the items to dimension, as shown in the table below.
As you move the pointer, the dimension snaps to the closest orientation.
3. Click to place the dimension.
The dimension shortcut menu provides Display Options. The choices available depend on the type of dimension and
other factors and may include the following:
• Center between witness lines
• Offset Text
• Show Parentheses
• Show as Inspection
Horizontal Dimension
You can specify a horizontal dimension between two entities. The horizontal direction is defined by the orientation of
the current sketch.
To specify a horizontal dimension:
1. In an open sketch, click Horizontal Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimensions, Horizontal.
Vertical Dimension
You can create a vertical dimension between two points. The vertical direction is defined by the orientation of the
current sketch.
To create a vertical dimension:
1. Click Vertical Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools, Dimensions, Vertical.
2. Click the two points to dimension.
3. Click a location to place the dimension.
Lock Dimensions
When you create a dimension, the dimension snaps to the closest orientation as you move the pointer. When the
preview indicates the dimension type you want, right-click to accept the dimension. You can then move the pointer to
place the dimension in another location without changing the dimension type.
To lock a dimension:
1. In an open sketch, click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimension, Smart.
2. Click the items to dimension.
3. Move the pointer around until the preview indicates the dimension type you want.
4. Right-click to lock the dimension type.
5. Move the pointer around until the dimension is in the location you want.
6. Click to place the dimension.
3-34
Point-to-Point Dimensions
You can place a horizontal, vertical, or linear dimension between two sketch points, sketch segment endpoints, or
model vertices. The model origin can also be one of the two points. Select the two points, then move the pointer
around to observe the dimension preview.
1. Click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools, Dimensions, Smart.
2. Click one point.
3. Click the other point.
4. Move the pointer to show the dimension preview.
5. Click to place the desired dimension.
Point-to-Point Dimensions
These distance dimensions were all created by selecting the same two points, then selecting a different location for
each dimension.
Arc Dimensions
The default dimension type for an arc is radius. You only need to select the arc for this dimension type.
You can dimension the true length of the arc.
1. In an open sketch, click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimensions, Smart.
2. Click the arc.
3. Click the two endpoints of the arc.
4. Move the pointer to show the dimension preview.
5. Click to place the dimension.
Arc Dimensions
When you dimension an arc, the default dimension type is radius.
To dimension the true length of an arc, select the arc and the two endpoints of the arc.
Circular Dimensions
You can create a circular dimension as a diametrical dimension or as a linear dimension. By placing the dimension
at an angle, the dimension is displayed as a diameter. By placing the dimension vertically or horizontally, it is
displayed as a linear dimension.
To create a circular dimension and then rotate the dimension around the circle:
1. In an open sketch, click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimensions, Smart.
2. Select the circle.
3. Drag the dimension and click to place it.
If the Modify box does not appear, either double-click the dimension or select Input dimension value
in Tools, Options, System Options, General.
5. If the dmension is a diametrical dimension, select the dimension drag handle and drag to rotate the
dimension to reposition it.
Circular Dimensions
By placing the dimension at an angle, the dimension is displayed as a diameter.
By placing the dimension vertically or horizontally, it is displayed as a linear dimension. To modify the angle of a
linear dimension, click the dimension, then drag the handle on the text. The dimension snaps to 15 degree increments.
To change the display of a circular dimension from linear to radial, right-click the dimension, select Properties, then
clear the Display as linear dimension check box.
3-36
Angular Dimensions Between Two Lines
You can place an angular dimension between two lines or a line and a model edge. Select the two entities, then move
the pointer to observe the dimension preview. The angle to be dimensioned changes based on the pointer position.
1. In an open sketch, click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimensions, Smart.
2. Click one line.
3. Click the second line.
4. Move the pointer to show the angular dimension preview.
5. Click to place the dimension.
Angular Dimensions
These angular dimensions were all created by selecting the two sketch lines, then selecting a different location for
each dimension.
1. In an open sketch, click Smart Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimensions, Smart.
2. Click a point to be the vertex of the angle.
3. Click the other two points.
4. Move the pointer to show the angular dimension preview.
5. Click to place the angular dimension.
Center
Min
Max
You can drag the extension lines to new attachment points in circles and arcs. The dimensions update
automatically. In the following example, the extension line of the right circle is dragged from the Min
attachment point to the Center.
You can drag an arc radial dimension, and the dimension moves automatically between outside and inside.
3-38
To dimension between concentric circles and display extension lines:
Extension lines
To display extension lines after placing the dimension, click the Select tool, then
right-click the dimension and select Display Options, Show extension lines.
Autodimension
Use the Autodimension tool to automatically insert dimensions in a sketch. You can also autodimension a sketch to
model entities. The Autodimension PropertyManager controls:
Entities to Dimension
• All entities in sketch. Dimensions all entites in the sketch.
• Selected entities. Dimensions only the selected entities.
Horizontal Dimensions
• Scheme. Sets the horizontal dimension scheme and sets the entity as the vertical point of origination for the
dimensions.
• Dimension placement
o Above sketch. Places dimensions above the sketch.
o Below sketch. Places dimensions below the sketch.
Vertical Dimensions
• Scheme. Sets the vertical dimension scheme and sets the entity as the horizontal point of origination for the
dimensions.
• Dimension placement
o Left of sketch. Places dimensions to the left of the sketch.
o Right of sketch. Places dimensions to the right of the sketch.
To autodimension a sketch:
3. Click OK .
2. In the open sketch, click Autodimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools,
Dimensions, Autodimension.
The color of the entities autodimensioned in the graphics area correspond to the colors shown in the
PropertyManager.
3. Click OK .
Geometric Relations
Click Add Relations on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools, Relations, Add to create geometric
relations (such as tangent or perpendicular) between sketch entities, or between sketch entities and planes, axes,
edges, or vertices.
You can also add relations while you create individual sketch entities, or when you select two exisitng entities.
Existing Relations and Add Relations sections appear in all sketch entity PropertyManagers.
When you create relations, at least one of the items must be a sketch entity. The other item (or items) can be either a
sketch entity or an edge, face, vertex, origin, plane, axis, or curve from another sketch that forms a line or arc when
projected on the sketch plane.
Geometric relations can also be created automatically. See Automatic Relations.
Automatic Relations
You can choose whether geometric relations are automatically created as you create sketch entities.
Horizontal Vertical
Coincident Midpoint
Intersection Tangent
3-40
Perpendicular
Brown inference lines indicate that a relation is added automatically; blue inference lines indicate that
no relation is added.
Selected Entities
Displays the names of selected sketch entities. Add entities to the list by selecting them in the graphics area.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations that exist for the selected sketch entity.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
• You can add relations to the selected entities from the list. The list includes only relations that are possible
for the selected entities. Equal and Midpoint relations are not available in 3D sketches.
When you add relations to entities, at least one item must be a sketch entity. Other items can include
additional sketch entities, edges, faces, vertices, origins, planes, or axes. You can also include sketch curves
from other sketches that form lines or arcs when projected onto the sketch plane.
Options
For construction. Converts the entities to construction geometry (not available in Add Relations
PropertyManager).
Sketch Relations
The following table describes the entities that you can select for a relation and the characteristics of the resulting
relation.
NOTES:
• When you create a relation to a line, the relation is to the infinite line, not just the sketched line segment or
the physical edge. As a result, some items may not touch when you expect them to.
• When you create a relation to an arc segment or elliptical segment, the relation is actually to the full circle or
ellipse.
• If you create a relation to an item that does not lie on the sketch plane, the resulting relation applies to the
projection of that item as it appears on the sketch plane.
• Additional relations are created automatically when you use Offset Entities and Convert Entities.
3-42
Sketch Relations Callouts
In an open sketch, when you double-click a sketch entity in the graphics area, the PropertyManager opens and
callouts appear for all the relations of the selected entity.
Alternatively, when you select a relation under Relations in the PropertyManager, a callout appears in the
graphics area.
The callouts display the relations applied to the selected sketch entity and the names of the related sketch entities. The
color of the callout specifies the status of the entity (under defined, over defined, dangling, and so on).
The default system color for fully defined status is black. In the callouts, fully defined status is blue, the same as
for under defined. The other colors in the callouts follow the system defaults. The status also appears next to
Information in the PropertyManager.
To delete a relation, select the relation under Relations, or select the callout in the graphics area, and press Delete.
To open the Display/Delete Relations PropertyManager, double-click the callout .
To always use fully defined sketches to create features, click Tools, Options, System Options, Sketch, and
select Use fully defined sketches.
Relations
• Filter. Specifies which relations to display, such as All in this sketch, Selected Entities, or any of the
following:
o Dangling
o Over Defined/Not Solved
o External
o Defined In Context
o Locked
o Broken
• Selected Entities (available when Filter is set to Seleted Entities). Displays the names of entities you select
in the sketch.
• Relations . Displays existing relations based on the selected Filter. When you select a relation from the
list, the names of the related entities are displayed under Entities and the sketch entity is highlighted in the
graphics area.
The status of external references is displayed the same as in the FeatureManager design tree.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity. If the relation was created within the
context of an assembly, the status can be Broken or Locked.
• Suppressed. Suppresses the relation for the current configuration. The name of the relation turns gray and
the Information status changes (from Satisfied to Driven, for example).
Entities
• Entities used in the selected relation:
o Entity. Lists each selected sketch entity in Relations.
o Status. Displays the status of the selected sketch entity, such as Fully Defined, Under Defined,
and so on.
o Defined In. Displays the location where the entity is defined, such as Current Sketch, Same
Model, or External Model.
Information for external entities in assemblies:
o Entity. Displays the entity name for sketch entities in the Same Model or External Model.
o Owner. Displays the part to which the sketch entity belongs
o Owner and Assembly. Displays the name of the top-level assembly where the relation was created
for sketch entities in an External Model.
• Replace. Replaces the selected entity with another entity. In the graphics area, select an entity for Entity to
replace the one selected above, and click Replace. If the replacement is not appropriate, the status is
Invalid.
3-44
Configurations
For models with multiple configurations, you can apply the selected relations to This configuration, All
configurations, or Specify configurations. If you select Specify configurations, select configurations in the
Configurations list. Click All to select all the configurations in the list. Click Reset to reset the selections to the
original settings.
Scan Equal
Use the Scan Equal tool to scan a sketch for entities with equal lengths or radii, and set an Equal relation between
sketch entities that are the same length or radius.
1. In an open sketch, click Scan Equal on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools, Relations,
Scan Equal.
If equal sketch entities exist, the appropriate selections are available:
• Length. Two or more lines are equal.
• Radii. Two or more arcs have equal radii.
• Both. An arc has a radii equal to a line length.
2. To see the equal sketch entities, select one of the available selections. The following occurs:
• The entities are highlighted in the sketch.
• Value. Displays the length or radii.
• Line Count and Arc Count. Displays the number of equal entities.
3. Click for additional options:
• Find Next. Available if additional sets of equal entities exist.
• Set Equal. Creates an Equal relation between the highlighted entities.
4. Click Close.
Splines
Splines
You can create spline curves. Splines can have as few as two points, and you can specify tangency at the end points.
To create a spline:
Alternatively, you can click on each through point to create the spline, then double-click when the
spline is complete.
To reshape a spline:
1. In an open sketch, select the spline.
Handles appear on the through points and the segment end points.
2. You can modify the spline using the following techniques:
• Drag the handles.
• Remove through spline points.
• Right-click and select Spline Point, Moving Frame, or Simplify Spline.
1. In an open sketch, click Spline on the Sketch toolbar and sketch a spline with three or more spline
points.
2. Right-click the spline and select Simplify Spline.
3. In the dialog box, click Smooth until the spline contains only two points, then click OK.
The endpoints of the spline retain their slope.
You can also add tangency to a two-point spline by adding a relation as described above.
3-46
Add tangent relation between spline and line Simplify spline to two points with slope retained
Proportional Splines
A newly created spline is non-proportional by default. You can change its shape by dragging a spline point or
endpoint.
A proportional spline retains its shape when you drag the endpoints; the entire spline resizes proportionally.
You can add dimensions and relations to internal points of proportional splines.
Spline PropertyManager
The Spline PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Spline:
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You cannot add relations to splines.
You can add relations to the spline points. Click a point on the spline to add a relation.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
Specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the spline if the spline is not
constrained by relations.
Spline Point Number. Highlights the selected spline point in the graphics area.
Proportional.Retains the spline shape when you drag an endpoint; the entire spline resizes
proportionally.
Fit Spline
Use the Fit Spline tool to fit sketch segments to a spline. Fit splines are parametrically linked to underlying geometry
so that changes to the geometry update the spline.
Fit spline chooses the most logical fit to the geometry you select, but you can modify the fit. If you select an entity
that has been fit, the entity is no longer part of the spline. If you select an entity that is not part of the spline, the spline
adjusts to include the selected entity.
You can also include model edges in a fit spline. However, you cannot constrain other geometry to the splines.
Sketch has four entities Fit Spline tool converts the geometry to a single spline
Parameters
• Delete geometry. Deletes the original sketch segments from the sketch. Otherwise, the segments remain as
construction geometry separate from the spline. When cleared, you can select the Constrained,
Unconstrained, or Fixed options.
• Closed spline. Creates a closed contour spline.
• Constrained. Parametrically links the fitted spline to the defining geometry.
• Unconstrained. Creates the fitted spline as the same shape as the original defining geometry but with no
constraints. You can dimension, constrain, and drag the spline.
• Fixed. Creates the fitted spline as the same shape as defining geometry but it is fixed in space.
• Edit Chaining. Allows you to edit the chain of splines created. Editing applies only to the order of the non-
contiguous spline elements, not the sketch entities. Click or to undo or redo the edits.
Tolerance
• Tolerance . Specifies the maximum deviation allowed from the original sketch segments.
• Actual Deviation. Updates based on the Tolerance value and the geometry selected. This is automatically
calculated.
4. Click OK .
3-48
Simplify Spline
Use the Simplify Spline tool to reduce the number of points in a spline and to increase system performance in models
with complex spline curves.
You can also simplify splines that were created from imported models or from tools such as Convert Entities, Offset
Entities, Intersection Curve, and Face Curves.
To simplify a spline:
1. In an open sketch, select the spline in the graphics area, then click Simplify Spline on the Spline Tools
toolbar, or click Tools, Spline Tools, Simplify Spline.
2. In the dialog box, set a value for Tolerance and press Enter, or click Smooth. (You can continue to click
Smooth until only two spline points remain). The SolidWorks software:
• Adjusts the tolerance and calculates a new curve with fewer spline points. The original spline is
displayed in the graphics area along with a preview of the smoothed curve.
• Displays the Number of spline points in In original curve and In simplified curve.
• Displays the simplified Tolerance, which measures the intended deviation of the simplified curve
from the original curve.
Click Previous to return through the sequence as far as the original curve.
3. Click OK.
The pointer changes to . If the pointer is not on the spline, the pointer changes to .
2. Click one or more places on the spline where you want to insert a point.
Moving Frame
The moving frame is a way to manipulate a spline without adding points. You can use the moving frame in a part or
drawing document. The moving frame is available for both 2D or 3D splines.
NOTE: The moving frame can be used with splines created in SolidWorks that you are able to modify. It cannot be
used with imported or converted splines.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
3-50
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the frame point if the frame
point is not constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically.
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Existing Relations
• Relations . Relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . The status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined and so on) is
displayed.
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the frame point if the frame
point is not constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically.
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Z Coordinate
Curvature Combs
Curvature combs provide visual enhancement of the slope and curvature of most sketch entities in part, assembly, and
drawing documents.
3. Click OK .
The comb remains visible when you close the sketch (unless the sketch is made into a feature).
3. Click OK .
Curvature Scale
The Scale slider adjusts the size of all the curvature combs in the active sketch.
Inflection Points
The Show Inflection Points tool displays all points where the concavity of a spline changes. The inflection point
symbol appears at the point where the spline changes from concave to convex.
3-52
Minimum Radius
The Show Minimum Radius tool displays the radial measurement of the curve with the smallest radius of a spline.
2D Sketching
Line
Creates a sketched line.
To sketch a line:
1. Click Line on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Line.
Line PropertyManager
The Line PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Line.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the line if the line is not
constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update automatically.
Start X Coordinate
Start Y Coordinate
End X Coordinate
End Y Coordinate
Length
Angle. Relative to the grid, with horizontal 180°, vertical 90°, and the positive direction
counterclockwise.
Delta X. Difference between the start and end X coordinates.
Delta Y. Difference between the start and end Y coordinates.
3-54
Points
You can insert points into sketches and drawings.
Point PropertyManager
The Point PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Point.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Parameters
You can specify the following parameters to define the point if the point is not constrained by relations.
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Circle
You can create a sketched circle.
To create a circle:
In an open sketch:
• Enlarge the circle by dragging its edge away from its center
point.
• Make the circle smaller by dragging its edge toward its
center point.
• Move the circle by dragging its center point.
Circle PropertyManager
The Circle PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Circle.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the circle if the circle is
not constrained by relations.
Center X Coordinate
Center Y Coordinate
Radius
3-56
Ellipse
Use the Ellipse tool to create a complete ellipse. Use the Partial Ellipse tool to create an elliptical arc.
To create an ellipse:
Partial Ellipse
You can create a partial ellipse (an elliptical arc) from a centerpoint, a start point, and an end point, similar to creating
a Centerpoint Arc.
1. In an open sketch, click Partial Ellipse on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Partial
Ellipse.
Ellipse PropertyManager
The Ellipse PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Ellipse or Partial Ellipse.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the ellipse if the ellipse
is not constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically. Some parameters are available only for a Partial Ellipse.
Center X Coordinate
Center Y Coordinate
Radius 1
Radius 2
Centerlines
Use centerlines to create symmetrical sketch elements (see Mirror Entities) and revolved features (see Revolve), or
as construction geometry.
To create a centerline:
1. Click Centerline on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Centerline.
Virtual Sharp
A virtual sharp creates a sketch point at the virtual intersection point of two sketch entities. Dimensions and relations
to the virtual intersection point are retained even if the actual intersection no longer exists, such as when a corner is
removed by a fillet or chamfer.
2. Click Point on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Point.
A virtual sharp appears at the point where the sketch entities would intersect.
Set the virtual sharp display style in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Virtual Sharps.
3-58
Centerpoint Arc
Use the Centerpoint Arc tool to create an arc from a centerpoint, a start point, and an end point.
To create a centerpoint arc:
1. In an open sketch, click Centerpoint Arc on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities,
Centerpoint Arc.
Tangent Arcs
Creates an arc, tangent to a sketch entity.
You can transition from sketching a line to sketching a tangent arc without selecting the Tangent Arc tool by
autotransitioning.
To create a tangent arc:
1. Click Tangent Arc on the Sketch Tools toolbar, or Tools, Sketch Entity, Tangent Arc.
2. Click the pointer on the end point of a line, arc, ellipse, or spline.
3 Point Arc
You can create an arc by specifying three points (start, end, and midpoint).
To create a 3 point arc:
1. Click 3 Point Arc on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, 3 Point Arc.
Arc PropertyManager
The Arc PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Centerpoint Arc, Tangent Arc, or 3 Point
Arc.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entities to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the arc if the arc is not
constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically.
Center X Coordinate
Center Y Coordinate
Start X Coordinate
Start Y Coordinate
End X Coordinate
End Y Coordinate
Radius
3-60
Parabolas
You can create a parabolic curve.
To create a parabola:
1. In an open sketch, select a parabola. (The pointer changes to when it is over a parabola.)
2. Drag the vertex to shape the curve. The pointer changes to when you select the vertex.
Parabola PropertyManager
The Parabola PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched Parabola.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the parabola if the
parabola is not constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters
update automatically.
Start X Coordinate
Start Y Coordinate
End X Coordinate
End Y Coordinate
Center X Coordinate
Center Y Coordinate
Apex X Coordinate
Apex Y Coordinate
3-62
Polygons
You can create equilateral polygons with any number of sides between 3 and 40.
To create a polygon:
1. Click Polygon on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Polygon.
4. To sketch another polygon, click New Polygon and repeat steps 2 through 5.
5. Click OK .
The Polygon tool is still active. You can create additional polygons, although the PropertyManager does not
open. To release the tool, click the tool on the Sketch toolbar, click another tool, or press Esc.
To edit a polygon:
1. In an open sketch, select one of the sides of the polygon and click Tools, Sketch Tools, Edit Polygon.
- or -
Right-click a side of the polygon and select Edit polygon.
2. Modify the polygon in the Polygon PropertyManager.
Polygon PropertyManager
The Polygon PropertyManager controls the following properties during creation of a sketched Polygon.
Existing Relations
Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You cannot add relations to polygons. However, you can add relations to the points and lines of polygons.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the polygon. When you change
one or more parameters, the other parameters update automatically.
• Number of Sides . Sets the number of sides in the polygon. A polygon can have 3 to 40 sides.
• Inscribed circle. Displays an inscribed circle inside the polygon to define the size of the polygon. The circle
is construction geometry.
• Circumscribed circle. Displays a circumscribed circle outside of the polygon to define the size of the
polygon. The circle is construction geometry.
• Center X Coordinate . Displays the X coordinate for the center of the polygon.
• Center Y Coordinate . Displays the Y coordinate for the center of the polygon.
Rectangles
You can create rectangles whose sides are horizontal or vertical with respect to the sketch grid. For rectangles whose
sides are at a different orientation, create a Parallelogram.
To create a rectangle:
Instead of dragging, you can move the pointer and click again (click-click mode).
You can force sketch segments to detach when you drag them. Click Tools, Sketch Settings, Detach
Segment on Drag.
3-64
Parallelograms
You can create a parallelogram and also create a rectangle whose sides are not horizontal or vertical with respect to
the sketch grid.
To create a parallelogram:
1. Click Parallelogram on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Parallelogram.
Instead of dragging, you can move the pointer and click again (click-click mode).
3. Click again and drag until the parallelogram is the correct size and shape.
• Press Ctrl while dragging to create a parallelogram at any angle.
You can reshape and resize the parallelogram by dragging its corners and sides.
• Drag without pressing Ctrl to create a rectangle at an angle.
You can resize the rectangle by dragging its corners and sides. You cannot change the angle of the
rectangle by dragging.
Text
You can sketch text on the face of a part and extrude or cut the text. The text can be inserted on any set of continuous
curves or edges, including circles or profiles made up of lines, arcs, or splines.
If the curve is a sketch entity, or a set of sketch entities, and the sketch text is in the same sketch as the curve,
convert the sketch entities to construction geometry.
Click Text on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Text.
To create a profile for placing the text, sketch a circle or a continuous profile from lines, arcs, or splines
in a sketch, close the sketch, then open another sketch for the text.
2. In the graphics area, select an edge, curve, sketch, or sketch segment.
5. Click OK .
6. With the sketch still open, Extrude or Cut the text.
1. In an open sketch, right-click the text (the pointer changes to when it is over the sketch text) and select
Properties.
2. Edit the text and its properties in the Sketch Text PropertyManager as necessary.
Curves
Select edges, curves, sketches, or sketch segments. The name of the selected entity appears in the box, and the text
appears along the entity.
Text
• Text. Type text in the Text box. The text appears along the selected entity in the graphics area. If no entity is
selected, the text appears horizonally starting at the origin.
• Style. You can select individual characters, or groups of characters, to apply Bold or Italic or to
Rotate .
Click Rotate to rotate the selected text 30 degrees counterclockwise. For other rotation angles, click
Rotate and then edit the code in the Text box. For example, for an angle of 10 degrees clockwise, replace
<r30> with <r-10>. To return to zero degrees rotation, delete the code and brackets. For angles of 180
degrees, use the Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal buttons.
• Alignment. Justify the text Left Align , Center Align , Right Align , or Full Justify .
Alignment is available only for text along a curve, edge, or sketch segment.
• Flip. Flip the text in the Flip Vertical direction and back , or in the Flip Horizontal direction
and back . Flip Vertical is available only for text along a curve, edge, or sketch segment.
• Width Factor . Widen each character evenly by the specified percentage. Width Factor is not available
when Use document's font is selected
3-66
• Spacing . Change the spacing between each character by the specified percentage. Spacing is not
available when the text is fully justified or when Use document's font is selected.
• Use document's font. Clear to choose another font.
• Font. Click to open the Font dialog box and choose a font style and size.
Sketch Picture
You can insert a picture (.bmp, .gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .tif, and .wmf) on a sketch plane. Pictures can be used as an underlay
for creating 2D sketches. The Sketch Picture PropertyManager controls the picture's position, size, angle,
orientation, and aspect ratio setting.
• The picture is inserted with its (0, 0) coordinate at the sketch origin, an initial size of 1 pixel per 1 mm, and
locked aspect ratio.
• The picture is embedded in the document (not linked). If you change the original image, the sketch picture
does not update.
• If you sketch on top of the picture, there is no snap to picture, inferencing, or autotracing capability. If the
image is moved, or deleted and replaced, the sketch does not update.
• If you hide the sketch, the picture is also hidden.
• Pictures can be inserted into assemblies when editing a part in context, but they cannot be inserted into
assembly sketches.
1. In an open sketch, click Sketch Picture on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Sketch
Picture.
2. In the dialog box, browse to the picture file and click Open.
The picture is inserted.
3. Set the properties in the Sketch Picture PropertyManager as necessary.
You can resize the picture in the graphics area by dragging its handles. You can drag the picture
4. Click OK .
To edit the picture after you have inserted it, double-click the picture.
Origin X Position. Enter an X coordinate value for the origin of the picture.
Origin Y Position. Enter a Y coordinate value for the origin of the picture.
Angle. Enter a value in degrees. A positive angle rotates the picture counterclockwise.
Width. Enter a value for the picture width. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected, the height adjusts
automatically.
Height. Enter a value for the picture height. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected, the width adjusts
automatically.
Lock Aspect Ratio. Select to keep a fixed width and height aspect ratio.
Flip Horizontally. Click to flip the picture horizontally within its borders.
Flip Vertically. Click to flip the picture vertically within its borders.
NOTE: Values in the Sketch Picture PropertyManager update automatically when you change the size or position of
the picture in the graphics area.
3D Sketching
3D Sketching
A 3D sketch consists of lines and arcs in series, and splines. You can use a 3D sketch as a sweep path, as a guide
curve for a loft or sweep, a centerline for a loft, or as one of the key entities in a routing system. (The routing
functionality is an add-in application.)
To begin a 3D sketch, click 3D Sketch on the Sketch toolbar, or click Insert, 3D Sketch. A space handle helps
you maintain orientation while sketching on several planes.
By default, you sketch relative to the default coordinate system in the model. To switch to one of the other two default
planes, click the sketch tool and press Tab. The origin of the current sketch plane is displayed.
Before you begin a 3D sketch, change the view orientation to Isometric. It is easier to create a 3D sketch in an
isometric orientation because the X, Y, and Z directions are visible.
Convert Entities creates one or more entities in a 3D sketch by projecting an edge, loop, face,
external curve, external sketch contour, set of edges, or set of external curves onto the sketch
plane.
3-68
Sketch Fillet rounds the intersections of sketched lines.
As you sketch a line, the line snaps to one of the major directions, X, Y, or Z, if applicable, and is constrained as
Horizontal, Vertical, or Along Z, respectively. The relations are added with respect to the current coordinate
system for the 3D sketch. See Dimensioning a 3D Sketch.
You are not restricted to drawing lines along one of the three major directions. You can sketch in the current sketch
plane at an angle to one of the major directions, or you can sketch out-of-plane if the endpoint of the line snaps to
existing model geometry.
1. Click Sketch Fillet on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Fillet.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Fillet Parameters, set the Radius .
3. Select two intersecting line segments, or select their intersection.
Line Snap
While you create a line in a 3D sketch, you can snap the line to geometry that already exists in the part, such as model
surfaces or vertices, and sketch points.
• Snap is not enabled if you are sketching in one of the major coordinate directions.
• If you are sketching on a plane, and the SolidWorks software infers a snap to a non-planar point, a temporary
3D graphics box is displayed to indicate an off-planar snap.
3D Lines
You can create lines in 3D sketches.
2. Click Standard Views , then select Isometric on the View toolbar so you can view all three
directions.
3. Click Line on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Entities, Line.
4. Click in the graphics area to start the line.
3D Line PropertyManager
The 3D Line PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched 3D Line.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
3-70
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the line if the line is not
constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically.
Start X Coordinate
Start Y Coordinate
Start Z Coordinate
End X Coordinate
End Y Coordinate
End Z Coordinate
Length
Angle. Relative to the grid, with horizontal 180°, vertical 90°, and the positive direction
counterclockwise.
Delta X. Difference between the start and end X coordinates.
Delta Y. Difference between the start and end Y coordinates.
Delta Z. Difference between the start and end Z coordinates.
3D Splines
You can create splines in 3D sketches.
2. Click Standard Views , then select Isometric on the View toolbar so you can see all three
directions.
Alternatively, you can click to place each through point, then double-click to place the endpoint and
complete the spline.
To reshape a spline:
1. In a 3D sketch, select the spline.
Handles appear on the through points and endpoints.
2. You can modify the spline using the following techniques.
• Drag the handles to reshape the spline.
• Add or remove through spline points to aid in shaping the spline. Right-click the spline and select
Spline Point, or select a spline point and press Delete.
• Insert a moving frame along the curve of the spline to manipulate the spline shape. Right-click the
spline and select Moving Frame.
• Smooth the spline. Right-click the spline and select Simplify Spline.
3D Spline PropertyManager
The 3D Spline PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched 3D Spline:
Existing Relations
• Relations . Relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . The status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so on) is
displayed.
Add Relations
You cannot add relations to splines.
NOTE: You can add relations to the spline points. Click a point on the spline to add a relation.
Options
Select the For construction check box to convert the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
Specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the spline if the spline is not
constrained by relations.
Spline Point Number. When you scroll through the points, the corresponding coordinates
appear below
X Coordinate. The x coordinate of the spline point.
3-72
3D Points
You can insert points into 3D sketches.
To create sketch points in a 3D sketch:
2. Click Standard Views , then select Isometric on the View toolbar so you can view all three
directions.
3D Point PropertyManager
The 3D Point PropertyManager controls the following properties of a sketched 3D Point.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
NOTE: When you sketch a 3D point on a face or surface, the point automatically has a coincident relation
with the face or surface.
• Information . The status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined and so on) is
displayed.
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Parameters
You can specify the following parameters to define the point if the point is not constrained by relations.
X Coordinate
Y Coordinate
Z Coordinate
3D Circle PropertyManager
The 3D Circle PropertyManager controls the following properties of a 3D Circle. To create a circle in a 3D sketch,
open a 3D Sketch on a circular face of a part, click Convert Entities , and select the circular edge.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . The status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined and so on) is
displayed.
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
Select the For construction check box to convert the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the circle if the circle is
not constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically.
Center X Coordinate
Center Y Coordinate
Center Z Coordinate
Radius
3-74
Space Handle
When working in a 3D sketch, a graphical assistant is provided to help you maintain your orientation while you
sketch on several planes. This assistant is called a space handle. The space handle appears when the first point of a
line or spline is defined on a selected plane. Using the space handle, you can select the axis along which you want to
sketch.
By default, you sketch relative to the default coordinate system in the model. To switch to one of the other two default
planes, click the sketch tool and press Tab. The origin of the current sketch plane is displayed.
Dimensioning a 3D Sketch
When working in a 3D sketch, you can sketch lines to the approximate length, and then dimension them.
• You can add a length dimension by selecting two points, a line, or two parallel lines.
• You can add an angular dimension by selecting either three points or two lines.
3D Arc PropertyManager
The Arc PropertyManager controls the following properties of an arc in a 3D sketch. To create an arc in a 3D sketch,
use Sketch Fillet on the Sketch toolbar to fillet two lines.
Existing Relations
• Relations . Displays relations inferenced automatically during sketching or created manually with Add
Relations. When you select a relation in the list, a callout is highlighted in the graphics area.
• Information . Displays the status of the selected sketch entity (Fully Defined, Under Defined, and so
on).
Add Relations
You can add relations to the selected entity. The list includes only relations that are possible for the selected
entity.
Options
For construction. Converts the entity to construction geometry.
Parameters
You can specify any appropriate combination of the following parameters to define the arc if the arc is not
constrained by relations. When you change one or more parameters, the other parameters update
automatically.
Center X Coordinate
Center Y Coordinate
Center Z Coordinate
Start X Coordinate
Start Y Coordinate
Start Z Coordinate
End X Coordinate
End Y Coordinate
End Z Coordinate
Radius
3-76
4
2D to 3D Conversion
2D to 3D Conversion Overview
Example of 2D to 3D Conversion:
4-2
Cut or extrude other features. In this
example, a round hole, a rectangular hole,
and a rectangular notch are cut to
complete the part.
The 2D sketch can be an imported drawing, or it can be a sketch constructed in SolidWorks. In either case, it must be
a single sketch in a part document.
NOTE: Even though the sketch can be an imported drawing, it must be imported into a sketch in a part document.
You can copy and paste the drawing from a drawing document, or you can import the drawing directly into a 2D
sketch in a part document.
The conversion procedure is generally as follows:
1. In a part document, import a drawing into a sketch or construct a new sketch.
2. Edit the sketch.
3. Extract sketches for views from the Front, Top, and so on. The sketches fold up into the appropriate
orientation.
4. Align the sketches.
5. Extrude the base feature.
6. Cut or extrude other features.
The tools for the conversion process are on the 2D To 3D Toolbar.
2D to 3D Toolbar
The 2D to 3D tools help you convert a 2D drawing to a 3D part. Some of the tools can be used in any sketches.
Front. The selected sketch entities become the front view in converting to a 3D part.
Top. The selected sketch entities become the top view in converting to a 3D part.
Right. The selected sketch entities become the right view in converting to a 3D part.
Left. The selected sketch entities become the left view in converting to a 3D part.
Bottom. The selected sketch entities become the bottom view in converting to a 3D part.
Back. The selected sketch entities become the back view in converting to a 3D part.
You can import a 2D drawing directly into a sketch in a part document for conversion into a 3D model.
4-4
Extracting Sketches
To create a base feature from a 2D drawing, extract sketches to specify the appropriate views. The sketches fold up
automatically into the correct orientation as though the drawing were a piece of paper.
Specify which portions of the drawing are the sketches for the front view, the right view, and so on. You can also
create auxiliary sketches that are not parallel to the principal view planes.
2. Click Front on the 2D to 3D toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, 2D to 3D, Front.
A new sketch appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
3. Click Auxiliary on the 2D to 3D toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, 2D to 3D, Auxiliary.
Line defines
angle of
auxiliary
view
Aligning Sketches
After extracting sketches for conversion to a 3D part, you can align the sketches before creating the base feature. The
sketch selected first moves to align with the sketch selected second.
To align sketches:
1. Select a line or a point in a sketch to be aligned with another sketch.
2. Hold Ctrl and select a line or a point in the second sketch to which the first sketch is to be aligned.
3. Click Align Sketch on the 2D to 3D toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Align, Sketch.
4-6
Extruding in 2D to 3D
You can extrude base features and other features using Extrude on the 2D to 3D toolbar with partial sketches.
NOTE: Extruded Boss/Base on the Features toolbar accepts only complete sketches.
To extrude a feature:
1. Edit a sketch.
2. Select the sketch entities required for the feature.
NOTE: It is not necessary to select a complete sketch.
3. Hold Ctrl and select a point (in any sketch) to be the starting point for the extrusion.
NOTE: If you do not select a starting point, or if you select a point in the edited sketch, the plane of the
sketch is considered to be the starting point.
4. Click Extrude on the 2D to 3D toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, 2D to 3D, Extrude, and click in
the graphics area to establish the direction of the extrusion.
The Base-Extrude PropertyManager appears.
5. Edit the properties in the Base Extrude PropertyManager.
NOTE: For 2D to 3D conversion, you can specify the depth of a blind extrusion by selecting a sketch entity.
6. Click OK .
Cutting in 2D to 3D
You can cut features using Cut on the 2D to 3D toolbar with partial sketches.
NOTE: Extruded Cut on the Features toolbar accepts only complete sketches.
To cut a feature:
1. Edit a sketch.
2. Select the sketch entities required for the feature.
NOTE: It is not necessary to select a complete sketch.
3. Hold Ctrl and select a face to be the starting point for the cut.
4. Click Cut on the 2D to 3D toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, 2D to 3D, Cut, and click in the
graphics area to establish the direction of the cut.
The Cut-Extrude PropertyManager appears.
5. Edit the properties in the Base Extrude PropertyManager.
NOTE: For 2D to 3D conversion, you can specify the depth of a blind cut by selecting a sketch entity. Click
6. Click OK .
4-8
Example of Cutting in 2D to 3D Conversion:
Click OK .
Repair Sketch
Repair Sketch can often fix errors in a sketch so that the sketch can be used to create a feature. Some tools
(Extrude and Cut, for example) repair sketches automatically when they detect errors they can fix. You can also
repair sketches manually. Repair Sketch is particularly useful for sketches created by importing DXF/DWG files.
Repair Sketch proceeds automatically as follows:
• Delete zero length line and arc segments (zero length is a segment less than ±1.0e-8 meters)
• Merge colinear lines that overlap
• Eliminate gaps of less than ±1.0e-8 meters in colinear lines
• Collect small segments in colinear lines with no gaps greater than ±1.0e-8 meters
• Merge coincident lines (separated by less than ±1.0e-8 meters) into one line
2. Click Repair Sketch on the 2D to 3D toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Repair Sketch.
3. Click Create Sketch from Selections , or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Create Sketch from Selections.
A new sketch appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
4-10
5
Reference Geometry
Reference geometry defines the shape or form of a surface or a solid. Reference geometry includes planes, axes,
coordinate systems, points, and 3D curves. You can use reference geometry in the creation of several kinds of
features:
• planes are used in lofts and sweeps
• split lines are used in some drafts and chamfers
• an axis is used in a circular pattern
This chapter includes:
• Creating and using planes
• Creating and using axes
• Creating local coordinate systems
• Converting sketch lines to construction geometry
• Creating 3D curves
• Creating reference points
You control the visibility of reference geometry and the names of the default planes in the document templates.
5. Click Save or File, Save to update the existing document template. Click File, Save As to update the
name of the document template as well.
Planes
Creating Planes
You can create planes in part or assembly documents. You can use planes to sketch, to create a section view of a
model, for a neutral plane in a draft feature, and so on.
You can preselect items before you click Plane . If you preselect items, SolidWorks attempts to select the
appropriate type of plane. You can always select a different type of plane.
You can right-click in the graphics area and select a plane type from the shortcut menu. When you have selected
enough entities to create a plane, the OK pointer appears. Right-click to create the plane.
NOTE: The created plane is 5% larger than the geometry on which the plane is created, or 5% larger than the
bounding box. This helps reduce selection problems when planes are created directly on faces or from orthogonal
geometry.
1. Click Plane on the Reference Geometry toolbar, or click Insert, Reference Geometry, Plane.
The Plane PropertyManager appears.
2. Under Selections, select the type of plane you want to create and the items to create the plane:
Through Lines/Points. Create a plane through an edge, axis, or sketch line, and a
• point, or through three points.
Select a face or planar face. Then select a midpoint. The new plane is parallel to the
selected face through the chosen
midpoint.
5-2
At Angle. Create a plane through an edge, axis, or sketch line at an angle to a face or
• plane.
a. Select a plane or planar face, and then select an edge, axis, or sketch line.
b. Enter the angle between the planes in the Angle box.
c. Select the Reverse direction check box, if necessary.
The behavior of the plane is as follows:
If the selected line is in the same plane as the selected If the selected line is parallel to the
plane, the new plane rotates around the selected line. selected plane, the new plane moves
to the parallel line and rotates around
the line.
If the selected line is skewed with respect to the selected plane, the selected line is projected onto
the selected plane and then the plane rotates around the projected line.
In this sample, use Plane 1 and Axis 1 to create a new plane at an angle. Sketch the extrusion
profile on Plane 4. Create the Y-shaped pipe.
Offset. Create a plane parallel to a plane or face, offset by a specified distance. This is
• the default plane created.
a. Select a plane or planar face.
b. Enter the offset distance in the Distance box.
c. Select the Reverse direction check box, if necessary.
d. To create multiple planes offset the same Distance from the selected plane, enter the number
In this example, you select A circle is swept along The helical spring is used in a battery
just the helix to create the the helix to create a contact terminal.
new plane. Plane 4 is spring.
perpendicular to the end of
the tapered helix.
On Surface. Create a plane on a non-planar face or angular surface. See Plane On
• Surface Examples.
a. Select a surface.
b. Select a sketch point on the surface.
• Drag and Drop. You can also drag and drop to create a plane.
a. Select an existing plane border.
b. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag the plane.
The Plane PropertyManager appears with Offset Distance selected. A preview of the
new plane appears in the graphics area.
c. Drop the new plane in the new location.
d. Adjust the values in the PropertyManager.
The selected items appear in the Reference Entities box. A preview of the new plane
appears in the graphics area.
• To create multiple planes, click Keep Visible to keep the Plane PropertyManager displayed.
5-4
Plane On Surface Examples
You can create the following types of planes using the On Surface tool in the Plane PropertyManager:
• Any surface and a point that is not on that surface, using a projected sketch or the closest point
Project to nearest location on surface is Project onto surface along sketch normal is
selected. The new plane is created at the point selected. The new plane is created at the point
on the surface closest to the selected sketch on the surface obtained by projecting the sketch
point. point normal to the plane on which the sketch
point is located. Select the Reverse check box if
the plane preview does not appear.
The preview of the new plane is created tangent to the selected face, along the line where the plane
intersects the surface.
3. Select the Normal plane check box (optional).
A preview of the new plane appears with an Offset angle of 45 degrees. You can adjust the offset
angle, as needed. The new plane intersects the axis of the cylinder.
5-6
• A conical face and a plane
1. Select a surface.
2. Select a plane that cuts through the
surface.
3. Select an edge on the surface.
A preview of the new plane appears.
The plane is created tangent to the Plane tangency The new plane
selected surface at the point where
the selected plane intersects the
selected edge.
Plane Display
You can set the following plane display options for part and assembly documents:
• Face color
• Transparency
• Intersection display and color
NOTE: You must enable the Display shaded planes option to display shaded planes.
5-8
• Front Face Color. Displays the Color dialog box that you use to set the front face color of planes.
• Back Face Color. Displays the Color dialog box that you use to set the back face color of planes.
• Transparency. Controls the plane transparency (0% displays a solid face color; 100% displays no
face color).
NOTE: Edges take the same color as the front and back faces, are not transparent, and are always
displayed.
4. Under Intersections, set the following options:
• Show intersections. Select or clear the Show intersections check box to display or hide the
intersection of planes.
• Line Color. Displays the Color dialog box that you use to set the plane intersection line color.
5. Click OK to accept the changes, or Cancel to discard the changes and exit the dialog box.
Using the plane’s handles and edges, you can do the following:
• Resize the plane by dragging a corner or edge handle.
• Move the plane by dragging the edge of the plane.
• Copy the plane by selecting a plane in the graphics area. Then hold down the Ctrl key and, using the edge,
drag to a new location. An offset plane is created.
3. In the PropertyManager, enter new values to define the plane, then click OK .
5-10
To see an example of automatic sizing of planes:
1. Select a planar face and create an offset plane.
Offset plane 1 appears and is automatically sized to the geometry of the face from which it was created.
Axis Overview
Reference Axis
1. Click Axis on the Reference Geometry toolbar, or click Insert, Reference Geometry, Axis.
2. Select the axis type in the Axis PropertyManager, then select the required entities for that type.
3. Verify that the items listed in Reference Entities correspond to your selections.
4. Click OK .
5. Click View, Axes to see the new axis.
5-12
Reference Axis
The Axis PropertyManager appears when you create a new axis or edit an existing axis. The PropertyManager
controls the following properties:
One Line/Edge/Axis. Select a sketch line, an edge, or select View, Temporary Axes and then select the axis
that is displayed.
Two Planes. Select two planar faces, or select View, Planes, and then select two planes.
Point and Surface. Select a surface or plane and a vertex point, or midpoint. The resultant axis is normal to the
selected surface or plane through the selected vertex, point, or midpoint. If the surface is non-planar, the point must
be on the surface.
Coordinate System
You can define a coordinate system for a part or assembly. Use this coordinate system with the Measure and Mass
Properties tools, and for exporting SolidWorks documents to IGES, STL, ACIS, STEP, Parasolid, VRML, and VDA.
1. Click Coordinate System on the Reference Geometry toolbar, or click Insert, Reference Geometry,
Coordinate System.
2. Use the Coordinate System PropertyManager to create the coordinate system.
• To reverse the direction of an axis, click its Reverse Axis Direction button in the
PropertyManager.
3. Click OK .
You may need to locate a coordinate system where there are insufficient entities available to define the coordinate
system. In this case, you can define a coordinate system someplace on the part that does provide the entities you need.
Then you can move the new origin to the desired location. The new location must contain at least one point or vertex.
When you create a coordinate system, it is a good idea to give it a meaningful name to explain its purpose.
Click-pause-click the coordinate system’s name in the FeatureManager design tree and enter a new name.
Individual coordinate systems always are highlighted when you select them, even when hidden.
The Coordinate System PropertyManager appears when you add a new coordinate system to a part or assembly or
edit an existing coordinate system. The PropertyManager controls the following properties:
Origin. Select a vertex, point, midpoint, or the default point of origin on a part or assembly for the coordinate
system origin.
X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. Select one of the following for the Axis Direction Reference:
• Vertex, point, or midpoint. Aligns the axis toward the selected point.
• Linear edge or sketch line. Aligns the axis parallel to the selected edge or line.
• Non-linear edge or sketch entity. Aligns the axis toward the selected location on the selected entity.
• Planar face. Aligns the axis in the normal direction of the selected face.
Origin
The model origin appears in blue and represents the (0,0,0) coordinate of the model. When a sketch is active, a sketch
origin appears in red and represents the (0,0,0) coordinate of the sketch. Dimensions and relations can be added to the
model origin, but not to a sketch origin.
To toggle the origin display:
Click View, Origins. A check mark next to the menu item means origins are visible (except for origins you
have hidden individually).
Centroid
If you select centroid as the reference point for a table-driven or sketch-driven pattern, the system determines the
centroid based on the type of seed feature.
• For cylindrical, conical, or revolved features, the centroid is the intersection of the axis of revolution with
the X-Y plane of the pattern.
• If the sketch consists of lines and arcs, such as rectangles or oval shapes, and if the sketch plane is parallel to
the X-Y plane, the centroid is defined as the centroid of the sketch.
• For any other condition, the centroid is the centroid of the face of the seed feature.
• If there is more than one seed feature, the centroid of the first seed feature is used.
• If the seed feature is generated from a sketch that includes multiple contours, the centroid of the largest
closed contour is used.
5-14
Converting Sketch Lines to Construction Geometry
You can convert sketched entities into construction geometry to use in creating model geometry.
To convert one or more sketch entities to construction geometry:
1. In an open sketch, select the sketch entities to convert.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click Construction Geometry on the Sketch toolbar.
• Select the For construction check box in the PropertyManager.
To convert sketch entities in a drawing to construction geometry:
Select the sketch entities that you want to convert and use one of the following methods:
Curve Overview
Individual curves always are highlighted when you select them, even when hidden.
1. Click Curve Through XYZ Points on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Curve Through
XYZ Points.
2. Create new sets of coordinates by double-clicking cells in the X, Y, and Z columns and entering a point
coordinate in each one. (Created outside of a sketch, the X, Y, and Z coordinates are interpreted with respect
to the Front plane coordinate system.)
The numbers in the Point column define the order in which the points are connected.
3. Click OK to display the curve.
The Curve Through XYZ Points icon appears next to the curve name in the FeatureManager design
tree.
1. Click Curve Through Reference Points on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Curve
Through Reference Points.
The Curve Through Reference Points PropertyManager appears.
2. Select the sketch points or vertices, or both, in the order in which you want to create the curve.
As you select, the entities are listed in the Through Points box.
3. If you want to close the curve, select the Closed Curve check box.
4. Click OK .
The Curve Through Reference Points icon appears next to the curve name in the FeatureManager
design tree.
Create curves to connect sketch Create the propellers for the fan Here is the completed fan
points between two loft profiles. using a loft feature and a circular assembly.
pattern.
5-16
Curve from File
3. Click Curve Through XYZ Points on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Curve Through
XYZ Points.
4. Click Browse to locate the file, then click Open.
The coordinates from the file are displayed in the Curve File dialog box. Notice the numbers in the Point
column, indicating the order in which the points will be connected.
5. Examine the preview of the curve, and edit the coordinates if necessary, until you are satisfied with the
result. (Double-click in any cell, then edit the value.)
6. Click OK.
2. Click Helix and Spiral on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Helix/Spiral.
3. Set values in the Helix/Spiral PropertyManager.
To define a helix, you specify two values, and the third value is automatically calculated.
4. Click OK .
The helix and the sweep profile are on the A boss-sweep feature (shown in blue) creates the threads
neck of the bottle. on the neck of the bottle.
Helix/Spiral PropertyManager
The Helix/Spiral PropertyManager appears when you create a new helix or spiral in a sketch or edit an existing
helix or spiral. The PropertyManager controls the following properties:
Defined By
• Pitch and Revolution. Creates a helix defined by Pitch and Revolutions.
• Height and Revolution. Creates a helix defined by Height and Revolutions.
• Height and Pitch. Creates a helix defined by Height and Pitch.
• Spiral. Creates a spiral defined by Pitch and Revolutions.
Parameters
• Height (Helix only). Sets the height.
• Pitch. Sets the rate of change of radius for each revolution. The Pitch value must be at least 0.001 and not
greater than 200000.
• Revolutions. Sets the number of turns.
• Reverse direction. Extends the helix backwards from the point of origin, or creates an inward spiral.
• Start angle. Sets where to start the first turn on the sketched circle.
• Clockwise. Sets the direction of the turns to clockwise.
• Counterclockwise. Sets the direction of the turns to counterclockwise.
Taper Helix
• Taper Helix. Creates a tapered helix.
• Taper Angle. Sets the angle of the taper.
• Taper outward. Tapers the helix outward.
You can preselect items before you click Projection . If you preselect items, SolidWorks attempts to select the
appropriate type of projection.
• If you preselect two sketches, the Sketch onto Sketch option is activated with the two sketches shown under
Sketches to Project .
• If you preselect a sketch and one or more faces, the Sketch onto Face(s) option is activated with the selected
items shown in the correct boxes.
• If you preselect one or more faces, the Sketch onto Face(s) option is activated.
You can right-click in the graphics area and select a projection type from the shortcut menu. When you have selected
enough entities to create a projected curve, the OK pointer appears. Right-click to create the projected curve.
To project a curve:
5-18
Sketch onto Face(s)
Use this selection to project a sketched curve onto a model face.
• Under Sketch to Project , select the curve in the graphics area or from the flyout FeatureManager
design tree.
• Under Projection Faces , select the cylindrical face on the model where you want to project the sketch.
• Select the Reverse Projection check box, or click the handle in the graphics area, if necessary.
Original sketch to project onto a face Projected curve Projected curve used as a sweep path
• Under Sketches to Project , select both sketches in the flyout FeatureManager design tree or the
graphics area.
The two sketches (gray) project onto each The curve is used as a The swept geometry is used to
other to form the 3D curve (green). path for a sweep. create this power adapter.
Split Lines
The Split Line tool on the Curves toolbar projects a sketch to curved or planar faces. It divides a selected face
into multiple separate faces, enabling you to select each face. You can also project a sketch onto a surface body. You
can use this tool to create two types of split lines:
• Projection. Projects a sketch line on a surface.
• Silhouette. Creates a split line on a cylindrical part.
2. Click Split Line on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Split Line.
The Split Line PropertyManager appears.
3. Under Type of Split, select Projection.
4. Under Selections, do the following:
• If necessary, click the Sketch to Project box and select the sketched line in the flyout
FeatureManager design tree or in the graphics area.
• Click the Faces to Split box and select the faces around the perimeter of the part that you want
the split line to pass through.
• Select the Single Direction check box to project the split line in only one direction.
• Select the Reverse Direction check box, if necessary, to project the split line in the opposite
direction.
5. Click OK .
The sketch line is projected onto the faces you selected. In this example, the four sides were selected. The
split line appears on each face, dividing each face into two sections.
Before After
5-20
To create a silhouette split line:
1. Click Split Line on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Split Line.
The Split Line PropertyManager appears.
2. Under Type of Split, click Silhouette.
3. Under Selections, do the following:
• Under Direction of Pull , in the flyout FeatureManager design tree or graphics area, select a
plane to project through the model's silhouette (outer edges).
• Under Faces to Split , select one or more faces to split. The faces cannot be planar.
4. Click OK .
The plane is projected through the model, creating silhouette split lines where the plane intersects the outer
edges of the selected faces.
The selected plane is projected through the model A silhouette split line is created on the model
in the direction of pull. where the selected plane projected through the
outer model edges.
Composite Curve
You can create composite curves by combining curves, sketch geometry, and model edges into a single curve. Use a
composite curve as a guide curve when creating a loft or a sweep.
1. Click Composite Curve on the Curves toolbar, or click Insert, Curve, Composite.
2. Click the items (sketch entities, edges, and so on) that you want to join.
The selected items appear in the Composite Curve Property Manager, under Entities to Join in the
Select the edges on the model for Create the sweep profile sketch, Here is the completed sweep cut.
the curve. then use the composite curve as
the sweep path.
Reference Points
You can create several types of reference points to use as construction objects. You can also create multiple reference
points that are a specified distance apart on curves. Click View, Points to toggle the display of reference points.
When you select items, the SolidWorks software attempts to select the appropriate point construction method. For
example, if you select a face, SolidWorks selects the Center of Face construction method in the
PropertyManager. You can always select a different type of point construction method.
1. Click Point on the Reference Geometry toolbar, or click Insert, Reference Geometry, Point.
2. In the PropertyManager, select the type of reference point to create.
3. In the graphics area, select the entities to use to create the reference point.
4. Click OK .
1. In a model with a curve, click Point on the Reference Geometry toolbar, or click Insert, Reference
Geometry, Point.
2. In the PropertyManager:
• Set values for Number of specified points and for Enter the distance/percentage value
according to distance.
3. Click OK .
Point PropertyManager
The Point PropertyManager appears when you create a new reference point or edit an existing reference point.
When you select items, the SolidWorks software attempts to select the appropriate point construction method. For
example, if you select a face, SolidWorks selects the Center of Face construction method in the
PropertyManager. You can always select a different type of point construction method.
The PropertyManager controls the following properties:
Reference Entities. Displays the selected entities used to create a reference point.
Arc Center. Creates a reference point at the center of the selected arc or circle.
Center Of Face. Creates a reference point at the center of gravity of the selected face. You can select planar or
non-planar faces.
Intersection. Creates a reference point at the intersection of the two selected entities. You can select edges,
curves, sketch segments, and reference axes.
Projection. Creates a reference point from one entity projected onto another. Select two entities: the entity to
project and the entity onto which to project. You can project points, endpoints of curves and sketch segments, and
vertices of solids and surfaces onto planes and faces (planar or non-planar). The point is projected normal to the plane
or face.
5-22
Along curve distance or multiple reference point. Creates a set of reference points along edges, curves, or
sketch segments. Select the entity and create the reference points using these options:
• Enter the distance/percentage value according to distance. Set a distance or percentage value to create
the reference points. If the value is too large to create the specified number of reference points, a message
warns you to set a smaller value.
• Distance. Creates the number of reference points spaced at the distance you set, starting from the closest
endpoint. The first reference point is created at this distance from the endpoint, not on the endpoint.
• Percentage. Creates the number of reference points spaced at the percentage you set, starting from the
closest endpoint. Percentage means percentage of the length of the selected entity. For example, select a
100mm-long entity. If you set the number of reference points to 5 and the percentage to 10, the 5 reference
points are spaced 10 percent of the total entity length (or 10mm) apart from each other.
• Evenly Distribute. Evenly distributes the number of reference points on the entity. If you edit the number of
reference points, the reference points update their position relative to the starting endpoint.
• Number of reference points. Set the number of reference points to create along the selected entity.
The reference points are created using the selected Distance, Percentage, or Evenly Distribute option.
5-24
6
Features
Features Overview
Features are the individual shapes that, when combined, make up the part. You can also add some types of features to
assemblies.
Features include multibody part capability. You can include separate extrude, revolve, loft, or sweep features, within
the same part document.
Features include:
• Base/Boss, and Cut
• Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, and Loft
• Fillet/Round, Chamfer, and Draft
• Hole - Simple and Hole Wizard
• Scale
• Shell
• Rib
• Dome
• Shape
• Pattern and Mirror
Some features originate as sketches; other features, such as shells or fillets, are created when you select the
appropriate tool or menu command and define the dimensions or characteristics that you want.
Surfaces
Surfaces are another type of feature. You can use surfaces to create or modify solid features. Other ways you can use
surfaces include the following:
• Import from other applications
• Thicken to create solid geometry
• Extrude, revolve, sweep, loft, knit, or offset from a model face or surface
• Extend, fillet, or trim a surface
• Create a mid surface
• Fill surface
Features Toolbar
The Features toolbar provides tools for creating model features. The set of features icons is very extensive so not all
of them are included on the default Features toolbar. You can customize this toolbar by adding and removing icons to
suit your working style and frequent tasks. See Customize Toolbars for more information.
Extruded Boss/Base
Revolved Boss/Base
Sweep
Loft
Thicken
Extruded Cut
Revolved Cut
Swept Cut
Lofted Cut
Thickened Cut
Fillet
Chamfer
Rib
Scale
Shell
Draft
Simple Hole
Hole Wizard
Dome
Shape
Deform
6-2
Wrap
Move/Size Features
Suppress
Unsuppress
Linear Pattern
Circular Pattern
Mirror Feature
Split
Combine
Join
Delete Solid/Surface
Imported Geometry
Insert Part
Move/Copy Bodies
Library Feature
Feature Previews
You can display detailed previews and control what displays with the Detailed Preview PropertyManager. You can
access the Detailed Preview PropertyManager from the PropertyManager in the following features:
• Extrudes
• Ribs
• Drafts
In the Detailed Preview PropertyManager you can select:
• Highlight new or modified faces. Display new extrude, rib, or draft features, or the faces that were affected
by the previous edit. If you check this option, new or modified faces are highlighted in a different color, as
opposed to appearing shaded as they do in the standard PropertyManager. All separate bodies appear in the
preview.
• Show only new or modified bodies. Display only new or modified bodies. All separate bodies are hidden in
the preview. Only separate bodies are affected.
6-4
Detailed Preview - Ribs
6-6
Chamfers
To create a chamfer:
• Click Edges and Faces or Vertex , then select an entity in the graphics area.
• Select one of the following from the PropertyManager (or right-click to use the shortcut menu):
o Distance-distance
o Angle-distance
o Vertex
• Select the Equal Distance check box to specify a single value for distance or vertex.
• Select the Keep features check box if you want to retain features such as cuts or extrudes that
would otherwise be removed when you apply the chamfer.
3. Click OK .
Chamfer Distance-distance
Enter values for both distances on either side of the selected chamfer edges, or click Equal Distance
and specify a single value.
Chamfer Angle-distance
Chamfer Vertex
Chamfer-vertex
Enter values for the distances on each side of the selected vertex, or click Equal Distance and specify
a single value.
Deform
Deform
The deform feature allows you to alter the shape of a model locally or globally. You can apply the deform feature to
both SolidWorks and imported models.
There are two deform types: Curve to curve and Point. With each type, dynamic options control which faces or
bodies are deformed, and the resulting geometry of the model.
The curve to curve and point descriptions are an overview. For complete options:
• Curve to curve options
• Point options
For examples on how to apply the deform feature:
• To deform a model using Curve to curve
• To deform a model using Point
6-8
Under Deform Region, you can specify the Bodies to be deformed:
• With Fixed edges selected, you can specify Fixed curves/edges/faces , and Additional faces to
deform .
• With Fixed edges cleared, you can control the area to deform by specifying a Deform radius .
You can create different shapes when you select or clear the Uniform option.
With Shape Options, you can also control the shape of the deformation by specifying a level of stiffness.
Point Overview
With Point deform, you select a point on a body or a point in space. A point on a body can be:
• point on an edge
• point on a face
• vertex
The point you select is the center of the deformation.
You can control the deformation by specifying:
• Deform distance . The length of the pull of the center of the deformation.
• Deform radius .
• Bodies to be deformed . Specify in a multibody part environment, or when the point you select does
not belong to a body.
You can also control the area of the deformation with the Deform region. When the Deform region check box is
selected, additional controls appear:
• Fixed curves/edges/faces . Entities not affected by the deformation.
If items selected as fixed entities contradict with deform entities, the latest item overrides any previous,
contradictory item. For example, if you first specified a face to deform, and then specified the same face as fixed, the
face would be fixed.
• Deform region check box. Clear the Deform region check box to control the shape of the deformation by
selecting an edge or a sketch line, and then specifying a Deform radius . The Deform axis option
creates a bending-type deformation, though not an exact bending.
With Shape Options, you can also control the shape of the deformation by specifying a level of stiffness.
There are many options in Curve to curve deformations. Some options are only available with specific selections.
However, you can combine options. The procedure below only uses some of these options. See curve to curve
options for details and models that display how these options interact.
This procedure uses a multibody part. You select the curves on one body as the Initial curves, and the curves
along the second body as the Target curves.
curves .
The selected edges, as shown in this example, are
outlined in green.
6-10
c. Align the connector along the profiles.
A connector is made up of a point along each
curve, and the connecting entity between the two
points. You can drag the points along each of the
curves to synchronize the alignment.
d. Click either of the connector handles.
e. Click the arrow on the connector handle - the
These options are only available when you click Fixed edges. Both of these options are optional. The
geometry of your model, and the intended deformation dictate their usage.
7. Click OK .
If you encounter problems, such as the error message Could not replace geometries, under Shape
Options, move the Shape accuracy slider. Other solutions include adding additional connectors, and
re-aligning existing connectors.
You can also select Ignore warning when a warning message appears. The system attempts to complete the
process and provides additional information on what options to modify to maximize success.
Deform Curves
Under Deform curves, select one or more connected curves as the Initial curves , and one or more connected
curves as the Target curves . The curves can be curved or linear, and be part of the model or separate sketches.
6-12
curve to curve deformation with fixed curve
Fixed curve
Deform Region
Under Deform Region, you can specify the following options:
• Fixed Edges
• Uniform
• Fixed curves/edges/faces
• Bodies to be deformed
Fixed Edges
Select Fixed edges to display additional deformation options:
Uniform
Select Uniform to create different shape options.
Example of deform with Uniform selected and cleared:
• If the Initial curves are within the closed contour, the deformation is confined to the contour.
• If the Initial curves are outside of the closed contour, no point inside the contour is deformed.
Example of the fixed edges option
Bodies to be Deformed
Specifying Bodies to be deformed is geometry-dependent:
• Required. If the Initial curves are sketch curves, you must select Bodies to be deformed .
• Optional. If you have a multibody part, you can select Bodies to be deformed , after you specify the
initial body to deform by selecting the initial and target curves under Deform Curves.
Example of the bodies to be deformed option
You can use the options Fixed curves/edges/faces , Bodies to be deformed , and Additional
faces to deform in any combination, dependent on the geometry of the model and the desired results. If the
selected options are conflicting, the latest item overrides any previous, contradictory item. For example, if
you first specified a face to deform, and then specified the same face as fixed, the face would be fixed.
Shape Options
You can also control the shape of curve to curve deformations by modifying the degree of stiffness, the Shape
Stiffness
There are three levels of stiffness:
• Stiffness - minimum
• Stiffness - medium
• Stiffness - maximum
You can combine any stiffness level with the options under Deform Region.
Example of shape stiffness levels
Shape Accuracy
Shape accuracy . The shape accuracy slider controls the surface quality. The default quality can be inadequate in
high curvature areas. When you increase the accuracy by moving the slider to the right, you can increase the success
rate of the deform feature. Move the slider only as needed; increasing surface accuracy decreases performance.
Minimum Maximum
6-14
Weight
Weight . If you clear Uniform and select Fixed edges, the weight slider appears. The weight slider controls the
degree of influence between two options:
• Moving curves. The edges and curves you specify under Deform Curves as Initial curves , and
Target curves .
Fixed Moving
Ignore Warning
If an error message appears:
• Verify your input. In curve to curve deformations, add new connectors or realign existing connectors.
• Verify the preview.
• Improve the surface quality using Shape accuracy under Shape Options.
• Clear the Uniform check box under Deform Region.
• Select Ignore warning under Shape Options. The system attempts to complete the deformation process by
ignoring small errors. For example, short edges may be merged or the body check may be skipped.
• If you select Ignore warning, inspect whether the results are topologically and geometrically correct.
• Click Check on the Tools toolbar, or click Tools, Check to check the part. If you get additional,
system-generated warnings from HOOPS routines, such as
Normal vector is of zero or nearly zero length
the problematic area is highlighted.
(1) Initial curve , (2) Target curve and Fixed edges/curves/faces selected
Top face selected for Additional faces to be No face selected. The bottom face is affected
by the deformation of the body.
deformed .
6-16
Example of Deform Curve to Curve Bodies to be Deformed
No deformation applied
Stiffness - minimum
Fixed curves/edges/faces
Fixed Moving
6-18
Deform Point
Point deformation that affects a small area may not display using default image quality settings. Click Tools,
Options, Document Properties, Image Quality. To increase the quality, move the Shaded and draft quality HLR/
HLV resolution slider to the right, or select Optimize edge length.
• Face. When you select a point on a face, the default Deform direction is perpendicular to
the face (Normal to picked is selected). If you clear Normal to picked, select a Deform
direction using a linear edge, a sketch line, a planar face, or a plane. If necessary, click
a. Select a point on an edge, a point on a face, a vertex, or a point in space as the Deform point .
Select a point on an edge Select a point on a face Select a point in space and a
Deform direction
c. With a point in space as the Deform point , select a linear edge, a face, or a plane as the
Deform direction. With a point on an edge, a point on a face, or a vertex, you can keep Normal to
picked selected.
d. Type a value for Deform distance .
4. Under Deform Region, select these items:
a. Set a value for Deform radius .
b. Select Deform region to confine the deformation to the area enclosed by the perimeter of the face
selected. With Deform region you can also select Fixed curves/edges/faces and Additional faces
to be deformed .
When you select a point on a face, and select Deform region, you can confine the deformation to
the area enclosed by the perimeter of the face selected. When you select a point on an edge, a vertex, or
a point in space, the deformation is not directly affected by this option.
Stiffness - minimum
Stiffness - medium
Stiffness - maximum
6-20
• Deform axis . When the Deform region check box is clear, you can control the shape of the
deformation by selecting a linear edge, a sketch line, a planar face or a plane as a deform axis.
Shape accuracy . Move the slider to control surface quality. Increasing the quality also increases
the success rate of the deform feature. For example, if you get an error message Could not replace
geometries, move the slider towards the right. Move the slider only as needed; increasing surface accuracy
decreases performance.
6. Click OK .
Deform Point
Point to deform. Under Deform point, you can select a point to deform on a face, an edge,a vertex, or a point in
model space.
• Face. Select a point on a face, and the default Deform direction is perpendicular to the face (Normal to
picked is selected). If you clear Normal to picked, select a Deform direction by specifying an edge, a
sketch line, or a planar face, or a plane. If necessary, click to reverse the deform direction.
o Linear edge or sketch line. Deform direction is parallel to the specified entity.
o Planar face or plane. Deform direction is perpendicular to the planar face or plane.
The location of the point on the face determines the center of the deformation.
Example of a point on a face
• Edge. Select a point on an edge, and the default Deform direction is an average between the normals to the
two adjacent faces (Normal to picked is selected). If you clear Normal to picked, select a Deform
direction in the manner described in the section above.
The location of the point on the edge determines the center of the deformation.
Example of a point on an edge
• Vertex. Select a vertex, and the default Deform direction is an average between the normals to the three
adjacent faces (Normal to picked is selected). If you clear Normal to picked, select a Deform direction in
the manner described in the section above.
• Point. When you select a point in space, there is no default deform direction (Normal to picked is cleared).
You must specify the deform direction. Under Deform Region, you must also select one or several bodies to
deform.
Example of a point in space
Deform Region
The interaction between the options under Deform Point and selecting the Deform region check box independently
are as follows:
When the Deform region check box is cleared, it enables an additional option under Shape Options:
Deform axis .
Example of a point on a face and Deform region
Deform distance and deform radius. Two of the parameters that control the deformation are distance and radius.
• Under Deform Region, specify a Deform radius . You do not need to select the Deform region
checkbox to change the Deform radius.
Example of Deform distance and Deform radius
Fixed/curves/edges/faces . Besides Deform distance and Deform radius , you can control the shape
of the deformation by selecting one of several curves, an edges, or faces. The selected entities are not deformed. With
closed contours, deformation behavior depends on the following:
• If the center of the deformation is within the closed contour, the deformation is confined to the contour.
• If the center of the deformation does not belong to the closed contour, no point inside the contour is
deformed.
Example of a fixed curve, edge, or face
If items selected as fixed entities contradict, the latest item overrides any previous, contradictory item. For
example, if you first specified a face to deform, and then specified the same face as fixed, the face would be fixed.
Additional faces to deform . You can also select more than one face on the model to deform.
Example of multiple faces
Bodies to be deformed . You can deform more than one body in a multibody part environment.
Example of multiple bodies
Shape Options
You can also control the shape of point deformations by modifying the degree of stiffness, specifying a deform axis,
6-22
Stiffness
There are three levels of stiffness:
• Stiffness - minimum
• Stiffness - medium
• Stiffness - maximum
You can combine the stiffness level with other controls.
Example of shape stiffness levels
Deform Axis
With the Deform region check box cleared, you can control the shape of the deformation by selecting a linear edge or
a sketch line as a deform axis.
• The Deform axis determines the shape of the deformation using the Deform radius .
• The Deform radius option creates a bending-type deformation, though not an exact bending, with a
specified radius.
Example of the deform radius axis
You can combine the deform axis with stiffness levels.
Shape Accuracy
Shape accuracy . The shape accuracy slider controls the surface quality. When you increase the accuracy by
moving the slider to the right, you can increase the success rate of the deform feature. Move the slider only as needed;
increasing surface accuracy decreases performance.
Minimum Maximum
Point deformation that affects a small area may not display using default image quality settings. Click Tools,
Options, Document Properties, Image Quality. To increase the quality, move the Shaded and draft quality HLR/
HLV resolution slider to the right, or select Optimize edge length.
Ignore Warning
If an error message appears:
• Verify your input.
• Verify the preview.
• Improve the surface quality using Shape accuracy under Shape Options.
• Clear the Uniform check box under Deform Region.
• Select Ignore warning under Shape Options. The system attempts to complete the deformation process by
ignoring small errors. For example, short edges may be merged or the body check may be skipped.
• If you select Ignore warning, inspect whether the results are topologically and geometrically correct.
• Read the warning following the build.
• Click Check on the Tools toolbar, or click Insert, Tools, Check to check the part. If you get additional,
system-generated warnings from HOOPS routines, such as
Normal vector is of zero or nearly zero length, the problematic area is highlighted.
Maintain Boundary
Maintain boundary appears only when you select the Deform region check box. Clear Maintain Boundary to
reduce the deform region, create new edges and move the boundaries.
6-24
Example of Deform Select Point
Point. With a point in space, you must always select the Deform direction, and under Deform
region, specify the Body to be deformed.
Deform direction. Parallel to the edge of the Deform direction. Perpendicular to the face of
extrude with draft feature, circled in red. the main extrude feature,circled in red.
Both examples use the same initial face to deform, with Deform distance - 60, and Deform radius - 100.
All examples use the same Deform distance and Deform radius
6-26
Example of Deform Point with Additional Faces
All examples use the same initial face to deform, with Deform distance - 60, and Deform radius - 100.
Point on edge selected as Deform point , and face selected as the Deform direction.
All examples use Deform distance - 60, and Deform radius - 100.
All examples use the same options except for the stiffness.
6-28
Example of Deform Maintain Boundary
With point on a face selected, clearing or selecting the Deform region check box
affects the deformation.
With point on an edge selected, clearing or selecting the Deform region check box does
not affect the deformation.
Domes
You can create one or more dome features simultaneously on the same model. The Parameters in the dome
PropertyManager include:
you can apply domes to faces whose centroid lies outside the face. This allows you to apply domes to
irregularly shaped contours.
• Distance. Set a value for the distance by which the dome expands.
• Constraint Point or Sketch . Control the dome feature by selecting a sketch to constrain the shape of
the sketch. When you use a sketch as a constraint, the Distance is disabled.
• Direction. Click Direction , and select a direction vector from the graphics area to extrude the dome in
a direction other than normal to the face. As a direction vector, you can use a linear edge or the vector
created by two sketch points.
• Elliptical dome. Specify an elliptical dome for cylindrical or conical models. An elliptical dome's shape is
a half ellipsoid, with a height equal to one of the ellipsoid radii.
• Continuous dome. Specify a continuous dome for polygonal models. A continuous dome's shape slopes
upwards, evenly on all sides. If you clear Continuous dome, the shape rises normal to the edges of the
polygon.
Continuous dome is not available when you use a Constraint Point or Sketch or a Direction
vector.
On cylindrical and conical models, you can set Distance to 0. The software calculates the distance
using the radius of the arc as a basis for the dome. It creates a dome that is tangent to the adjacent
cylindrical or conical face.
6-30
To create a dome:
3. Click OK .
Checked Cleared
Drafts
Draft Overview
Draft tapers faces using a specified angle to selected faces in the model. One application is to make a molded part
easier to remove from the mold. You can insert a draft in an existing part or draft while extruding a feature.
You can apply draft to solid or surface models.
When creating a draft using a parting line with step draft, you can select Perpendicular steps to prevent tapering of
the slanted faces.
Using the draft feature, you can specify the following:
• Neutral plane
• Parting line
• Step draft
Draft Feature
Creates a feature that tapers selected model faces by a specified angle, using either a Neutral Plane or a Parting
Line. You can apply draft to either solid or surface models.
You can also apply a draft angle as a part of an extruded base, boss, or cut.
6-32
To draft a model face to a neutral plane: Example
• Select Reverse direction to slant the draft to slant in the opposite direction.
5. Under Faces to draft , select the faces to draft in the graphics area, and choose an item from the Face
propagation list if you want to propagate across additional faces:
• Along Tangent. Extend the draft to all faces that are tangent to the selected face.
• All Faces. Draft all faces extruded from the neutral plane.
• Inner Faces. Draft all faces extruded from the neutral plane.
• Outer Faces. Draft all faces next to the neutral plane.
6. Click OK .
Neutral Plane
The Neutral Plane is the plane or face that you choose to determine the pull direction when creating a mold.
The Z axis direction of this chosen plane is the direction in which the part ejects from the mold. Reverse direction
changes the direction of the draft, not the direction of the pull. In the example below, Plane 1 is the Neutral
Plane, with the arrow indicating the pull direction.
6-34
Parting Line Draft
The parting line option lets you draft surfaces around a parting line. The parting line can be non-planar. In a draft
using a parting line, you can also include a Step draft.
To draft on a parting line, you can first divide the faces to be drafted by inserting a split line, or you can use an
existing model edge. Then you specify the direction of pull, or the side of the parting line from which material is
removed.
You can check the draft angles on your model using the draft analysis tool. Draft analysis creates a color-coded
rendition of the model faces based on the angle and the direction of pull criteria that you specify.
7. Under Parting Lines , select the parting lines in the graphics area.
Note the arrow direction. To specify a different draft direction for each segment of the parting line, click the
name of the edge in the Parting Lines box, and click Other Face.
NOTE: In this example, all parting lines were selected, using the same face.
8. Choose the Face propagation type:
• None. Draft only the selected face.
• Along Tangent. Extend the draft to all faces that are tangent to the selected face.
9. Click OK .
Draft applied with first direction Draft applied with Other Face
Use the Allow reduced angle check box under the following condition:
The normal of one or more side faces adjacent to the edge and the faces being drafted is nearly perpendicular
to the Direction of Pull. With this model type and condition, select the Allow reduced angle check box
when the maximum angle between the pull direction and the normal of the steep face, plus the draft angle, is
greater than or equal to 90°.
6-36
Parting Line with Step Draft
A step draft is a variation of a parting line draft. The step draft creates one face rotated about the plane used as the
Direction of Pull. This results in small faces, reperesenting the steps (highlighted in blue in the example below).
Model with parting line Parting line draft Parting line with step draft
You can check the draft angles on your model using the draft analysis tool. Draft analysis creates a color-coded
rendition of the model faces based on the angle and the direction of pull criteria that you specify.
10. Click OK .
Model with no draft applied Tapered steps applied Perpendicular steps applied
Extrudes
Extrude Feature
An extrude operation can either add material to a part (in a base or boss) or remove material from a part (in a cut or
hole).
Extrude extends a sketched profile in one or two directions as either a thin feature or a solid feature.
6-38
A rectangle extruded as a solid feature A rectangle extruded as a thin feature (with draft)
You can also extrude in a direction other than normal to the profile of the sketch by selecting a direction vector.
Extrude Direction
• Observe the preview to verify the direction and depth of the feature.
• Select the parameters under Direction 1 to extrude the feature in one direction from the sketch plane.
• Select Direction of Extrusion to extrude in a direction other than normal to the profile of the sketch.
• Select the parameters under Direction 2 to extrude the feature in both directions from the sketch plane.
End Condition
• If you choose Blind or Mid Plane, you must specify the Depth .
• If you choose Offset From Surface, you must specify the Offset.
When you choose Offset from Surface, you can specify Translate Surface. When you specify the
Translate Surface option, the end of the extrusion is a translation of the reference surface, rather than a true
offset.
• If necessary, select the Reverse offset check box.
If the End Condition you specified relies on the selection of a surface or vertex, click that item in the
Depth
Reverse Direction
Click Reverse Direction to extend the feature in the opposite direction from that shown in the preview in the
graphics area.
Link to Thickness
Link to Thickness is used on sheet metal parts. Selecting this option automatically links the depth of an extruded
boss to the thickness of the base feature.
Flip Side
Flip Side to Cut appears only when you are extruding a cut. By default, material is removed from the inside of the
profile. Selecting Flip Side to Cut removes all material from the outside of the profile.
Draft
Click Draft On/Off to add a draft to the feature. Enter a Draft Angle . If necessary, select the Draft
outward check box.
Thin Feature
Thin Feature adds (or removes) thin-walled volumes to the model. A Thin Feature base can also be used as a basis
for a sheet metal part.
• Select One-Direction, Two-Direction, or Mid-Plane
• If necessary, select the Cap ends check box and enter a Cap Thickness .
6-40
Extrude Direction Along Vector
You can extrude 2D and 3D sketches normal to the face, or you can select a Direction of Extrusion .
You can also select a Direction with the Dome feature.
6-42
Up To Surface. Extends the
feature from the sketch plane to
the selected surface.
Extruded Boss/Base
Listed below are the steps you follow to create an extruded boss/base feature. For related information about the
extrude feature, see the following:
• Extrude feature overview
• Extrude thin feature
• Examples of thin features
1. With a sketch active, click Extruded Boss/Base on the Features toolbar or Insert, Boss/Base,
Extrude.
2. Under Direction 1, do the following:
• Select an End Condition.
• Examine the preview and if necessary, click Reverse Direction to extrude in the opposite
direction.
• To extrude in a direction other than normal to the profile of the sketch, select Direction of
Extrusion .
• Enter a Depth .
• Examine the preview and if necessary, click Reverse Direction to create the thin feature on
the opposite side.
5. Click OK .
For bosses on sheet metal parts, click Link to Thickness tab to link the depth of the boss to the
thickness of the base feature.
6-44
Boss/Base-Extrude
The Extrude PropertyManager defines the characteristics of extruded features. You can create either solid features
or thin features.
• If you choose Up To Surface, specify the the Face/Plane in the graphics area.
• If you choose Offset From Surface, specify the Face/Plane , and enter the Offset Distance
3. If necessary, click Reverse Direction to extend the feature in the opposite direction from that shown in
the preview.
4. If necessary, click Draft On/Off to add a draft to a feature while you extrude it. Set the Draft Angle,
and check the Draft outward check box, if necessary.
5. To create an extrusion in the other direction, click Direction 2, and follow the same steps.
6. Click OK .
• If you choose Two-Direction, set the Direction 1 Thickness and the Direction 2 Thickness
4. If necessary, select the Cap ends check box and enter the Cap Thickness .
5. If you created an open profile you can select the following options:
• Click the Auto fillet corners check box to automatically create a round at each edge where lines
meet at an angle.
6. Click OK .
Type
The Type specifies whether to extrude the thin feature in One-Direction, Mid-Plane, or Two-Direction.
• One-Direction extrudes the sketch in one direction using the specified wall thickness.
• Mid-Plane extrudes the sketch in both directions, dividing the specified wall thickness equally on both sides
of the sketch geometry.
• Two-Direction extrudes the sketch in both directions, using a different wall thickness on each side of the
sketch geometry (as specified for Direction 1 Thickness and Direction 2 Thickness ).
Wall Thickness
The wall thickness specifies the thickness of the thin feature wall.
Reverse
Reverse Direction allows you to add the wall thickness to the inside of the sketched profile. The default is to
add the wall thickness to the outside of the sketched profile.
Additional Options
For thin feature base extrusions only, you can specify the following additional options:
• Cap Ends - If you create a closed profile sketch, you can use the Cap Ends option.
This option covers (caps) the ends of the feature, creating a hollow part. If you select this option, you must
6-46
Cap ends applied to thin feature Auto fillet corners applied to thin feature
Cut Feature
A cut is a feature that removes material from a part or an assembly.
With multibody parts, you can use cuts to create disjoint parts. You can control which parts to keep and which parts
are affected by the cut.
You can create a cut by using any of the following:
• Extrude
• Revolve
• Sweep
• Loft (from one or more sketches)
• Thicken feature (from a surface)
Cutting Tools
You can use features to cut a solid model. The model can be a single part or a multibody part.
2. Create the sketches, based on the feature to use as the cutting tool.
The feature you select depends on your base model and the shape you want the cut to produce. Cutting tools
include:
• Extruded Cut
• Revolved Cut
• Swept Cut
• Lofted Cut
• Thickened Cut
Extruded Cut
Revolved Cut
Swept Cut
Lofted Cut
Thickened Cut
6-48
Cut with Surface
Surface Cut
With multibody parts, you can select which bodies to keep when you use a surface to cut multiple parts.
You can cut a solid body with a plane, as well as with a surface.
3. Examine the preview, and if necessary, click Flip cut to reverse the direction of the cut.
The arrow points in the direction of the solid to discard.
4. With multibody parts, under Feature Scope, select one of the following:
• All bodies. The surface cuts all bodies every time the feature regenerates. If you add new bodies to
the model that are intersected by the cutting surface, these new bodies are also regenerated to
include the cut.
• Selected bodies. The surface cuts only the bodies you select using the pointer . If you add
new bodies to the model that are intersected by the cutting surface, you need to use Edit Definition
to select those bodies, and to add them to the list of selected bodies. If you do not add the new
bodies to the list of selected bodies, they remain intact.
• Auto-select. The option is selected by default, and is only available if you click Selected bodies.
When you first create a model with multibody parts, the cutting surface automatically processes all
the relevant intersecting parts. The Auto-select option is faster than the All bodies option, since it
processes only the bodies on the initial list, and does not regenerate the entire model. If you click
Selected bodies, and clear Auto-select, you must select the bodies you want to cut from the
graphics area.
The solid bodies you select are highlighted in the graphics area, and listed in the Feature Scope
box. In the example below, only the yellow body (third from the right), was not selected.
5. Click OK , right-click the surface in the FeatureManager design tree, and select Hide Surface Body to
hide the cutting surface.
Extruded Cut
When you use the Extruded Cut tool, you can display an additional PropertyManager by selecting Detailed
1. With a sketch active, click Extruded Cut on the Features toolbar or click Insert, Cut, Extrude.
2. Under Direction 1:
• Select an End Condition.
• Click in Direction of Extrusion, then select an entity to extrude the feature in a direction
other than normal to the sketch.
Example of extrude along direction vector
• Examine the preview and if necessary, click Reverse Direction to extrude in the opposite
direction.
• If necessary, select Flip side to cut.
6-50
• Click Draft On/Off to add a draft to the feature.
• Enter a Draft Angle.
• Select Draft outward to change the draft direction.
3. If necessary, select Direction 2 to apply the cut extrude in a second direction. Follow the procedure listed
under step 2 above.
4. To create a thin-walled feature, select Thin Feature and do the following:
• Select a Type: One-Direction, Mid-Plane, or Two-Direction.
• Examine the preview and if necessary, click Reverse Direction to create the thin feature on
the opposite side.
a. In the graphics area, select the bodies you want cut for Solid Bodies to Affect .
b. In the PropertyManager, select the scope of the operation.
c. Click OK , and in the Bodies to Keep dialog box, select which bodies to keep after the cut.
d. Click OK to exit the PropertyManager.
7. Click OK .
Extrude applied
Using sketch for Direction of Extrusion
6-52
Example of Cut Extrude Feature Scope
Fillets
Fillet
You can create different types of fillets. The PropertyManager dynamically displays the appropriate options, based on
the type of fillet you create.
Fillets include previews for all fillet types. You can select a Partial preview, a Full preview, or No preview in the
Fillet PropertyManager.
If you choose a face or more than one edge on the model and select Partial preview, you can cycle through all the
filleted edge previews. To view each fillet preview in turn, press A (the default toggle key).
Example
You can select an edge or you can apply a fillet to a feature. Using Select Feature or Select Loop on the shortcut
menu applies the same radius fillet to all edges that make up the feature.
Example
• Verify that the edges you want to fillet are displayed in the Edges box.
• If necessary, select the Multiple radius fillet check box. Then highlight each Edge, and specify the
6. Click OK .
6-54
Other fillet topics:
Fillet Overview
Model with no fillets Model with Keep features Model with Keep features
applied to fillets for front applied to all fillets
boss and right cut features
Omit attach edges check box checked: Omit attach edges check box cleared:
attachment edge without the fillet fillet included on the attachment edge
6-56
Fillet Overview
Fillet/Round creates a rounded internal or external face on the part. You can fillet all edges of a face, selected sets of
faces, selected edges, or edge loops.
Select a Partial preview, a Full preview, or No preview in the Fillet PropertyManager. Fillets now include previews
with all fillet types except face fillets and full round fillets.
If you choose a face or more than one edge on the model and select Partial preview in the Fillet PropertyManger,
you can cycle through all the filleted edges. To view each fillet preview in turn, press A (the default toggle key).
Example
Fillets include the following types:
Full round fillet. With full round fillets, you can select
three adjacent face sets (two or more tangent faces), and
apply a fillet that is tangent to the three face sets.
• Enter a Radius .
• In the graphics area, select Edges, Faces, Features and Loops to fillet.
• Clear the Tangent propagation check box if you do not want the fillet to extend to all faces that are
tangent to the selected face or edge.
• Select Full preview, Partial preview, or No preview.
6-58
Tangent Propagation
5. Click OK .
Overflow Type
• Default. The system chooses one of the following options, depending on the geometry conditions
(convexity of edges being filleted and the adjacent edges, and so on).
• Keep edge. Maintains the integrity of adjacent linear edges. However, the fillet surface is broken into
separate surfaces, and in many cases the top edge of the fillet may have a dip in it.
• Keep surface. Uses the adjacent surface to trim the fillet. As a result, the fillet edge is continuous and
smooth, but the adjacent edge is disturbed.
• In the graphics area, highlight the Edges, Faces, Features and Loops to fillet.
The edge or loop and the radius is listed in the Edges, Faces and Loops box.
• Enter the Radius for the next edge or loop to fillet, and in the graphics area, select the next
5. Click OK .
6-60
Round Corner Fillet
Fillets with round corners allow you to control the transition between edges at the corners. A rounded fillet blends the
adjoining edges, eliminating or smoothing the sharp juncture where the two edges meet.
• Enter a Radius .
• In the graphics area, select two or more adjacent Edges, Faces, Features and Loops to fillet.
- or -
right-click on the feature and choose Select feature to fillet all the edges on the feature.
• Select Full preview, Partial preview, or No preview.
4. Under Fillet Options, click Round corners.
If necessary clear the Keep features check box.
5. Click OK .
Fillets applied without Round corners Fillets applied with Round corners
Setback Fillet
With setback fillets, you can create a smooth transition between the blended surface, along the edge of the part, into
the fillet corner. You select a vertex and a radius, and then assign the same or different setback distances for each
edge. The setback distance is the point along each edge at which the fillet starts to blend into the three faces that meet
at the common vertex.
Setback fillet shown with Full preview, and Setback fillet shown with Full preview, and
with the same setback Distance of 12mm with a different setback Distance applied
applied to all three edges. to all three edges.
Setback Distance uniform for all edges Setback Distance different for all edges
(12mm) (4mm, 8mm, and 12mm)
6-62
To create setback fillets:
1. Create a part that includes edges, meeting at a vertex, that you want to blend together.
The edges are listed in the Edge, Faces, Features and Loops box.
• Select Full preview, Partial preview, or No preview.
5. If you want to apply the same setback distance to all edges, do the following:
The values are displayed in the Setback Distances box and on the callouts in the graphics area.
6. If you want to apply a different setback distance to each edge, do the following:
• Select the next edge (E2) belonging to Vertex <1>, and enter a Distance for that edge.
• Repeat the process for all edges belonging to Vertex <1>.
• To apply the same Setback Distances to all unspecified edges in the remaining vertices, click
Set Unassigned.
• To apply different Setback Distances to the remaining vertices, repeat the process for each
vertex (Vertex <2>, Vertex <3>, and so on) in the Setback Vertices box .
7. Click OK .
Model with no setback fillets applied Model with preview of selected edges
Model with preview of setback callouts Model with setback fillets applied
The edges are listed in the Edges, Faces, Features, and Loops box.
Under Variable Radius Parameters, the vertices are listed in the Attached Radii box.
o Clear Tangent propagation if necessary.
o Select Full preview, Partial preview, or No preview.
6-64
4. If you want to apply the same radius to all unassigned vertices in the Attached Radii box, do the
following:
o Under Variable Radius Parameters, select V1 in the Attached Radii box to assign the
radius to V1.
o Select V2 in the Attached Radii box, and enter a Radius for the second vertex.
o To apply the same radius to all remaining vertices (and still retain the value assigned to V1), click
Set unassigned.
o To keep applying different radii to the remaining vertices, select the remaining unassigned vertices
pointer changes to .
o Enter a radius value in the callout, or select P1 in the Attached Radii box, and enter a Radius
.
o To apply the same radius to all remaining control points (and still retain the value assigned to P1),
select the remaining control points (P2 and P3), and click Set unassigned.
o If necessary, repeat the process for the remaining control points, P2 and P3.
o Add control points: If necessary, you can add additional control points by selecting the control
point, pressing Ctrl and dragging the new control point into position. Or, from the
PropertyManager, you can increment the value in the control points box . Adding new control
points through the PropertyManager places the points at default positions. If necessary, you can
then drag the control points to a new position.
o Subtract control points: You can remove specific control points by right-clicking, and selecting
Delete from the shortcut menu. Or, from the PropertyManager, you can decrement the value in the
control points box . Deleting new control points through the PropertyManager removes the
points from the default positions.
NOTE: You can edit radius values for vertices or control points, but you cannot add new control
points after you first build the part.
8. Click OK .
NOTE: You can remove an assigned radius value by selecting the vertex in the Attached Radii box,
and pressing Delete. Radius values calculated by the software are not shown in the Attached Radii
Model with tangent faces Edges to fillet Variable radius fillets applied
• Select the control point in the Attached Radii box, or double-click and modify the dimension
in the graphics area.
• Select the control point, the pointer changes to , and drag the control point to the new position.
4. Click OK .
No fillet applied to revolved surface Variable radius fillets applied to revolved surface
6-66
Example of Variable Radius Control Points
points box . Adding new control points through the PropertyManager adds points in the default
positions.
o Subtract control points: You can remove specific control points by right-clicking, and selecting
Delete from the shortcut menu. Or, from the PropertyManager, you can decrement the value in the
control points box . Deleting new control points through the PropertyManager removes the
points from the default positions.
• You can select more than one sketch entity to fillet. Complete each entity before selecting any additional
Model with single sketch entity selected and three Model with radii assigned to control points in
default, unassigned control points. default locations.
NOTE: If you want to select two sketch segments,
assign radii to the vertices and to the control points
of the first sketch entity, before selecting any
additional sketch entities.
Model with two sketch segments selected, and Model with two sketch segments selected, and all
radius assigned to vertex from the second entity. control points with assigned radii.
NOTE: Before assigning radii to the control NOTE: Both the old and new control point
points, you should assign a radius to the vertex. position are displayed, but only the new position
includes the callout.
You can assign radius values to any number of Variable radius fillet applied
control points, or leave them as unassigned.
Return to Variable Radius Fillet
6-68
Full Round Fillet
With full round fillets, you can select three adjacent face sets (one or more tangent faces), and apply a fillet that is
tangent to the three face sets.
5. Click OK .
The full round fillet is applied to one
side of the model.
Note: You can apply a full round
fillet to the other side of the model.
However, you need to create the
second full round fillet as a separate
feature.
• The three sketch entities indicated by the arrows • Vertical relations are applied to the endpoints
are tangent to each other, as shown above. of the tangent sketch entities, as shown above.
Face Fillet
You can blend non-adjacent faces with a face fillet.
• Enter a Radius .
• In the graphics area, select first face or set of faces to blend. The selections are listed in the Face
Set 1 box.
• Click the Face Set 2 box and select the faces in the graphics area to blend with Face Set 1.
NOTE: If you select more than one face for either Face Set 1 or Face Set 2, each set of faces must
be smoothly connected for the face fillet to properly propagate to all faces.
• Tangent Propagation is the default. Click to clear the check box if you do not want the fillet to
apply to tangent faces.
5. Under Fillet Options, you can do either of the following:
• Click Curvature continuous to resolve discontinuity problems and create a smoother curvature
between adjacent surfaces. To verify the effect of the curvature continuity, you can display Zebra
Stripes. You can also analyze the curvature using the curvature tool.
Curvature continuous fillets differ from standard fillets in the following ways. They have a spline
cross section as opposed to a circular cross section. Curvature continuous fillets are smoother than
standard fillets because there is no jump in curvature at the boundary. Standard fillets include a
jump at the boundary because they are tangent continuous at the boundary.
• Click the Help point check box to resolve an ambiguous selection. Then click a vertex close to the
location where you want to insert the fillet.
6-70
6. Click OK .
• Do not enter a Radius . The distance between the hold line and the edge that is filleted
determines the radius.
• In the graphics area, select first face or set of faces to blend. The selections are listed in the Face
Set 1 box.
• Click the Face Set 2 box, and select the faces in the graphics area to blend with Face Set 1.
• Tangent Propagation is the default. Click to clear the check box if you do not want the fillet to
apply to tangent faces.
The Hold line determines where the fillet ends. In this model, the lower edge of the
faces selected for Face Set 2.
4. Under Fillet Options, click the model edge or edges that mark the end of the fillet. The names are listed in
the Hold lines box.
If necessary, click Curvature continuous to resolve discontinuity problems and create a smoother curvature
between adjacent surfaces. To verify the effect of the curvature continuity, you can display Zebra Stripes.
You can also analyze the curvature using the curvature tool.
Curvature continuous fillets differ from standard fillets in the following ways. They have a spline cross
section as opposed to a circular cross section. Curvature continuous fillets are smoother than standard fillets
because there is no jump in curvature at the boundary. Standard fillets include a jump at the boundary
because they are tangent continuous at the boundary.
When you use Hold lines and the Curvature continuous options together, you can select a hold line for
each face.
5. Click OK .
The faces that share an edge with the hold lines are removed by the fillet.
6-72
Face Fillet with Split Line
A split line is another way of creating a face fillet with a hold line. Instead of selecting an edge as the hold line, you
use a split line.
• Do not enter a Radius . The radius is determined by the hold line (the split line you created on
the model face).
• In the graphics area, select first face or set of faces to blend. The selections are listed in the Face
Set 1 box.
• Click the Face Set 2 box, and select the faces in the graphics area to blend with Face Set 1.
• Tangent Propagation is the default. Click to clear the check box if you do not want the fillet to
apply to tangent faces.
4. Under Fillet Options, click the model edge or edges that mark the end of the fillet. The names are listed in
the Hold lines box.
If necessary, click Curvature continuous to resolve discontinuity problems and create a smoother curvature
between adjacent surfaces. To verify the effect of the curvature continuity, you can display Zebra Stripes.
You can also analyze the curvature using the curvature tool.
Curvature continuous fillets differ from standard fillets in the following ways. They have a spline cross
section as opposed to a circular cross section. Curvature continuous fillets are smoother than standard fillets
because there is no jump in curvature at the boundary. Standard fillets include a jump at the boundary
because they are tangent continuous at the boundary.
5. Click OK .
Holes
Simple Hole
Hole creates various types of hole features in the model. You place a hole and set a depth on a planar face. You can
specify its location by dimensioning it afterwards.
Recommendations
In general, it is best to create holes near the end of the design process. This helps you avoid inadvertently adding
material inside an existing hole. Also, if you are creating a simple hole which does not require additional parameters,
use Simple Hole. The second option, using Hole Wizard introduces additional parameters that are not required with
simple holes. Simple Hole provides better performance than Hole Wizard for simple holes.
Hole Wizard creates holes with complex profiles, such as Counterbore or Countersunk.
• If you choose Up to Surface, specify the the Face/Plane in the graphics area.
• If you choose Offset from Surface, specify the Face/Plane , and enter the Offset distance
4. To extrude in a direction other than normal to the profile of the sketch, select Direction of Extrusion .
6. If necessary, click Draft On/Off to add a draft to the hole. Set the Draft Angle, and select the Draft
outward check box, if necessary.
7. Click OK .
6-74
To position the hole:
1. Right-click the hole feature in the model or the FeatureManager design tree, and select Edit Sketch.
2. Add dimensions to position the hole. You can also modify the hole diameter in the sketch.
To change the diameter, depth, or type of the hole, right-click the hole feature in the model or the FeatureManager
design tree, and select Edit Definition. Make the necessary changes, and click OK.
True offset - Translate surface check box Translated surface - Translate surface check box
cleared selected
• If you choose Up to Surface, specify the the Face/Plane in the graphics area.
• If you choose Offset from Surface, specify the Face/Plane , and enter the Offset distance
3. If necessary, click Draft On/Off to add a draft to the hole. Set the Draft Angle, and select the Draft
outward check box, if necessary.
4. Click OK .
Blind Extends the feature from the sketch plane for a specified distance.
Through All Extends the feature from the sketch plane through all existing
geometry.
Up to Next Extends the feature from the sketch plane to the next surface that
intercepts the entire profile. (The intercepting surface must be on
the same part.)
Up to Surface Extends the feature from the sketch plane to the selected surface.
Click on a face to specify the surface.
Offset from Surface Extends the feature from the sketch plane to a specified distance
from the selected surface.
Click on a face to specify the surface.
Specify an Offset.
Up to Vertex Extends the feature from the sketch plane to a plane that is
parallel to the sketch plane and passing through the specified
vertex.
Click on a Vertex.
6-76
Hole Wizard
Dynamic Updating
The hole type you select determines the capabilities, available selections, and graphic previews. After you select a
hole type, you determine the appropriate fastener. The fastener dynamically updates the appropriate parameters. The
interface uses a three column format (Property, Parameter 1, Parameter 2), along with an overall graphic preview
based on end condition and depth. Parameters may include one or two values. You can adjust the width of each
parameters column.
In addition to the dynamic graphic preview based on end condition and depth, graphics in the parameter columns
show specific details, as they apply to the type of hole you select.
Capabilities
Functionality includes tabs for the following hole types:
• Counterbore
• Countersink
• Hole
• Tap
• PipeTap
• Legacy
When you create a hole using the Hole Wizard, the type and size of the hole, based on the Description, appears in the
FeatureManager design tree.
You can create holes on a plane with the Hole Wizard, as well as holes on planar faces. Holes on a plane allows you
to create holes at an angle to the feature.
You can edit the plane you create to use with the Hole Wizard.
• When you pre-select a planar face, and click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar, the resulting sketch
is a 2D sketch.
• If you first click Hole Wizard , and select either a planar or a non-planar face, the resulting sketch is a
3D sketch.
• Unlike a 2D sketch, you cannot constrain a 3D sketch to a line. However, you can constrain a 3D sketch to a
face.
Favorite Name
For each hole type (except Legacy), you can create, save, update, or delete hole types to include your favorite
properties parameters. This allows you to apply any saved hole types to a SolidWorks document.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the appropriate tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
NOTE: On models with multiple features, you can add hole wizard holes to any of the
features in the model.
6-78
Hole Wizard Hole Placement
You can position a single hole created with Hole Wizard. You can also create and position multiple holes, using the
initial instance as the seed.
1. Click Hole Wizard to create the Hole Wizard hole, and enter the information in the Parameters
column for each Property that you want to customize.
2. Click Next to display the Hole Placement dialog box.
3. Drag the hole to its approximate position by clearing the Point tool on the Sketch Tools toolbar.
4. Use Dimension or Add Relations on the Sketch Relations toolbar to position and fully define the
hole.
5. Click Finish.
3. Using the Point tool, click where you want to create each hole.
4. Click Dimension and add the appropriate dimensions for each hole to fully define.
5. Click Finish.
Property
Each tab in the Hole Definition dialog box represents a hole type. Select a hole type, and the appropriate changes
display in the Property column. For example, the Property column includes a listing for Standard as well as Screw
type. For each item listed in the Property column, the appropriate items are displayed in the Parameters column.
Return to overview
Parameters
Each tab in the Hole Definition dialog box represents a hole type. Select a hole type, and the appropriate changes
display in the Parameters column, where you enter information to customize each hole type. The listings and
previews in the Parameters column vary, depending on which hole type you select. For example, all hole types
include, as a Property, a Standard recognized by the industry. The Standard includes definitions such as ISO and
JIS.
Other descriptions and values, however, depend on which tab (hole type) you select. The different and appropriate
parameters are displayed in the Property and Parameters columns.
The system also updates dynamically, reacting to the information that you enter in the Parameters column. For
example, with a countersink type, you can adjust the Hole Fit & Diameter to be either: Close, Normal, or Loose. As
you select each of these values, the diameter changes, based on dimensions you have set in other areas.
Close
Normal
Loose
NOTE: Some values do not use the document’s units. Instead, they adopt units based on the selected fastener type.
Return to overview
6-80
Delete Favorite Hole
1. Click Hole Wizard , and enter the information in the Parameters column for each Property that you
want to customize.
2. Under Favorites, click Add to display the New Favorite Name dialog box.
3. Accept the default name retrieved from the Description, or type in the name of your choice.
4. Click OK.
Hole Series
You can use Hole Series to create a series of holes through the individual parts of an assembly.
The Hole Series is an assembly feature which creates hole features in the components of the assembly. A Hole Series
extends through each unsuppressed component in the assembly that intersects the axis of the hole (the components do
not have to touch). Unlike other assembly features, the holes are contained in the individual parts as externally
referenced features. If you edit a Hole Series within an assembly, the individual parts are modified.
2. Select a plane or planar face in your assembly, and click Hole Wizard , or Insert, Assembly Feature,
Hole, Wizard.
The Hole Definition dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hole Series tab.
The Hole Series is divided into First Part, Middle Parts, and Last Part.
• The First Part is the part whose face you selected. The counterbored or countersunk hole, if any, is
in the First Part.
• The Last Part is the last part through which the hole passes. The Last Part contains the tap, or the
bottom of the hole if it is a blind hole.
• The Middle Parts are all the other parts through which the hole passes.
4. If you want all parts of the hole series to be the same diameter if you change the Size property, select the
Automatically select middle and end hole sizes based on first hole size check box.
This sets the diameters for the middle and last parts by choosing the closest available hole size to the
diameter of the first part. The available hole sizes depend on the selected screw type.
Select this check box before you set a diameter for the hole in the first part.
5. Enter parameters for the hole series:
a. On the First Part tab:
• Choose a Standard, Style, Screw type, and Size.
• If you select a Screw type of C'Bore or C'Sink, choose a Hole Fit.
• The parameters of the hole appear in the box. You can change the parameters.
b. On the Middle Parts tab:
• Select a size, or accept the default.
• Choose a Screw type.
c. On the Last Part tab:
• Select a Style (Hole or Tap).
If you select Tap, choose Bottoming Tapped hole, or Tapped hole. Select from the
cosmetic thread display options.
If you select Hole, choose a Screw type.
• For a tapped hole, select a Tap Drill Type.
If you select Blind, choose a depth. This is the depth from the front face of the Last Part
in the hole series.
If you select Up To Next, choose a Thread Type.
• The parameters of the hole appear in the box. You can change these parameters.
6. Click Next.
The Hole Placement dialog box appears.
7. Add dimensions to locate the center of the hole, or add sketch points to create multiple holes.
8. Click Finish to add the holes to your assembly and close the dialog box.
NOTES:
• You cannot use Hole Series on assembly components which are multiple instances of the same part, unless
each instance is a separate configuration of the part.
6-82
• You cannot edit the parameters of a Hole Series hole in an individual part (unless you underive the feature),
although you can delete or suppress the hole. To edit the parameters of the hole in context of the assembly,
go to the assembly and edit the Hole Series.
If you underive the Hole Series hole in an individual part it becomes a Hole Wizard hole with no reference
to the assembly.
Create Standards
Delete Standards
You can delete derived hole wizard standards.
For example, under Bolts and Screws , Machine Screws , Hex Screw - Ansi , you can
change the Size name, the Pitch, the Diameter, and so on.
• Add. To add a new row of data, scroll to the bottom of the table and type values in the row with the
asterisk.
• Delete. To delete a row of data, click the button at the beginning of the row and press Delete.
6. Click Apply to save your changes and continue editing, or click OK to save your changes and close the
Configure Data dialog box.
You do not need to have SolidWorks Toolbox installed on your system to create new standards for Hole Wizard
holes.
Counterbore
When you select the Counterbore tab in the Hole Definition dialog box, all the information in the Property and
Parameters columns update to retrieve only information that applies to this hole type. The preview also updates,
depending on your selections.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the Counterbore tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
6-84
3. Determine which (if any) of the remaining parameters you Note: Setting a Head Clearance value
need to change. other than 0.00 adds that value to the
Enter the values, using the illustrations as a guide to what Counterbore value above it.
each item in the Property column represents.
4. To save these settings and use them for future holes, save as
a favorite.
5. Click Next to position the hole on your model.
Countersink
When you select the Countersink tab in the Hole Definition dialog box, all the information in the Property and
Parameters columns update to retrieve only information that applies to this hole type. The preview also updates,
depending on your selections.
To access hole wizard and use countersink type:
1. Create a part and select a planar surface.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the Countersink tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
To create a countersink hole:
4. To save these settings and use them for future holes, save as
a favorite.
5. Click Next to position the hole on your model.
Hole
When you select the Hole tab in the Hole Definition dialog box, all the information in the Property and Parameters
columns update to retrieve only information that applies to this hole type. The graphic preview also displays only
information that applies to holes that do not fall into the other identified categories.
To access hole wizard and use hole type:
1. Create a part and select a planar surface.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the Hole tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
To create a hole:
6-86
Dynamic Changes with Regular Holes
For example, if you select Up To Surface:
• The preview updates to show a reference surface at which the hole stops. Note that the reference surface
does not need to be flat.
• The Hole Type & Depth box becomes unavailable.
• The Selected Item & Offset box becomes available so you can select a reference surface in the graphics
area at which the hole stops.
• The system calculates the most likely remaining values. You can accept or enter appropriate new values.
Tap
When you select the Tap tab in the Hole Definition dialog box, all the information in the Property and Parameters
columns update to retrieve only information that applies to this hole type. The graphic preview also displays only
information that applies to tap holes.
To access hole wizard and use tap type:
1. Create a part and select a planar surface.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the Tap tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
To create a tap hole:
4. To save these settings and use them for future holes, save as
a favorite.
5. Click Next to position the hole on your model.
Pipe Tap
When you select the Pipe Tap tab in the Hole Definition dialog box, all the information in the Property and
Parameters columns update to retrieve only information that applies to this hole type. The graphic preview also
displays only information that applies to pipe tap holes.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the Pipe Tap tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
1. Determine what type of pipe tap you need. For each of the
following items in the Property column, select the
corresponding item from the Parameters column.
• Standard, select for example ANSI Inch or DIN.
• Screw type: select Tapered Pipe Tap.
• Size, select a size for your pipe tap. Preview with the Pipe Tap tab
The Description updates properly.
NOTE: Once you have selected a pipe tap type, the
Hole Wizard updates items in the Parameters column.
3. Determine which (if any) of the remaining parameters you NOTE: You can click the Add Cosmetic
need to change. Thread arrow to display the options.
Enter the values, using the illustrations as a guide to what
each item in the Property column represents.
6-88
4. To save these settings and use them for future holes, save as
a favorite.
Legacy
Use the Legacy tab to edit any holes that you created prior to the SolidWorks 2000 release.
When you select the Legacy tab in the Hole Definition dialog box, all the information including the graphic preview,
displays in the same format as when you originally created the hole, prior to the SolidWorks 2000 release.
NOTE: If you scroll through the list, the Hole type list now includes all the new hole types that are part of the Hole
Wizard.
2. Click Hole Wizard on the Features toolbar or Insert, Features, Hole, Wizard.
3. Click the Legacy tab in the Hole Definition dialog box.
Lofts
Loft Overview
Loft creates a feature by making transitions between profiles. A loft can be a base, boss, cut, or surface. You can
manipulate a loft in the following ways:
• Create a loft as a thin feature.
• Synchronize loft profiles.
• Control the magnitude and direction of a tangency in a loft.
• Add, position, and edit new loft sections.
• Add side tangency to lofts that use guide curves.
• View the loft using zebra stripes as you create it.
Place the pointer on the loft, open the shortcut menu, and select Zebra stripes preview. When you create
another sweep, loft, or add a loft section, the zebra stripes display. Use the shortcut menu to clear Zebra
stripes preview.
6-90
Loft Features
You can create a loft by connecting profiles.
You can view the loft using zebra stripes as you create it. Place the pointer on the loft, open the shortcut menu, and
select Zebra stripes preview. Note that if you apply zebra stripes, when you create another sweep, loft, or add a loft
section, the zebra stripes display. Use the shortcut menu to clear Zebra stripes preview.
To create a loft:
1. Click Loft , or Insert, Boss, Loft. Select the profile sketches in order in the graphics area.
In the graphics area, a shaded preview connecting the selected entities appears.
TIP: For each profile, select the point from which you want the path of the loft to travel. In the
2. Examine the path preview. If necessary, click Move Up or Move Down to adjust the order of the
profiles, or re-select the sketches to connect different points on the profiles.
3. Under Start/End Tangency: If you want to select a different option for Start tangency type or End
tangency type, click Start/End Tangency.
• Select the start and end tangency type.
• To control tangency, enter a start and an end tangent length in the PropertyManager, or drag the
5. If you are using guide curves, click Guide Curves , then select the sketches in the graphics area to use
as guide curves. If necessary, click Move Up or Move Down to reorder multiple guide curves.
6. You can add side tangency between adjacent faces that lie along the path of a guide curve. This creates a
smoother transition between the adjacent faces.
Select All Faces in the Guide tangency type list.
NOTE: For best results when using side tangency, the profiles should also be tangent to the tangency faces
at the point where each profile meets the guide curve. Ideal tolerance is 2 degrees or less. Avoid profiles with
connection points greater than 2 degrees off tangency.
7. Under Centerline Parameters: If you are using a centerline parameter as opposed to a guide curve, click
Centerline Parameters , then select the sketch in the graphics area to use as the centerline.
8. Click the Thin Feature check box to create a thin feature.
6-92
Example of Loft Control Tangency
Sketch profile with preview Loft without using Maintain Loft using Maintain tangency
tangency option option
Click Maintain tangency to cause the corresponding surfaces in the resulting loft to be tangent if
the corresponding lofting segments are tangent. Faces that can be represented as a plane, cylinder, or
cone are maintained. Other adjacent faces are merged, and the sections are approximated. Sketch
arcs may be converted to splines.
Shaded loft preview with Close loft cleared. Loft with Close loft cleared
Shaded loft preview with Close loft selected. Loft with Close loft selected
Click Close loft under Options to create a closed body along the loft direction. This
connects the last sketch and the first sketch automatically.
Loft with side tangency not applied Loft with side tangency applied
• Enter a Direction 1 Thickness and if using Two-Direction as the Type, a Direction 2 Thickness
6-94
Loft Thin Feature Samples
5. Under Profile:
a. Select the Profiles to loft in the graphics area. Select the face of the non-planar profile and the
other profiles in order, by clicking a corresponding point on each profile. You do not have to select
the vertices precisely; the vertex closest to the selection point is used.
A shaded preview connecting the selected entities appears in the graphics area.
b. You can change the synchronization between the profiles by manipulating the connectors.
c. Examine the preview, and click Move Up or Move Down to reorder the profiles.
6. To control tangency at the start and end of the loft, click Start/End Tangency.
7. Under Options, select Maintain tangency, Advanced smoothing, or Close loft, if needed.
• Clear Show preview to display only the profiles and the path.
• Merge result merges all the loft elements.
8. To create a loft with thin walls, select the Thin Feature check box.
9. Click OK .
7. Under Guide Curves select guide curves from the graphics area, if needed.
When using guide curves, you can also control side tangency by selecting All Faces under Guide tangency
type.
6-96
8. Under Options, select Maintain tangency, Advanced smoothing, or Close loft, if needed.
• You can also clear the Show preview check box to display only the profiles and the path.
• Merge result is the default value. Clear the check box if you do not want to merge all the loft
elements.
9. To create a loft with thin walls, click Thin Feature.
10. Click OK .
6. You can control the tangency magnitude and direction of a loft between sketches, faces, or edges of surfaces.
To control Start/End Tangency, do the following:
• For Start tangency type select either Normal to Profile, Direction Vector, or All Faces.
NOTE: If you use Direction Vector as the Start tangency type, select a plane (using the flyout
FeatureManager design tree) or a linear edge or axis to define the Direction Vector .
• Set the Start Tangent Length. Use the handles in the graphics area and drag to change the value,
or enter the values directly in the PropertyManager.
• Examine the preview and click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
• Select an End tangency type, and set an End Tangent Length. If you use Direction Vector as the
End tangency type, select a different plane (using the flyout FeatureManager design tree) or a
• Examine the preview and click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
Example of loft tangency options
Example of controlling the tangency magnitude and direction:
7. Under Guide Curves, do the following:
• Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order in which to use the guide curves.
When using guide curves, you can also control side tangency by selecting All Faces under Guide
tangency type.
8. Under Options, select Maintain tangency, Advanced smoothing or Close loft, if needed.
• You can also clear the Show preview check box to display only the profiles and the path.
• Merge result is the default value. Clear the check box if you do not want to merge all the loft
elements.
9. To apply a Thin Feature, do the following:
• Select a Type, either One-Direction, Mid-Plane, or Two-Direction.
Thickness .
10. Click OK .
6-98
Loft with Guide Curve and non-Planar Profile
You can create a guide curve loft by using two or more profiles and one or more guide curves to connect the profiles.
The profiles can be either planar or non-planar. The guide curves help you control the intermediate profiles that are
generated.
You can view the loft using zebra stripes as you create it. Place the pointer on the loft, open the shortcut menu, and
select Zebra stripes preview. If you apply zebra stripes, when you create another sweep, or loft, or add a loft section,
the zebra stripes appear. Use the shortcut menu to clear Zebra stripes preview.
After you create a loft, you can add and edit additional loft sections.
Non-planar profile with split line and Non-planar profile with split line and
guide curve guide curve leading to planar profile
• In the graphics area, select the split line face and the planar Profiles in order.
In the graphics area, a shaded preview connecting the selected entities appears.
FeatureManager design tree) or a linear edge or axis to define the Direction Vector .
• Set the Start Tangent Length. Use the handles in the graphics area and drag to change the value,
or enter the values directly in the PropertyManager.
• Examine the preview and click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
• Select an End tangency type, and set an End Tangent Length. If you use Direction Vector as the
End tangency type, select a different plane (using the flyout FeatureManager design tree) or a
• Examine the preview and click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
Example of loft tangency options
Example of controlling the tangency magnitude and direction
8. Under Guide Curves, do the following:
• Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order in which to use the guide curves.
When using guide curves, you can also control side tangency by selecting All Faces under Guide
tangency type.
9. Under Options, select Maintain tangency, Advanced smoothing or Close loft, if needed.
• You can also clear the Show preview check box to display only the profiles and the path.
• Merge result is the default value. Clear the check box if you do not want to merge all the loft
elements.
10. To apply a Thin Feature, do the following:
• Select a Type, either One-Direction, Mid-Plane, or Two-Direction.
Thickness .
11. Click OK .
Loft between adjacent edges Loft preview using zero Start Loft using Normal to profile
of two surfaces tangency and End tangency for both Start tangency and
End tangency
6-100
Recommendations for Lofts with Guide Curves
Consider the following when creating lofts with guide curves.
• Guide curves must intersect all the profiles.
• There is no limit to the number of guide curves you may use.
• Guide curves can intersect at points.
• You can use any of the following items as a guide curve: sketched curves, model edges, or curves of any
kind.
• If a loft fails or twists:
o Use loft synchronization to modify the synchronization between loft profiles. You adjust the
synchronization by changing the alignment between the profiles. To adjust the alignment, you
manipulate the handles which appear in the graphics area as part of the connector. The connector is
the poly line connecting corresponding points in both directions.
o Add a Curve Through Reference Points as a guide curve, selecting corresponding vertices of the
profiles to create the curve.
• Guide curves can be longer than the resulting loft. The loft stops at the end of the smallest guide curve.
• You can further control the behavior of the loft by creating the same number of segments on all the guide
curves. The endpoints of each segment mark corresponding points for transition of the profiles.
3. Click OK .
FeatureManager design tree) or a linear edge or axis to define the Direction Vector .
• Set the Start Tangent Length. Use the handles in the graphics area and drag to change the value,
or enter the values directly in the PropertyManager.
• Examine the preview and click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
• Select an End tangency type, and set an End Tangent Length. If you use Direction Vector as the
End tangency type, select a different plane (using the flyout FeatureManager design tree) or a
• Examine the preview and click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
Example of loft tangency options
Example of controlling the tangency magnitude and direction
6. When using guide curves, you can also control side tangency by selecting All Faces under Guide tangency
type.
7. Under Options, select Maintain tangency, Advanced smoothing, or Close loft, if needed.
• You can also clear the Show preview check box to display only the profiles and the path.
• Merge result is the default value. Clear the check box if you do not want to merge all the loft
elements.
8. Under Centerline Parameters, select the Centerline sketch in the graphics area.
9. You can preview the effect of the centerline. Click Number of Sections and adjust the slider to change the
number of previews to display in the graphics area. Then click Show Sections to display the previews
by using the arrows .
NOTE: The number of sections you specify affects the shape of the loft. You may need to increase, or
decrease, the number of sections to get the desired shape.
6-102
10. To apply a Thin Feature, do the following:
• Select a Type, either One-Direction, Mid-Plane, or Two-Direction.
Thickness .
11. Click OK .
FeatureManager design tree) or a linear edge or axis to define the Direction Vector .
2. Set the Start Tangent Length. Use the handles in the graphics area and drag to change the value, or enter
the values directly in the PropertyManager.
3. Examine the preview and if necessary, click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
4. Select an End tangency type, and set an End Tangent Length. If you use Direction Vector as the End
tangency type, select a different plane (using the flyout FeatureManager design tree) or a linear edge or axis
5. Examine the preview and if necessary, click Reverse Tangent Direction to reverse the direction of the
tangent.
Example of loft tangency options
Loft preview using no Start tangency Loft using All Faces for both Start
and End tangency tangency and End tangency
NOTE: You can click OK in the PropertyManager after adding the new loft section if you do not need
to specify a different plane, reposition the loft section, or use the edit functions.
2. If you want to use the temporary plane, position the plane along the path of the existing loft by doing one of
the following:
• Drag the plane along the axis of the path of the existing loft.
• Place the pointer at one of edges of the plane. The pointer changes to . This allows you to
change the angle of the plane and modify the shape of the new loft section.
3. If you want to use another previously created plane, click the Use selected plane check box, and select a
plane .
NOTE: The plane you use to add a new loft section must appear before the loft section in the
FeatureManager design tree.
4. Once you position the new loft section, you can do either of the following:
6-104
5. Once you define the new loft section, click Finish.
The sketch used to add the new loft section appears in the loft feature.
You can delete any sketch you added using Add Loft Section.
3. Click OK .
This removes the loft sketch from the loft section, and places it above the loft feature in the
FeatureManager design tree. It does not remove the loft section.
4. To permanently remove the loft section and the sketch from the model, do the following:
• Select the sketch from the FeatureManager design tree.
• Press Delete.
Loft Synchronization
This capability allows you to modify the synchronization between loft profiles. You adjust the synchronization by
changing the alignment between the profiles. To adjust the alignment, you manipulate the handles which appear in the
graphics area as part of the connector. The connector is the poly line connecting corresponding points in both
directions.
Regardless of the profile you select, the behavior is identical. However, the shape of the loft varies
accordingly.
2. Start to drag towards the vertex on which you want to relocate the connector.
The connector moves to the next vertex along the edge you specified.
The loft preview updates with the new synchronization.
To add a connector:
1. Select and edge.
2. Right-click and chose Add Connector.
Once you add new connectors to profiles with vertices, or with smooth contour profiles, you can drag the
handles to reposition the connector.
6-106
To control connectors using local twist control:
If you have coincident vertices, you need to select the corresponding vertex to move the initial handle.
Hide Connector
6-108
• For a Linear Pattern, select the features, then specify the direction, the linear spacing, and the total number
of instances.
• For a Circular Pattern, select the features and an edge or axis as the center of rotation, then specify:
The total number of instances and the angular spacing between instances.
– or –
The total number of instances and the total angle in which to create the pattern.
• For a Curve Driven Pattern, select the features and an edge or sketch segment on which to pattern the
feature. Then you can specify the type of curve, the curve method, and the alignment method.
• For a Sketch Pattern, select where to populate a seed feature by sketching points on model face.
• For a Table Pattern, add or retrieve previously created X-Y coordinates to populate a seed feature on the
face of the model.
• For a Mirror Feature, select the features to copy and a plane about which to mirror them. If you select a
planar face on the model, you mirror the entire model about the selected face.
You can also create patterns of patterns, and mirrored copies of patterns, as well as control and modify patterns.
For information about using a pattern of components in an assembly, see adding a component pattern.
Patterns of Patterns
With multibody parts, you can create a pattern that includes some or all of the multibody parts that you used to create
the original multibody part pattern. You can use any of the patterns such as linear, circular, sketch driven, and so on.
You have the same options with patterns of patterns in the multibody part environment as you have in the single body
environment. For example, you can use more than one direction, skip instances, and so on.
Pattern from existing linear pattern. Some bodies and a single direction selected.
Pattern from existing linear pattern. Some bodies, single direction, and instance to skip selected.
1. Click Mirror on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Pattern/Mirror. Then select either linear,
circular, or curve driven pattern. You can also use a pattern you created using X-Y coordinates (table
pattern) or sketch points.
2. Do one of the following:
• For a single body pattern, select the pattern feature in the FeatureManager design tree, or select a
face on a pattern instance in the model.
• For a multibody part pattern, under Bodies to Pattern , select the individual instances from the
existing pattern that you want to include in the new pattern.
3. Proceed as described in Linear Pattern, Circular Pattern, or curve driven pattern.
The Curve Driven Pattern tool on the Features toolbar allows you to create patterns along a planar curve. To
define the pattern, you can use any sketch segment, or the edge of a face (solid or surface), that lies along the plane.
Like other pattern types, such as linear or circular, you can skip pattern instances, and pattern in one or two
directions. Elements specific to curve driven patterns include the following:
• Type of curve. The type of curve you use to create your pattern determines how you specify the number of
instances to pattern for both directions. You can base your pattern on an open curve or a closed curve (such
as a circle).
o Direction 1. You can equally space the pattern instances by applying the Equal spacing option.
Alternatively, you can specify a distance along the curve between each pattern instance. The
distance between the curve or sketch segment and the Feature to Pattern is measured normal to
the curve.
o Direction 2. For Direction 2, you can also apply the Equal spacing option or specify step
distances. If you use a closed curve, you can create patterns of concentric rings or rows of
identically patterned features.
o Implicit Direction 2. If you select the Direction 2 check box without specifying a sketch element
or edge, an implicit pattern is created. The implicit Direction 2 is based on what you specified for
Direction 1.
• Curve method. You can define the direction of the pattern by transforming how you use the reference curve
(an edge, sketch, or curve) on which your pattern is based. The default method is Transform curve, in
which the feature you pattern follows the shape of the reference curve. Using Offset curve, the feature you
pattern is offset from the reference curve.
• Alignment method. You can align the features to the original alignment of the seed feature. Alternatively,
you can align the features tangent to the direction reference.
6-110
To create a curve driven pattern:
1. Create a part that includes a feature you want to pattern along a curve.
2. Click Curve Driven Pattern on the Features toolbar, or Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Curve Driven
Pattern.
3. Under Direction 1, do the following:
• In the graphics area, click a curve, edge, or a sketch entity, or select a sketch from the
FeatureManager to use as the pattern. If necessary, click Reverse Direction to change the
direction of the pattern. The examples below use the upper edge of the model as Direction 1.
Equal spacing check box cleared Equal spacing check box selected
The pointer changes to when you mouse over each pattern instance. Click to select a pattern instance.
The coordinates of the pattern instance appear. To restore a pattern instance, click the instance again, or
delete the pattern instance from the Instances to Skip box. If you want to pattern only the geometry (faces
and edges) of the features, rather than patterning and solving each instance of the feature, under Options,
click to clear Geometry Pattern.
NOTE: In some cases, the geometry pattern option speeds up the creation and rebuilding of the pattern.
However, you cannot create geometry patterns of features that have faces merged with the rest of the part.
5. Do one of the following:
• To create the pattern based on the feature, under Features to Pattern , select the feature in the
graphics area.
NOTE: If the feature to pattern includes fillets or other additions, use the flyout FeatureManager
design tree to select these features.
• To create the pattern based on the faces that make up the feature, under Faces to Pattern ,
select all the faces in the graphics area. This is useful with models that import only the faces that
make up the feature, and not the feature itself.
NOTE: When using Faces to Pattern, the pattern must remain within the same face or boundary.
It cannot cross boundaries. For example, a cut across the entire face or different levels (such as a
raised edge) would create a boundary and separate faces, preventing the pattern from propagating.
• To create a pattern based on multibody parts, under Bodies to Pattern , select the the body to
pattern in the graphics area.
6-112
To create a curve pattern in two directions: Example
1. Follow steps 1-5 above to create a linear pattern in Direction 1.
NOTE: You can select the Features to Pattern, Faces to Pattern, or Bodies to Pattern, and the Options
before or after you select Direction 2.
2. Under Direction 2, do the following:
• In the graphics area, click a curve or an edge to use as the pattern direction. In the example below,
the right edge is selected. If necessary, click Reverse Direction to change the direction of the
pattern.
4. Click OK .
Linear Pattern
Creates multiple instances of selected features along one or two linear paths. You can specify the following with
linear patterns:
• Bodies to Pattern. For multibody parts, select a separate body to create a linear pattern. You can use all
functions such as Direction 2 or Instances to Skip with Bodies to Pattern.
Example
• Direction of the pattern.
• Number of pattern instances in each direction.
• Distance between pattern instances.
• Pattern instances to skip.
• Pattern only the seed feature. If you modify the original feature (seed feature), all instances in the pattern
are updated to reflect the changes.
• Faces to Pattern. You can select the faces that make up a feature to create the pattern. This is useful with
models that import only the faces that make up the feature, and not the feature itself.
When using Faces to Pattern, the pattern must remain within the same face or boundary. It cannot
cross boundaries. For example, a cut across the entire face or different levels (such as a raised edge) would
create a boundary and separate faces, preventing the pattern from propagating.
• Multibody parts. Apply features to one or more multibody parts by selecting Geometry Pattern and
using Feature Scope to choose which bodies should include the feature.
You must create the model to which you want to add the features for multibody parts prior to adding
those features.
6-114
To create a linear pattern in one direction: Example
1. Create a base part and on the base part, create one or more cut, hole, or boss features that you want to repeat.
2. Click Linear Pattern on the Features toolbar or click Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Linear Pattern.
3. Under Direction 1, do the following:
• Click a model edge or a dimension to indicate the first direction for the pattern. The name of the
edge or dimension appears in the Direction 1 box.
• Click Reverse Direction if the arrow on the model points in the wrong direction.
• To create the pattern based on the feature, under Features to Pattern , select the feature in the
graphics area.
If the feature to pattern includes fillets or other additions, use the flyout FeatureManager
design tree to select these features.
• To create the pattern based on the faces that make up the feature, under Faces to Pattern ,
select all the faces in the graphics area.
• To create a feature pattern on multibody parts:
a. Under Features to Pattern , select the feature to pattern from the FeatureManager
design tree.
b. Under Options, select Geometry pattern.
c. Under Feature Scope, select an option based on the bodies to which you want to apply
the feature.
• To create a pattern based on multibody parts, under Bodies to Pattern , select the body to
pattern in the graphics area.
5. If you want to include specific pattern instances to skip, do the following: Example
• Click Reverse Direction if the arrow on the model points in the wrong direction.
The Pattern seed only option is especially useful when creating patterns in two opposite
directions. Use Pattern seed only, to prevent duplicate copies of the feature in the same location.
• To create a feature pattern on multibody parts, follow the same steps from the procedure above.
3. If you want to include specific pattern instances to skip, do the following:
4. Click OK .
6-116
Example of Linear Pattern Instances to Skip
Linear pattern both directions preview Linear pattern both directions applied
Linear pattern Pattern seed only not applied Linear pattern Pattern seed only applied
Extrude and dome features applied Extrude and dome feature applied
to selected body to all bodies
6-118
Circular Pattern
Creates multiple instances of one or more features which you can space uniformly around an axis. Circular pattern
includes the following:
• Bodies to Pattern. For multibody parts, select a separate body to create a circular pattern. You can use all
functions such as Instances to Skip with Bodies to Pattern.
Example
• Seed feature. Modify the original feature (seed feature), and all instances in the pattern are updated to
reflect the change.
• Select pattern instances to skip as you create the circular pattern.
• Faces to Pattern. Select the faces that make up a feature to create the pattern. This is useful with models
that import only the faces that make up the feature, and not the feature itself.
When using Faces to Pattern, the pattern must remain within the same face or boundary. It cannot
cross boundaries. For example, a cut across the entire face or different levels (such as a raised edge) would
create a boundary and separate faces, preventing the pattern from propagating.
• Multibody parts. Apply features to one or more multibody parts by selecting Geometry Pattern and
using Feature Scope to choose which bodies should include the feature.
You must create the model to which you want to add the features for multibody parts prior to adding
those features.
3. Click Circular Pattern on the Features toolbar, or Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Circular Pattern.
4. Under Parameters, do the following:
• In the graphics area, select an axis, model edge or an angular dimension as the Pattern Axis.
• If necessary click Reverse Direction to change the direction of the circular pattern.
change the Angle in which to create the pattern, using the PropertyManager or the callout in
the graphics area.
If you change Number of instances or the Angle using the PropertyManager or the callout
box, a preview of the resulting pattern is automatically displayed in the graphics area.
• To create the pattern based on the feature, under Features to Pattern , select the feature in the
graphics area.
If the feature to pattern includes fillets or other additions, use the flyout FeatureManager
design tree to select these features.
• To create the pattern based on the faces that make up the feature, under Faces to Pattern ,
select all the faces in the graphics area.
• To create a feature pattern on multibody parts:
a. Under Features to Pattern , select the feature to pattern from the FeatureManager
design tree.
b. Under Options, select Geometry pattern.
c. Under Feature Scope, select an option based on the bodies to which you want to apply
the feature.
• To create a pattern based on multibody parts, under Bodies to Pattern , select the body to
pattern in the graphics area.
6. If you want to skip circular pattern instances, click Instances to Skip, and in the graphics area, select each
of the pattern instances to skip.
The pointer changes to when you mouse over each pattern instance. Click to select a pattern instance.
The coordinates of the pattern instance appear. To restore a pattern instance, click the instance again. If you
want to pattern only the geometry (faces and edges) of the features, rather than patterning and solving each
instance of the feature, under Options, click to clear Geometry Pattern.
In some cases, the geometry pattern option speeds up the creation and rebuilding of the pattern.
However, you cannot create geometry patterns of features that have faces merged with the rest of the part.
7. Click OK .
When you create a pattern using a Shape feature, all pattern instances must be on the same face.
Pattern instances inherit the feature color of the original feature as long as:
• the pattern is based on one feature.
• the color of the pattern or any faces on any pattern instances has not
been changed.
6-120
Example of Multibody Part with Circular Patterns
Cut extrude feature applied to all Cut extrude feature using circular Cut extrude feature using
multibody parts. pattern applied to single body circular pattern applied to all
bodies
3. Click Point or Tools, Sketch Entity, Point and add multiple sketch points to represent the pattern you
want to create, based on the seed feature.
4. Click Sketch Driven Pattern on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Sketch Driven
Pattern.
5. Under Selections, do the following:
• If necessary, use the flyout FeatureManager design tree to select a Reference Sketch to use as
the pattern.
• Click either Centroid to use the centroid of the seed feature, or Selected point to use another
point as the reference point.
• If you chose Selected point as the reference point, select a Reference Vertex in the graphics
area.
NOTE: You can use the centroid of the seed feature, the sketch origin, a vertex, or another sketch
point as a reference point in a sketch-driven pattern.
6. Do one of the following:
• To create the pattern based on the feature, under Features to Pattern , select the feature in the
graphics area.
NOTE: If the feature to pattern includes fillets or other additions, use the flyout FeatureManager
design tree to select these features.
• To create the pattern based on the faces that make up the feature, under Faces to Pattern ,
select all the faces in the graphics area. This is useful with models that import only the faces that
make up the feature, and not the feature itself.
NOTE: When using Faces to Pattern, the pattern must remain within the same face or boundary.
It cannot cross boundaries. For example, a cut across the entire face or different levels (such as a
raised edge) would create a boundary and separate faces, preventing the pattern from propagating.
• To create a pattern based on multibody parts, under Bodies to Pattern , select the the body to
pattern in the graphics area.
7. Under Options, select the Geometry pattern check box (see Geometry Pattern).
NOTE: The Geometry pattern is not available with Bodies to Pattern.
6-122
The sketch-driven pattern is displayed.
Sketch pattern with Centroid as the Sketch pattern the Selected point as the
reference point reference point
Multibody part with Body to Pattern and sketch points Sketch driven pattern applied
Origin used as the Reference point Selected Vertex used as the Reference point
NOTE: You can also alter the relative position of the features you propagate when using a table driven pattern.
5. Click Table Driven Pattern on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Table Driven
Pattern.
6. In the Reference point box, select Centroid to use the centroid of the seed feature or Selected point, to use
another point as the Reference point.
NOTE: You can use the centroid of the seed feature, the sketch origin, a vertex, or another sketch point as a
reference point in table driven pattern.
See Centroid for more information on how the system determines the centroid of a seed feature.
7. In the Coordinate system box, select the Coordinate System you created from the FeatureManager design
tree.
8. Do one of the following:
• To create the pattern based on the feature, under Features to copy, select the feature in the graphics
area.
NOTE: If the feature to pattern includes fillets or other additions, use the flyout FeatureManager
design tree to select these features.
• To create the pattern based on the faces that make up the feature, under Faces to copy, select all the
faces in the graphics area. This is useful with models that import only the faces that make up the
feature, and not the feature itself.
NOTE: When using Faces to Copy, the pattern must remain within the same face or boundary. It
cannot cross boundaries. For example, a cut across the entire face or different levels (such as a
raised edge) would create a boundary and separate faces, preventing the pattern from propagating.
• To create a pattern based on multibody parts, under Bodies to Pattern , select the the body to
pattern in the graphics area.
9. Select the Geometry pattern check box (see Geometry Pattern).
NOTE: The Geometry pattern is not available with Bodies to Pattern.
10. Double-click the area under Point 0 to enter the X-Y coordinates for each instance of the table pattern. Note
that the X-Y coordinates of your seed feature are displayed for Point 0.
NOTE: You can use positive or negative coordinates. To enter a negative coordinate, precede the value with
a minus (-).
11. Click OK to create the table pattern.
The table driven pattern is displayed.
6-124
Example of Multibody Part with Table Driven Patterns
1. With a part open, click Table Driven Pattern on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Pattern/Mirror,
Table Driven Pattern.
2. Click Browse to locate the .sldptab file, then click Open.
The file name appears in the Read a file from box, along with the X-Y coordinates.
3. Enter the appropriate Reference point and Coordinate system.
4. Click OK to apply the Table Pattern to the part.
Mirror Pattern
You can select one or more features, the faces that comprise a feature, or with multibody parts, select a body to create
a mirror pattern.
Multibody parts. Apply features to one or more by selecting Geometry Pattern and using Feature Scope to choose
which bodies should include the feature.
You must create the model to which you want to add the features for multibody parts prior to adding those
features.
• To use faces: Under Faces to Mirror , in the graphics area click the faces that comprise the
feature you want to mirror. Faces to Mirror is useful with imported parts where the import process
included the faces of the feature, but not the feature itself.
• To mirror a feature pattern on multibody parts:
a. Under Features to Pattern , select the feature to pattern from the FeatureManager
design tree.
b. Under Options, select Geometry pattern.
c. Under Feature Scope, select an option based on the bodies to which you want to apply
the feature.
• To use bodies: Under Bodies to Mirror , in the graphics area select the body you want to
mirror. If you select Bodies to Mirror, the following Options appear:
• Merge solids. When you select a face on a solid part, and clear the Merge solids check box, you
can create a mirrored body that is attached to the original body, but is a separate entity. If you select
Merge solid, the original part and the mirrored part become a single entity.
• Knit surfaces. If you select to mirror a surface by appending the mirror face to the original face
without intersecting it, you can select Knit surfaces to knit the surfaces together.
A preview of the mirrored pattern appears.
3. Click Geometry pattern if you want to make an exact, geometric copy of the faces and edges of the original
feature.
Under certain conditions, when using Faces to Mirror, you may not be able to use the Geometry
Pattern option. The Geometry Pattern is not available with Bodies to Mirror. To mirror a feature pattern
on multibody parts, you must select Geometry Pattern.
4. Click OK .
6-126
Geometry Pattern
The Geometry Pattern option speeds up the creation and rebuilding of a pattern. Individual instances of the feature
being copied are not solved; end conditions and calculations are ignored. Each instance is an exact copy of the faces
and edges of the original feature. By default, the Geometry Pattern option is not selected except when you create a
pattern using a Shape or Dome feature.
NOTE:
The Geometry Pattern option is available when creating any type of pattern:
• Circular Pattern
• Linear Pattern
• Curve-Driven Pattern
• Table Pattern
• Sketch Pattern
• Mirror Feature
Vary Sketch
Use the Vary Sketch option if you want the pattern to change its dimensions as it is repeated. For example, you may
want to maintain a specific distance between the edges of the base part and the patterned features.
In this example, the first feature (the hole feature) is patterned three times.
When Vary Sketch is not checked, the When Vary Sketch is checked, the pattern
pattern remains the same regardless of the maintains its relation to the sloping edge,
defining geometry. based on the dimensions and constraints of
the first instance of the pattern.
5. From the Features toolbar, click Linear Pattern , or click Insert, Pattern/Mirror, Linear Pattern.
6. Click the dimension that you want to use to drive the pattern. Notice the preview arrow.
7. Click the Vary Sketch check box.
8. Specify the values for the Spacing and Total Instances of the pattern.
9. Click OK to create the pattern.
Pattern Deletion
6-128
To restore deleted pattern instances:
1. Right-click the pattern feature, and select Edit Definition.
2. Select the coordinates of the deleted instance in the Instances to Skip box, and press Delete to restore that
instance.
3. Click OK .
Seed Feature
The original feature for any type of pattern (linear, circular, sketch driven and so on) or mirrored pattern, is called the
seed feature. You can edit this feature.
Mirror Feature
Creates a copy of a feature, (or multiple features), mirrored about a face or a plane. You can select the feature or you
can select the faces that comprise the feature.
• Bodies to Mirror. Select a body in a single model or multibody part to create a mirror entity.
• Multibody parts. Apply features to one or more multibody parts by selecting Geometry Pattern and
using Feature Scope to choose which bodies should include the feature.
You must create the model to which you want to add the features for multibody parts prior to adding
those features.
Example
If you modify the original feature (seed feature), the mirrored copy is updated to reflect the changes.
To mirror a feature:
• To use features: Under Features to Mirror , click one or more features in the model or use the
flyout in the FeatureManager design tree.
• To mirror the entire model: Under Bodies to Mirror , select a model in the graphics area.
The mirrored model attaches to the face you select.
• To use faces: Under Faces to Mirror , in the graphics area click the faces that comprise the
feature you want to mirror.
• To mirror a feature pattern on multibody parts:
a. Under Features to Pattern , select the feature to pattern from the FeatureManager
design tree.
b. Under Options, select Geometry pattern.
c. Under Feature Scope, select an option based on the bodies to which you want to apply
the feature.
• To use bodies: Under Bodies to Mirror , in the graphics area select the body you want to
mirror.
3. If you select Bodies to Mirror, the following Options appear:
• Merge solids. When you select a face on a solid part, and clear the Merge solids check box, you
can create a mirrored body that is attached to the original body, but is a separate entity. If you select
Merge solid, the original part and the mirrored part become a single entity.
• Knit surfaces. If you select to mirror a surface by attaching the mirror face to the original face
without intersections or gaps between the surfaces, you can select Knit surfaces to knit the two
surfaces together.
Example
4. If you want to mirror only the geometry (faces and edges) of the features, rather than solving the whole
feature, select Geometry Pattern.
The geometry pattern option speeds up the creation and rebuilding of the pattern. However, you cannot
create geometry patterns of features that have faces merged with the rest of the part. To mirror a feature
pattern on multibody parts, you must select Geometry Pattern.
The geometry pattern is only available with Features to Mirror and Faces to Mirror.
5. Click OK .
6-130
Example of Feature Scope Mirror Pattern
Surface created on Front plane Surface mirrored using Front plane. Knit
surface option is available.
Surface mirrored using Top plane. Knit Surface mirrored using Right plane. Knit
surface option is not available. surface option is not available.
Revolves
Revolved Boss/Base
Revolve creates a base or boss by revolving a sketch around a centerline. The default angle is 360°. You can also
create revolved cut or revolved surface.
With the Selected Contours pointer, you can choose different sketches from among intersecting or non-intersecting
sketches to create the revolve.
Example
• Angle
• Reverse Direction
• Thin Feature
• Selected Contours
Revolve Features
Revolve creates a feature that adds or removes material by revolving one or more profiles around a centerline. The
feature can be either a solid, a thin feature, or a surface.
With the Selected Contours pointer, you can choose different sketches from among intersecting or non-intersecting
sketches to create the revolve.
Example
6-132
To create a revolved feature:
1. Create a sketch containing one or more profiles and a centerline.
Contours pointer, you can select to revolve one or more intersecting profiles.
• The sketch for a thin or surface revolved feature can contain multiple open or closed intersecting profiles.
• Profiles cannot cross the centerline. If the sketch contains more than one centerline, select the centerline you
want to use as the axis of the revolution.
• When you dimension a revolve feature inside the centerline, you produce a radius dimension for the revolve
feature. If you dimension across the centerline, you produce a diameter dimension for the revolve feature.
• Revolved Boss/Base in the Features toolbar, or Insert, Base, Revolve, or Insert, Boss,
Revolve
• The angle defaults to 360°. If necessary, change the Angle , or drag the handles in the graphics
area.
4. If creating a Thin Feature, click the Thin Feature check box, and do the following:
• Click the Direction 1 Thickness and enter a value. If necessary, click Direction 2 Thickness
a. Hover over the region with the pointer , and select the contours you want to revolve, You can
select any combination of regions to create single or multibody parts. The selected region becomes
red.
b. Click to create a preview of the revolve. The selected region becomes yellow, and the region of the
sketch appears in the Selected Contours box.
3. Click OK .
Select top region (contour) Select top and mid regions (contours)
6-134
Select mid region (contour) Select bottom region (contour)
Select bottom and mid regions (contours) Select all regions (contours)
Ribs
Rib Overview
Rib is a special type of extruded feature created from an open sketched contour. It adds material of a specified
thickness in a specified direction between the contour and an existing part. Elements that control the type of rib you
create include:
• Specifying single open or closed sketch elements on a plane or a face
• Selecting the type of the plane such as parallel
• Changing the extrusion direction
• Selecting either a linear or natural extension
• Creating multiple open sketch elements on a plane
• Using multiple drafts
• Using the Detailed Preview PropertyManager with multibody parts to enhance detail and select entities to
display
For additional information and examples of the rib feature, see the following topics:
• Creating a simple rib
• Creating a rib using Normal to Sketch
• Using multiple open sketch elements
• Using the multiple drafts feature
• Reversing the direction of the rib extrusion
The examples below display some of the methods and results you can apply to create the rib feature.
Single open sketch on face. The Rib feature applied using Parallel Sketch on parallel plane, same
arrow indicates the direction of distance as used for the Base-
the rib feature to Sketch as the Extrusion Extrude (30mm). The arrow
direction. indicates the direction of the rib
feature.
Rib feature applied using Sketch on plane, parallel to the Rib feature applied using Parallel
plane used for the Base-Extrude
Normal to Sketch as the (15mm). The arrow indicates the to Sketch as the Extrusion
Extrusion direction. direction of the rib feature. direction.
• Select Parallel to Sketch or Normal to Sketch as the Extrusion Direction, depending on your
model and the position of the bounding edges
6-136
Multiple open and closed contours sketched on Rib feature applied using Normal to Sketch
a plane
as the Extrusion Direction
Single open contour sketch on a plane using Single open contour sketch on a plane using
Single open contour sketch on a face. With an open contour sketch on a face, you can only use
Click Next Reference Repeat and click Next Apply a draft Angle and apply
Reference, until you have rib with multiple drafts.
selected the contour you wish
to use as the reference.
6-138
4. Under Parameters, do the following.
Select a Thickness from the following options:
• Create rib on the left of the sketch - adds material only to the left side of the sketch.
• Create rib on both sides of the sketch - adds material equally to both sides of the sketch.
• Create rib on the right of the sketch - adds material only to the right side of sketch.
Select Normal to Sketch as the Extrusion direction, and choose either of the following:
• Linear creates a rib that extends the sketch contours normal to the direction of the sketch until they
meet a boundary.
• Natural creates a rib that extends the sketch contours in the same directions as the contour until
they meet a boundary.
Linear Natural
Select the Flip material side check box to change the direction of the extrusion.
Click Draft On/Off to add a draft, and enter the Draft Angle.
5. Click OK .
Rib Feature
You can create a rib using either single or multiple open, or closed, sketches.
Detailed Preview is available from the Rib PropertyManager.
Sketch for rib feature created on an intersecting Rib applied selecting Parallel to sketch
plane
Normal to Sketch
Parallel to Sketch
Rib using open sketch elements, selecting Rib using open sketch elements, selecting
• Create rib on the left of the sketch - adds material only to the left side of the sketch.
• Create rib on both sides of the sketch - adds material equally to both sides of the sketch.
• Create rib on the right of the sketch - adds material only to the right side of sketch.
6. Click Draft On/Off to add a draft, and enter the Draft Angle.
You can also create drafts using multiple drafts.
7. Click OK .
6-140
Scaling
You can scale a part or surface model about its centroid or about the model origin. The Scale feature scales only the
geometry of the model, for use in data export, cavities, and so on. It does not scale dimensions, sketches, or reference
geometry.
With multibody parts, you can select to scale one or more models.
A Scale feature is like any other feature in the FeatureManager design tree: it manipulates the geometry, but it does
not change the definitions of features created before it was added. To temporarily restore the model to its unscaled
size, you can roll back or suppress the Scale feature.
You can select to scale a model using a uniform or non-uniform scaling by selecting X-Y-Z coordinate values.
1. In a part document, click Scale on the Features toolbar or click Insert, Features, Scale.
The Scale PropertyManager appears.
2. From the Scale about list, select: Centroid, Coordinate System, or Origin.
3. If you want uniform scaling, specify a scaling value in the Scale factor box.
4. If you want non-uniform scaling, click to clear the Uniform scaling check box., and enter values for X, Y,
and Z.
5. Click OK .
1. In a part document, click Scale on the Features toolbar or click Insert, Features, Scale.
3. From the Scale about list, select: Centroid, Coordinate System, or Origin.
4. If you want uniform scaling, specify a scaling value in the Scale factor box.
5. If you want non-uniform scaling, clear the Uniform scaling check box and enter values for X, Y, and Z.
6. Click OK .
Shapes
Shape Feature
Creates a deformed surface on a model by expanding, constraining, and tightening the selected surface. A deformed
surface is flexible, much like a membrane. It can be expanded, constrained, and tightened using the sliders on the
Controls tab on the Shape Feature dialog box.
6-142
Example of Shape Constraints
6. Click Preview. Rotate the part and examine the shape from different angles.
7. Use the sliders on the Controls tab to adjust the shape.
8. When you are satisfied with the shape, click OK.
NOTE: If you constrain the shape using a vertex of a 3D sketch, you can use a feature handle to adjust the
shape. See Move/Size Features with Feature Handles.
6-144
Stretch and Bend Sliders
The following illustrations show how you can get different results by adjusting the Stretch and Bend sliders.
Resolution Slider
The following illustrations show how you can get different results by adjusting the Resolution slider.
Increase resolution
Shells
Shell Features
The shell tool hollows out the part, leaves open the faces you select, and creates thin-walled features on the remaining
faces.
If you do not select any face on the model, you can shell a solid part, creating a closed, hollow model.
If you plan on adding fillets to the part, you should fillet the part before you shell it.
If you have problems shelling a model, you can run the error diagnostics.
• Click on the Faces to remove , and select the faces from the graphics area to create a part with
one or more open faces.
• Select the Shell Outward check box if you want the shell feature to increase the outside dimensions of the
part.
NOTE: You also have the option to shell a model using multiple thicknesses.
3. Click OK .
6-146
3. Select Face <1> in the Multi-thickness Faces box, and enter a wall thickness in the Multi-
thickness(es) box.
4. Select each remaining Face <> in the the Multi-thickness Faces box, and enter a wall thickness in the
6. Click OK .
Shell with variable thickness and face removed Shell with variable thickness and model hollow (no
faces removed)
Surfaces
Surfaces Overview
Surfaces are a type of geometry that can be used to create solid features. Surface tools are available on the Surfaces
toolbar. You can create surfaces by these methods:
• Insert a planar surface from a sketch or from a set of closed edges that lie on a plane
• Extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft from sketches
• Offset from existing faces or surfaces
• Import a file
• Create mid-surfaces
You can modify surfaces in the following ways:
• Extend
• Trim existing surfaces
• Untrim surfaces
• Fillet surfaces
• Repair surfaces using Fill Surface
• Move/Copy surfaces
• Delete and patch a face
You can use surfaces in the following ways:
• Select surface edges and vertices to use as a sweep guide curve and path.
• Create a solid or cut feature by thickening a surface.
• Extrude a solid or cut feature with the end condition Up to Surface or Offset from Surface.
• Create a solid feature by thickening surfaces that have been knit into a closed volume.
• Replace a face with a surface
Surfaces Toolbar
The Surfaces toolbar provides tools for creating and modifying surfaces.
Extruded Surface
Revolved Surface
Swept Surface
Lofted Surface
Offset Surface
Radiate Surface
Knit Surface
Planar Surface
6-148
Extended Surface
Trimmed Surface
Filled Surface
Mid-Surface
Replace Face
Delete Face
Untrim Surface
Surface Bodies
Surface body is a general term that describes connected zero-thickness geometries such as single surfaces, knit
surfaces, trimmed and filleted surfaces, and so on. You can have multiple surface bodies in a single part.
You can select a surface body from the graphics area using Filter Surface Bodies on the Selection Filter toolbar.
You can select all types of surfaces with Filter Surface Bodies.
The cursor changes to , indicating when the pointer is over a surface body. Surface bodies can include:
• Single face surfaces
• Multiple face surfaces
• Knit surfaces
• Filleted surfaces
• Trimmed and extended surfaces
• Imported surfaces
• Planar surfaces and mid surfaces
• Surfaces made by extrude, revolve, loft, sweep, offset, radiate, or fill
To select a single face in a complex surface body, use Filter Faces on the Selection Filter toolbar.
Surface Features
Planar Surface
4. Click OK .
3. Click OK .
Extruded Surface
To extrude a surface:
1. Sketch the profile of the surface.
• If necessary, click Reverse Direction to extrude the surface in the opposite direction.
• If using Offset from surface, select a Face/Plane in the graphics area. Examine the preview.
If the offset is in the wrong direction, click the Reverse offset check box.
• Enter a Depth .
6-150
4. If necessary, click Direction 2 and repeat the same process you followed under Direction 1.
5. Click OK .
Revolved Surface
Choose different sketches from intersecting or non-intersecting sketches to create the revolve with the Selected
Contours pointer .
Example
To revolve a surface:
1. Sketch a profile and a centerline around which to revolve the profile.
2. Click Revolved Surface on the Surfaces toolbar or click Insert, Surface, Revolve.
3. Under Revolve Parameters, do the following:
• Select a Revolve type: One-Direction, Two-Direction, or Mid-Plane.
• Enter an Angle .
4. When creating a revolve with multiple contours do the following:
a. Hover over the region with the pointer , and select the contours you want to revolve, You can
select any combination of regions to create single or multiple revolved surfaces. The selected
region becomes red.
b. As you drag the pointer over the contours, the color of the contours changes to pink, then yellow
when you select them. The region of the sketch appears in the Selected Contours box.
5. Click OK .
Swept Surface
To sweep a surface:
1. Create planes as needed for sketching the sweep profile, sweep path, and the guide curves (if any are
needed).
2. Sketch the sweep profile and path on the planes that you created.
NOTE: You can also sketch the sweep path on a model face or use a model edge for the path.
3. If you are using one or more guide curves, create coincident or pierce relations between the guide curves
and the profile.
4. Click Swept Surface on the Surfaces toolbar or click Insert, Surface, Sweep.
5. Under Profile and Path, do the following:
• Click Profile and select the profile sketch in the graphics area.
• Click Path and select the path sketch in the graphics area.
NOTE: If you preselect either the profile sketch or the path sketch, the sketch appears in the
appropriate box of the PropertyManager.
6-152
6. Apply Options if needed.
NOTE: Some of these Options apply only to sweeps using a guide curve.
7. Under Guide Curves, do the following:
• Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order in which to use the guide curves.
• If necessary, clear the Merge smooth faces check box. Example
• Click Show Sections , and click the arrows to view and troubleshoot the profile by
Section Number.
8. Apply Start/End Tangency if necessary.
9. Click OK .
Lofted Surface
To loft a surface:
1. Create a plane for each profile section of the loft. (The planes do not need to be parallel.)
2. Sketch the section profiles on the planes. You need a separate sketch for each profile.
3. Create guide curves, if needed. You need a separate sketch for each guide curve.
8. If you are using guide curves, select the Guide Curves in the graphics area. Click Move Up or
Move Down to change the order in which to use the guide curves.
9. To control tangency, click Start/End Tangency.
10. Click OK .
Offset Surface
1. Click Offset Surface or Insert, Surface, Offset.
The Offset Surface PropertyManager appears.
2. Select the surfaces or faces to offset.
The name of the surfaces appear under Offset Parameters .
NOTE: If you select multiple faces, they must be contiguous.
3. Enter an offset distance in the Offset Distance box.
NOTE: You can create an offset surface with a distance of zero.
The selected faces are listed under Offset parameters, and a preview of the offset is displayed.
4. Click Flip Offset Direction to change the direction of the offset.
5. Click OK .
6-154
Radiating a Surface from a Parting Line
You can create surfaces by radiating a parting line, an edge, or a set of contiguous edges inwards or outwards, and
parallel to a selected plane.
• Select the split line in the graphics area to place it in the Edges to radiate box. Note the arrow
5. Click OK .
• If the preview arrow points away from the second face, click Reverse Face Set to change the
direction of the face blend.
6. In the graphics area, select the second face to fillet.
• The face you selected appears in the Face Set 2 box.
• Click Reverse Face Set , if necessary, so that the arrows point towards each other.
7. Tangent Propagation is the default. Click to clear the check box if you do not want the fillet to apply to
tangent faces.
8. Under Fillet Options, you can do the following:
• Click under Hold line then click an edge on one of the faces to define the size of the fillet. You
cannot pick a laminar edge as a hold line. (A laminar edge is an edge with only one attached face.)
• Click Curvature continuous to resolve discontinuity problems and create a smoother curvature
between adjacent surfaces. To verify the effect of the curvature continuity, you can display Zebra
Stripes.
• Click the Help point check box to resolve an ambiguous selection. Then click a vertex close to the
location where you want to insert the fillet.
• Under Trim surfaces, select one of the following:
o Trim and attach. Trim the filleted faces and knit the surfaces into one surface body. This
is the default.
o Don't trim or attach. Add a new fillet surface, but do not trim the faces or knit the
surfaces.
6-156
9. Click OK .
The face blend fillet combines the two separate surface bodies into a single surface body.
Surface Controls
Extend Surface
You can extend a surface by either selecting an edge, multiple edges, or a face.
To extend a surface:
1. Click Extended Surface on the Surfaces toolbar or click Insert, Surface, Extend.
2. In the graphics area, select one or more edges (to extend those edges), or a face (to extend the entire surface
an equal amount on all edges).
The edge or face you select displays in the Edges/Faces to Extend box.
3. Select an End Condition.
• Distance. Enter a value under Distance to extend the surface that distance. Use the handles or
enter the Distance in the PropertyManager.
• Up to point. Select a Vertex in the graphics area where the extended surface ends.
• Up to surface. Select a Surface/face (or a plane) in the graphics area where the extended
surface ends.
4. Select an Extension Type.
• Same surface extends the surface along the geometry of the surface.
• Linear extends the surface tangent to the original surface along the edges.
Extend edge using Same Extend edge using Linear as the Extend surface using the face as the
surface as the Extension Type. Extension Type. Edges/Faces to Extend and Same
surface as the Extension Type.
TIP: To extend a surface up to another surface or reference plane, click and use the flyout
FeatureManager design tree to select the surface or plane.
5. Click OK .
2. Select to extend individual adjacent tangent surfaces, non-adjacent tangent surfaces, or all tangent surfaces
(see tangent surfaces sample).
• To extend individual or multiple (adjacent or non-adjacent) tangent surfaces, select any edge or
face.
• To extend all tangent surfaces, select an edge, and click Propagate to highlight and extend all
tangent edges.
Propagate changes color, indicating that you can extend all tangent edges.
• Click Propagate again to cancel the extension of all additional tangent edges.
NOTE: Propagate only displays when you select an edge. If you select the face, the surface
extends in all directions.
3. Select an Extension Type and End Condition.
4. Click OK .
6-158
Extend tangent surfaces selecting Extend tangent surfaces selecting multiple
multiple adjacent edges non-adjacent edges
Fillet Surface
You can use a fillet to smooth the edge between two adjacent faces in a surface body that meet at an angle.
Select a Partial preview, a Full preview, or No preview in the Fillet PropertyManager. Fillets now include previews
with all fillet types except face fillets and full round illets.
Constant radius surface fillet with Full preview Constant radius surface fillet applied
Multiple radius surface fillet with Partial preview Multiple radius surface fillet applied
Surface filleting works as it does for solid bodies with a few exceptions.
You can do the following:
• Fillet the edges of a surface body.
• Make multiple radius surface fillets.
• Make fillets between two surfaces, or face blend fillets.
• Add setback parameters to the surface fillets.
• Make surface fillets with hold lines.
• Trim or keep the filleted surfaces in a face blend fillet.
6. Click OK .
6-160
Knit Surface
Use the Knit Surface function to combine two or more faces and surfaces into one.
Note the following about knit surfaces:
Edges of the surfaces must be adjacent and not overlapping.
Surfaces do not need to be on the same plane.
Select the entire surface body, or select one or more adjacent surface bodies.
• Knit surfaces do not absorb the surfaces you used to create them.
• Create a solid body when the knit surfaces form a closed volume, or leave as a surface body.
To knit surfaces:
2. Click OK .
The surfaces are knit.
5. Click OK .
The seed face and all adjacent faces are knitted to the radiated surface.
Mid Surface
The Mid Surface tool enables you to create mid surfaces between suitable selected face pairs. Suitable face pairs
should be offset from each other. Examples of suitable face pairs include two parallel planes, or two concentric
cylindrical faces. Mid surface is useful for generating meshes of two-dimensional elements in finite element
modeling.
1. Click Mid-Surface on the Surfaces toolbar, or click Insert, Surface, Mid Surface.
2. Under Selections, choose one of the following:
from the graphics area an individual set of face pairs, multiple sets of face pairs
- or -
from the PropertyManager, click Find Face Pairs to have the system scan the model for all suitable face
pairs. Find Face Pairs automatically filters out any unsuitable face pairs.
Individual face pair selected All face pairs selected (Find Face Pairs)
6-162
3. Use Position to place the mid surface between the face pair. The default is 50%. The position is the distance
between the faces that appear in the Face 1 and Face 2 boxes, starting from Face 1.
mid surface
face 1
face 2
face 3
4. When you use Find Face Pairs, you can specify a Recognition threshold to filter the results. The
Recognition threshold is based on combining the following:
• The Threshold Operator function (= equal, < less than, <= less than or equal to, > greater than, >=
greater than or equal to), is the mathematical operative.
• The Threshold Thickness is the wall thickness.
For example, you can set the system to recognize all suitable face pairs that have a wall thickness of
less than or equal to (<=) 3 millimeters. Any face pair not meeting this criteria is not included in the
results.
5. If necessary, under Options, click the Knit surfaces check box to clear the default which creates a knit
surface.
6. Click OK .
You can either add new face pairs, delete existing ones, or update face pairs.
2. Click OK .
3. Click OK .
To update face pairs:
1. Select a set in Face Pairs.
The face pair is displayed in Face 1 and Face 2.
2. Select another pair of offset faces in the graphics area.
NOTE: You can also amend one selection of the offset pair, provided the new face you select is offset to the
first face.
3. Click Update Pair to update Face pairs with the new set of faces.
4. Click OK .
Fill Surface
The Fill Surface feature constructs a surface patch with any number of sides, within a boundary defined by
existing model edges, sketches, or curves. You can use this feature to construct a surface to fill a gap in a model. You
can apply Fill Surface in one or more of the following cases:
• Correct a part that does not import correctly into SolidWorks (where there are missing faces).
• Fill the holes in a part used for core and cavity molding.
• Construct a surface for industrial design applications.
• Create a solid.
• Include features as separate entities, or merge those features.
Fill Surface includes the following capabilities in the PropertyManager.
Patch Boundary
Patch Boundary defines the edges of the patch you apply. Boundaries include the following properties and
capabilities.
• You can use surfaces or solid edges, as well as 2D or 3D sketches as boundaries for the patch.
• For all sketch boundaries, you can select only a Contact patch as the type of Curvature Control.
Curvature Control
Curvature Control defines the type of control you want to exert on the patch you create. The types of Curvature
Control include:
• Contact. Creates a surface within the selected boundary.
• Tangent. Creates a surface within the selected boundary, but maintains the tangency of the patch edges.
You can apply different types of Curvature Control in the same patch. Example
Optimize surface
Select the Optimize surface option with two, three, or four-sided surfaces. The Optimize surface option applies a
simplified surface patch that is similar to a lofted surface. Potential advantages of the optimized surface patch include
faster build times, and increased stability when used in conjunction with other features in the model.
Show preview
Display a shaded preview of the surface fill.
Preview mesh
Display a grid on the patch to help you visualize the curvature. The Preview mesh is available only when you select
Show preview.
6-164
Reverse Surface
Change the direction of the surface patch. The Reverse Surface button is dynamic, and only displays under these
conditions:
• All boundary curves are coplanar
• No constraint points exist
• No interior constraints
• Fill surface is non-planar
Example
Constraint Curves
Constraint Curves allow you to add slope control to the patch. They are used primarily with industrial design
applications. You can create a constraint curve using sketch elements such as sketch points or splines.
Click on the images below to see examples of applying Fill Surface
Resolution Control
If your fill surface is not smooth, you can improve its quality by adjusting the Resolution Control slider.
The Resolution Control is available only when the Optimize Surface check box is cleared.
The resolution is set to 1 by default. Change the setting to 2 or 4 to increase the number of patches defining the
surface. A higher setting improves the quality of the surface profile.
Changing the resolution increases the model size and processing time. You should not change the default setting
if your surface is satisfactory.
Options
You can create a solid model with the Filled Surface tool. Options include:
• Merge result
• Try to form solid
• Reverse direction
Merge result
The behavior for this option depends on the boundaries.
When all the boundaries belong to the same solid body, you can use the surface fill to patch the solid.
If at least one of the edges is an open sheet edge and you select Merge result, then the Surface Fill knits with the
surfaces to which the edges belong.
If all the boundary entities are open edges, then a solid may optionally be created.
Model without Filled Surface applied. Model with Filled Surface applied and
Note the features inside. Merge result selected. The surface fill joins
the solid, removing the features inside.
Model with Filled Surface applied and Merge result cleared. The surface fill
creates a new surface, and the features inside remain.
Reverse direction
When patching a solid with a fill surface there are often two possible results. Click Reverse direction to correct if the
fill surface displays in an unwanted direction.
6-166
Example of Using Alternate Face
Example of a solid model, using Contact as the Curvature Control.
The fill surface feature automatically selects a direction when you pick a boundary. In some cases, there is more than
one possible direction option. To choose other directions, select Alternate Face.
6-168
2. Click Filled Surface on the Surfaces toolbar, or Insert, Surface, Fill.
3. In the graphics area, under Patch Boundary, select each of the tangent edges around the hole.
The edges, along with the curvature type are listed in the Patch Boundaries box.
NOTE: In this case use Tangent to apply constraints to the patch.
4. Click OK .
Sketch1 Sketch2
3. Sketch3 - Sketch an arc to connect Sketch1 and Sketch2 on Plane2 (Top). Dimension and add the
necessary relations.
4. Create Plane4 (at angle to Plane1) and add sketch points (Sketch4), as shown, to use as constraint curves.
5. Create Plane5 (offset from Plane2) and sketch spline (Sketch5), as shown, to use as a constraint curve.
The edges, along with the curvature type are listed in the Patch Boundaries box.
NOTE: The curvature control defaults to Contact, since only contact surfaces are eligible with sketch
boundaries.
8. Under Constraint Curves, select Sketch4 and Sketch5 in the graphics area.
9. Click OK .
Three views of the industrial design example with fill surface applied
Trim Surface
You can use a surface, plane, or sketch as a trim tool to trim other surfaces where they intersect. You can also use a
surface in conjunction with additional surfaces, as mutual trim tools. Trim surface includes the following options:
• Trim type: Standard or Mutual.
• Keep selections Retains trimmed surfaces.
• Remove selections. Discards trimmed surfaces.
• Natural. Trims and forces the boundary edges to follow the shape of the surface.
• Linear. Trims and forces the boundary edges to follow a linear direction from the trim point.
• Split All. Displays all possible splits on the surface.
6-170
To trim a surface:
1. Create two surfaces which intersect at one or more points.
• In the graphics area, select a surface as the Pieces to keep , or as the Pieces to remove ,
based on the following:
o Keep selections. Select to retain the surface bodies listed under Pieces to keep.
o Remove selections. Select to discard the surface bodies listed under Pieces to remove.
5. Under Surface Split Options, select an item:
• Natural. Boundary edges follow shape of the surface.
• Linear. Boundary edges follow linear direction from trim point.
• Split All. Display all splits in the surface.
6. Click OK .
• In the graphics area, select the areas you want as the Pieces to keep , or as the
You can select one or more areas to keep, depending on the intersecting surfaces.
5. Under Surface Split Options, select an item:
• Natural. Boundary edges follow shape of the surface.
• Linear. Boundary edges follow linear direction from trim point.
• Split All. Display all splits in the surface.
6. Click OK .
Untrim Surface
With Untrim Surface, you can patch surface holes and external edges by extending an existing surface along its
natural boundaries. You can also extend the natural boundaries of the surface by a given percentage, or connect the
end points to fill the surface. Use the Untrim Surface tool with any imported surface or surfaces that you create.
Note: Untrim Surface extends an existing surface, whereas Surface Fill creates different surfaces, applies a patch
between multiple faces, uses constraint curves, and so on.
6-172
Example of Untrim Surface
Select the edges as shown and under Options, choose Extend edges
Select the edges as shown, and under Select edges as shown, and under Options,
Options, choose Extend edges. choose Connect endpoints.
Select the edge as shown, keep the Select the edge as shown, change the Distance
Distance at the default 0%. Under to 30%. Under Options, choose Extend
Options, choose Extend edges. edges.
Select the face, and under Options, choose Select the face, and under Options, choose
Internal edges. External edges. You can also select All edges
to untrim both internal and external edges.
Extend edges. If you select the edge as shown, the To constrain the surface extension, select
surface extends to its natural boundaries. both edges, as shown above.
4. Under Options, as the Edge untrim type, you can
accept the default Extend edges to extend all edges
to their natural boundaries. Or you can select both
edges and choose Connect endpoints, as shown at
right.
To create a surface extension that merges with the
original surface, select the Merge with original
check box (default).
To create a new, separate surface body, clear the
Merge with original check box. Both the original
and the new surface body appear in the
FeatureManager design tree.
Surface untrim, select both left edges and the inner edge. Surface untrim, select the face. Under
Under Options, select Connect endpoints. Options, select All edges. All edges are
extended to their natural boundaries.
6-174
Radiate Surface
Radiate surface works on edges, parting lines, or planar and non-planar curves.
To radiate a surface:
3. Click the Edges To Radiate box , then click a parting line, an edge, or a set of contiguous edges.
4. Note the arrow direction. To specify the opposite direction, click Flip Radiate Direction .
5. Select Propagate along tangent faces if the part has tangent faces and you want the surface to continue
around the part.
7. Click OK .
To hide bodies:
1. Open a document containing multiple surface or solid bodies.
4. Click OK .
The entities you selected remain hidden.
3. Click OK .
The translucent entities you selected are visible again.
You can also use the shortcut menu to hide a surface without using the PropertyManager to preview the entities you
select. To show the hidden surface again, click View, Hide/Show Bodies, select the translucent bodies in the graphics
• To hide or show an assembly component, click Hide/Show Component on the Assembly toolbar.
6-176
Delete Face
With Delete Face tool, you can do the following:
• Delete. Deletes a face from a surface body, or deletes one or more faces from a solid body to create surfaces.
• Delete and Patch. Deletes a face from a surface body or solid body and automatically patches and trims the
body.
• Delete and Fill. Deletes faces and generates a single face to close any gap.
4. Click OK .
The faces disappear.
3. Click OK .
The faces disappear, and the adjoining faces extend to form an unbroken surface.
3. Click OK .
The faces are deleted, and are filled by a single unbroken surface.
delete .
3. Under Options, click Delete.
4. Click OK .
The faces disappear, and a new DeleteFace1
surface body is added to the Surface Bodies
folder in the FeatureManager design tree.
6-178
Delete Hole
The Delete Hole dialog box lists any closed profile instances previously deleted from a surface. It allows you to
remove one or more instances, without deleting the entire Delete Hole feature from the FeatureManager design tree.
NOTE: All entities must be on the same body.
Valid. Both holes are on the same body. Invalid. Each set of holes is on a separate
body. You need to create two instances of
Delete Hole to remove all holes.
Replace Face
You can replace faces in a surface or solid body with new surface bodies. The replacement surface body does not
need to have the same boundaries as the old faces. When you replace a face, adjacent faces in the original body
automatically extend and trim to the replacement surface body, and the new face trims.
• Click the faces you want to replace to place them in the Target faces for replacement box.
The faces must be connected, but they do not have to be tangent. If you cannot see the faces, right-
click the replacement surface body and select Hide Surface Body.
6-180
• Click the Replacement surfaces box, then click the replacement surface body to place it in
the box. If the replacement surface body is hidden, select it in the FeatureManager design tree.
4. Click OK .
The faces are replaced, and the adjacent faces of the original body are trimmed and extended to fit. The new
face is trimmed to fit the adacent faces of the original body.
NOTE: If the replacement surface body is still visible, right-click it and select Hide Surface Body.
To replace more than one set of connected faces with surface bodies:
box. You do not have to click them in order, but you need to place the first set together in the
list.
• Click the second set of faces to place them in the Target faces for replacement box.
• Click to highlight the Replacement surfaces box, then click first the replacement surface
body for the first group of faces, then the replacement surface body for the second group of faces.
3. Click OK .
The faces are replaced, and the adjacent faces of the original body are trimmed and extended to fit. The new
faces are trimmed to fit the adjacent faces of the original body.
Sweeps
Sweep Overview
Sweep creates a base, boss, cut, or surface by moving a profile (section) along a path, according to these rules:
• The profile must be closed for a base or boss sweep feature; the profile may be open or closed for a surface
sweep feature.
• The path may be open or closed.
• The path may be a set of sketched curves contained in one sketch, a curve, or a set of model edges.
• The start point of the path must lie on the plane of the profile.
• Neither the section, the path, nor the resulting solid can be self-intersecting.
You can view the sweep using zebra stripes as you create the sweep. Place the pointer on the sweep, open the
shortcut menu, and select View zebra stripes. If you apply zebra stripes, when you create another sweep, or loft, or
add a loft section, the zebra stripes appear. Use the shortcut menu to clear View zebra stripes.
6-182
Sweeps can include:
• Simple sweeps
• Sweeps using guide curves
• Sweeps using multiple profiles
• Sweeps using thin features
Simple Sweep
Profile
• The profile must be closed for a base or boss sweep feature.
• The profile can be open or closed for a surface sweep feature.
Path
• The path can be open or closed.
• The path can be a set of sketched curves contained in one sketch, a curve, or a set of model edges.
• The start point of the path must lie on the plane of the profile.
Neither the section, the path, nor the resulting solid can be self-intersecting.
You can create a sweep using multiple profiles.
You can view the sweep using zebra stripes as you create it. Place the pointer on the sweep, open the shortcut menu,
and select Zebra stripes preview. If you apply zebra stripes, when you create another sweep, or loft, or add a loft
section, the zebra stripes appear. Use the shortcut menu to clear View zebra stripes.
1 = Profile
2 = Path
• Click Profile and select the profile sketch in the graphics area.
• Click Path and select the path sketch in the graphics area.
NOTE: If you preselect either the profile sketch or the path sketch, the sketch is displayed in the appropriate
box of the PropertyManager.
Under Options, clear Show preview if you do not want to display a shaded preview of the sweep.
Under Orientation and Twist Control, only Keep normal constant and Follow path apply to simple
sweeps. The other selections apply only to sweeps using a guide curve. When you select Follow path as the
Orientation/twist type, you can select parameters to stabilize the profiles when small and uneven curvature
fluctuations along the path cause the profiles to misalign.
6. Apply Start/End Tangency if needed.
7. You can create a Thin Feature sweep.
Thickness .
8. Click OK .
6-184
Sweeps Feature
A sweep creates a base, boss, cut, or surface by moving a profile (section) along a path.
You can view the sweep using zebra stripes as you create it. Place the pointer on the sweep, open the shortcut menu,
and select Zebra stripes preview. Note that if you apply zebra stripes, when you create another sweep, loft, or add a
loft section, the zebra stripes display. Use the shortcut menu to clear View zebra stripes.
Sweeps with guide curves. An option allows you to clear Merge smooth faces for sweeps with guide curves.
Clearing Merge smooth faces results in the following:
• The performance of sweeps with guide curves improves. Sweeps generate faster and merge between
adjacent geometry and edges.
• The swept body is segmented at all points where the guide curve or the path is not curvature continuous (see
the example below). Consequently, the lines and arcs in the guide curves are more accurately matched.
Merge smooth faces check box checked Merge smooth faces check box cleared
When you clear the Merge smooth faces check box, the potential exists that some features created
later might fail due to changed geometry.
Orientation/twist type option. When you select Follow path as the Orientation/twist type, options stabilize the
profiles when small and uneven curvature fluctuations along the path cause the profiles to misalign.
Profiles always maintain a normal to the path. Profile fluctuations are due to uneven curvature fluctuations along
the path. Unless you correct the fluctuations by selecting one of the Orientation/twist type options, the profiles
follow the path and shift to adjust to the misaligned path:
To create a sweep:
1. Sketch a profile and a path.
Profile
• The profile must be closed for a base or boss sweep feature.
• The profile may be open or closed for a surface sweep feature.
Path
• The path may be open or closed.
• The path may be a set of sketched curves contained in one sketch, a curve, or a set of model edges.
• The start point of the path must lie on the plane of the profile.
Neither the section, the path, nor the resulting solid can be self-intersecting.
• Click Path and select the path sketch in the graphics area.
If you preselect either the profile sketch or the path sketch, the sketch is displayed in the
appropriate box of the PropertyManager.
Clear the Show preview check box if you want to only display the profile and path.
6. Click OK .
6-186
Sweeps with Mulltiple Profiles
If you have already created the profiles for a sweep with guide curves, skip to step 4.
3. Sketch the sweep profile. See some recommendations for creating sweeps with guide curves.
You can create a sweep using multiple profiles.
The Pierce Point relation is not required for sweeps with guide curves. You can use guide curves
without specifying a pierce point between the guide curve and the profile sketch. You can also create the
guide curves and the profile sketches in any order.
4. Click one of the following:
• Swept Boss/Base on the Features toolbar or Insert, Boss/Base, Sweep
• Swept Cut on the Features toolbar, or Insert, Cut, Sweep
• Swept Surface on the Surfaces toolbar or Insert, Surface, Sweep
5. Under Profile and Path, do the following:
• Click Profile and select the profile sketch in the graphics area.
• Click Path and select the path sketch in the graphics area.
NOTE: If you preselect either the profile sketch or the path sketch, the sketch is displayed in the
appropriate box of the PropertyManager.
6. Click Options to apply the following, if necessary:
• Clear the Show preview check box if you want to only display the profile, path and guide curves.
• Orientation/twist Type
If the sweep includes guide curves, end tangency is controlled by choosing either: Follow path and
1st guide curve or Follow 1st and 2nd guide curves.
• Maintain tangency
If the sweep section has tangent segments, selecting this option causes the corresponding surfaces
in the resulting sweep to be tangent. Faces that can be represented as a plane, cylinder, or cone are
maintained. Other adjacent faces are merged, and the sections are approximated. Sketch arcs can be
converted to splines.
• Advanced smoothing
If the sweep section has circular or elliptical arcs, the sections are approximated, resulting in
smoother surfaces. Sketch arcs can be converted to splines.
7. Under Guide Curves, do the following:
• Select the Guide Curves in the graphics area.
• Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order in which to use the guide curves.
• Click Show Sections , and click the arrows to view and troubleshoot the profile by
Section Number.
• If necessary, clear the Merge smooth faces check box. Example
8. Click Start/End Tangency to apply the following, if necessary:
• None. No tangency is applied.
• Path tangent. The sweep is normal to the path at the start or end.
• Direction vector. The sweep is tangent to a selected linear edge or axis, or to the normal of a
selected plane. Select Direction vector, then click the edge, axis, or plane.
• All faces. The sweep is tangent to the adjacent faces of existing geometry at the start or end. This
selection is only available when the sweep is attached to existing geometry.
NOTE: Tangency options for sweeps are similar to tangency options for lofts. See Loft Tangency
Options for examples.
9. Click OK .
6-188
Recommendations for Sweeps with Guide Curves
The following recommendations will help you when creating a sweep with guide curves.
Relations
Note that relations such as Horizontal or Vertical may be added automatically as you sketch the section. These
relations influence the shape of the intermediate sections, and may produce results that are not what you want.
Use Display/Delete Relations to delete the unwanted relations. This allows the intermediate sections to twist as
desired.
Guide curves
Guide curves may meet at a common point, which is the apex of the swept surface.
You can use any of the following items as a guide curve: sketched curves, model edges, or curves.
Sweeps Options
Sweep Options
Under Options, you can do the following:
Orientation/twist Type
• With a simple sweep, end tangency is controlled by choosing either Follow path or Keep normal constant.
• When you select Follow path as the Orientation/twist type, options stabilize the profiles when small and
uneven curvature fluctuations along the path cause the profiles to misalign.
• If the sweep includes guide curves, end tangency is controlled by choosing either: Follow path and 1st
guide curve or Follow 1st and 2nd guide curves.
Maintain tangency
If the sweep section has tangent segments, selecting this option causes the corresponding surfaces in the resulting
sweep to be tangent. Faces that can be represented as a plane, cylinder, or cone are maintained. Other adjacent faces
are merged, and the sections are approximated. Sketch arcs can be converted to splines.
Advanced smoothing
If the sweep section has circular or elliptical arcs, the sections are approximated, resulting in smoother surfaces.
Sketch arcs can be converted to splines.
Align with end faces
Continues the sweep profile to the last face encountered by the path.
Align with end faces selected Align with end faces not selected
Top of helix
Bottom of helix
6-190
Example of Sweep with Thin Features
Merge smooth faces check box checked Merge smooth faces check box cleared
The entities that comprise the Path for sweeps with guide curves need not be tangent.
NOTE: When you clear the Merge smooth faces check box, the potential exists that some features created
later might fail due to the changed geometry.
6-192
Start and End Tangency Options for Sweeps
With a simple sweep, end tangency is controlled by choosing either Follow path or Keep normal constant in the
Orientation/twist Type list.
When you use guide curves to create a sweep, you have additional options for controlling the tangency at the ends of
the path. You specify the Start tangency type and End tangency type under Start/End Tangency. These tangency
options are only effective when you use guide curves in the sweep.
Choose from these start and end tangency types:
• None. No tangency is applied.
• Path tangent. The sweep is normal to the path at the start or end.
• Direction vector. The sweep is tangent to a selected linear edge or axis, or to the normal of a selected plane.
Click the Direction vector button, then click the edge, axis, or plane.
• All faces. The sweep is tangent to the adjacent faces of existing geometry at the start or end. This selection is
only available when the sweep is attached to existing geometry. All faces is available only as a Start
tangency type.
Select Follow path and the section remains at the Select Keep normal constant and the section
same angle with respect to the path at all times. remains parallel to the beginning section at all times.
When you select Follow path, options stabilize the profiles when small and uneven curvature
fluctuations along the path cause the profiles to misalign.
Select Follow path and 1st guide curve and the Select Follow 1st and 2nd guide curves and the
twist of the intermediate sections is determined by twist of the intermediate section is determined by the
the vector from the path to the first guide curve. The vector from the first to the second guide curve. The
angle between the horizontal plane and the vector angle between the horizontal plane and the vector
remains constant in the sketch planes of all of the remains constant in the sketch planes of all of the
intermediate sections. intermediate sections.
Profiles always maintain a normal to the path. Profile fluctuations are due to uneven curvature fluctuations
along the path. Unless you correct the fluctuations by selecting one of the new options, the profiles follow the path
and shift to adjust to the misaligned path.
• Direction vector. Select a plane, planar face, or line to define the vector. When you select a plane or planar
face, the normal of the plane or planar face is applied. If you select a line, the line direction provides the
direction vector.
The section plane (along which the sweep is created), always includes the direction vector as its X-axis. The
normal of the plane, the Z-axis, is the plane that contains the direction vector and the path tangent at that
point.
The Front plane (shown) is the Direction vector. The profiles do not fluctuate,
remaining aligned along the entire path, and creating a smooth sweep.
• All faces. If the path includes neighboring faces, you can select All faces. When the path includes 2
alternative faces, click Next Face to switch faces.
The section plane (along which the sweep is created), always includes the face normal as its Y-axis. The
normal of the plane, the Z-axis, is the tangent of the path at that point.
All faces selected (as shown). The profiles do not fluctuate, remaining aligned along
the entire path, and creating a smooth sweep.
6-194
Thicken
If the surface you want to thicken is comprised of multiple adjacent surfaces, you must first knit the surfaces
together before you thicken the surface.
To thicken a surface:
1. Click Thicken on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Base (or Boss), Thicken.
2. Under Thicken Parameters, do the following:
• Enter the Thickness . Note that when you select Thicken Both Sides , it adds the
Thickness you specify to both sides.
NOTE: To create a solid, click Create solid from enclosed volume. This option is available only
if you created a volume that is fully enclosed by surfaces.
3. Click OK .
1. Click Thickened Cut on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Cut, Thicken.
3. Click OK .
The Bodies to Keep dialog box appears, which gives you the option to create a multibody part.
4. You can choose All bodies or Selected bodies.
If you chose Selected bodies, the dialog box expands to display the number of bodies available. Click the
check boxes of the bodies you want to keep.
5. Click OK.
6-196
To change the thicken feature:
You can edit the side to thicken, the thickness of the feature, and the bodies you selected to keep.
1. Right click the feature’s name in the FeatureManager design tree and select Edit Feature.
2. Examine the preview, and if necessary select one of the following to change the side to thicken:
• Thicken Side 1
• Thicken Side 2
4. Click OK .
The Bodies to Keep dialog box appears.
5. Change the bodies to keep, as necessary.
6. Click OK.
3. Click Cut with Surface on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Cut, With Surface.
In the PropertyManager, under Surface Cut Parameters, choose the Selected surface for cut.
4. Note the preview arrow, indicating which side of the part will be cut away and click Flip Cut to
reverse the direction of the cut, if necessary.
5. Click OK .
6. To hide the surface, if desired, right-click the Surface feature in the FeatureManager design tree and select
Hide.
You can also cut a part with a surface by using the Up To Surface option when extruding a cut.
Analysis of Features
Criteria
• Reverse Direction . Change the direction of the draw normal to the Direction of Pull (plane or face)
you selected.
• Draft Angle. Enter a reference draft angle, and then compare that reference angle to those currently existing
on the model.
Categories
The results displayed when you click Calculate depend on the type of draft analysis you select. Each time you
change the type of analysis or the parameters, you need to re-calculate.
Face Classification
In the graphics area, each face displays a color based on the Draft angle you selected.
Draft analysis results listed under Color Settings are grouped into four categories, when you specify Face
classification:
• Positive draft. Displays any faces with a positive draft, based
on the reference draft angle you specified. A positive draft
means the angle of the face, with respect to the direction of
pull, is more than the reference angle.
• Negative draft. Displays any faces with a negative draft,
based on the reference draft angle you specified. A negative
draft means the angle of the face, with respect to the direction
of the pull, is less than the negative reference angle.
• Draft required. Displays any faces that require correction.
These are faces with an angle greater than the negative
reference angle, and less than the positive reference angle.
• Straddle faces. Displays any faces that contain both positive
and negative types of draft. Typically, these are faces that
requires you to create a split line.
NOTE: Display colors may vary. The first time you use draft
analysis, the system uses default colors. If you modify the
colors, the system will use the new colors you specified.
6-198
Find Steep Faces
This option is used only to analyze the curved faces on a model where a draft was added. Based on the reference
angle, there are points on a curved face that meet the criteria, and other points on the curve that do not meet the
criteria specified by the reference angle. On some models that include curved faces, all areas along the curve may
meet or exceed the reference angle. In such cases, selecting Find steep faces will not register any results, since any
point along the curved face meets or exceeds the reference angle.
• Positive draft. Displays any steep faces with a positive draft, based on the reference draft angle you
specified.
• Negative draft. Displays any steep faces with a negative draft, based on the reference draft angle you
specified.
Surfaces
When analyzing the draft for surfaces, an additional Face classification criterion is added: Surface faces with draft.
Since a surface includes an inside and an outside face, surface faces are not added to the numerical part of the
classification (Positive draft and Negative draft). Surface faces with draft lists all positive and negative surfaces
that include draft.
Negative draft Positive draft No steep faces, as all points along curved
face are greater than the reference angle
In the examples below, a draft analysis using Face classification was applied to the model.
• Number of faces included in the category, shown as the number on the color swatch for that category
• Save the color classifications with the part when you click OK .
Color Contour
Color contour displays the uniform or graduated changes within each face on the model as the angle on the face
changes. Based on the reference angle (Draft angle ), the scale in the PropertyManager displays a positive to
negative range, with 0 degrees at the center. You can select two display modes:
• Uniform display. The uniform display uses three colors to represent the areas within the faces that have
positive draft, negative draft, and that require draft. You can modify the three colors.
• Transition display. Select the Gradual transition check box to display the variations in the angles on the
model where the draft is required.
TIP: You can see the individual faces of the model during a color contour calculation by specifying Display
6-200
Draft Analysis
Using the settings in draft analysis, you can verify draft angles on model faces or you can examine angle changes
within a face.
1. Open the model, and click in the Mold Tools toolbar, or click Tools, Draft Analysis.
• Note the draw direction. To change the draw direction, click Reverse Direction . You can also
use the handle in the graphics area to reverse direction.
3. Examine the results. Note that the colors may not exactly match with the images below, and will depend on
your computer settings.
Draft Required. Displays faces that require correction. These are faces with an angle less than the specified
draft angle.
If the model includes curved faces and you checked the Find steep faces check box, examine steep faces as
well.
When analyzing the draft for surfaces, an additional Face classification criterion is added: Surface faces
with draft. Since a surface includes an inside and an outside face, surface faces are not added to the
numerical part of the classification (Positive draft and Negative draft). Surface faces with draft lists all
positive and negative surfaces that include draft.
Straddle faces. Displays faces that include a combination of positive and negative draft.
TIP: To examine draft angles within a face in more detail, use a contour map. Perform the analysis without
using Face classification. See "To apply a contour map of draft angles" below.
4. You can change the default colors, and toggle between Show or Hide .
NOTE: You can change colors or toggle the display before or after you complete the steps under Analysis
Parameters.
• To change colors: Click Edit Color, select a color from the Color dialog box, and click OK.
• To Show/Hide a draft category: Click Show or Hide to toggle. The default is Show
TIP: You can combine the Show or Hide function with the number on the color swatch
in each draft category to help identify small faces that have a draft problem.
5. Click OK to exit the draft analysis. If you want to save the draft analysis colors with the part, click OK.
The next time you open the part, it will use the colors used with the draft analysis.
6-202
To apply a contour map of draft angles:
1. Open the model, and click in the Mold Tools toolbar, or click Tools, Draft Analysis.
2. Under Analysis Parameters, do the following:
• Select a plane, a planar face, a linear edge or an axis from the graphics area to indicate the
Direction of Pull.
• Note the draw direction. To change the draw direction, click Reverse Direction .
4. Under Color Settings, you can toggle between two display modes, and change the colors.
• Clear the Gradual transition check box to display a uniform color gradient. This is the default
display.
• Check the Gradual transition check box to display color variations that reflect the transitions in
the draft angles on the model. This displays the range of angles (positive draft through negative
draft), based on the Draft Angle you specified. Gradual transition is especially useful with
complex models with numerous variations in the draft angle.
TIP: You can see the individual faces of the model during a color contour calculation by specifying
Gradual transition check box cleared Gradual transition check box checked.
5. To change the color display, click Edit Color, select a color from the Color dialog box, and click OK.
NOTE: If you selected Gradual transition, you can change only the colors for Positive draft and Negative
draft.
6. If necessary, under Draft Angle, enter a new value to view angular changes in smaller steps.
7. If you changed the values under Draft Angle or changed the type of display, click Calculate to re-examine
the results.
8. Click OK .
6-204
Example of Draft Analysis
Deviation Analysis
The Deviation Analysis tool is a diagnostic tool that calculates the angle between faces. You can select a single edge
or a series of edges. The edges can be between faces on a surface, or any edges on a solid.
The analysis is based on the number of sample points that you select along the edges. You can examine operations
which fail or have the potential for failure in any of the following situations:
• Molds. Investigate problems with mold tooling along the split line of the mold, in conjunction with the
Draft Analysis tool.
Example
• Fillets. Identify potential problems along tangent faces where a fillet operation fails.
Example
• Tangency requirements. Check along the edges of lofts, sweeps, or surface fills and verify that tangency
requirements are met.
• Maximum deviation. Identify problem areas along the edges of sweeps, lofts, or surface fills where there is
maximum deviation.
Example
After you use the Deviation Analysis tool, you can modify the results by controlling the appropriate entities within
the model. For example, when you examine an edge along a surface fill, deviation analysis results vary according to
the following:
• Curvature Control. Select Contact or Tangent. Normally, Tangent yields a lower deviation between
adjoining faces.
• Optimize surface. Use the standard patch, or, with two, three, and four sided edges, apply the Optimize
surface option to use the more efficient simplified patch.
3. Under Analysis Parameters , select the edges in the graphics area that you want to examine.
4. Use the slider to select the Number of Sample Points to include in the analysis.
NOTE: The number of points is based on the size of the window client area. If you select more than one
edge, the sample points are distributed across the selected edges, proportional to the edge length.
5. Click Calculate.
The colored arrows display the amount of deviation. The results appear for the following criteria
between the adjacent faces:
• Maximum Deviation - the maximum deviation error along the selected edge.
• Minimum Deviation - the minimum deviation error along the selected edge.
• Average Deviation - the average between the maximum and the minimum values along the
selected edge.
NOTE: You can change the display colors for Maximum Deviation and for Minimum Deviation. To change the
colors, click Edit Color to display the Color palettes, select a color for each deviation type, and click OK or
Calculate to apply the new colors.
6-206
Example of Deviation Analysis with Mold Part
Manipulation of Features
6-208
4. To move a feature, you can either:
Move/Copy Bodies
With multibody parts, you can move, rotate, and copy bodies and surfaces.
1. Click Move/Copy Bodies on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Features, Move/Copy.
The Move/Copy Body PropertyManager appears.
2. Select the surface or the body in the graphics area.
The name of the selected item appears under Bodies to Move/Copy.
3. Under Translate:
4. Click OK .
The surface or body appears in the moved position.
Example of move body parts and move multibody parts
1. Click Move/Copy Bodies on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Features, Move/Copy.
2. Select a surface or a body in the graphics area.
3. Under Rotate:
• Enter values for X Rotation Origin , Y Rotation Origin , and Z Rotation Origin .
A square marker appears in the graphics area to show the location of the origin.
• Enter values for X Rotation Angle (angle around the X axis), Y Rotation Angle , and Z
Rotation Angle .
- or -
• Click to highlight the Rotation Reference Entity box .
• Select an edge in the graphics area to define the rotation axis.
• Enter an Angle .
The original position of the surface or the body and a preview of the rotated surface or the body appear.
4. Click OK .
The surface or body appears in the rotated position.
Example of rotate solid bodies or surfaces
Preview of move multibody solid parts Preview of move multibody solid parts
Delta X: 10mm
Translation Reference: vertex indicated
Delta Y: 40mm
Delta Z: -30mm To Vertex: vertex indicated
6-210
Preview of move multibody surface parts Preview of move multibody surface parts
Delta X: 20mm
Translation Reference: Point at origin
Delta Y: 50mm
Delta Z: 0mm To Vertex: Vertex indicated
Preview of rotate multibody solid parts (the arrow Preview of rotate multibody solid parts
indicates the X-Y rotation origin)
Rotation Reference: Point at sketch origin,
X Rotation Origin: 10mm as indicated
Preview of rotate surface (the arrow indicates the Preview of rotate surface
X-Y rotation origin)
Translation Reference: Point at sketch
X Rotation Origin: 40mm origin, as indicated
Preview of rotate and copy multibody solid parts Preview of rotate and copy multibody solid parts
Preview of rotate and copy surface Preview of rotate and copy multibody surfaces
6-212
Combine Bodies
You can combine multiple solid bodies to create a singled-bodied part or another multibody part. There are three
ways to combine multiple solid bodies:
• Add. Combines solids of all selected bodies to create a single body.
5. Click OK .
6. Click OK .
Delete Body
You can delete bodies using the Delete Body feature.
1. Click Delete Solid/Surface on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Features, Delete Body.
The Body-Delete PropertyManager appears.
2. Under Bodies to Delete, select the bodies from the graphics area.
3. Click OK .
Choose Option
The Choose Option dialog box appears when you select several entities on a model and press Delete. The dialog box
is dynamic, with the appropriate selections available depending on what entities you select on the model. Options
include the following:
• Delete Feature. Deletes the entire feature and any associated features.
• Delete Face(s). Displays the Delete Face PropertyManager.
• Delete Hole(s). Deletes any holes created with a sketch, the Simple Hole, or the Hole Wizard features.
From the Delete Face PropertyManager, you can select one or more faces on the solid model to create
surfaces.
For example, if you select the two items on the model, as shown below, and press Delete, the Choose Option
dialog box appears. Because the Hole Wizard holes were drilled on the non-planar surface prior to creating the
offset surface feature, the holes on the offset surface do not appear on the FeatureManager design tree.
6-214
Select Detailed Preview
Detailed Preview is available from the PropertyManager with the following features:
• Ribs
• Extrudes
• Draft
You can use the Detailed Preview PropertyManager with multibody parts to enhance detail and select entities to
display:
• Highlight new or modified faces. Inspect what was changed from the previous edit. New or modified faces
are highlighted in color, as opposed to appearing shaded.
• Show only new or modified bodies. Display only new or modified bodies. All other bodies are hidden.
Wrap
This feature wraps a sketch onto a planar or non-planar face. You can create a planar face from cylindrical, conical, or
extruded models. You can also select a planar profile to add multiple, closed spline sketches. The wrap feature
supports contour selection and sketch reuse.
The sketch plane must be tangent to the face, allowing the face normal and the sketch normal to be parallel at
the closest point.
b. Select a non-planar face in the graphics area for Face for Wrap Sketch .
6-216
4. Under Pull Direction, if Emboss or Deboss is selected, click Pull Direction , and select a line, linear
edge, or a plane. If you select a plane, the direction is normal to the plane.
5. Click OK .
6-218
7
Parts
Parts Overview
The 3D part is the basic building block of the SolidWorks mechanical design software. This section describes parts
and some ways to work with them, including:
• Modeling solid multibody parts
• Applying custom properties
• Editing properties of features and faces
• Editing, moving, and copying
• Using color
• Controlling material properties
• Using equations
• Dependency editing using suppress and unsuppress
• Derived parts and external references
• Splitting parts
• Displaying a section view of the model
• Annotating parts
• Specifying lighting characteristics and material properties
Edit Definition
In a parts document, you can perform the following types of feature editing operations:
• Edit the definition, the sketch, or the properties of a feature.
• View the parent and child relationships of a feature.
• Use the feature handles to move and resize features.
• Control the access to selected dimensions.
• Change the order in which features are reconstructed when the part is rebuilt (see Drag and Drop Features).
• Roll back the part to the state it was in before a selected feature was added.
To perform some of these operations, you use the icons in the FeatureManager design tree, where the features are
listed in the order in which they are created.
See also color and appearance of parts.
7-2
Dynamic Feature Editing
You can see a dynamic feature preview when you drag the entities of a sketch, either with or without opening the
sketch itself.
The preview updates when you release the mouse button after dragging.
NOTE: Even though the fillet feature was created separately from the cut extrude, it moves and changes
size with the cut extrude because of parent and child relations.
Copying Features
You can copy features from one face to another on the same model. You can also copy features from model to model.
To copy a feature:
1. With your cursor highlighting the feature, hold down Ctrl and drag the feature where needed. To copy more
than one feature, hold down Ctrl as you select the features.
2. Drop the feature on the same face or to a different face.
If the feature includes locating dimensions or relations that restrict its movement, a dialog box is displayed.
You can Delete the relations or dimension, Dangle them, or Cancel copy.
2. Click the dangling dimension and drag the red handle to a new attachment point. As you drag, the
pointer is displayed until you are on an edge or a vertex that is suitable to re-attach the dimension.
Cut extrude feature with Copy of cut extrude feature Red handle indicates the dangling
location dimensions with dangling dimensions attachment point
3. Release the pointer to re-attach the dimension to the new edge or vertex.
Tile the windows, then drag the features from one window to another, or use the Copy and Paste
tools on the Standard toolbar.
Color of Parts
You can apply a color to the entire part, selected features (including surfaces or curves), or selected model faces. You
can also modify the color by manipulating the shaded appearance of the model.
NOTE: Color selections made with the Edit Color tool supercedes colors set on the Document Properties tab.
7-4
To change the color of selected features or the entire part:
1. Select each feature from the FeatureManager design tree or from the graphics area (use Ctrl to select
multiple features).
2. Click Edit Color on the Standard toolbar, and select a color from the Color palette or select a Custom
color.
3. If you selected items from the graphics area, in Apply to select Face, Feature, Body, or Part.
4. Click Apply to see a preview then click OK.
All features selected on the Color applied to all features Color applied to selected
model features
Ambient. Slider set to minimum (default Shininess. Slider set close to maximum
is maximum) (default is 1/3 of maximum)
7-6
Edit Color
Use Edit Color to change the color of a face, feature, part, or assembly when in shaded mode.
NOTE: Colors selelections made with the following procedures supercede colors set on the Document Properties tab.
NOTE: To remove the color layers that you applied, click Undo or click Edit, Undo Edit Color.
Entity Property
Displays the properties of faces, surfaces, or edges.
Change Color
To change the color for the selected face when in Shaded view, click this button. Select a color from the color blocks
or create a color with the custom color palette.
7-8
Advanced Properties
Use the slider controls to change the material display properties of the selected face. For example, you can make the
face more or less transparent (Transparency), or control how much light is projected from the face (Emission). The
material display properties are independent of color. You can also combine the controls in the Advanced Properties
dialog box with lighting, to create different effects.
System default setting for all sliders Diffuse slider set to minimum (0%)
Multibody Parts
Multibody Overview
Part documents can now contain multiple solid bodies. A folder named Solid Bodies appears in the
FeatureManager design tree when there are solid bodies in a single part document. The number of solid bodies in the
part document is displayed in parentheses next to the Solid Bodies folder.
You can manipulate multibody solids the same ways you manipulate single solid bodies. For example, you can add
and modify features, and change the names and colors of each solid body.
You can hide and show solid bodies in the FeatureManager design tree. You can create multiple solid bodies from a
single feature with the following commands:
• Extrude boss and cut (including thin features)
• Revolve boss and cut (including thin features)
• Sweep boss and cut (including thin features)
• Surface cut
• Boss and cut thicken
• Cavity
Modeling techniques that you can use in a multibody environment include the following:
• Bridging
• Local Operations
• Symmetry Modeling
• Body Intersection
• Tool Body Modeling
• Multibody Versus Assemblies
7-10
To save an assembly as a multibody part document:
1. Open an assembly document.
2. Click File, Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Set the Save as type to Part (*.prt, *.sldprt).
A set of options appears at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. Select one of the following:
Modeling Techniques
Body Intersection
For the body intersection multibody technique, you use the Combine feature and its Common option. Body
intersection is a quick way to create complex parts with very few operations, which can result in faster performance.
The operation takes multiple solid bodies that overlap one another and leaves only the intersecting volumes of the
bodies. For most models that can be represented fully by two or three drawing views, this technique can be used by
intersecting either two or three extruded solids. The extrusion sketches are the solid lines represented in the two or
three views. The following example shows this technique with the intersection of two extrusions.
And then select the Common option of the Combine feature to use only the overlapping material of the base part.
Bridging
Bridging is a commonly used technique in a multbody environment. Bridging creates a solid that connects multiple
solid bodies. This technique is useful when you create portions of the model first and create the connecting geometry
afterwards.
For example, when designing a golf club, you might know the specifics of the head and shaft design, but not
necessarily how they are connected. You can design the head and the shaft first, then bridge the two bodies.
Local Operations
You use local operations when you want to perform operations on certain portions of a mulitbody model, but not on
others. For example, you design a double-ended measuring cup. You need to shell the two cups and fillet them.
However, you do not want to shell the piece that connects the two cups. You can create the part and perform the
feature operations on the separate bodies.
When modeling the double ended measuring cups, first create the cups as two separate solid bodies.
7-12
Lastly, fillet the edges.
Symmetry Modeling
Symmetry modeling simplifies the creation of axis-symmetric parts and also speeds performance for these types of
parts. In this approach you make one symmetric body, pattern the bodies to obtain the remaining geometry, then use
the Combine feature to glue all of the bodies together. You can use multiple patterns and combine features to create
an entire model.
For instance, the example below shows the design progression of a symmetrical part.
Controlling Parts
Equations
Creates mathematical relations between model dimensions, using dimension names as variables. When using
equations in an assembly, you can set equations between parts, between a part and a sub-assembly, with mating
dimensions, and so forth.
When you delete a feature or dimension that is used in an equation, you have the option of deleting the equation or
not.
NOTE: Dimensions driven by equations cannot be changed by editing the dimension value in the model.
7-14
To add an equation:
7. Click OK, then click or Edit, Rebuild to update the model. (All equations are solved before the
geometry is regenerated.)
An equation folder appears in the FeatureManager design tree. Right-click the folder to delete or edit
existing equations or add a new equation to the document.
NOTE: When using any trig function in an equation or dimension dialogue, the value of the angle is
interpreted as radians. For example, sin(90) is evaluated as .89 (90radians) not 1.0 (90deg).
To edit equations:
1. Click or Tools, Equations, and click Edit All, or right-click and select Edit equation.
2. Edit the equations. Each equation must be on a separate line, and dimension names must be enclosed in
quotes.
3. Click OK to close the Edit Equations window.
4. Click OK to close the Equations window.
To edit an equation:
1. Click Equations or click Tools, Equations and then click Edit All.
- or -
Right-click the Equations folder , and select Edit Equation.
2. In the Edit Equations dialog box, edit the text of the equations as needed, and click OK. The revised
equation is displayed in the Equations dialog box. You can also cut and paste equations here to change the
order, if necessary.
If you make a mistake, click Undo to clear each consecutive value in the New Equation dialog box. You can
clear one value each time you click Undo.
To delete an equation:
Comments in Equations
You can add comments to equations, to document your design intent. You can also use comment syntax to prevent an
equation from being evaluated.
7-16
To add a comment to a new equation:
Equation Status
When you delete a feature or a dimension that is used in an equation, the software asks you if you want to delete the
equation also. Because the order of solving equations is important, you may prefer to keep the equation, and edit it
later.
If you keep the equation, it has Not Solved status, and is marked with a red exclamation point in the Equations
dialog box. Equations with Solved status are marked with green check marks .
When you rename an assembly that includes an equation between assembly components, the equation is marked with
a Read Only status .
Shared Values
Using shared values, enables you to link dimension values using named variables.
You can set the value of several dimensions to be equal without using multiple equations or relations. When
dimensions are linked in this way, any member of the group can be used as a driving dimension. Changing any one of
the linked values changes all others to which it is linked.
The variable name you specify becomes the name of the linked dimensions, and appears in the Name box of the
Dimension Properties dialog box.
The two linked dimensions are the side of the cube (25) and the depth of the cut extrude feature
(25). When you change the side of the cube to 10, the linked value changes accordingly.
Measure
Measures distance, angle, radius, and size of and between lines, points, surfaces, and planes in sketches, 3D models,
assemblies, or drawings. When you measure the distance between two points, the delta x, y, and z distances are also
displayed. When you select a vertex or sketch point, the x, y, and z coordinates are displayed. See Coordinate
Systems.
In Detached drawings, if the model is not loaded, all measurements are reported as 2D projected data.
3. Select the items to measure.
Right-click an edge to use the Select Other, Select Midpoint, Select Tangency, Select Loop, or Clear
Selections commands.
The selected items appear in the Selected items list, and appropriate values are displayed in the
Measurements box. New measurements update dynamically when you change selections.
If you select a curve, one of the measured values is chord length. Chord length is the distance between the
end points of the curve.
7-18
If you select a single entity, the size of the entity If you select two entities, the smallest distance
(the length of an edge, the area of a face, and so between the entities is displayed in the
on) is displayed in the Measurements box. Measurements box.
If a valid measurement cannot be performed with the selected entities, a message in the Measurements box
states: Invalid combination of selected entities.
4. To delete an item from the Selected items list, click the item’s name in the list and press the Delete key, or
click the selected item again in the graphics area.
5. To clear all items from the Selected items list, right-click in the graphics area, and select Clear Selections.
6. To display the results based on a coordinate system that you defined, select the name from the Output
coordinate system list.
7. To display the results in scientific notation or using different measurement units than the units specified for
the active document, click Options to display the Measurement Options dialog box.
To change other material properties, click Tools, Options, on the Document Properties tab, select Material
Properties.
8. To temporarily turn off the measure function, right-click in the graphics area, and choose Select from the
menu.
To turn the measure function back on, click inside the Measure dialog box.
9. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Measurement Options
Use the Measurement Options dialog box to modify measurement units and the material density of parts.
Units
You can change the measurement units.
• Use Length unit for linear dimensions.
• Use Angular unit for angular dimensions.
• Select the Scientific notation check box to display measurements in scientific notation.
When you change the Length unit, the dialog box reacts dynamically depending on which Length unit you select.
For example, if you select microinches, mils, inches, or feet & inches, you can also select Fractions, Denominator,
and Round to nearest fraction.
Display Units
To display the results with units other than the units specified for the active document, select one of the following:
• View measurement settings. Displays the units specified in the Measurement Options dialog box.
• View global settings. Displays the units specified for the active document set in Tools, Options, Document
Properties, Units.
• View system defaults. Displays the system default units for new documents set in the document template.
Material Properties
In Material Properties, select Density to change the density of the material for this document. You can enter the
density value using any units. For example, if the units of the part are grams and millimeters, you can enter a density
value using pounds and inches. The software converts the value to the document’s units when you click OK.
You can also change the density, as well as change options for cross hatch patterns through the Tools menu. Click
Tools, Options, on the Document Properties, tab click Material Properties.
Accuracy Level
You can select between two accuracy level settings:
• Default mass/section property precision. Calculation used in versions previous to 2003 of the SolidWorks
software.
• Maximum property precision (Slower). Provides greater accuracy of the calculation, but the computation
is slower.
Dependency Editing
You can suppress a feature so you can work on the model with the selected feature temporarily removed from the
model. Suppressing a feature not only removes it from the display, but also from any calculations in which it may be
involved. Rebuilding complex models occurs faster when features with a large amount of detail are suppressed. The
Features toolbar contains the following tools to suppress and unsuppress features of the model. See Suppress and
unsuppress.
Suppression is governed by the parent and child relations of the features.
Dependency editing is one way to control parts. Others methods of controlling parts include:
• Rollback
• Configurations
• Design tables
7-20
Suppress and Unsuppress Features
To suppress a feature:
1. Select the feature in the FeatureManager design tree, or select a face of the feature in the graphics area. To
select multiple features, hold down Ctrl as you select.
To unsuppress a feature:
1. Select the suppressed feature in the FeatureManager design tree.
2. Click Unsuppress with Dependents on the Features toolbar, or click Edit, Unsuppress with
Dependents.
The selected feature and any features that are dependent on it are returned to the model.
- or -
1. Select the child feature in the FeatureManager design tree.
2. Click Unsuppress with Dependents on the Features toolbar, or click Edit, Unsuppress with
Dependents.
The selected feature and its parent feature are returned to the model.
Derived Parts
You can create a new part directly from an existing part. The new part, called a derived part, has the original part as its
first feature, and it is linked to that part by means of an external reference. This means that any changes you make to
the original part are reflected in the derived part.
When a part has an external reference, its name in the FeatureManager design tree is followed by an arrow ->. To
see the name, location, and status of the externally referenced document, right-click the derived part, and select List
External Refs.
There are three types of derived parts:
• Insert part
• Mirror part
• Derived component part
Insert Part
Use Insert Part to insert one or more base parts multiple times into a part document. Under Locate Part, select the
Launch Move Dialog check box on the Insert Part PropertyManager to define a location for the inserted part. When
you insert more than one part, the Locate Part PropertyManager appears automatically.
To insert a part:
1. With a part document open, click Insert Part on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Part.
2. Browse to a part document and click Open.
The Insert Part PropertyManager appears.
3. Under Transfer, select any combination of the following:
• Axis. Transfers the axis information.
• Plane. Transfers all planes from the original part.
• Cosmetic Thread. Transfers cosmetic threads.
• Surface. Transfers surfaces.
4. Click OK .
Mirror Part
Mirror Part creates a mirrored version of an existing part. This is a good way to create a left-hand version and a
right-hand version of a part. Because the mirrored version is derived from the original version, the two parts always
match.
This type of mirroring produces a different result than using a mirror pattern.
7-22
Derive Component Part
Derive Component Part creates a part from an assembly component. Derived parts created this way include any
features created in the context of the assembly. For example, you can create a cavity in a mold assembly, then derive
and cut the pieces of the mold. The derived parts maintain the necessary references to the components in the
assembly. However, you cannot insert the derived component part back into the assembly.
To split a part:
• Reference surfaces and non-planar model faces (These do not extend their boundaries. Note that
internal holes on reference surfaces or non-planar model faces are closed when splitting the part.)
graphics area for up to 10 bodies. As you move your pointer over a body, the body highlights.
4. Select a body.
The Save As dialog box appears.
5. Type a name for the new part and click Save.
The new part name appears in the Resulting Bodies list and in the callout box.
NOTE: You can choose the same name for two different bodies if they are identical. If the bodies are not
identical, the software does not let you choose the same name.
6. Continue selecting bodies in the graphics area and naming new parts as needed. You can save all the bodies
as new parts. The bodies that you do not save are not split. They remain with the original part.
7. Callout boxes are displayed for 10 bodies at a time. Click Next 10 or Previous 10 to scroll through all the
callout boxes for a part.
8. Click OK .
The new part documents open beneath the original document. Minimize the original document to see them.
7-24
3. Click Cut Part.
Split lines appear on the part, showing the
different bodies formed by the split. Callout
boxes appear in the graphics area for up to 10
8. Click OK .
New Parts
The new parts are derived; they contain a reference to the parent part. Each new part contains a single
feature named Stock-<parent part name>-n->.
If you change the geometry of the original part, the new parts also change.
With multibody parts, the various split parts are listed in the FeatureManager design tree under Solid
Bodies.
Original Part
The original part contains all its original features plus a new feature called Split.
The solid body displayed in the graphics area is the original solid body minus the new parts. If all bodies in
the original part were saved as split bodies, no solid body is displayed. To see the original solid body, move
the rollback bar in the FeatureManager design tree above the split feature, or suppress the split feature.
If you delete the split feature in the original part, the new parts still exist, but the status of the external
reference in the new parts is dangling.
You can also save solid bodies after you split the model using the Save Bodies feature. This enables you to save the
bodies from a split part to a different folder or with different names to the same folder.
5. Click OK .
In the FeatureManager design tree, the entities are listed under Solid Bodies .
7-26
Create Assembly
You can create an assembly from split part in a single step using the Create Assembly feature. The assembly you
create is identical to an assembly created manually by opening an assembly document and dragging the part files
individually into the assembly document.
You can create additional features in the multibody part after using the Create Assembly command.
However, these additional features do not appear as individual part files and are not part of the assembly
document.
7. Click OK .
The new assembly document opens.
Resolve Ambiguity
The Resolve Ambiguity dialog box is displayed when the SolidWorks software identifies two or more valid
solutions. Since more than one solution is valid, you are prompted to select the most appropriate solution from the list
the solution. The Resolve Ambiguity dialog box can appear in any of the following scenarios.
Rebuild Errors
If you accept the selected document, the model may have rebuild errors, especially if you have added features in the
derived part document. If the geometry of the document you selected is not the same as the geometry of the original
referenced document, the additional features may have rebuild errors.
Feature Statistics
Feature Statistics is a tool that displays the amount of time it takes to rebuild each feature in a part. Use this
tool to reduce rebuild time by suppressing features that take a long time to rebuild. This tool is available in all part
documents.
7-28
Model Geometry Overview
The Check Entity dialog box enables you to identify undesirable geometry and check model geometry. It is divided
into two sections, Check and Check for.
• Check allows you to check Solids, Surfaces, or Features.
• Click Selected items to display the Items to check box.
This checks a selected face or edge, for the items listed in the Items to check list. Use as a fast check of the selected
items to report any errors on faces or edges.
You can use this option first, to determine if the model geometry is valid. If you design very complex models, it is a
good idea to use this option regularly, after creating several features. Sample of selected items check
• Click All to check some or all of the Solid or Surface features from the model. You can select all Solids, all
Surfaces, or both.
It is a fast check of the whole model (or the selected items). It reports any errors on faces or edges. You can also use
this option, to determine if the model geometry is valid.
• Click Features to select all the features in the model.
This is slower, especially for complex models, because it examines the model feature by feature, to locate the source
of the problem. If any errors are found when you use Selected items, you can use this option to identify which
features contain errors
• Check for allows you to select the types of problems that you want to check for:
• Invalid face(s)
• Invalid edge(s)
• Short edge(s)
When you check for Short edge(s), you must specify a minimum edge length. The software reports any edges that are
less than the specified length.
The number of errors is listed in the Found column. The items are displayed in the Result list box. Additional
information is in the message area.
You can also check model geometry:
• Maximum radius of curvature
• Maximum edge gap
• Maximum vertex gap
The items are displayed in the Result list box. Additional information is in the message area.
Rebuild operation (Ctrl + B) only rebuilds new or changed features and their children.
3. Examine and correct any features that fail, beginning with the first failed feature in the FeatureManager
design tree. Often fixing one failed feature allows subsequent failed features to rebuild successfully.
4. When you are satisfied that all the errors are corrected, click Tools, Options, on the System Options tab,
select Performance, clear the Verification on rebuild check box.
7-30
Checking Part Faces or Edges
Check Entity
4. Click Check. (The dialog box remains open so that you can change the options or select different items to
check.)
• The Item to check box displays the items you selected from the graphics area.
• The Result list box displays the minimum radius. In the graphics area, an arrow points to the place
on the curve where the minimum radius of curvature is found. (If there are two locations with the
same minimum radius, only one is reported.)
• The message area lists a description of results (the minimum curvature). To highlight the individual
result, select the item displayed in the selection box.
5. Click Close to exit the Check Entity dialog box.
Interrupt Regeneration
Press Esc to interrupt the regeneration of parts. This also works with opening parts, rollbacks, and so on.
NOTE: When you interrupt the regeneration of a part, the system completes regeneration of the current feature and
then places the rollback bar after the feature.
Send To
Send the current part document to another system using electronic mail.
7-32
To toggle the display of annotations:
Right-click Annotations and select (or clear) the items to display:
• Display Annotations. All annotation types that are selected in the Annotation Properties dialog
box are displayed. This is the same as selecting the Display Annotations check box in the
Annotation Properties dialog box.
• Show Feature Dimensions. This is the same as selecting the Feature dimensions check box in the
Display filter of the Annotation Properties dialog box.
• Show Reference Dimensions. This is the same as selecting the Reference dimensions check box
in the Display filter of the Annotation Properties dialog box.
Summary Information
You can use the Summary Information dialog box to add more information to a part or assembly document, or to a
configuration of the model in the document. Use this type of custom information in the followings ways:
• Apply in a Bill of Materials
• Add associative dimensions in parts that dynamically update in a Bill of Materials
• Use as advanced selection criteria for managing assembly configurations
• Integrate with drawing sheet formats and link notes to document properties
• Add system-defined, configuration-specific mass properties
• When you type a Name and a Value to add a new Property, you can click OK to add the new property
without first clicking Add.
• If you type a Name and a Value to add a new Property, and then select another name from the list without
clicking Add, the first property is automatically added.
• When you modify an existing custom property, those changes are saved when you click OK. You no
longer need to click Modify to apply the changes.
In addition to the BOM, you can use the properties in the following ways:
• As advanced selection criteria for managing assembly configurations
• In drawing sheet formats and to link notes to document properties
If you plan to use the property as a custom column in a Bill of Materials, do not include any spaces in the Name.
7-34
To delete custom properties:
1. Click the property in the Properties box that you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
NOTE: This deletes the custom properties from the current document only. Delete the global custom
properties with the Edit List dialog box.
You can add system-defined, configuration-specific mass properties as a custom property, using either the Custom
or Configuration Specific tabs. Use the Configuration Specific tab to display with other configuration-specific
properties. Mass properties use the following, system-generated format:
SW<mass property>@ @configuration@model
Edit List
You can edit the list of custom properties. You can also edit the text file where the properties are stored in any text
editor. The default file location is install_dir\lang\english\properties.txt.
Truncated Faces
Convert Entities
For functions other than Measure and Section Properties, the truncated faces act as if they are not truncated. For
example, if you open a sketch on a truncated face and convert the edges, the edges of the full face are converted.
7-36
Section Views in Models
Section views use a plane to display a cutaway of a part or assembly.
1. Click Section View on the View toolbar or click View, Display, Section View.
The Section View dialog box appears.
2. Click one or more planes in the FeatureManager design tree, or click one or more planar faces on the model.
Alternatively, you can pre-select planes or planar faces before you click View, Display, Section View. If
nothing is selected, the Front plane is used by default. To pre-select multiple planes or faces, hold down the
Ctrl key as you select.
3. Click a plane in the Section Plane(s)/Face(s) box, then use the arrows to set a value in the Section Position
box to move the plane and change the section cut.
You can also use the viewing plane.
4. Click the Flip the Side to View check box to reverse the viewing direction of the section cut. (Not available
if you are using the viewing plane.)
5. Select a Preview/Display mode:
• When Preview is selected, the section view is updated whenever any item in the dialog box is
changed. If you need to adjust more than one setting, especially with a large part or assembly, this
option may not be efficient.
• When Preview is cleared, click Display to update the section view. You can make multiple changes
to the settings, then click Display again to update the view with all the changes at once.
6. Click OK.Example
NOTE: You can view both the section view and the complete view of the model at the same time by
splitting your screen into two windows. (Drag the split controls on the bottom or right side of the window
frame.) You can revolve, size, and shade the views independently.
Click Section View or click View, Modify, Section View again to deselect the command.
Model with no section view Model using plane 45° to Plane1 and
Section Position -5.00mm
Model using plane 45° to Plane1, Section Model using Viewing Plane and Section
Position -5.00mm, and Flip side to view Position 26.50mm
Before you can calculate mass properties or section properties of an assembly, you must fully resolve any lightweight
parts that it contains. See also Loading Additional Model Data.
Mass Properties
To evaluate components or solid bodies in assembly and multibody part documents, click the component or body, and
click Recalculate. If no component or solid body is selected, the mass properties for the entire assembly or multibody
part are reported.
7-38
To display mass properties:
1. Click Mass Properties on the Tools toolbar or click Tools, Mass Properties.
NOTES:
• You evaluate different entities without closing the Mass Properties dialog box. Clear the
selections, then select the entity, and click Recalculate.
• The results are displayed in the Mass Properties dialog box, and the principal axes and center of
mass are displayed graphically on the model.
2. Click Options if you want to display the Measurement Options dialog box and to display the results using
different units than the units specified for the active document.
3. Click Print if you want to print the results directly from this dialog box.
4. Click Copy if you want to copy the information to the clipboard, then paste it into another document.
5. Click Close to close the dialog box.
NOTE: When you save the document, you can update the mass properties information. This enhances system
performance, since the next time you access mass properties, the system does not need to recalculate the values (if the
document is unchanged). To set this option, click Tools, Options, on the System Options tab, click Performance,
and click the Update mass properties while saving document check box.
Section Properties
You can evaluate section properties for multiple faces and sketches that lie in parallel planes. Clear the selections,
then select the entity, and click Recalculate.
NOTE: When you evaluate more than one entity, the first selected face defines the plane for section property
calculation.
Curvature
You can display a part or assembly with the surfaces rendered in different colors according to the local radius of
curvature. Curvature is defined as the reciprocal of the radius (1/radius), in current model units. By default, the
greatest curvature value displayed is 1.0000, and the smallest value is 0.0010.
As the radius of curvature decreases, the curvature value increases, and the corresponding color changes from black
(0.0010), through blue, green, and red (1.0000).
As the radius of curvature increases, the curvature value decreases. A planar surface has a curvature value of zero (1/8).
3. Click View, Display, Curvature. The curvature of the model is displayed in color. When you point to a
model surface, a spline, or a curve, the curvature value and the radius of curvature are displayed beside the
pointer.
4. To remove the color, click View, Display, Curvature to clear the check mark.
Model with no color applied to curved surface Model with color applied to selected curved
surfaces (zero curvature is black)
2. To remove the color, right-click the model face and click Face Curvature to clear the check mark.
7-40
Curvature Options
Defines the colors associated with the curvature of models. Curvature is equal to the inverse of the radius of the curve
(curvature = 1/radius).
By default, the greatest curvature is represented by red, and the least curvature is represented by black. For example,
if you display curvature on a cube, all sides display as black. This is because the radii of flat faces are infinite and the
curvature is zero.
As the curvature increases (and the radius decreases), the corresponding color values change from black, through
blue, green, and red.
You can change the curvature values at both ends of the scale and at three points in the middle so that the curvature
values increment within a narrower or wider range, or increment more or less rapidly.
Curvature Display
You can display a surface, part, or assembly with the curved surfaces rendered in different colors according to their
local radius of curvature.
To define the colors, click Tools, Options, and click the Document Properties tab. Select Colors and click
Curvature.
You can also display the curvature value of sketch segments and curves in a closed sketch.
To render curved surfaces in colors, and to display the radius of curvature values:
Click View, Display, Curvature.
While the Curvature menu item remains selected,
• The value of the curvature radii is displayed next to the pointer when you point at curved surfaces.
• The curvature of the model is displayed in colors related to the radii of the curvature.
To remove the curvature display, click View, Display, Curvature again (to clear the check mark).
Zebra Stripes
Zebra stripes allow you to see small changes in a surface that may be hard to see with a standard display. Zebra stripes
simulate the reflection of long strips of light on a very shiny surface.
With zebra stripes, you can easily see wrinkles or defects in a surface, and you can verify that two adjacent faces are
in contact, are tangent, or have continuous curvature. See Zebra Stripes on Boundaries for more information.
• Adjust the Stripe Accuracy . Move the slider from low accuracy (left) to high accuracy
(right) to improve the quality of the display. Note that increasing the display accuracy also
increases the display calculation time.
• Change the Color Of Stripes and Color Of Background. Click Edit Color, choose a new color
from the Color palette, and click OK. The new color appears in the color box and in the graphics
area.
• Select one of the following:
• Spherical Map. Available on all systems. The part appears to be inside a large sphere that
is covered on the inside with strips of light. The zebra stripes are always curved (even on
flat faces) and display singularities.
Singularities
7-42
• Cube Map. Available on systems with a graphics card that supports cube texture maps. If
your computer does not have this type of graphics card, SolidWorks does not allow you to
select this option. The part appears to be inside a large square room that is covered with
strips of light on the walls, ceiling, and floors. The zebra stripes are straight on flat faces,
and do not display singularities.
The cube map display shows unstriped bands. Unstriped bands are the reflections of the
corners of the "room."
3. Click OK .
3. Click OK .
Contact
Zebra stripes do not match at the boundary.
Tangency
Zebra stripes match at the boundary, but there is an abrupt change in direction.
Curvature Continuous
Zebra stripes continue smoothly across the boundary. Curvature continuity is an option when creating face blend fillets.
7-44
Lighting
Lighting Overview
You can adjust the direction, intensity, and color of light in the shaded view of a model. You can add light sources of
various types, and modify their characteristics to illuminate the model as needed.
The properties of the light sources work with the material properties of the model. If you change material properties
of the model, you can enhance or reduce the effect of the light properties.
Light Types
There are several types of light source:
• Ambient light. Illuminates the model evenly from all directions. In a room with white walls, the level of
ambient light is high, because the light reflects off the walls and other objects.
• Directional light. Comes from a source that is infinitely far away from the model. It is a columned light
source consisting of parallel rays from a single direction, like the sun. The rays of a Directional light point
toward the center of the model.
• Point light. Comes from a very small light source located at a specific coordinate in the model space. This
type of light source emits light in all directions. The effect is like a tiny light bulb floating in space.
• Spot light. Come from a restricted, focused light with a cone-shaped beam that is brightest at its center. A
spot light can be aimed at a specific area of the model. You can adjust the position and distance of the light
source relative to the model, and you can adjust the angle through which the beam spreads.
1. Click the to expand the Lighting folder and display the light sources.
2. Select Spot Light (or Directional Light, or Point Light) and press Delete.
- or -
Click View, Lighting, Delete, Spot (or Directional, or Point).
To turn off a light, without deleting it:
1. Click the to expand the Lighting folder and right-click the light source.
2. Select Properties.
- or -
Click View, Lighting, Properties (Ambient, Directional, Spot, or Point).
3. In the Ambient, Directional, Spot, or Point Light Properties dialog box, click to clear the On check box.
Ambient Light
You can control the intensity and the color of ambient light.
To control ambient light:
1. In the FeatureManager design tree, click to expand the Lighting folder.
2. Right-click Ambient and select Properties.
3. In the Ambient Light Properties dialog box, you can do the following:
• Clear the On check box to eliminate the ambient light from the model. You can turn ambient light
off, but you cannot delete the ambient light.
• Move the slider from left (for low intensity) to right (for high intensity).
• Click Edit to display the Color palette, and select colored ambient light rather than the default
white light.
• Click Use as default to save the current ambient setting as your default setting.
7-46
NOTE: The results vary widely. They depend on multiple combinations, including the color of the model, the degree
of ambience (intensity), as well as the color of the light. For example, changing the color of the ambient light
produces more noticeable results with high ambience than with low ambience.
Basic Tab
On the Basic tab, a Directional light source has the following Intensity properties:
• Brightness. This slider controls the brightness of the light source. A higher value results in more light on the
side of the model closest to the source.
• Specularity. This slider controls the extent to which shiny surfaces exhibit bright highlights where the light
strikes them. A higher value results in more dramatic highlights and a shinier appearance.
Direction Tab
On the Direction tab, specify the following properties:
• Direction. Specify the direction from which the light arrives, relative to the origin. You can use the sliders to
specify the values for Longitude and Latitude, or you can enter a value in degrees.
Directional light with Directional light with change in Directional light with change
default placement Latitude in Latitude and Longitude
• Lock to model. When this check box is selected, the light moves along with the model when you rotate the
model. The light always shines on the same area of the model because the position of the light relative to the
model is maintained.
To keep the light in the same position in the model space, clear the Lock to model check box. When you rotate the
model, the light shines on different areas of the model because the position of the light remains fixed in space.
As you edit the Directional light, a graphical representation of the light source is displayed, indicating the color and
direction of the light.
After you finish, click OK.
Basic Tab
On the Basic tab, a Point light includes the following Intensity properties:
• Brightness. This slider controls the brightness of the light source. A higher value results in more light on the
side of the model closest to the source.
• Specularity. This slider controls the extent to which shiny surfaces exhibit bright highlights where the light
strikes them. A higher value results in more dramatic highlights and a shinier appearance.
Position Tab
On the Position tab, specify the Position of the light source relative to the origin. Select the type of coordinate
system, and specify the values:
• Spherical (Longitude, Latitude, Distance)
• Cartesian (X, Y, Z)
Point light with default Point light with default Point light with increase in
placement and default values placement, change to green Brightness (Basic) and
color and Specularity at changes to Position, using
maximum Cartesian coordinates
• Lock to model. When this check box is selected, the light moves along with the model when you rotate the
model. The light always shines on the same area of the model because the position of the light relative to the
model is maintained.
To keep the light in the same position in the model space, clear the Lock to model check box. When you rotate the
model, the light shines on different areas of the model because the position of the light remains fixed in space.
As you edit the Point light, a graphical representation of the light source is displayed, indicating the color and
direction of the light.
After you finish, click OK.
7-48
Spot Light Properties
Basic Tab
On the Basic tab, a Spot light includes the following Intensity properties:
• Brightness. This slider controls the brightness of the light source. A higher value results in more light on the
side of the model closest to the source.
• Specularity. This slider controls the extent to which shiny surfaces exhibit bright highlights where the light
strikes them. A higher value results in more dramatic highlights and a shinier appearance.
Position Tab
On the Position tab:
• Position. The Position is the location of the light source relative to the center of the scene. Like a Point
light, you can use either Spherical or Cartesian coordinates.
• Target. The Target is where the light strikes the model or the surrounding scene. Only Cartesian
coordinates (X, Y, Z) are available.
The Spot light also includes an Advanced tab where you can set Cone Angle, Exponent, and Attenuation.
As you edit each light, a graphical representation of the light source is displayed, indicating the color and direction of
the light.
After you finish, click OK.
Lighting - Basic
All light sources have the following properties:
• Color. To change the color, click Edit, select a new color from the palette, and click OK.
• On. To turn the light on or off, select or clear the On check box.
• Configurations. Select This Configuration, All Configurations, or Specify Configurations.
• Use as default. If you want to save the settings for the current light, and use them in new documents, click
Use as default.
• Intensity. Move the Ambient slider to adjust the level of light. The level changes equally on all sides of the
model.
Directional, Point, and Spot lights have these additional properties:
• Brightness. This slider controls the brightness of the light source. A higher value results in more light on the
side of the model closest to the source.
• Specularity. This slider controls the extent to which shiny surfaces exhibit bright highlights where the light
strikes them. A higher value results in more dramatic highlights and a shinier appearance.
Lighting - Advanced
Exponent. The exponent controls how tightly the beam of light is concentrated.
A low exponent value produces a focused, cone-shaped
beam of light with sharp edges. The intensity of the light
is similar at the center of the beam and at the edges.
Cone Angle. The cone angle specifies the angle through which the beam spreads. A small angle produces a narrow
beam of light.
Attenuation. The attenuation is the property that decreases the intensity of the light as the distance increases. The
values A, B, and C are multipliers in the following equation (D is the distance):
attenuation = 1 / A + (B * D) + (C * D2)
As the values for A, B, and C increase, the amount of light that reaches the target decreases.
7-50
Lighting - Position and Direction
Direction. For a Directional light, specify the direction from which the light arrives, relative to the origin. You can
use the sliders to specify the values for Longitude and Latitude, or you can enter a value in degrees.
For a Point or Spot light, select the type of coordinate system, then specify the values:
• Spherical (Longitude, Latitude, Distance)
• Cartesian (X, Y, Z)
For a Directional light, type a position or use the sliders to set values for the following:
• Latitude
• Longitude
Lock to model.
• In these examples, notice the position
of the Spot light relative to the model
when the model is rotated.
Original position
• When selected, the light moves along
with the model when you rotate the
model. The light always shines on the
same area of the model because the
position of the light relative to the
model is maintained.
7-52
8
Mold Design
The Mold Tools toolbar provides tools for creating molded parts and assemblies.
Scale
Parting Lines
Ruled Surface
Parting Surfaces
Tooling Split
Cavity
Draft
Split Line
Offset Surface
Ruled Surface
Radiate Surface
Planar Surface
Knit Surface
Draft Analysis
Undercut Detection
Creating a mold design in the SolidWorks software requires the following items:
• Design parts - The parts that you want to mold.
• A mold base - The part that holds the cavity feature of the design part.
• An interim assembly - The assembly in which the cavity is created.
• Derived component parts - The parts that become the halves of the mold after you cut them (recommended).
You can create a mold using a sequence of integrated tools that control the mold creation process. With the model
finished, you can use these mold tools to analyze and correct deficiencies with either SolidWorks or imported models.
Mold tools span from initial analysis to creating the tooling split. The process is as follows:
• Undercut Detection . Use the Undercut Detection tool to identify trapped areas that prevent the
model from ejecting.
• Shut-off Surfaces . Models often include openings which you need to shut-off to prevent leakage from
core-to-cavity.
• Parting Surfaces . Parting surfaces extrude from the parting line to separate mold cavity from core.
You can also use a parting surface to create an interlock surface. In such instances, you can create a
separate surface to separate mold cavity from core.
• Ruled Surface . Ruled surfaces are used with imported parts when the draft analysis shows that
sections of the model require draft. You can also use the Ruled Surface tool to create an interlock surface.
• Tooling Split . The Tooling Split tool creates the core and cavity by automatically populating the core,
cavity and parting surface, based on the steps followed earlier.
The Mold Tools toolbar also includes additional tools common to the mold process, such as Scale , Cavity ,
as well surface modeling tools such as Planar Surface and Knit Surface .
You combine the design parts and mold base in the interim assembly. Then, you create a cavity feature in the context
of the interim assembly. This relates the mold base to the design part in the event that the design part changes shape.
8-2
Mold Tools - Undercut Detection
The Undercut Detection tool finds trapped areas in a model that cannot be ejected from the mold. These areas
require a slide, which usually slides in a perpendicular direction to the core and cavity segments as these are
separated.
Undercut detection does not detect with imported surface parts, or surface parts generated in SolidWorks.
Undercut analysis is not based on the parting line.
1. Click Undercut Detection in the Molds toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Undercut Detection.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Analysis Parameters:
• Click Coordinate input to set coordinates along the X, Y and Z axes. This controls the Direction
of Pull.
- or -
• Select a plane, face, or edge as the Direction of Pull .
3. Click Calculate.
• Click Show , or Hide for either the undercut faces or the normal faces.
• Click Edit Color to display the Color palette and change the color for either the undercut faces or
the normal faces.
• Clear Save color if you do not want to save the new color definition upon exit.
5. Click OK .
Scaling Factor
When you create a mold you must account for the scaling factor. The scaling factor is the amount the material in the
mold shrinks or expands as it solidifies. The scaling factor depends on the type of material used and the shape of the
mold, and is expressed as a percentage of the linear size (not volume) of the design part.
The software scales the cavity by the specified scaling factor, using this formula:
Cavity size = part size * (1 + scaling factor/100)
For example:
Desired Scaling factor in % Resulting
adjustment (enter this number) cavity size
2% material shrinkage 2.0 part size * 1.02
(cavity larger than part)
2% material expansion -2.0 part size * 0.98
(cavity smaller than part)
If you have a SolidWorks model, you can use the Split Line tool to split faces and the Draft tool to add
draft. You can also used the Ruled Surface tool with either SolidWorks or imported models to add draft, correct
flawed surfaces, or create interlock surfaces.
Parting lines lie along the edge of the molded part, between the core and the cavity surfaces. They are used to create
the parting surfaces, and to separate the surfaces. You create the parting lines after the model is scaled and proper
draft is applied.
1. Click Parting Lines on the Mold toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Parting Line.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Mold Parameters:
• Select a flat face or a plane as the Direction of Pull.
8-4
3. Inspect the model for draft, and compare the colors to those displayed under Mold Parameters. You should
have a combination of Positive and Negative draft. If draft is required:
• With a SolidWorks model, click Draft on the Molds toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Draft.
• With an imported model, click Ruled Surface on the Molds toolbar, or click Insert, Molds,
Ruled Surface.
4. Under Parting Lines, do one of the following:
• If the model includes a chain of edges that runs between positive and negative faces (that includes no
straddle faces), the parting lines are selected automatically.
• If the model includes multiple chains, the longest chain is selected automatically.
• If you want to automatically select a different chain of edges:
a. Right-click and select Clear Selections.
b. Select an edge.
b. Click Select next edge , and repeat until all the edges appear under Edges.
c. Click Zoom to the selected edge for detail of the edge selection area.
5. Click OK .
With imported geometry, you cannot use draft tools from the SolidWorks application to correct surfaces that require
draft. The Ruled Surface command can create ruled surfaces that are either perpendicular or tapered from the
selected edges. You can also use the ruled surfaces to create interlock surfaces.
1. Click Ruled Surface on the Molds toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Ruled Surface.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Type, select an option:
• Tangent to Surface. Ruled surface is tangent to the surfaces that share an edge.
• Normal to surface. Ruled surface is normal to the surfaces that share an edge.
• Tapered to Vector. Ruled surface is tapered to the specified vector.
• Perpendicular to Vector. Ruled surface is perpendicular to the specified vector.
• Sweep. Ruled surface is built by creating a swept surface using selected edges as guide curves.
3. Under Distance/Direction:
6. Click OK .
After you create the parting lines, you need to shut off any open areas to prevent leakage. The liquid filling the mold
must not connect the cavity side of the part with the core side of the part.
1. Click Shut-off Surfaces on the Mold toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Shut-off Surfaces.
In the PropertyManager, under Edges, all the edges that belong to open surfaces appear.
2. Inspect the arrows that show the direction of the shut-off surface.
8-6
Incorrect direction Correct direction
Incorrect direction: note the uneven surface Correct direction: note the smooth surface
4. Click OK .
After you determine the parting lines and create the shut off surfaces, you create the parting surfaces. Parting
surfaces extrude from the parting lines, and are used to separate the mold cavity from the core. To create a tooling
split (the next step in the process), you need at least three surface bodies in the Surface Bodies folder.
1. Click Parting Surfaces on the Molds toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Parting Surface.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Mold Parameters, select an option:
• Tangent to surface. Parting surface is tangent to the surface of the parting line.
• Normal to surface. Parting surface is normal to the surface of the parting line.
• Perpendicular to pull. Parting surface is perpendicular to the direction of pull. This is the most
common.
• If you selected Tangent to surface or Normal to surface, you can set a value for Angle . This
changes the angle from perpendicular to the direction of pull.
• Smoothing. You can apply a smoother transition between adjacent surfaces.
o Smooth gives you the option to set a value for Distance between adjacent edges. A
higher value creates a smoother transition between adjacent edges.
4. Under Options:
• Clear knit all surfaces to prevent surfaces from knitting by default. With most models, the surfaces are
created correctly. However, if you need to repair a gap between adjacent surfaces, you can use surface
tools such as Lofted Surface on the Surfaces toolbar, or Ruled Surface on the Molds
toolbar. When you clear knit all surfaces, use Knit Surface in the Molds toolbar to manually knit
the surfaces after the repairs.
• Clear Show Preview if you want to optimize system performance.
5. Click OK .
With most mold parts, you need to also create interlocking surfaces. Interlock surfaces help prevent the
core and cavity blocks from shifting, and are located along the perimeter of the parting surfaces. Usually,
they have a 5 degree taper. With simpler models, you can create interlock surfaces using the same tools you
used to create the parting surface.
8-8
Mold Tools - Tooling Split
After you define a parting surface, use the Tooling Split tool to create the core and cavity blocks for the model.
To create a tooling split, you need at least three surface bodies in the Surface Bodies folder.
This model includes an interlock surface. It was created using the Ruled Surface tool and it was finished
using other surface modeling tools.
2. Click Tooling Split on the Molds Tools toolbar, or click Insert, Molds, Tooling Split.
3. Orient the model so that the surface or plane you selected is normal to.
4. Sketch a rectangle that extends beyond the model edge, but is within the parting surface boundaries.
With most models, creating an interlock surface manually provides better control than relying on auto-
matic creation.
8. Click OK .
Interlock Surface
With most mold parts, you need to create interlock surfaces. Interlock surfaces help prevent the core and cavity
blocks from shifting, and are located along the perimeter of the parting surfaces. Usually, they have a 5 degree taper.
Lofted Surface
Ruled Surface
Use Ruled Surface, rather than Extend
Surface to maintain the correct taper.
Extend Surface
To facilitate Trim Surface.
8-10
Create a plane, parallel to Top Plane.
Sketch rectangle to create a planar
surface.
Planar Surface
Click the mold base, and click Edit Component on the Assembly toolbar.
You are editing the part, not the assembly. The changes you make are reflected in the original part file
of the mold base. If you do not want to affect the original mold base, use Save As in the mold base part
document to save it with a different name for use in each new mold assembly. Otherwise, the original mold
base includes the cavity you are about to insert.
3. Click Cavity on the Mold Tools toolbar, or click Insert, Mold, Cavity.
4. In the PropertyManager, under Design Components, select the design parts from the FeatureManager
design tree.
6. Click OK .
A cavity in the shape of the design part is created. The cavity size reflects the scaling factor you specified.
Any changes you make to the design part automatically update the cavity in the mold base, as long as the
update path is available. See also External References.
8-12
9
Assemblies
Assemblies
You can build complex assemblies consisting of many components. The components of an assembly can include both
individual parts and other assemblies, called sub-assemblies. For most operations, the behavior of components is the
same for both types. Components are linked to the assembly file. Assembly documents have the .sldasm extension.
1. Click Make Assembly from Part/Assembly on the Standard toolbar, or click File, Make Assembly
from Part.
An assembly opens with the Insert Component PropertyManager active.
2. Click in the graphics area to add the part to the assembly.
The following topics describe the basics of creating an assembly from components you have already built, and
general information about working with assemblies of any kind.
• Design methods
• Adding assembly components
• Assembly mating
• Working with sub-assemblies
• Simplifying large assemblies
• Using advanced component selection methods
• Exploding an assembly view
• Customizing the appearance of an assembly
• Smart Fasteners
Design Methods
You can create an assembly using bottom-up design, top-down design, or a combination of both methods.
Bottom-up Design
Bottom-up design is the traditional method. In bottom-up design, you create parts, insert them into an assembly, and
mate them as required by your design. Bottom-up design is the preferred technique when you are using previously
constructed, off-the-shelf parts.
An advantage of bottom-up design is that because components are designed independently, their relationships and
regeneration behavior are simpler than in top-down design. Working bottom-up allows you to focus on the individual
parts. It is a good method to use if you do not need to create references that control the size or shape of parts with
respect to each other.
Top-down Design
Top-down design is different because you start your work in the assembly. You can use the geometry of one part to
help define other parts, or to create machined features that are added only after the parts are assembled. You can start
with a layout sketch, define fixed part locations, planes, and so on, then design the parts referencing these
definitions.
For example, you can insert a part in an assembly, then build a fixture based on this part. Working top-down, creating
the fixture in context, allows you to reference model geometry, so you can control the dimensions of the fixture by
creating geometric relations to the original part. That way, if you change a dimension of the part, the fixture
automatically is updated.
9-2
To view an assembly by dependencies or by features:
• To display the dependencies, right-click the assembly name in the FeatureManager design tree and select
Tree Display, View Mates and Dependencies or click View, FeatureManager Tree, By Dependencies.
Dependent items (instead of features) are listed under each component. Dependent items include mates and
component patterns. You can view a component's features and planes by expanding the Features folder
under the component.
• To display the features again, right-click the assembly name in the FeatureManager design tree, and select
Tree Display, View Features or click View, FeatureManager Tree, By Features.
Resolved. The component is fully loaded into memory and all of its features
and mates are editable.
Hidden. A transparent icon indicates that the component is active, but invisible.
Viewing Mates
View Mates displays a list of the mates for one or more components or sub-assemblies in an assembly. It is a useful
tool to use when the number of mates gets large.
When you place a component (either an individual part or a sub-assembly) in an assembly, the component file is
linked to the assembly file. The component appears in the assembly; the component data remains in the source
component file. Any changes you make to the component file update the assembly.
There are many ways to add components to a new or existing assembly:
• Use the Insert Component PropertyManager.
• Drag from an open document window.
• Drag from Windows Explorer.
• Drag a hyperlink from Internet Explorer.
• Drag within the assembly for additional instances of existing components.
• Drag from the Feature Palette window.
• Use Insert, Smart Fasteners to add bolts, screws, nuts, pins, and washers.
Insert Components
1. Click Insert Components on the Assembly toolbar, or click Insert, Component, Existing Part/
Assembly.
Open documents that you previously saved appear under Part/Assembly to Insert.
2. Select a part or assembly from the list, or click Browse to open an existing document.
3. Click Keep Visible to add more than one instance of a component or more than one component.
4. Click in the graphics area to place the component.
If Keep Visible is not selected, the PropertyManager closes.
If Keep Visible is selected, click again in the graphics area to add another instance of the selected
component. Alternatively, you can repeat steps 2 through 4 to add a different component.
Options
• Start command when creating new assembly. Select to open this PropertyManager when you create a new
assembly. Clear if your first assembly task is commonly something other than inserting components.
• Graphics preview. Select to see a preview of the selected document in the graphics area under your pointer.
9-4
Adding Components from an Open Document Window
ConfigurationManager tab in the source window, then drag and drop the name of the desired
configuration.
When you save an assembly, the path and name of each referenced component is saved in the assembly document.
For this reason, you must exercise caution when you save or rename a component document, or move it to a different
folder.
Under the File menu, there are several ways to save an assembly document. Whichever method you use, the current
locations of all referenced components (parts and sub-assemblies) are saved with the assembly document.
• Save. When you use Save, you save the assembly document, and any referenced component documents that
have changed.
• Save As. When you use Save As, you save a copy of the assembly document with a new name or path. You
can create a new folder in the Save As dialog box if needed. After you use Save As, you are working in the
new assembly document. The original assembly document is closed without saving.
• Save as copy. Click the Save as copy check box in the Save As dialog box to save a copy of the assembly
document, with a new name or path, without replacing the active document. You continue to work in the
original assembly document.
• With both Save As and Save as copy, if any of the components have changed since the last Save operation,
you are notified that they need to be saved also. If you agree to save them, they are saved in their original
referenced locations.
9-6
Saving an Assembly in Various Ways
The following table lists the effects of saving an assembly in various ways. For this example, assume that these are
the active documents:
Replace Components
An assembly and its components may go through many revisions during the course of a design cycle. This is
especially true in a multi-user environment where several users can work on the individual parts and sub-assemblies.
A safe, efficient way to update the assembly is to replace the components as needed.
NOTES:
• You can replace a part with a sub-assembly or vice versa.
• You can replace one, more than one, or all instances of a component at the same time.
1. Click Replace Components on the Assembly toolbar, click File, Replace, or right-click a component
and select Replace Components.
The Replace PropertyManager appears.
2. Select the components to replace in the Replace these component(s) box. Select the All instances
check box to replace all the instances of the selected component.
3. Click Browse to locate the replacement component for the With this one box.
4. Under Configuration, select Match name to allow the software to try to match the configuration name of
the old component with a configuration in the replacement component. Select Manually select to choose the
matching configuration in the replacement component.
5. Select Re-attach mates to allow the software to try to re-attach existing mates to the replacement
component.
6. Click OK .
The selected component instances are replaced. If you chose Manually select, choose the configuration to
open in the Configurations dialog box. If you selected the Re-attach mates check box, the Mated Entities
PropertyManager appears.
Reload Documents
Allows you to Reload documents. This is useful if you have read-only access to a document and you want to reload
the latest version with any changes made by a colleague.
To reload a document:
1. Click File, Reload in a part or assembly document, or right-click a component in an assembly and select
Reload.
2. Select Open as read-only if you do not want to save any changes to the file.
NOTE: If you have write-access to a sub-assembly then you reload it as read-only, you still have write-
access to the individual components of the sub-assembly. You must reload each of the sub-assembly
components as read-only to relinquish write-access privileges.
3. Click OK.
See also Replace Components.
The Mated Entities PropertyManager helps you reattach dangling mate entities. You can list all of the mated entities
in the assembly or in a particular component. Then you can replace any of the mated entities to satisfy the mates.
For example, if you have a mate between two faces and you remove one of the faces from a model (by a cut or a
fillet), the mate becomes dangling. You can use the Mated Entities PropertyManager to select a replacement face to
satisfy the mate again.
9-8
To replace dangling mate entities:
1. Right-click a mate, a component, or a mategroup and select Replace Mate Entities to replace the entities for
a single mate, all the mates on a component, or all the mates in the assembly, respectively.
- or -
Select a mate, a component, or a mategroup, then click Replace Mate Entities on the Assembly
toolbar to replace the mate entities for the selected entity.
The Mated Entities PropertyManager appears. Dangling mates appear with an X and satisfied mates appear
with a checkmark in the Mate Entities list.
2. Select an entity to replace in the Mate Entities list, then select a replacement entity.
Assembly Statistics
Click Statistics on the Tools menu, or click Tools, Assembly Statistics. The report includes the
following items:
• total number of components
• number of unique parts and sub-assemblies
• number of suppressed, resolved and lightweight components
• number of top-level mates
• maximum depth of the assembly hierarchy (for nested sub-assemblies).
When you are finished reading the report, click OK to close the dialog box.
Component Properties
o Component Description. The description is read-only in this dialog box. You set it in the
Summary Information dialog box of the component.
o Model Document Path. The path to the component document is displayed. You can click Browse
to search for a replacement component. The last saved or in-use configuration of the replacement
component is used.
3. Select Configuration specific properties. The properties available depend on the type of assembly
component you selected.
4. Click OK when you finish making your changes.
Arranging Components
Assembly PropertyManager
From this PropertyManager, you can do the following:
• Move a component.
• Rotate a component.
• Detect collisions with other components.
• Activate Physical Dynamics
• Dynamically detect the clearance between components.
NOTE: The selections under Options appear in each of the topics listed above, as necessary for that topic.
9-10
Fixing the Position of a Component
You can fix the position of a component so that it cannot move with respect to the assembly origin. By default, the
first part in an assembly is fixed; however, you can float it at any time.
It is recommended that at least one assembly component is either fixed, or mated to the assembly planes or origin.
This gives a frame of reference for all other mates, and helps prevent unexpected movement of components when
mates are added.
• A fixed component has a (f) before its name in the FeatureManager design tree.
• A floating, under defined component has a (-) before its name in the FeatureManager design tree.
• A fully defined component does not have a prefix.
Moving a Component
To prevent this behavior, click Tools, Options, System Options, Assemblies. Clear Move
components by dragging, then click OK.
2. Drag the arm of the triad to move along the axis coincident with the arm.
3. Drag the wing of the triad to move along the plane coincident with the wing.
4. Drag the center sphere to a linear or planar entity to align the triad with the entity.
5. Right-click the center sphere and select from the following:
• Show Translate XYZ Box. Moves the component to a specific XYZ coordinate.
• Show Translate Delta XYZ Box. Moves the component by a specific amount.
• Align to Component or Align to Assembly. Aligns the triad's axes to the component's or
assembly's axes.
1. Click Move Component on the Assembly toolbar, or click Tools, Component, Move.
3. Select an item from the Move list to move the components in one of following manners:
o Free Drag - Select a component and drag in any direction.
o Along Assembly XYZ - Select a component and drag in the X, Y, or Z direction of the assembly.
The coordinate system appears in the graphics area to help orient you. To select the axis you want
to drag along, click near that axis before dragging.
o Along Entity - Select an entity, then select a component to drag along that entity. If the entity is a
line, an edge, or an axis, the component you move has one degree of freedom. If the entity is a
plane or a planar face, the component you move has two degrees of freedom.
o By Delta XYZ - Type an X, Y, or Z value in the PropertyManager, and click Apply. The
component moves by the amount you specify.
o To XYZ Position - Select a point of a component, type an X, Y, or Z coordinate in the
PropertyManager, and click Apply. The component’s point moves to the coordinate you specify. If
you select something other than a vertex or point, the component’s origin is placed at the coordinate
you specify.
You can select and move one component or group of components after another while the Move Component
tool is active.
4. Under Advanced Options, select This configuration to apply the movement of the components to only the
active configuration.
Rotating a Component
To prevent this behavior, click Tools, Options, System Options, Assemblies. Clear Move
components by dragging, then click OK.
2. Use the right-mouse button to drag the arm of the triad to rotate about the axis coincident with the
arm.
3. Drag the center sphere to a linear or planar entity to align the triad with the entity.
4. Right-click the center sphere and select from the following:
• Show Rotate Delta XYZ Box. Rotates the component by a specific amount about the specified
arm of the triad.
• Align to Component or Align to Assembly. Aligns the triad's axes to the component's or
assembly's axes.
1. Click Rotate Component on the Assembly toolbar, or click Tools, Component, Rotate.
9-12
3. Select an item from the Rotate list to rotate the components in one of the following manners:
o Free Drag - Select a component and drag in any direction.
o About Entity - Select a line, an edge, or an axis, then drag a component around the selected entity.
o By Delta XYZ - Type an X, Y, or Z value in the PropertyManager, and click Apply. The
component moves around the assembly’s axes by the angular value you specify.
You can rotate one component or group of components after another; the tool remains active until you click
it again, or select another tool.
4. Under Advanced Options, select This configuration to apply the rotation of the components to only the
active configuration.
Assembly Mates
Mates create geometric relationships between assembly components. As you add mates, you define the allowable
directions of linear or rotational motion of the components. You can move a component within its degrees of
freedom, visualizing the assembly's behavior.
Some examples include:
• A coincident mate forces two planar faces to become coplanar. The faces can move along one another, but
cannot be pulled apart.
• A concentric mate forces two cylindrical faces to become concentric. The faces can move along the common
axis, but cannot be moved away from this axis.
Other topics about mates include:
• Mate PropertyManager
• Standard Mates
• Advanced mates including Cam Follower Mates, Gear Mates, Limit Mates, and Symmetry Mates.
• SmartMates
Mate PropertyManager
Mate Selections
Select the faces, edges, planes, and so on that you want to mate together. See Standard Mates by Entity or see one
of the mate types listed below.
Standard Mates
Angle, Coincident, Concentric, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular, and Tangent mates are under Standard Mates.
All the mate types are always shown in the PropertyManager, but only the mates that are applicable to the current
selections are available.
Toggle the Mate Alignment as necessary.
Advanced Mates
Cam, Gear, Limit, and Symmetric mates are under Advanced Mates.
Toggle the Mate Alignment as necessary.
Mates
The Mates box contains all the mates added while the PropertyManager is open or all of the mates that you are
editing. When there are multiple mates in the Mates box, you can select one to edit that mate.
To edit more than one mate at a time, select multiple mates in the FeatureManager design tree, then right-click
and select Edit Feature. All the mates appear in the Mates box.
Options
• Add to new folder. When selected, new mates appear in a folder in the mategroup in the FeatureManager
design tree. When cleared, new mates appear in the mategroup.
• Show pop-up toolbar. When selected, the Mate pop-up toolbar appears when you add standard mates.
When cleared, you add standard mates in hte PropertyManager.
• Show preview. When selected, a preview of a mate occurs when you make enough selections for a valid
mate.
• Use for positioning only. When selected, components move to the position defined by the mate, but a mate
is not added to the FeatureManager design tree. A mate appears in the Mates box so you can edit and
position the components, but nothing appears in the FeatureManager design tree when you close the Mate
PropertyManager.
This check box is an alternative to adding many mates, then later deleting those mates in the
FeatureManager design tree.
Standard Mates
The valid mating relationships are:
• Coincident: positions selected faces, edges, and planes (in combination with each other or combined with a
single vertex) so they share the same infinite line. Positions two vertices so they touch
• Parallel: places the selected items so they lie in the same direction and remain a constant distance apart from
each other
• Perpendicular: places the selected items at a 90 degree angle to each other
• Tangent: places the selected items in a tangent mate (at least one selection must be a cylindrical, conical, or
spherical face)
• Concentric: places the selections so that they share the same center point
• Distance: places the selected items with the specified distance between them
• Angle: places the selected items at the specified angle to each other
Entities to Mate .
The Mate pop-up toolbar appears with a default mate selected and the components move into place to
preview the mate.
The preceding occurs if you select Show pop-up toolbar and Show preview under Options in the
PropertyManager.
9-14
Standard Mates by Entity
Mates create geometric relationships, such as coincident, perpendicular, tangent, and so on. Each mate is valid for
specific combinations of geometry. Select one of the geometry types below to view its valid mates.
Cam
• Cam/Cylinder - Tangent
• Cam/Plane - Tangent
• Cam/Point - Coincident
Cone
• Cone/Circular or Arc Edge - Coincident, Concentric
• Cone/Cone - Angle, Coincident, Concentric, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Cone/Cylinder - Angle, Concentric, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Cone/Extrusion - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Cone/Line - Angle, Concentric, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Cone/Plane - Tangent
• Cone/Point - Coincident, Concentric
• Cone/Sphere - Tangent
Cylinder
• Cylinder/Cam - Tangent
• Cylinder/Cone - Angle, Concentric, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Cylinder/Cylinder - Angle, Concentric, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular, Tangent
• Cylinder/Extrusion - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular, Tangent
• Cylinder/Line - Angle, Coincident, Concentric, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular, Tangent
• Cylinder/Plane - Distance, Tangent
• Cylinder/Point - Coincident, Concentric, Distance
• Cylinder/Sphere - Concentric, Tangent
• Cylinder/Circular Edge - Concentric, Coincident
• Cylinder/Surface - Tangent
Extrusion
• Extrusion/Cone - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Extrusion/Cylinder - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular, Tangent
• Extrusion/Extrusion - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Extrusion/Line - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Extrusion/Plane - Tangent
• Extrusion/Point - Coincident
Line
• Line/Cone - Angle, Concentric, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Line/Cylinder - Angle, Coincident, Concentric, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular, Tangent
• Line/Extrusion - Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Line/Line - Angle, Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Line/Plane - Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Line/Point - Coincident, Distance
• Line/Sphere - Concentric, Distance, Tangent
• Line/Circular Edge - Concentric
Plane
• Plane/Cam- Tangent
• Plane/Cone - Tangent
• Plane/Cylinder - Distance, Tangent
• Plane/Extrusion - Tangent
• Plane/Line - Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Plane/Plane - Angle, Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Perpendicular
• Plane/Point - Coincident, Distance
• Plane/Sphere - Distance, Tangent
• Plane/Circular Edge - Coincident
• Plane/Surface - Tangent
Point
• Point/Cam - Coincident
• Point/Cone - Coincident, Concentric
• Point/Cylinder - Coincident, Concentric, Distance
• Point/Extrusion - Coincident
• Point/Line - Coincident, Distance
• Point/Plane - Coincident, Distance
• Point/Point - Coincident, Distance
• Point/Sphere - Coincident, Concentric, Distance
• Point/Surface - Coincident
Sphere
• Sphere/Cone - Tangent
• Sphere/Cylinder - Concentric, Tangent
• Sphere/Line - Concentric, Distance, Tangent
• Sphere/Plane - Distance, Tangent
• Sphere/Point - Coincident, Concentric, Distance
• Sphere/Sphere - Concentric, Distance, Tangent
Surface
• Surface/Cylinder - Tangent
• Surface/Plane - Tangent
• Surface/Point - Coincident
9-16
Mate Alignment
You can set the alignment condition of standard and advanced mates in the Mate PropertyManager. The alignment
conditions for a mate are:
• Aligned : places the components so the normal or axis vectors for the selected faces point in the same
direction.
• Anti-Aligned : places the components so the normal or axis vectors for the selected faces point in
opposite directions.
Aligned Anti-aligned
Coincident
Distance
Mate Reference
Mate references specify one or more entities of a component to use for automatic mating. When you drag a
component with a mate reference into an assembly, the SolidWorks software tries to find other combinations of the
same mate reference name and mate type. If the name is the same, but the type does not match, the software does not
add the mate. Here are some items to note about mate references:
• Components. You can add mate references to part and assembly components. In assemblies, you can select
assembly geometry (such as a plane in the assembly) or component geometry (such as the face of a component.)
• Multiple mate references. A component can contain more than one mate reference. The MateReferences
folder in the FeatureManager design tree holds all mate references.
For example, you can have a component in an assembly with two mate references, bolt and washer. When
you drag a fastener with a mate reference named bolt into the assembly, mates are added between the
entities with the same mate reference name.
• Multiple mated entities. Each mate reference can contain up to three mated entities: a primary, secondary,
and tertiary reference entity. Each of these entities can have an assigned mate type and alignment. The
primary reference entity on one component must mate to the primary reference entity on another component.
For example, a shaft can have its cylindrical face assigned to a concentric mate and its planar end face
assigned to a coincident mate. When you drag that component into an appropriate location in an assembly,
the SolidWorks software adds both mates.
• SmartMates. When the SmartMates PropertyManager is open, the software adds mates via mate
references before it adds geometric SmartMates.
1. In a part or an assembly, click Mate Reference on the Reference Geometry toolbar, or click Insert,
Reference Geometry, Mate Reference.
The Mate Reference PropertyManager appears.
2. Under Reference Name, type a name for the mate reference.
3. Under Primary Reference Entity:
o Select a face, edge, vertex, or plane for the Primary reference entity . The entity is used for
potential mates when dragging a component into an assembly.
o Select a Mate Reference Type and a Mate Reference Alignment to define the default
mate for the reference entity.
4. If desired, repeat Step 3 to add secondary and tertiary entities.
5. Click OK .
The mate reference is added to the FeatureManager design tree in the MateReferences folder.
4. Type a name under Reference Name and click OK to add the mate reference to the component.
Mategroups
When you create a new assembly, an empty mategroup is automatically included in the FeatureManager design tree.
Each mating relationship that you create is added to this mategroup. The entry for each mating relationship includes
the names of the components involved.
All the mates within a mategroup are solved together; the order in which they appear within the mategroup does not
matter.
You can perform operations such as Replace Mate Entities on all the mates in a mategroup by selecting the
mategroup in the FeatureManager design tree.
You can add mates to a folder within a mategroup to sort the mates. Right-click the mates and select Add to New
Folder or drag the mates into an existing folder. Additionally, you can select the Add to new folder check box under
Options in the Mate PropertyManager.
9-18
Modifying a Mating Relationship
3. To replace one entity with another, click the entity to replace in the Mate Selections box, press Delete,
then select the new entity.
Angle Mate
You can add an angle mate between the combinations shown below:
Cone Line
- Cone - Cone
- Cylinder - Cylinder
- Extrusion - Extrusion
- Line - Line
Cylinder Plane
- Cone - Plane
- Cylinder
- Extrusion
- Line
Extrusion
- Cone
- Cylinder
- Extrusion
- Line
NOTE:
• A Cylinder refers to the cylinder's axis.
• An Extrusion refers to a single face of an extruded solid or surface feature. Extrusions with draft are not
allowed.
• You must type an angle value in the Angle box in the Mate PropertyManager. The default value is the
current angle between the selected entities.
Coincident Mate
You can add a coincident mate between the combinations shown below:
NOTE:
• Mates between two cones must use cones of the same half-angle.
• An Extrusion refers to a single face of an extruded solid or surface feature. Extrusions with draft are not
allowed.
Concentric Mate
You can add a concentric mate between the combinations shown below:
9-20
Distance Mate
You can add a distance mate between the combinations shown below:
Cone Plane
- Cone - Cylinder
Cylinder - Line
- Cylinder - Plane
- Line - Point
- Plane - Sphere
- Point Point
Line - Cylinder
- Cylinder - Line
- Line - Plane
- Plane - Point
- Point - Sphere
- Sphere Sphere
- Line
- Plane
- Point
- Sphere
NOTES:
• A Line can also refer to an axis in this instance.
• You must type a distance value in the Distance box in the Mate PropertyManager. The default value is the
current distance between the selected entities.
• Mates between two cones must use cones of the same half-angle.
Cone Line
- Cone - Cone
- Cylinder - Cylinder
- Extrusion - Extrusion
- Line - Line
Cylinder - Plane
- Cone Plane
- Cylinder - Line
- Extrusion - Plane
- Line
Extrusion
- Cone
- Cylinder
- Extrusion
- Line
NOTE:
• A Cylinder refers to the cylinder's axis.
• An Extrusion refers to a single face of an extruded solid or surface feature. Extrusions with draft are not
allowed.
Tangent Mate
You can add a tangent mate between the combinations shown below:
NOTE:
• An Extrusion refers to a single face of an extruded solid or surface feature. Extrusions with draft are not
allowed.
Cam-Follower Mates
A cam-follower mate is a type of tangent or coincident mate. It allows you to mate a cylinder, plane, or point to a
series of tangent extruded faces, such as you would find on a cam. You can make the profile of the cam from lines,
arcs, and splines, as long as they are tangent and form a closed loop.
The following picture shows three followers which stay in contact with the cam as it rotates.
3. Under Mate Selections, select the tangent faces on the cam for Entities to Mate .
Right-click one of the faces and click Select Tangency. This selects all the tangent faces in one step.
4. Click in Cam Follower and select a face or vertex on the cam follower.
5. Click OK .
9-22
6. The follower is mated to all of the cam surfaces, allowing the follower to stay in contact with the cam as it
rotates.
A cam-follower mate for a cam made from a set of tangent surfaces appears in the FeatureManager
design tree as CamMateCoincident or CamMateTangent. A cam-follower mate for a cam made from a
single surface appears as Coincident or Tangent.
Gear Mates
Gear mates force two components to rotate relative to one another about selected axes. Valid selections for the axis of
rotation for gear mates include cylindrical and conical faces, axes, and linear edges. Other notes include:
• You can mate any two components that you want to rotate relative to one
another. You do not have to mate two gears.
• Similar to other mate types, gear mates do not prevent interference or
collisions between components. To prevent interference, use Collision
Detection or Interference Detection.
• Click Gear .
• Type a value for Ratio to set the gear ratio.
• Select Reverse to change the direction of rotation of the gears relative to one another.
3. Under Mate Selections, select the rotation axes on the two gears for Entities to Mate .
4. Click OK .
Limit Mates
Limit mates allow components to move within a range of values for distance and angle mates. You specify a starting
distance or angle as well as a maximum and minimum value.
• Set Maximum Value and Minimum Value to define the maximum and minimum
extents of the limit mate.
3. Under Mate Selections, select the entities to mate together for Entities to Mate .
4. Click OK .
A LimitDistance or LimitAngle mate is added to the assembly.
Symmetry Mate
A symmetry mate forces two similar entities to be symmetric about a plane or planar face of a component or a plane
of the assembly. The following entities are allowed in symmetry mates:
• Points such as vertices or sketch points
• Lines such as edges, axes, or sketch lines
• Planes or planar faces
• Spheres of equal radii
• Cylinders of equal radii
3. Under Mate Selections, select the two entities to be symmetric for Entities to Mate .
4. Click in Symmetry Plane and select the plane of symmetry.
5. Click OK .
9-24
SmartMates
You can create some types of mating relationships automatically. Mates created with these methods are referred to as
SmartMates.
• You can create mates when you insert a part in the assembly, by dragging the part in specific ways from an
open part window. The entity that you use to drag determines the types of mates that are added. See
Geometry-Based Mates, Feature-Based Mates, and Pattern-Based Mates.
• You can specify a mate reference in the part document. A mate reference identifies the entity to use for
mating when you insert the part from a file. See Defining a Mate Reference.
• You can create mates by inferring potential mate partners when you move a part within the assembly. See
Adding SmartMates While Moving Components.
Geometry-Based Mates
You can create some types of SmartMates by dragging parts into assemblies using certain model geometry. You
inference the geometry of existing components to create mates as you drop the new parts.
2 vertices Coincident
Feature-Based Mates
You can add mates automatically between features that have a "peg-in-hole" relationship. The requirements are as
follows:
• One of the features must be a base or boss, and the other must be a hole or a cut.
• The features may be extruded or revolved.
• The conical faces that are used in the mate must both be of the same type (either a cone or a cylinder, not one
of each type).
• There must be a planar face adjacent to the conical face of both features.
Click for an example of feature-based mates.
A preview of the part snaps into place. If the preview indicates that you need to change the alignment
condition, press the Tab key to flip the alignment (aligned/anti-aligned).
2. Drop the part. Two mates are applied: a Concentric mate between the cylindrical or conical faces, and a
Coincident mate between the planar faces that are adjacent to the conical faces.
Pattern-Based Mates
In some special cases, you can create as many as three SmartMates at once. Each part must have a circular pattern of
cylindrical holes (or bosses) on a planar face with a circular edge.
9-26
To add SmartMates based on a feature pattern:
1. Drag the component into the assembly using the circular edge.
When the pointer is over another circular edge, it changes to to indicate the mates that will result if
the component is dropped at this location. A preview of the part snaps into place.
2. Press the Tab key to rotate the part that you are dragging, to align it with the desired pattern instance.
3. Drop the component.
You can also select one or more mates and click Suppress (or Unsuppress ) on the Features
toolbar, or click Edit, Suppress (or Unsuppress), This Configuration.
Mate Diagnostics
Mate Diagnostics is a tool that allows you to identify mating problems in an assembly. You can examine the details
of mates that are not satisfied, and identify groups of mates which over define the assembly.
Versions of the software after SolidWorks 2001 may find a mating error that went undetected in earlier versions of
SolidWorks. These are primarily conflicts between mates and in-context features. Remember that when this error
occurs, it is important to understand that the mate problem is not a new one. It existed in earlier versions of
SolidWorks but was not detected by the software. Mate Diagnostics can help you identify these errors.
An assembly with one or more mates that are not satisfied has a red flag next to the mategroup. An assembly with
one or more over defined mates and mates that are all satisfied has a yellow flag next to the mategroup.
.
2. Click Tools, Mate Diagnostics, or right-click the assembly, mategroup, or any mate in the mategroup, and
select Mate Diagnostics.
3. In the PropertyManager, under Analyze problem, click Diagnose.
One or more subsets of mates with problems appear. In the graphics area, components that are not related to
the current subset become transparent. A message appears with information on the mating problem.
9-28
4. Under Not satisfied mates, click a mate.
The entities in the unsolved mate are highlighted in the graphics area. A message tells you the distance or
angle by which the mated entities are currently misaligned.
Mates that appear under Analyze Problem and Not Satisfied Mates appear in bold.
5. Right-click a mate in the PropertyManager and select:
• Suppress.
• Edit Mates. Opens the Mate PropertyManager so you can edit the mate.
• Toggle alignment. Toggles the mate alignment between aligned and anti-aligned. (Available only
for mates with alignment problems.)
6. Click OK .
NOTE: Mate Diagnostics analyzes only one mategroup at a time. Sub-assembly mategroups are not included in the
analysis of a top-level assembly mategroup. You can analyze the mategroup in any sub-assembly separately.
Conflicting Mates
At times a mate can not be satisfied because the components are already constrained in such a way that they can not
move into the mate. The components can be fixed or mated to other components.
Example
The bottom faces of these two blocks are mated to the same plane:
If you add a coincident mate between the side of one block and the side of the other, the blocks can move into the
mate:
If you add a coincident mate between the bottom of one block and the top of the other, you get an error. The first
block cannot be simultaneously mated to the plane and to the top of the second block, because the bottom of the
second block is also mated to the plane.
Example
Suppose your intention is to align these two blocks so that they are coincident on one side and one end as shown.
Your visual inspection makes you believe the blocks are each orthogonal.
The blocks do not move into the mate and a mating error appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
9-30
Errors in Solving Mates
If changes in a component remove an entity (face, edge, and so on,) that is involved in a mate, the mate cannot be
solved. The mate is not deleted, however. The mate is suppressed, and is displayed in the FeatureManager design tree
with an error symbol. Suppressed mates are not considered when the remaining mates are solved.
Sometimes adding many mates can cause the position of a component to be over defined. To correct the situation,
suppress the mates on the component individually, then test the degrees of freedom by dragging the component. That
way you can identify and delete the mate that is causing the conflict.
Example
Red block is in-context, Delete Inplace mate, Mate solves by Red block updates, but
blue block is fixed add Distance mate moving red block sketch origin moves
The red block was created in the context of the assembly by converting and extruding a face of the blue block. If you
delete the Inplace mate and add a distance mate between the parts, the following occurs:
1. SolidWorks tries to solve the distance mate by moving the red block. As the red block moves, the origin of
the sketch for the base extrude of the red block moves.
2. SolidWorks then updates the sketch for the base extrude of the red block by converting the sketch entities
from the face of the blue block.
The blocks appear exactly as they did previously, except that the origin of the sketch for the red block has
moved relative to the blocks.
If you have a drawing of the red block, the geometry may appear to have "walked" off the edge of the
drawing.
In versions earlier than SolidWorks 2001Plus, the distance mate was not marked as an error, although it is clearly not
satisfied.
Mate Diagnostics detects this type of error, lists the Distance mate as not satisfied, and displays a message about the
geometry of the mated faces.
Example
In this example, there is a concentric mate between the two cylinders. Then, the sketch for the base feature of the
bottom component changes from a circle to a rectangle. The cylindrical face of the bottom component no longer
exists. The concentric mate to that face can no longer be solved.
Example
In this example, the assembly-level plane cannot be both colinear with one side of the rectangular sketch, and at a
distance from the side of the part created from that sketch. When you apply the distance mate, the part moves into the
mate, and then the sketch updates to place the edge of the rectangle back at the assembly-level plane. If you have a
drawing of the block, the geometry may appear to have "walked" off the edge of the drawing, since the part origin has
moved.
Mate Diagnostics detects this type of error, lists the Distance mate as not satisfied, and displays a message about the
geometry of the mated faces.
9-32
Physical Simulation
Physical Simulation allows you to simulate the effects of motors, springs, and gravity on your assemblies. Physical
Simulation combines simulation elements with SolidWorks tools such as mates and Physical Dynamics to move
components around your assembly.
To create a simulation:
1. Add simulation elements. See Linear or Rotary Motors, Springs, and Gravity.
2. Record the simulation. See Recording and Replaying a Simulation.
3. Playback the simulation. See Recording and Replaying a Simulation.
NOTES:
• A simulation that you record is valid for as long as you do not make changes to the assembly. If you delete,
suppress, move, replace, fix, float, or change a component that is included in a recorded simulation, the
simulation is no longer valid.
• Physical Simulation uses the Sensitivity setting of Physical Dynamics to check for collisions. To change this
setting, click Move Component , select Physical Dynamics under Options, then move the Sensitivity
slider.
• You can suppress and configure the suppression state of the Simulation folder in the FeatureManager design
tree and its simulation elements. Suppressing the folder also suppresses its elements.
1. Click Linear Motor on the Simulation toolbar, or click Insert, Simulation, Linear Motor.
The Linear Motor PropertyManager appears.
2. Select a linear or circular edge, a planar, cylindrical, or conical face, or an axis or a plane of a component as
4. Click OK .
A LinearMotor icon is added to the FeatureManager design tree under the Simulation icon.
1. Click Rotary Motor on the Simulation toolbar, or click Insert, Simulation, Rotary Motor.
The Rotary Motor PropertyManager appears.
2. Select a linear or circular edge, a planar, cylindrical, or conical face, or an axis or a plane of a component as
4. Click OK .
A RotaryMotor icon is added to the FeatureManager design tree under the Simulation icon.
Linear Springs
Linear springs are simulation elements that move components around an assembly using Physical Simulation.
Physical Simulation combines simulation elements with other tools such as mates and Physical Dynamics to move
components in a realistic manner within the components degrees of freedom.
NOTES:
• Springs apply a force to a component. A spring with a higher spring constant will move a component faster
than a spring with a lower spring constant. Also, a component with a smaller mass will move faster than a
component with a larger mass if acted upon by an equal strength spring.
• Motion due to a spring stops when the spring reaches its free length.
• Motion due to motors supersedes motion due to springs. If you have a motor moving a component to the left
and a spring pulling a component to the right, the component moves to the left.
See Recording and Replaying a Simulation for more information on creating a simulation.
To add a spring:
1. Click Linear Spring on the Simulation toolbar, or click Insert, Simulation, Linear Spring.
The Linear Spring PropertyManager appears.
2. Select two Spring Endpoints to connect the spring. You can select linear edges, vertices, or sketch
points.
If you select an edge, the Spring Endpoint attaches to the midpoint of the edge.
3. Type a value for Free Length to determine if the spring is stretched or compressed.
4. Type a value for Spring Constant to determine the strength of the spring.
5. Click OK .
A LinearSpring icon is added to the FeatureManager design tree under the Simulation icon.
9-34
Gravity
Gravity is a simulation element that moves components around an assembly using Physical Simulation. Physical
Simulation combines simulation elements with other tools such as mates and Physical Dynamics to move
components in a realistic manner within the components degrees of freedom.
See Recording and Replaying a Simulation for more information on creating a simulation.
NOTES:
• You can define one gravity simulation element per assembly.
• All components move at the same speed under the effect of gravity regardless of their mass.
• Motion due to motors supersedes motion due to gravity. If you have a motor moving a component to the left
and gravity pulling a component to the right, the component moves to the left without any pull to the right.
To add gravity:
, if necessary.
If you select a plane or a planar face, the Direction Reference is normal to the selected entity.
3. Move the Strength slider to to the right to increase the gravitational strength or to the left to decrease the
strength.
4. Click OK .
A Gravity icon is added to the FeatureManager design tree under the Simulation icon.
Move Component or Rotate Component tools to move components during the simulation.
• If there is an initial collision between two or more components, Physical Simulation ignores collisions
between these components while recording a simulation. If the components no longer collide due to the
motion of a simulation, Physical Simulation takes subsequent collisions between the components into
account.
• When you record a simulation, components with in-context references may move if you do not fully define
the position of the components. Be cautious when using Physical Simulation in an assembly with in-context
references.
• When replaying a simulation, the components do not actually move to their original positions. Temporarily,
the components appear in their original positions in the graphics area to show the start of the simulation. The
replay of the simulation is for graphical purposes only.
To record a simulation:
1. Add simulation elements. See Linear or Rotary Motors, Springs, and Gravity.
3. Click Stop Record or Playback on the Simulation toolbar to end the simulation. Sometimes the
simulation stops automatically if the components can no longer move within their degrees of freedom.
The components are in their new position.
4. If desired, click Reset Components on the Simulation toolbar to return the components to their
original position.
To replay a simulation:
1. Click Replay Simulation to replay the simulation from the beginning to the end.
2. Click a tool on the Animation Controller pop-up toolbar. For example, you can continuously replay the
simulation or replay it at one-half speed.
Sub-assemblies
Creating a Sub-assembly
There are several ways to create a sub-assembly:
• You can create an assembly document as a separate operation, then make it a sub-assembly by inserting it as
a component in a higher-level assembly.
• You can insert a new, empty sub-assembly at any level of the assembly hierarchy while you are editing a
top-level assembly, then add components to it in a variety of ways.
• You can form a sub-assembly by selecting a group of components that are already in the assembly. This
creates a sub-assembly and adds components to it in a single step.
Modifying a Sub-assembly
• As you develop an assembly, you can modify its sub-assemblies in these ways:
• You can dissolve a sub-assembly into individual components, thereby moving the components up one level
in the assembly hierarchy.
• You can edit the assembly structure by moving components up or down in the hierarchy, or to a different
branch of the hierarchy. There are two ways to do this:
• Drag and drop the components to move them from one assembly to another.
• Click Tools, Reorganize Components. This method can be easier to use when the FeatureManager
design tree is very long, and therefore requires a lot of scrolling.
• You can change the order of the components within a level of the hierarchy.
9-36
Forming a New Assembly from Existing Components
You can form a sub-assembly from components that are already in the assembly, thereby moving the components
down one level in the assembly hierarchy.
It is a good idea to position and mate at least one of the components before you begin, then select that component
first.
9-38
Changing the Order of Components
You can change the order of the components within a level of the assembly hierarchy.
By default, assembly components appear in the FeatureManager design tree in the order in which they are added. The
same order is used in a bill of materials in a drawing of the assembly. By changing the order in the assembly, you can
control the order in the bill of materials.
Click New Assembly on the Assembly toolbar, or click Insert, Component, New Assembly.
The Save As dialog box appears.
2. Browse to a different folder if needed, enter a File name for the new assembly document, and click Save.
An empty sub-assembly is inserted as the last component of the selected assembly, and a new assembly
document (.sldasm) is created and saved in the folder you specify.
3. Add components to the sub-assembly:
• To move a component that is already in the assembly into the sub-assembly, see Dragging Components
to Edit the Assembly Structure or Assembly Structure Editing.
• To add an existing, saved component to the sub-assembly, right-click the sub-assembly icon in the
FeatureManager design tree, and select Edit Sub-assembly. Then insert components using any of the
methods in Adding Components to an Assembly.
• To insert a new component into a sub-assembly, you must edit the sub-assembly in its own window. You
cannot insert a new component into a sub-assembly while you are editing the top-level assembly. Also,
you cannot insert a new component while you are editing the sub-assembly in the context of a higher
level assembly.
Right-click the sub-assembly icon in the FeatureManager design tree, and select Open <sub-
assembly.sldasm> to open the sub-assembly in its own window. Then add a new component.
Dissolving a Sub-assembly
You can dissolve a sub-assembly into individual components, thereby moving the components up one level in the
assembly hierarchy.
To dissolve a sub-assembly:
In the FeatureManager design tree, right-click the sub-assembly you want to dissolve, and select Dissolve Sub-
assembly. You can also select the sub-assembly icon and click Edit, Dissolve Assembly.
The components become components of the immediate parent assembly, and the sub-assembly is removed. The
assembly document itself is not deleted from the folder where it is stored.
9-40
Automatic Change of Editing Focus
For some types of editing operations, the software recognizes that the changes you are making belong to the sub-
assembly, and not to the top-level assembly. In those cases, the editing focus automatically changes from the top-level
assembly to the sub-assembly.
If you edit any of the following items that belong to a sub-assembly, the editing focus changes automatically:
• sketch
• component pattern
• mate
• assembly feature (cut or hole)
• reference geometry.
Similarly, if you edit a feature (the definition or the sketch) of a sub-assembly component, the software automatically
changes to Editing Part mode. References that you make while editing a sub-assembly component are always made
in the context of the top-level assembly, not the sub-assembly that contains it.
If you add a mate between a sub-assembly component and some geometry outside that sub-assembly, the focus
changes to the sub-assembly automatically. The mate is added to the lowest level assembly that contains both
components (the lowest common parent).
Flexible Sub-Assemblies
You can make sub-assemblies flexible. This allows movement of the individual components of a sub-assembly within
the parent assembly.
An example of the benefit of this function is when you want to move the components of a piston sub-assembly in a
motor assembly. You can move the individual components of the piston while still grouping the components as a sub-
assembly.
Please note the following regarding flexible sub-assemblies:
• Mates. The mates in a flexible sub-assembly are solved simultaneously with the mates of the parent
assembly. Therefore, moving or rotating a sub-assembly component does not violate the mates in the sub-
assembly or its parent. A component moves only within its degrees of freedom according to its mates.
• Configurations. Each flexible sub-assembly must have its own unique configuration. This is because the
position of a component in one flexible sub-assembly could be in a different position in another
configuration of the flexible sub-assembly.
External References
An external reference is created when one document is dependent on another document for its solution. If the
referenced document changes, the dependent document changes also.
In an assembly, you can create an in-context feature on one component that references the geometry of another
component. This in-context feature has an external reference to the other component. If you change the geometry on
the referenced component, the associated in-context feature changes accordingly.
An in-context feature updates automatically if the update path is available. The update path is contained in the
assembly where you create the reference. Update paths for in-context features are displayed in the
FeatureManager design tree. If the update path is not available (for example, if the assembly document is closed),
updating occurs the next time you open the assembly that contains the update path.
See Understanding the Update Path for more information.
click the top-level assembly icon and select Hide Update Holders.
9-42
Understanding the Update Path
Consider the example of an assembly that contains two components: a mold base and a design component.
In the context of the assembly, you create a cavity feature in the mold base, with an external reference to the design
component. The update path for the cavity feature is therefore contained in the assembly.
Now, suppose that you need to change the design component and you need to update the mold base accordingly.
• If the assembly is open, the cavity feature in the mold base updates automatically when you make the
changes to the design component.
• If the assembly is closed, the cavity feature cannot be updated to reflect the changes until you open the
assembly, thereby making the update path available.
To list the external references for a feature, an assembly component, or a derived part:
Right-click the feature, component, or part in the FeatureManager design tree and select List External Refs.
This operation is only available for items that have external references.
The External References For dialog box appears.
o The Part or Assembly box displays the path and name of the assembly in which the component or
feature was created.
o Configuration. Select the configuration of the referenced component to use for a derived part.
o The Feature column lists each in-context item (sketches, features, and so on) in the selected part.
o The Data column describes the type of data used to create the item (converted edge or face,
converted or offset sketch entity, body, and so on).
o The Status of each reference. This can be In context or Out of context, Locked, or Broken.
o The Referenced Entity describes the actual item being used, and the name of the document that
contains the item.
o The Feature’s Component column displays the name of the component in which the affected
feature exists. This information is displayed only when the Referenced entity is in a different
component in an assembly; this column does not apply to derived parts.
To lock, unlock, or break external references, see Locking and Breaking External References.
9-44
Rules Examples
1. Uses any open document with the same name. If p2.sldprt is in another open document,
SolidWorks uses this version of p2.sldprt.
2. Searches the first path that you specify in the Folders D:\aa\bb\p2.sldprt
list in the File Locations Options dialog box.
NOTE: You must select the Search file locations for
external references check box in the External
References Options dialog box or else SolidWorks
ignores the paths that you specify.
3. Searches the path in Step 2 plus the last folder in the D:\aa\bb\xx\p2.sldprt
path where the referenced document was last saved.
4. Searches the path in Step 2 plus the last two folders in D:\aa\bb\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
the path where the referenced document was last
saved.
5. Repeats Step 4 until the full original path has been D:\aa\bb\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
appended to the the path in Step 2.
NOTE: This concept of adding one folder at a time
from the full path will be called "recursive searching"
in the following steps.
6. Recursively searches the first path in the Folders list, D:\aa\xx\p2.sldprt
then recursively searches the path where the D:\aa\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
referenced document was last saved. D:\aa\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
7. Repeats Steps 2 through 6 for the other folders in the E:\cc\dd\p2.sldprt
Folders list. E:\cc\dd\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\cc\dd\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\cc\dd\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\cc\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\cc\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\cc\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
E:\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
8. Searches the path of the active document, then D:\ss\tt\p2.sldprt
recursively searches the path where the referenced D:\ss\tt\xx\p2.sldprt
document was last saved. D:\ss\tt\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\ss\tt\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\ss\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\ss\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\ss\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
D:\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
9. Searches the path where you last opened a document, same as Step 8
then recursively searches the path where the
referenced document was last saved.
NOTE: In most cases, the path of the active
document and the path where you last opened a
document are the same.
The two paths are different if you click File, Open to
open one document, then drag and drop an assembly
from Windows Explorer into that document. The path
of the active document is the path from Windows
Explorer and the path where you last opened a
document is the path from File, Open.
10. Searches the path where the software last found a C:\qq\p2.sldprt
referenced document. This is the location of p1.sldprt.
11. Searches the full path where the document was last This is useful if you save a part with a UNC
saved without a drive designation. path such as \\machine\folder\p2.sldprt.
12. Searches the full path where the document was last C:\zz\yy\xx\p2.sldprt
saved with its original drive designation.
13. Allows you to browse for the document yourself. n/a
Search Results
In an assembly document, lists the part and sub-assembly documents that are components of the active assembly. This
is useful if you have several versions of the component files.
In a part document, lists externally referenced documents, if they exist.
To list the referenced files then copy the listed files to a new directory:
1. Click File, Find References.
2. In the dialog box, click Print to print the contents of the dialog box.
3. Click Copy list to copy the contents of the dialog box to the Windows clipboard so you can paste the list into
a text editor.
4. To copy the files:
a. Click Copy files.
NOTE: This option is not available for parts with in-context references. To copy files in this case,
open the assembly that is listed, and click File, Find References.
b. To retain the directory structure of the file copies, click Yes when prompted to preserve directory
structure. To copy all files to a single folder, click No.
c. Browse to the desired folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box and click OK.
5. Click Close to close the dialog box.
9-46
Editing Parts in the Assembly Context
While editing an assembly, you can:
• Create a new part in the assembly window
• Edit an existing component in the assembly window
• Open an existing component document in its own window
1. Click New Part on the Assembly toolbar, or click Insert, Component, New Part. The default part
template on the Default Templates Options page is used.
2. In the Save As dialog box, enter a name for the new part and click Save. The new part is saved in its own
document so you can edit it separately.
click anywhere in the graphics area, and select Edit Assembly:assembly_name, or click Edit Part .
1. Right-click the part and select Edit Part, or click Edit Part on the Assembly toolbar.
The title bar shows the name of the part in the assembly that is open for editing as part_name in
assembly_name.sldasm. Note that the message in the status bar indicates that you are now editing the part
document even though the entire assembly is visible.
NOTE: When you edit a part in the context of an assembly, the referenced configuration in the assembly
becomes the active configuration in all open windows (for example, if the part is open in its own window).
If the part is used in another open assembly document, with the Use component’s in-use or last saved
configuration option selected, those instances are also affected.
For more information, see Component Configurations in an Assembly.
2. Make the necessary changes to the part.
3. To return to editing the assembly, right-click the assembly name in the FeatureManager design tree, or right-
click anywhere in the graphics area, and select Edit Assembly:assembly_name, or click Edit Part .
The illustrations below show the results of applying different settings during editing
of the sphere in this assembly. The sphere is completely enclosed by blocks, some
of which have transparency applied as a component property.
2. Click Change Assembly Transparency on the Assembly toolbar, and select from the following:
9-48
Opaque Maintain Transparency Force Transparency
TIP: Additionally, you can right-click any blank area and set Assembly Transparency on the shortcut menu
to Opaque, Maintain Transparency, or Force Transparency.
3. Edit the part as needed.
4. Click Edit Part to return to editing the assembly, and to turn off transparency.
Time-Dependent Features
Time-dependent features are the basis of top-down design. They include:
• Assembly features (assembly feature cuts or holes, and weld beads)
• Components that are created in the context of the assembly
• In-context features, reference geometry, and sketches that reference other components
• Component patterns
When a time-dependent feature references components that have already been positioned by mates, the features
become dependent on both the components and the mates that position the components. To view these dependencies,
right-click the feature and select Parent/Child.
Mates are solved together as a system within a mategroup. Each assembly has a single default mategroup. The order
in which mates are added to the mategroup does not matter; all the mates are solved at the same time.
• Type a value for Spacing . This is the value between the centers of the instances.
• Type a value for Number of Instances . This is the total number of instances including the
seed components.
3. Repeat for Direction 2 for a bidirectional pattern.
Select Pattern seed only to pattern the seed component only in the second direction. When cleared,
SolidWorks patterns all of the instances generated by Direction 1 and the seed component in the second
direction.
5. To skip instances, click in Instances to Skip and select the preview of the instance in the graphics
area.
7. Click OK .
The new components appear under LocalLPattern in the FeatureManager design tree.
By default, all instances use the same configuration as the seed components. To change the configuration,
edit the component properties of an instance.
• Type a value for Angle . This is the angular value between the centers of the instances.
• Type a value for Number of Instances . This is the total number of instances including the
seed components.
• Select Equal Spacing to set the Angle to 360°. You can change the value to a different angle.
The instances equally space themselves along the total angle.
9-50
3. Click in Components to Pattern , then select the seed components.
4. To skip instances, click in Instances to Skip and select the preview of the instance in the graphics
area.
6. Click OK .
The new components appear under LocalCirPattern in the FeatureManager design tree.
By default, all instances use the same configuration as the seed components. To change the configuration,
edit the component properties of an instance.
3. Click in Driving Feature and select the pattern feature in the FeatureManager design tree or a face of a
pattern instance in the graphics area.
4. Click OK .
The new components appear under DerivedLPattern or DerivedCirPattern in the FeatureManager design
tree.
By default, all instances use the same configuration as the seed components. To change the configuration,
edit the component properties of an instance.
To skip instances:
1. Right-click the pattern feature in the FeatureManager design tree and select Edit Feature.
2. Click in Instances to Skip and select the preview of the instance in the graphics area.
You cannot skip instances when creating a derived component pattern; you must edit the feature.
The difference between a component that you copy and one that you mirror is described as follows:
Copy Mirror
No new documents are created. A new document is created.
The geometry of the copied component is The geometry of the new component is
identical to the original component; only the mirrored; thus it is different from the original
orientation of the component is different. component.
6. Click Next .
If you chose to mirror components, you go to Step 2: Filenames to choose names for your new parts. If you
did not mirror components, you go to Step 3: Orientation.
9-52
Mirror Components Step 2: Filenames
Select a name and a location for each of the components you are mirroring. You can create a new part or sub-
assembly from the component or use an existing part or sub-assembly. For example, if you previously made a mirror
of your component in an earlier operation, you can use that part.
5. Click OK .
Reorder
Changing the order of assembly items in the FeatureManager design tree is dictated by parent/child relationships, just
as it is with features in parts.
• You can reorder sketches, features, and reference geometry that belong to the assembly.
• You can reorder components within their own level of the assembly hierarchy. See Changing the order of
components.
• You can reorder mates within the mategroup.
• You cannot reorder mategroups, component patterns, in-context features, or any default assembly items
(default planes, Annotations or Lighting folders, and so on).
Roll Back
You can roll back reference geometry, sketches, component patterns, assembly features and in-context features. In
general, rolling back assembly items behaves the same as rolling back features in parts. The following behaviors are
specific to assemblies:
• If you roll back an assembly pattern, the components generated by that pattern are rolled back.
• You cannot roll back into the section of the FeatureManager design tree that lists the components (that is,
after some of the components are added, or before others). This is because components are not time-
dependent. Hide or suppress the components instead.
You can change the location or the size of the pulleys by editing the layout sketch.
The assembly now consists of a belt and a set of pulleys whose locations and sizes are driven by the layout sketch.
The advantage of this type of design is clear when you have to make changes to the design.
9-54
For example, working in the layout sketch, you can:
• Rearrange the pulleys so that a slipping pulley has more of its surface covered by the belt.
• Make a driven pulley larger so less torque is required to turn it.
• Drag the pulleys and belt to dynamically experiment with different locations.
• Set an angle dimension to specify how much of each pulley must be covered by the belt.
• When you exit the layout sketch, the assembly and the parts are updated.
If you designed this assembly without a layout sketch, you would need to change many dimensions, or move
components in the assembly, then rebuild each time.
The layout sketch does not have to be the master plan for a design. If you had a model of an engine with some fixed
pulley locations, you could make the circles in the layout sketch coincident with the known locations of the pulleys in
the model. You would still have the freedom to drag the other pulleys to different locations, and the assembly would
update automatically when you made changes.
Assembly Features
While in an assembly, you can create cut or hole features that exist in the assembly only. You determine which parts
you want the feature to affect by setting the scope. You can create a pattern of assembly features in the same manner
as you create a pattern of features in a part.
This is useful for creating cuts or holes that are added after the components are actually assembled, and that affect
more than one component. When you want to add a cut or hole to a single component in an assembly, it is better to
edit the part in context than to use an assembly feature.
While it is not a requirement, it is good practice to fully define the positions of the components of the assembly, or fix
their locations before you add assembly features. This helps prevent unexpected results if the components are moved
later.
Feature Scope
When creating an feature in an assembly or a multibody part, you must determine which components or bodies you
want to be affected by the feature. By setting the scope, you can selectively choose the components or bodies you
want the feature to impact.
Joining Parts
You can join two or more parts to create a new part. The join operation removes surfaces that intrude into each other's
space, and merges the part bodies into a single solid volume.
To join parts:
9-56
3. Save the assembly but do not close the window.
4. Insert a new part into the assembly:
o Click Insert, Component, New Part.
o Enter a name for the new part and click
Save.
o Click a plane or planar face on a
component on which to position the new
part.
5. Click Insert, Features, Join.
The Join PropertyManager appears.
6. In either the FeatureManager design tree or the graphics area, click the components you want to
join.
The names appear under Parts to Join.
7. Select the Hide Parts check box to hide the original components after the join is complete.
8. Select the Force Surface Contact check box if you want to join any coincident faces (as well
as intruding volumes).
The software finds the affected faces, then extends the face with the smallest area into the other
component, and fills in any resultant gaps.
10. To exit from Editing Part mode, right-click in the graphics area, and select Edit
Assembly:assembly_name.
Weld Beads
You can add a variety of weld types to an assembly. The weld bead becomes a new assembly component created in
the context of the assembly. See Working with Parts within an Assembly.
You can do the following:
• View the available weld types
• Create and edit weld beads
• Select faces for weld beads more easily
• Automatically create weld symbols
Weld Types
The following weld types are supported for the ISO and ANSI dimensioning standards:
ISO ANSI
Butt Square
Square Butt Scarf
Single V Butt V Groove
Single Bevel Butt Bevel
Single V Butt with Root U Groove
Single Bevel Butt with Root J Groove
Single U Butt Flare-V
Single J Butt Flare-Bevel
Backing Run Fillet
Fillet Seam
Seam Flange-Edge
Flange-Corner
9-58
6. Select the necessary faces. For all welds, you must select Contact Faces. Depending on the type of weld
you are adding, you may also need to select Stop Faces and Top Faces. Click each box, then select the faces
in the graphics area. See Weld Face Selection Tips for more information.
Stop Faces are the faces that define the beginning and
the end of the weld bead. On each component, select
two faces (or two sets of adjacent faces) that share an
edge with the contact faces.
7. Click Next.
8. In the Weld Bead Part dialog box, either accept the default name for the Weld Bead Part, or enter a new
part name, and click Finish.
To edit a weld:
1. In the FeatureManager design tree, expand the Bead component.
2. Right-click the Weld Bead feature and select Edit Feature.
3. In each of the dialog boxes, change the parameters as needed. Click Next to continue, then click Finish
when you reach the last dialog box.
For a concave weld, the distance is measured below the top surface rather than above.
• Rotate the model using Rotate View . You can change the orientation then select the faces.
9-60
Simplifying Assemblies
Click Large Assembly Mode on the Assembly toolbar, or click Tools, Large Assembly Mode.
The options are enabled.
Lightweight Components
You can load an assembly with its active components fully resolved or lightweight. Both parts and sub-assemblies can
be lightweight.
• When a component is fully resolved, all its model data is loaded in memory.
• When a component is lightweight, only a subset of its model data is loaded in memory. The remaining model
data is loaded on an as-needed basis.
You can improve performance of large assemblies significantly by using lightweight components. Loading an
assembly with lightweight components is faster than loading the same assembly with fully resolved components.
Lightweight components are efficient because the full model data for the components is loaded only as it is needed.
Only components that you select, and components that are affected by changes that you make in the current editing
session, become fully resolved.
Assemblies with lightweight components rebuild faster because less data is evaluated. Mates on a lightweight
component are solved, and you can edit existing mates.
When you point at a lightweight part in the graphics area, a feather pointer is displayed, and the body is
surrounded by a bounding box.
NOTE: Lightweight parts are only used when the model is in Shaded mode. If the model was last saved in
Hidden Lines Removed, Hidden In Gray, or Wireframe mode, lightweight parts are not used.
Select the component, then click Change Transparency on the Assembly toolbar.
• Select the component, then click Hide/Show Components on the Assembly toolbar. This method
changes only the visibility of the active configuration.
• Select the component, then click Edit, Hide (or Show, or Show with Dependents), This Configuration (or
All Configurations, or Specified Configurations).
9-62
Component Suppression States
Depending on the scope of the work you plan to do at any given time, you can specify an appropriate suppression
state for the components. This can reduce the amount of data that is loaded and evaluated as you work. The assembly
displays and rebuilds faster, and you make more efficient use of your system resources.
There are three suppression states for assembly components:
• Resolved
• Suppressed
• Lightweight
• Click a component, then click Change Suppression State on the Assembly toolbar. This method
changes only the suppression state of the active configuration.
-or-
Click Edit, Suppress (or Unsuppress), This Configuration (All Configurations, Specified
Configurations).
If you select Specified Configurations, a dialog box appears. Select the configurations you want to change
from the list, and click OK.
• To fully resolve (unsuppress) a suppressed component, right-click the suppressed component, and select Set
to Resolved. This resolves all configurations of the component.
• To fully resolve all lightweight parts, right-click the assembly icon at the top of the FeatureManager design
tree, and select Set Lightweight to Resolved.
NOTE: You cannot set specific configurations of components to lightweight.
Resolved
Resolved (or unsuppressed) is the normal state for assembly components. A resolved component is fully loaded in
memory, fully functional, and fully accessible. All its model data is available, so its entities can be selected,
referenced, edited, used in mates, and so on.
Suppressed
You can use the suppressed state to remove a component temporarily from the assembly, without deleting it. It is not
loaded in memory, and it is no longer a functional member of the assembly. You cannot see a suppressed component,
or select any of its entities.
A suppressed component is removed from memory, so loading speed, rebuild speed, and display performance are
improved. Because of the reduced complexity, evaluation of remaining components occurs faster.
However, mates that involve the suppressed components are suppressed also. As a result, the positions of components
in the assembly can become under defined. In-context features that reference suppressed components may also be
affected. When you restore a suppressed component to the fully resolved state, conflicts can occur. Therefore, use the
suppressed state carefully when modeling.
9-64
1 In-context features on resolved parts that reference lightweight parts update automatically.
2 Global operations include Mass Properties, Interference Detection, Exploded View, Advanced Selection and
Advanced Show/Hide, solving equations, displaying section views, and exporting to other file formats. When
lightweight components are present, the software prompts you to either resolve them, or cancel the operation.
3 Lightweight components are resolved automatically when selected for this operation.
Assembly Envelopes
An assembly envelope is a special type of assembly component. It is a reference component, and it is ignored in
global assembly operations (Bill of Materials, Mass Properties, and so on). This functionality allows you to select
components based on their positions with respect to the envelope volume (inside, outside, or crossing).
You can use an envelope by itself to quickly change the visibility of assembly components. You can also use an
envelope (either alone or in combination with file properties), to select components for other editing operations, such
as suppress, copy, or delete.
The envelope component must be a solid volume (not shelled). This is because selection with envelopes is based on
interference between the volumes of the functional assembly components and the envelope component. It is not based
on the containment of components within the bounding box of the envelope component.
Envelope components are displayed in a light blue transparent color when you use Shaded view mode. An Envelope
feature is added to the ConfigurationManager for each envelope component that you create. Also, envelope
components are identified in the FeatureManager design tree.
Apply Envelope
Lets you specify selection criteria to hide or show assembly components, based on their positions relative to an
envelope component.
9-66
Component Selection by Properties
You can select components for editing operations based on properties. Properties include those specified under File,
Properties, Custom and Configuration Specific, as well as some properties that are specific to SolidWorks
documents, including Part volume, Configuration name, Document name, and Part mass.
For example, you assign the custom property System to each component in an assembly. You specify the name of the
system the component belongs to as the value. Then you select all components that have the custom property System
whose value is Cooling Or Heating. This selects all the components that belong to either the cooling system or the
heating system of the assembly.
Before you can use these component selection methods in an assembly, you must fully resolve any lightweight parts
that it contains. See Lightweight Components and Loading Additional Model Data for more information.
9-68
Displaying Assemblies
Assembly Exploder
1. Click Exploded View on the Assembly toolbar, or right-click the configuration name in the
ConfigurationManager, and select New Exploded View.
2. Click Auto Explode.
3. Examine the Step Parameters, and modify if necessary.
4. Click OK.
1. Select the Explode Step you want to edit, or use the buttons to examine and edit each step in turn.
As you select each step, the drag handle appears and the components involved are highlighted or enclosed in
bounding boxes.
2. Edit the explode step by dragging the green handle, changing the distance or direction, and so on, until the
component is positioned as desired.
3. To change the Components to explode or the Direction to explode along, click the corresponding box,
then click the desired entities to select or deselect them.
4. To clear the contents of a box and start again, click the box, then right-click in the graphics area, and select
Clear Selections.
9-70
Alternative Method for Editing an Exploded View
3. Drag the component by the green drag handle to the new position.
4. Repeat as needed for each component, then collapse the assembly.
2. Click Explode Line Sketch on the Assembly toolbar, or click Insert, Explode Line Sketch.
The Route Line PropertyManager appears.
3. Add explode lines as needed using the Route Line and Jog Sketch Line tools on the Explode
Sketch toolbar. The lines appear in phantom font.
4. Add additional lines using the 3D sketch tools, if needed. All lines appear in phantom font.
5. Close the sketch.
The sketch appears in the ConfigurationManager under ExplView<n>.
Jog Line
You can jog sketch lines in 2D or 3D sketches in part, assembly, and drawing documents. Jog lines are automatically
constrained to be parallel or perpedicular to the original sketch line.
You can drag and dimension jog lines.
1. In an open sketch with a line, or in a drawing with a sketched line, click Jog Line on the Explode
Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Jog Line.
2. Click a line to begin the jog.
3. Move the pointer to preview the width and depth of the jog.
The Jog Line tool stays active so you can insert multiple jogs.
9-72
To change the color of selected component instances:
1. Click a component in the FeatureManager design tree or in the graphics area. To select multiple components,
hold Ctrl as you select.
2. Click Edit Color on the Standard toolbar. See Color and Optics.
3. Click OK.
Annotations in Assemblies
To specify the display of annotations in an assembly, right-click the Annotations folder in the FeatureManager
design tree, and select Details. In the Annotation Properties dialog box, you have these options:
• Display filter. Select which annotation types, if any, to display by default. To select specific types, clear the
Display all types check box, and select the types you want.
• Text scale. Adjust the size of the text as needed.
• Always display text at the same size. When checked, all annotations and dimensions are displayed at the
same size, regardless of zoom.
• Display items only in the view orientation in which they are created. When checked, any annotation is
displayed only when the model is viewed in the same orientation as when the annotation was added.
• Display assembly annotations. Toggles the display of annotations, including annotations that belong to the
assembly, and annotations that are displayed in the individual part documents.
• Use assembly’s setting for all components. Sets the display of all annotations to match the setting for the
assembly document, regardless of the setting in the individual part documents. Use this option along with
Display assembly annotations to display different combinations of annotations.
Interference Detection
In a complex assembly, it may be difficult to visually determine whether components interfere with each other. You
can determine the interference between components and examine the resulting interference volumes.
To detect interference:
1. Click Interference Detection on the Assembly toolbar, or click Tools, Interference Detection.
By default, the top-level assembly appears under Selected Components unless you pre-selected other
components. If you check an assembly for interference, all of its components are checked.
2. Under Options, select Treat coincident as interference to report coincident entities as interference
volumes. When cleared, coincident entities are ignored.
5. Clear the Selected Components box, select new components, and click OK to check other components
for interference.
Collision Detection
You can detect collisions with other components when moving or rotating a component. The software can detect
collisions with the entire assembly or a selected group of components. You can find collisions for either the selected
components or for all of the components that move as a result of mates to the selected components.
Physical Dynamics is an option in Collision Detection that allows you to see the motion of assembly components in
a realistic way. With Physical Dynamics enabled, when you drag a component, the component applies a force to
components that it touches, and moves the components if they are free to move.
9-74
6. Under Options, select:
o Highlight faces - The faces that touch the component you are moving are highlighted.
o Sound - The computer beeps when a collision is detected.
o Ignore complex surfaces - Collisions are only detected on the following surface types: planar,
cylindrical, conical, spherical, and torodial.
NOTE: The This configuration check box does not apply to Collision Detection, Physical
Dynamics, or Dynamic Clearance. It applies only to Move Component or Rotate Component.
7. Move or rotate the component to detect collisions.
Physical Dynamics
Physical Dynamics is an option in Collision Detection that allows you to see the motion of assembly components in a
realistic way.
With Physical Dynamics enabled, when you drag a component, the component applies a force to components that it
touches. The effect is to move or rotate contacted components within their allowable degrees of freedom. The
dragged component reacts to a collision by rotating within its allowable degrees of freedom or by sliding against a
constrained or partially constrained component to allow the drag to continue.
Physical Dynamics propagates throughout the assembly. The dragged component can push aside a component, which
then moves into and pushes aside another component, and so on.
Physical Dynamics works best and is most meaningful on assemblies that have only a few degrees of freedom.
Add all appropriate mates prior to running Physical Dynamics.
You cannot use Physical Dynamics and Dynamic Clearance at the same time.
Use the most sensitive settings only for very small components, or for components with complex
geometry in the collision area. When you use the maximum sensitivity when checking for collisions
between larger components, the drag is very slow. Use only the sensitivity setting you need to see the motion
in your assembly.
4. If needed, specify the components to participate in the collision:
a. Click These components.
b. Select components for Components for Collision Check.
c. Click Resume Drag.
6. Click OK .
Initial Collisions
If the component you drag has an initial collision with another component, SolidWorks displays a message in the
graphics area and all components involved in the collision turn transparent. Physical Dynamics is turned off for
collisions between the transparent components. You can continue the drag, and collide with and apply a force to other
components.
Dynamic Clearance
You can dynamically detect the clearance between components when moving or rotating a component. As you move
or rotate a component, a dimension appears indicating the minimum distance between the selected components.
Additionally, you can prevent two components from moving or rotating within a specified distance of one another.
3. Click in Components for Collision Check , select the components to check, then click Resume Drag.
4. Click Stop at Specified Clearance and type a value in the box to prevent the selected components
from moving within the specified distance.
5. Drag one of the selected components in the graphics area.
Notice a dimension appears in the graphics area and in the PropertyManager. This dimension is the minimum
distance between the selected components; the dimension dynamically updates as you drag the component.
Also, in the PropertyManager, a value appears in brackets. This is the minimum distance found during the
drag operation.
9-76
6. Under Options, select:
o Sound - The computer beeps when the minimum distance in the Stop at Specified Clearance box
is reached.
o Ignore complex surfaces - Clearances are only detected on the following surface types: planar,
cylindrical, conical, spherical, and torodial.
NOTE: The This configuration check box does not apply to Collision Detection, Physical
Dynamics, or Dynamic Clearance. It applies only to Move Component or Rotate Component.
Smart Fasteners
Fasteners
Hole Wizard holes are fitted with matching bolts or screws. For other types of holes, you can configure Smart
Fasteners to add any type of bolt or screw as a default. The fasteners are automatically mated to the holes with
concentric and coincident mates.
Hardware Stacks
Smart Fasteners can add nuts and washers to your fasteners. Nuts and washers are automatically mated to the
fastener with a concentric mate, and to the fastening surface with a coincident mate.
Configurations
The added fasteners are fully parameterized parts. Each Smart Fastener is shown in the FeatureManager, and can be
expanded to show individual features. Smart Fasteners added to hole patterns use a fastener pattern derived from the
hole pattern. The fasteners are all the same type and size, but you can use different configurations of the fastener in
the pattern. For example you can make some bolts longer than others.
Editing
You can change your fasteners with the Edit Smart Fasteners command. It is not recommended to edit the
individual parameters of a Toolbox part using Edit Sketch or Edit Definition. These functions do not update the
Toolbox database.
To enable Toolbox:
1. Click Tools, Add-ins.
2. Select SolidWorks Toolbox and SolidWorks Toolbox Browser.
3. Click OK.
2. Click Smart Fasteners on the Assembly toolbar, or click Insert, Smart Fasteners.
If you pre-selected a hole, face, or component, new fasteners appear in the assembly and under Fasteners in
the PropertyManager.
3. To add fasteners:
a. Select holes, faces, or components.
b. Under Selection, click Add.
New fasteners appear in the assembly and under Fasteners.
c. Click Populate All to add fasteners to all the holes in the assembly.
4. Change the fastener parameters if needed.
5. Add nuts and washers if needed.
6. Click OK .
9-78
Fastener Defaults
The length of a new fastener is the next smallest national standard length for a blind hole, and the next
longest national standard length for a through hole. When holes are deeper than the longest fastener length,
the longest one is used.
For a Hole Wizard hole, the fastener type matches the type of hole, and the diameter is the appropriate size.
For a Simple Hole or cylindrical cut, you can specify a default fastener type. The fastener diameter is the
next smallest national standard size.
Askew Head Bolt Binding Head Screw Binding Head Miniature Countersunk Bolt
Screw
Countersunk Elevator Bolt Countersunk Square Fillister Head Screw Fillister Head
Neck Bolt Chamfered Miniature
Screw
Fillister Head Oval Crown Flat Head Screw Flat Head Miniature Screw Heavy Hex Bolt
Miniature Screw
Heavy Hex Structural Bolt Hex Lag Screw Hex Screw Hex Washer Screw
Oval Head Screw Pan Cross Head Screw Pan Head Miniature Screw Pan Slot Head Screw
Round Head Bolt Round Head Fin Neck Round Head Ribbed Neck Round Head Screw
Bolt Bolt
Round Head Square Neck Round Head Step Bolt Socket Button Head Cap Socket Countersunk
Bolt Screw Head Cap Screw
9-80
Socket Head Cap Screw Socket Head Shoulder Square Bolt Square Lag Screw
Screw
Styles:
Both Hex Nuts and Heavy Hex Nuts are available in Hex, Hex Flat, Hex Flat Jam, Hex Jam, and Hex Slotted
styles.
Acorn High Crown Acorn High Crown 61 Acorn Low Crown Heavy Hex Square
Type A Washers
Selected washers have a smaller hole than preferred washers.
Narrow washers are slightly thinner than wide washers.
Preferred Narrow Flat Preferred Wide Flat Selected Narrow Flat Selected Wide Flat
Type B Washers
Narrow washer is slightly thinner than wide and regular washers.
9-82
Spring Lock Washers
Single holes
The hole must pass through at least two components.
Unsupported Supported
A base extrude with inside circles appears to form holes. Although geometrically identical to holes, they are not
separate features, and are not recognized by Smart Fasteners.
Unsupported Unsupported
Supported Supported
9-84
Large differences in radius
If any hole in a series is more than twice the radius of the smallest hole in the series, Smart Fasteners does not
recognize the holes.
Unsupported hole series - 45 > 2(20) Supported hole series - 35 < 2(20)
Misaligned holes
Holes are unsupported if they are misaligned. If Smart Fasteners does not insert a fastener into a hole series that
appears aligned and is otherwise appropriate, check for a small geometric misalignment (see Measure).
9-86
NOTE: To remove a component from the stack, select None from the component list.
Single fastener assigned to hole series. Hole series split. New fastener lengths.
4. Select the first hole feature that you want to split off from the series, (in this example, the third hole feature),
and drag it to the fastener name at the top level of the tree. The first and second hole features stay with the
original series, and the third and fourth hole features form a new series.
When you select a hole feature for a new series, that hole feature and all the ones following it in the fastener
list move into the new series.
5. A message box appears. Select one of the following options:
• Click Yes to calculate new fastener lengths for both series.
• Click No to keep the original fastener length for both series.
A new Series is added to the list, and another set of fasteners appears in the graphics area in the selected
holes. The fasteners have the same properties (except for length) as the parent fastener.
You can edit the properties at the fastener level or at the Series level.
Reassigning Holes
One way to change the properties of Smart Fasteners is to reassign the fastener hole to a different fastener. See
Editing Smart Fasteners for other ways to change fastener properties.
To reassign a hole:
1. If you are not in the Smart Fasteners PropertyManager, right-click the Smart Fastener in the
FeatureManager design tree, and select Edit Smart Fasteners.
2. Expand the fastener and Series for the hole you want to reassign.
3. Select the hole series in the PropertyManager design tree and drag it to another Smart Fastener in the tree.
The hole series moves under the new Smart Fastener in the tree, and the new fastener appears in the
graphics area.
5. Click OK .
Mark Up-to-date
If you change a hole containing Smart Fasteners, you might get the following warning: Hole series has changed.
Please verify that current fastener is correct.
The affected fastener is marked with a flag in the FeatureManager design tree.
9-88
Configuring Bolt Patterns in Smart Fasteners
Smart Fasteners added to hole patterns use a bolt pattern derived from the hole pattern. The fasteners are all the
same and there is only one fastener listed in the Smart Fasteners PropertyManager. If you want to change the
properties of some bolts in the pattern, (for example, make them longer), you can specify different configurations of
the bolt.
Each time you specify a Smart Fastener, you add it to your Toolbox database. Smart Fasteners follows the copy
parts options in the SolidWorks Toolbox Configure Browser dialog box to determine if fasteners are added to an
assembly as a configuration of an existing part or as a copy of an existing part.
9-90
10
Configurations
Configurations Overview
Configurations allow you to create multiple variations of a part or assembly model within a single document.
Configurations provide a convenient way to develop and manage families of models with different dimensions,
components, or other parameters.
To create a configuration, you specify a name and properties, then you modify the model to create the design
variations you want.
• In part documents, configurations allow you to create families of parts with different dimensions, features,
and properties, including custom properties.
• In assembly documents, configurations allow you to create:
o simplified versions of the design by suppressing or hiding components.
o families of assemblies with different configurations of the components, different parameters for
assembly features, different dimensions, or configuration-specific custom properties.
You can create configurations manually, or you can use a design table to create multiple configurations
simultaneously.
Design tables provide a convenient way to create and manage configurations in an easy-to-use worksheet. You can
use design tables in both part and assembly documents, and you can display design tables in drawings.
Custom properties created in design tables are automatically added to the Configuration Specific tab in the
Summary Information dialog box.
ConfigurationManager
The ConfigurationManager on the left side of the SolidWorks window is a means to create, select, and view multiple
configurations of parts and assemblies in a document.
You can split the ConfigurationManager and either display two ConfigurationManager instances, or combine the
ConfigurationManager with the FeatureManager design tree, PropertyManager, or third party applications that use
the panel.
The icons in the ConfigurationManager denote whether the configuration was created manually or with a design
table .
To activate the ConfigurationManager:
Show Preview
You can display configuration previews of a part or assembly in the PropertyManager. You do not have to open a
configuration to see it, which saves time in complex parts and assemblies.
You can have more than one instance of an in-context component that is geometrically different in an assembly. To
accomplish this, you must have the following:
• A driving part with two configurations.
• An sub-assembly with two configurations.
• In the sub-assembly, create a driven part with two configurations. The driven part is built in the context of
the sub-assembly referencing the different geometry in the two configurations of the driving part.
The configurations in the driving part, driven part, and sub-assembly do not need to have the same
name. But, you must correctly organize the configuration names that represent each combination of
geometrically different components.
Here is an example to show how to place components that are geometrically different into the same assembly:
1. Create a cylindrical part called tube.
2. Create two configurations of tube called large and small. Each configuration has a different diameter for the
cylinder.
3. Add tube to a sub-assembly called pipes and create two configurations of the sub-assembly called large and
small. Each configuration of the sub-assembly, pipes, use tube in its large and small configurations.
4. Create a part called plug in the context of the sub-assembly, referencing the different diameters of tube.
Plug must have two configurations large and small that match the driving component, tube.
5. Insert two instances of the sub-assembly, pipes, into a main assembly called plumbing. Set one instance of
pipes to the large configuration and the other to the small configuration.
You now have two instances of the driven part, plug, that are geometrically different in the same assembly.
The important detail is matching the configurations of the driving part, driven part, and sub-assembly.
10-2
Configure Document
When you open an assembly document, you can specify the configuration name to use for the parts contained in the
assembly. You can also create a new configuration when you open an assembly, and either suppress or resolve all of
the components at once.
The Configure Document for View dialog box appears if you opened a drawing whose configuration no longer
exists.
The Configurations dialog box appears if you replaced a component in an assembly, and clicked the Manually
select option.
If either of these dialog boxes appears, select a configuration to use, then click OK.
Manual Configurations
1. In either a part or assembly document, click the ConfigurationManager tab at the top of the
FeatureManager design tree to change to the ConfigurationManager.
2. In the ConfigurationManager, right-click the part or assembly name and select Add Configuration.
3. In the Add Configuration dialog box, type a Configuration Name and specify properties for the new
configuration. You can specify a configuration specific color.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the FeatureManager design tree tab to return to the FeatureManager design tree.
6. Modify the model as needed to create the design variation.
7. Save the model.
10-4
For parts, the following check box is available:
• Suppress features. By default, newly added features are unsuppressed in the active configuration. This
option controls what happens when new features are added to another configuration, then this configuration
is activated again.
When selected, new features added to other configurations are suppressed in this configuration. Otherwise,
new features are unsuppressed in this configuration also.
Part number displayed when used in a bill of materials. Click to specify how the assembly or part is listed in a Bill
of Materials.
• Select one of the following:
o Document Name. The part number is the same as the document name.
o Configuration Name. The part number is the same as the configuration name.
o User Specified Name. The part number is a name that you type.
Don’t show child components in BOM when used as sub-assembly (assemblies only). When selected, the sub-
assembly is always shown as a single item in the bill of materials. Otherwise, the child components may be listed
individually in the BOM, when Show parts only or Show assemblies and parts in an indented list is selected.
NOTE: After you create a configuration, if you right-click the configuration name in the ConfigurationManager and
select Properties, the Configuration Properties dialog box appears. Click Custom to access Configuration
Specific properties in the Summary Information dialog box.
Part documents
Suppress features New features are included (not New features are suppressed
suppressed)
Assembly documents
Suppress features and mates New features* and mates are New features* and mates are
included (not suppressed) suppressed
Hide component models New components are shown New components are hidden
Suppress component models New components are resolved New components are suppressed
(not suppressed)
* New features in assemblies include assembly feature cuts and holes, component patterns, reference geometry,
and sketches that belong to the assembly (not to one of the assembly components).
Derived Configurations
Derived configurations allow you to create a parent-child relationship within a configuration. By default, all
parameters in the child configuration are linked to the parent configuration. If you change a parameter in the
parent configuration, the change automatically propagates to the child.
You can override any configurable parameter in the derived configuration so that the parameter is no longer
linked to the parent.
Consider the following example. Part1 has three
configurations:
• Configurations A and C are top-level
configurations.
• Configuration B is a derived configuration of
configuration A.
10-6
You cannot specify a parent configuration in a design table if its child configuration was created first, unless the
parent configuration already existed in the model.
Valid: Parent created before derived configuration Invalid: Parent created after derived configuration
This Configuration
When you select This Configuration, the changes you make to the model are reflected in the current configuration
only.
Specify Configurations
When you select Specify Configurations, the changes you make to the model are reflected in the configurations that
you specify.
All Configurations
When you select All Configurations, the changes you make to the model are reflected in each of the model's
configurations.
Modified configuration A
Configuration B (derived)
Configuration C
The extrude in configuration A is modified from 120mm to 60mm. In the Modify dialog box, when This
Configuration is selected, the dimension changes in configurations A and B, but not C.
Activating a Configuration
10-8
Sketch Planes in Configurations
The plane on which a sketch lies is configurable through the Sketch Plane PropertyManager. You can place a single
sketch on different planes in different configurations.
4. Click OK .
The sketch changes planes in the selected configurations.
NOTES:
• You must select a configuration prior to changing sketch relations. When you change sketch
relations, the change is immediately applied to the selected configuration.
• If you selected Specify configurations, you cannot clear the active configuration.
4. Under Relations, select the sketch relations to suppress or unsuppress.
5. Select or clear Suppressed.
When Suppressed is selected, the sketch relation's Information Status changes from Satisfied to
Driven.
Sketch relations and sketch entities include an assigned number (such as Fixed1) in the Sketch Relations
PropertyManager.
Example of a design table that controls the suppression state of a sketch relation:
4. Click OK .
The end condition is applied to the selected configurations.
10-10
Modifying a Configuration Dimension
To modify a dimension value for a selected configuration, do one of the following:
• Control the value in a design table.
• Double-click the feature to display the dimension. Then double-click the dimension, change the value in the
Modify box, and select one of the following (these options are only available if there is more than one
configuration in the model):
o This Configuration
o All Configurations
o Specify Configuration(s)
This applies in part and assembly documents, to all types of feature dimensions, the values used in mates (distance or
angle), the number of instances in patterns, and so on.
Editing a Configuration
To edit a configuration:
1. Activate the desired configuration.
2. Change to the FeatureManager view, then:
• In a part document, change the suppression state of features, modify dimensions, and so on, as
needed.
• In an assembly document, change the suppression state or visibility of components, and so on, as
needed.
To edit the configuration properties:
1. Right-click the configuration name, and select Properties.
The Configuration Properties dialog box appears.
2. Edit the name, comments, or properties as desired.
3. Click Custom to add or modify custom properties for the configuration.
4. Click OK.
To suppress or hide features or components:
1. Select the features or components to suppress or hide (or to unsuppress or show).
2. Click Edit and choose from the following menu items:
In parts:
• Suppress
• Unsuppress
• Unsuppress with Dependents
In assemblies:
• Hide
• Show
• Show with Dependents
• Suppress
• Unsuppress
• Unsuppress with Dependents
3. Each menu item has the following choices:
• This Configuration
• All Configurations
• Specified Configurations
4. If you selected Specified Configurations, a dialog box appears with a list of configurations and buttons to
Select All and Reset Selection. Select configurations in the list and click OK.
When you edit a part in the context of an assembly, the referenced configuration in
the assembly becomes the active configuration in all open windows (for example, if the
part is open in its own window, or in use in another open assembly, with this property
selected).
To change the active configuration for a component that is not already open, right-click
the component name in the FeatureManager design tree, and select Open Part or Open
Assembly. Then, in the model document, make the desired configuration active.
10-12
You cannot change the referenced configuration of a suppressed component, because
suppressed components are removed from memory. However, if you open the document
of a suppressed component and change the configuration, the newly selected configuration
is used if you restore the component to the resolved state.
The words, "in-use" are displayed next to the component name in the FeatureManager
design tree if a component is "in-use."
o Use named configuration
To always use a specific configuration regardless of the configuration currently in
memory, select this option and choose a configuration from the list.
It is good design practice to use named configurations when components have multiple
configurations, to prevent the in-use configuration from affecting the assembly in
unexpected ways.
o Use same configuration as pattern seed component
If the selected component is an instance of a component pattern, this is the default setting.
To specify a configuration that is different from the seed component, select Use named
configuration, and choose a configuration from the list.
• Change properties in. Allows you to set properties in This Configuration, All Configurations,
or Specify Configuration(s).
The Change properties in list is only available in assemblies with more than one
configuration.
• Suppression state. Controls the suppression state of the component.
• Solve as. Sets the component as Rigid or Flexible.
• Exclude from bill of materials. Omits this component from the bill of materials.
3. Click OK.
If you selected Specify Configuration(s) for Change properties in, a dialog box appears for you to select
the desired configurations.
If the selected component is a component of a sub-assembly, you can do the following:
1. Under Visibility, choose which visibility properties to use:
• Use visibility properties specified in configuration <configuration_name> of <sub-
assembly_name>. The Visibility properties (Hide Model and Color) specified for this component
in the selected configuration in the sub-assembly document are used.
• Override visibility properties specified in configuration <configuration_name> of <sub-
assembly_name>. The Visibility properties specified for this component in this configuration of
the assembly are used.
2. Under Solve as, select Rigid or Flexible.
Deleting a Configuration
You can delete a configuration with either of the following methods:
• Manually
• Within a design table
NOTE: Deleting a configuration does not delete any features or components.
To delete a configuration manually:
1. In the ConfigurationManager, activate a configuration that you want to keep. The configuration that you
want to delete must not be active.
2. Right-click the name of the configuration you want to delete, and select Delete.
You are asked to confirm the deletion of the configuration.
3. Click Yes.
The selected configuration is deleted.
When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
NOTES:
• When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
• If you copy and paste the contents of a design table to a new worksheet in Microsoft Excel, follow the
instructions below.
10-14
To create a design table as a separate Excel file:
1. Open Microsoft Excel and create a worksheet.
2. In the first column (row header cells A2, A3, and so on), type the names of the configurations that you want
to create. Leave cell A1 blank.
The names can include numerics, but must not include the forward slash (/) or at (@) characters.
3. In the first row, (column header cells B1, C1, and so on), type the parameters that you want to control.
If you update a linked design table in Microsoft Excel, then open the SolidWorks model, you
can choose to update either:
o the model with the design table values
- or -
o the design table with the model values
You can set the update options in Tools, Options, System Options, External References. Set
Update out-of-date linked design tables to to Model or Excel File.
9. Click OK .
The worksheet appears in the model document, and the Excel menus and toolbars replace the SolidWorks
menus and toolbars.
10. Edit the design table if necessary. When you finish editing, click anywhere outside the table to close it.
A message indicates the names of any new configurations that were generated by the design table, and the
SolidWorks menus and toolbars reappear.
The Design Table icon appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
To display the configurations added by the design table, click the Configuration tab at the bottom of
the window. Double-click the configuration name, or right-click the configuration name and select Show
Configuration.
NOTES:
• When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
• To use design tables, it is strongly recommended that you have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your
computer.
There are several different ways to insert a design table. Click one of the following for instructions on how to insert a
design table:
1. In a part or assembly document, click Design Table on the Tools toolbar, or click Insert, Design
Table.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Source, select Auto-create.
3. Set the Edit Control settings and Options, as desired.
4. Click OK .
Depending on the settings you selected, a dialog box may appear that asks which dimensions or parameters
you want to add.
An embedded worksheet appears in the window, and the SolidWorks toolbars are replaced with Excel
toolbars.
Cell A1 identifies the worksheet as Design Table for: <model_name>.
5. Click anywhere outside of the worksheet (but in the graphics area) to close the design table.
1. In a part or assembly document, click Design Table on the Tools toolbar, or click Insert, Design
Table.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Source, click Blank.
3. Set the Edit Control settings and Options, as desired.
4. Click OK .
Depending on the settings you selected, a dialog box may appear that asks which dimensions or parameters
you want to add.
An embedded worksheet appears in the window, and the SolidWorks toolbars are replaced with Excel
toolbars.
5. Cell A1 identifies the worksheet as Design Table for: <model_name>. Cell A3 contains the default name
for the first new configuration, First Instance.
6. In row 2, type the parameters that you want to control. Leave cell A2 blank. Notice that cell B2 is active.
You can also enter parameters by double-clicking the feature or dimension in the graphics area or in the
FeatureManager design tree. When you double-click a feature or dimension, its associated value appears in
the First Instance row.
7. In column A (cells A3, A4, and so on), type the names of the configurations that you want to create. The
names can include numerics, but must not include the forward slash (/) or at (@) characters.
You can change the configuration name in cell A3 (First Instance) if you want.
10-16
8. Type the parameter values in the worksheet cells.
9. When you finish adding information to the worksheet, click outside the table to close it.
A message lists the configurations that were created.
10. Click OK.
The design table is inserted in the model, and Design Table appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
1. In a part or assembly document, click Design Table on the Tools toolbar, or click Insert, Design
Table.
The Design Table PropertyManager appears.
2. Under Source:
• Click From file, then click Browse to locate the Excel file.
• To link the design table to the model, select the Link to file check box. A linked design table reads
all of its information from an external Excel file.
NOTE: If you update a linked design table in Microsoft Excel, then open the SolidWorks model, you
can choose to update either:
o the model with the design table values
- or -
o the design table with the model values
You can set the update options in Tools, Options, System Options, External References. Set Update
out-of-date linked design tables to to Model, Excel file, or Prompt.
3. Set the Edit Control settings and Options, as desired.
4. Click OK .
An embedded worksheet appears in the window, and the SolidWorks toolbars are replaced with Excel
toolbars.
5. Click anywhere outside of the worksheet (but in the graphics area) to close the design table.
Options
10-18
Formatting a Design Table
When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly. This topic shows
how to format a design table with:
• Automatically created design tables
• Manually created design tables
• Blank rows and columns
• Invalid criteria
When you edit a design table, you can create rows above and columns to the left of the Family cell. The example
below is a valid design table as long as configuration names and SolidWorks parameters are kept below and to the left
of the Family cell.
Invalid Criteria
The SolidWorks software stops processing a design table if it reaches invalid parameters in a cell. A summary of
design table parameters is available.
If you enter information to the left of the parameters row or below the configuration name column, the SolidWorks
software warns of an invalid value, and stops processing the design table without completing the remaining rows and
columns. If this happens, some configurations will not update properly.
10-20
Manually Add Parameters in a Design Table
When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
To manually add certain types of parameters in a design table, with the appropriate worksheet cell active:
• Dimensions. Double-click a dimension in the graphics area. (Make sure that the necessary dimensions are
displayed before you insert the new design table.)
The Dimension@Feature or Dimension@Sketch parameter is inserted in the cell.
• Feature suppression. Double-click a face of the feature.
The $STATE@Feature parameter is inserted in the cell.
• Component suppression. Double-click a face of the component.
The $STATE@component<instance> parameter is inserted in the cell.
As you continue to add parameters this way, the adjacent cell (C2, D2, and so on) is activated automatically. Each
parameter is added to the header row, and the current value is displayed in row 3.
When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
1. In the FeatureManager design tree, right-click Design Table and select Edit Table or Edit Table in New
Window.
The worksheet appears in the window. (If you select Edit Table in New Window, the worksheet opens in a
separate Excel window.)
2. Edit the table as needed. You can change the parameter values in the cells, add rows for additional
configurations, or add columns to control additional parameters.
Since design tables appear in drawings, you may wish to change their appearance while editing them in the
model documents. You can edit the format of the cells, using the Excel functions to modify fonts, alignment,
borders, and so on.
3. Click outside of the table to close it. (If you are working with the design table in a separate window, click
File, Close.)
4. If you receive a confirmation message that the design table generated new configurations, click OK.
The configurations update to reflect your changes.
1. In a document with a design table, select Design Table in the FeatureManager design tree, then click
File, Save As.
- or -
Right-click Design Table in the FeatureManager design tree and select Save Table.
The Save Design Table dialog box appears.
2. Type a File name, then click Save.
The design table is saved as an Excel file (*.xls).
NOTE: Due to a Microsoft limitation, changes to linked design tables may not be saved if they contain values that are
linked to other spreadsheets. To save the design table, you can:
• Remove the linked values from the design table
• Clear Link to file in the Design Table PropertyManager to unlink the design table from the model
Deleting a Configuration
You can delete a configuration with either of the following methods:
• Manually
• Within a design table
NOTE: Deleting a configuration does not delete any features or components.
10-22
Specifying Design Table Parameters
Specifying Design Table Parameters
When used in a design table, the names of dimensions, features, components, and configurations must match the
name in the model. To ensure an exact match, you can copy and paste the name from the Properties dialog box for
the selected item.
You can use multiple languages in a design table. However, the language for the value in a table body cell must be in
the same language as the parameter in the corresponding column header. For example, if the parameter in the column
header is in English, then the corresponding value in the table body cell must also be in English. The next column
header can be in another language, such as Japanese, but its corresponding value in the table body cell must also be in
Japanese.
NOTES:
• When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
• If the design table has been saved in English and then opened in Japanese, only English and Japanese will
work. You cannot add another language, such as Polish, unless you use a Polish version of SolidWorks, or
you have previously opened, closed, or saved the design table in a Polish version of SolidWorks.
• Design tables used in versions prior to SolidWorks 2003 do not support multiple languages.
Example:
This is an example of a design table that creates three configurations, adds a comment for each one, suppresses a
feature, and controls a dimension.
Do not include any rows or columns with blank headers in the middle of the design table. The SolidWorks
software stops evaluating the data when it reaches a row or column that has an empty header cell. Data that appears in
or after a row or column with an empty header is ignored.
NOTES:
• When you use design tables in the SolidWorks software, it is important to format the tables properly.
• The parameter syntax (header cells) are not case sensitive.
10-24
$state@component<instance> Resolved, R, Resolved
Suppressed, S
$configuration@component<instance> configuration name Component's "in-use" or last
saved configuration
NOTE: If the component uses a
derived configuration, and the
value is left blank, the
configuration used is linked to its
parent.
$never_expand_in_BOM Yes (never expand) No
No (allow to expand)
NOTES:
• When you specify values, be sure to use the system of units specified for the model document (click Tools,
Options, Document Properties, Units).
• You can display dimensions that are driven by design tables in a different color. Click Tools, Options,
System Options, Colors. Select Dimension, Controlled by Design Table in System colors and change the
color.
Dimensions
The Dimensions dialog box appears after you select the Auto-create option in the Design Table PropertyManager
and click OK . The SolidWorks software asks you which dimensions you want to add to the design table.
NOTE: The Dimensions dialog box appears if the model has only one configuration.
Component Configuration
The column header in a design table to control component configuration uses this syntax:
$CONFIGURATION@component<instance>
In the table body cells, enter the name of the desired configuration.
If you leave this table body cell blank, SolidWorks uses the component's "in-use" or last saved configuration.
If the assembly configuration is derived, and the table body cell is left blank, the value of the component
configuration used is linked to the assembly configuration's parent.
Below is an example of a design table that controls a component configuration. Because the table body cell of
Derived_config is left blank, the component configuration used is linked to Parent_config, which is Default.
Component Visibility
The column header in a design table for controlling component visibility uses this syntax:
$SHOW@component<instance>
If the component uses a derived configuration, and the table body cell is left blank, the value of the component
visibility used is linked to its parent.
10-26
Example of a design table that controls component visibility:
In the table body cells, type the value for the desired suppression state: Suppressed (or S), or Resolved (or R). You
cannot set a component to the lightweight state. If a cell is left blank, the default suppression state is Resolved.
If the component uses a derived configuration, and the table body cell is left blank, the value of the component
suppression state used is linked to its parent.
Suppression of Features
In a part document, you can suppress any feature.
In an assembly document, you can suppress features that belong to the assembly. These include mates, assembly
feature holes and cuts, and component patterns. Sketches and reference geometry may also belong to an assembly.
You cannot control the suppression of a feature that belongs to an individual assembly component.
In a design table, there are two ways to specify the suppression of features.
• Method 1 (recommended). The column header for controlling feature suppression uses this syntax:
$STATE@feature
where feature is the name of the feature. For example, the column labeled $STATE@Hole1 controls
the suppression of the first hole.
In the table body cells, type the value for the desired suppression: Suppressed (or S), Unsuppressed (or
U). If a cell is left blank, the default is Unsuppressed.
• Method 2. Type only the feature name in the column header cell. To suppress the feature, leave the table
body cell blank. To include the feature, type any string in the body cell. This is the syntax that was used in
SolidWorks 98 and earlier versions, and is included for backward compatibility.
You can also suppress individual features with the shortcut menu.
Base Parts
You can control the configuration of a base part with a design table. This is available in part documents only.
The column header in a design table for controlling base part configurations uses this syntax:
$CONFIGURATION@<part name>
where <part name> is the name of the base part.
In the table body cells, type the base part's configuration names. For example, to use the default configuration of a
base part named washer.sldprt, the column heading syntax is $CONFIGURATION@washer. The table body cell
value is Default.
Example of a design table that controls a base part configuration:
10-28
$PARTNUMBER
In the table body cells, type the part number for each configuration.
The $PARTNUMBER parameter now includes the document name or the parent name (derived configurations only)
in a bill of materials. The following table shows values that can be used with this parameter:
If multiple configurations of the same document are used in an assembly, the BOM lists each configuration by name
as a separate item number. If you do not want each configuration listed separately in the BOM, do one of the
following:
• Assign the same value for the $PARTNUMBER parameter in all the configurations.
• After the design table creates all of the configurations, edit the properties of each configuration, and select
Document Name. To override the document name, you can use the Title specified under File, Properties
for the component document.
Example of a design table that controls the value of a part number in a BOM with custom names:
Comment
The Configuration Properties dialog box has a Comment box, where you can enter a description, or other
additional information about the configuration. In a design table, the column header for entering information in this
box for each configuration uses this syntax:
$COMMENT
In the table body cells, enter the comments for the configuration. Comments are optional; if a cell is left blank, the
Comment box is empty.
Equations in Configurations
You can suppress or unsuppress equations in specified configurations.
3. Click Configs.
4. In the dialog box, select the configurations to which you want the equation to apply: This configuration, All
configurations, or Specify configurations.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK again to close the Equations dialog box.
7. Click Rebuild .
The equation is applied to the selected configurations.
10-30
Expand in BOM
You can control how the assembly is listed in a BOM, when this configuration is used as a sub-assembly. The column
header in the design table uses this syntax:
$NEVER_EXPAND_IN_BOM
This corresponds to the Don’t show child components in BOM when used as sub-assembly option in the
Configuration Properties dialog box.
Split Parts
You can control the configuration of a split part with a design table. This is available in part documents only.
The column header in a design table for controlling split part configurations uses this syntax:
$CONFIGURATION@<feature_name>
where <feature_name> is the name of the split feature.
In the table body cells, type the base part's configuration names. For example, to use the default configuration of the
base part for a split feature named Stock-Part1-1.sldprt, the column heading syntax is
$CONFIGURATION@Stock-Part1-1. The table body cell value is Default.
Example of a design table that controls a split part configuration:
Custom Properties
The column header in a design table to specify a custom property uses this syntax:
$PRP@property
where property is the name of a custom property. You can use one of the custom properties listed in the Summary
Information dialog box (click File, Properties, Configuration Specific), or you can add a new custom property.
NOTES:
• The column header is not case sensitive.
• If you plan to use the custom properties as columns in the bill of materials, do not use property names that
contain spaces.
For example, use the header $prp@Cost to control the custom property Cost for each configuration. In the table
body cells, type the property value for each configuration. If a cell is blank, the property is undefined for the
configuration.
Properties that are associated with model parameters (dimensions and mass properties) update automatically when
the model parameters change.
10-32
Include the quotation marks and be sure the file name extension (.SLDPRT) is uppercase.
c. In new columns, add the standard design table information, for example, D2@Sketch1 as the
header, and dimension values in the column.
3. Click outside the design table to close it.
Custom properties added in a design table appear automatically on the Configuration Specific tab of the
Summary Information dialog box. You can use these properties in Notes and Bills of Materials.
Example of a design table that specifies custom properties:
User Notes
The design table can include additional columns or rows for information only (notes, intermediate calculations, and
so on). Use the keyword $USER_NOTES in the header of any column or row that you do not want evaluated. You
may use as many of these rows or columns as you need. However, you may not include rows or columns with empty
headers in the middle of the table.
Color Parameter
The design table can include a column for configuration-specific colors. The value is a 32-bit integer that specifies
RGB (red, green, blue). If no value is specified, zero (black) is used.
If you know the 32-bit integer value of a color, you can type the number directly into the design table in a column
with the $COLOR parameter as the header. If you do not know the 32-bit integer value, you can calculate it in the
design table with the RGB component values.
d. Note the component numbers next to Red Component of Color , Green Component of Color
3. Click OK .
You may have to insert columns so that these parameters appear in cells B2 through E2.
b. Type integers in cells B3, C3, and D3 for the red, green, and blue components of a color.
c. Type the following formula in cell E3:
= MAX(MIN(B3,255),0) + MAX(MIN(C3,255),0)*16*16 + MAX(MIN(D3,255),0)
*16*16*16*16
The formula ensures that each component value is between zero and 255.
Make sure there are no extra spaces before the = sign in the cell.
d. Type other color components in the appropriate rows and copy the formula, adjusted for the row
number, into the corresponding cells in column E.
The following table lists some typical colors, their components, and the equivalent integer values.
If the color for wireframe and HLR modes is the same as the color for shaded mode, the configuration-specific color
applies to all three modes. If the color is not the same for all three modes, then the configuration-specific color applies
to shaded mode only.
To set the color the same for wireframe, HLR, and shaded modes:
1. Click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Colors.
2. Select Apply same color to wireframe, HLR and shaded.
3. Click OK.
10-34
Design Tables in Drawings
3. Return to the drawing window, and click Rebuild to see the updated table.
10-36
11
Drawings
Drawings Overview
You can create 2D drawings of the 3D solid parts and assemblies you design. Parts, assemblies, and drawings are
linked documents; any changes that you make to the part or assembly change the drawing document.
One-way associativity can be set between drawings and models during the software installation. This prevents
changes to model dimensions, thereby preventing changes to the model itself from within a drawing. This option can
be reset only with a new installation of the software.
Generally, a drawing consists of several views generated from the model. Views can also be created from existing
views. For example, a section view is created from an existing drawing view.
When you select a view on a drawing sheet, the view name appears in the PropertyManager title.
You can open existing drawings from inside part and assembly documents. Right-click the top item in the
FeatureManager design tree or anywhere on the model in the graphics area and select Open Drawing. SolidWorks
looks for a drawing with the same name as the model, in the same folder as the model. If the drawing exists, it opens
automatically. If such a drawing is not found, a browse window appears so you can locate a drawing manually.
To replace components in assembly drawings, use File, Open and click References. Edit the references in the
Edit Referenced File Locations dialog box.
When you open a drawing of a large assembly, you are prompted with the option to open the drawing in Large
Assembly Mode.
When you save or close a drawing without all the sheets loaded into memory, you are prompted to update the
drawing. If you choose to update, all drawing views on all sheets are updated. The prompt appears only once per
drawing document per SolidWorks session. If you choose not to update, the views on sheets that were not loaded do
not appear in the SolidWorks view-only mode or in the SolidWorks Viewer.
Topics about drawings include:
• Setting options
• Creating a Drawing
• Customizing Sheet Formats
• 2D sketching in drawings
• Drawing Documents
• Creating standard views (model views and standard 3 views)
• Creating derived views, such as detail, section, projected, broken, and so on
• Aligning and displaying views
• Printing and sending drawings
Dimensions, notes, datums, geometric tolerances, and other annotations are discussed in Detailing.
Page Setup
Set to meet your printer or plotter requirements. Click File, Page Setup to specify such properties as page margins
and orientation, scale of printed drawing, and custom headers and footers.
Drawing sheets
You can customize the following properties of drawing sheets:
• Sheet Format. Customize information blocks and text.
• Sheet Properties. Change the sheet size and orientation, sheet scale, and 1st or 3rd angle projection.
Templates
Customize drawing templates to conform to the standards of your workplace. You can set drawing, detailing, and
standards options in templates. You can also save drawing documents to be used as drawing templates.
Tables (Bills of Materials, Hole Tables, Revision Tables, and Weldment Cut Lists) also use templates that you can
customize and save.
11-2
Creating a Drawing
Drawings consist of one or more views generated from a part or assembly. The part or assembly associated with the
drawing must be saved before you can create the drawing. You can create a drawing from within a part or assembly
document.
Drawing files have the .slddrw extension. A new drawing takes the name of the first model inserted. The name
appears in the title bar. When you save the drawing, the name of the model appears in the Save As dialog box as the
default file name, with the default extension .slddrw. You can edit the name before saving the drawing.
2. In the New SolidWorks Document dialog box, select Drawing , then click OK.
3. Select a Sheet Format/Size, then click OK.
4. In the Model View PropertyManager, select a model from Open documents or browse to a part or
assembly file.
5. Specify options in the PropertyManager, then place the view in the graphics area.
Sheet Format/Size
You select a sheet format when you open a new drawing. The standard sheet formats include links to system
properties and custom properties.
Sheet formats help create drawings with a uniform format. Drawing sheet formats are OLE documents in which you
can embed objects such as bitmaps.
To select a different sheet format in an existing drawing document, right-click in the graphics area and select
Properties. To save a sheet format, click File, Save Sheet Format.
Sheet Properties
You can set the sheet properties when you add a sheet to a drawing or modify existing sheet properties.
To specify sheet properties:
1. In the active drawing sheet, right-click the sheet icon in the FeatureManager design tree, or in any blank area
of the drawing sheet, or on the sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing window, and select Properties.
- or -
For a drawing sheet that is not active, right-click the sheet icon in the FeatureManager design tree, or on the
sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing window, and select Properties.
- or -
Right-click in any blank area of the drawing sheet, or on the sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing window,
and select Add Sheet.
2. Specify properties as described below and click OK.
Name. Enter a title in the box.
Scale. Set a scale for the sheet.
Type of projection. Select First angle or Third angle for Standard 3 View projection.
Next view label. Specify the letter of the alphabet to be used for the next section and detail views.
Next datum label. Specify the letter of the alphabet to be used for the next datum feature symbol.
Sheet Format/Size
• Standard sheet size. Select a standard sheet size, or click Browse and locate a custom sheet format file.
o Reload. If you make changes to the Sheet Format, click to return to the default format.
o Display sheet format. Display border, title block, and so on.
• Custom sheet size. Specify a Width and Height.
Use custom property values from model shown in. If more than one model is shown on the sheet and the drawing
contains notes that are linked to custom properties of a model, select the view thatcontains the model whose
properties you want to use. If you do not specify otherwise, the properties of the model in the first view inserted into
the sheet are used. See Linking Notes to Document Properties.
To add a sheet:
1. Click Insert, Sheet. You can also right-click any sheet tab or any sheet icon in the FeatureManager design
tree, and select Add Sheet.
2. The Sheet Properties dialog box appears, with the default name of the next new sheet in sequence, for
example, Sheet2.
3. Specify the sheet details as described in Sheet Properties, and click OK.
To delete a sheet:
1. Right-click any sheet tab or any sheet icon in the FeatureManager design tree, and select Delete.
You can also click anywhere in the graphics area and press Delete to delete the active sheet.
2. Click Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box.
11-4
Sheet Formats, Sheets, and Views
Ownership of items in drawings is dependent on what is active when the item is created. Sketch entities, notes, and
other items can belong to the drawing sheet, to an individual view, or to the drawing sheet format. In general, you
must activate the owner of an item in order to edit the item.
NOTE: Dimensions and annotations that are attached to model geometry are exceptions to this rule. They belong to
the view where they are attached, regardless of whether the view is active when you create the item.
For example, you can activate a view, and create a construction line that belongs to the view. If you move or delete
the view, the construction line is moved or deleted also. To edit the construction line, you must activate the view
again.
You can create the same construction line on the sheet, when no view is active. However, if you move or delete the
views on the sheet, the construction line is not affected. To edit the construction line, the sheet itself must be active.
Similarly, you must activate the sheet format to edit any items that are owned by the sheet format. While the sheet
format is active, the sheet is hidden, including all the items that belong to the sheet, and all the views.
click OK .
To move, delete, or add lines or text:
• To delete, click the line or text and press the Delete key.
• To move, click the line or text and drag to a new location.
• To add text, click Note on the Annotations toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Note. Specify the text
properties, then click to place the text in the desired location.
OLE Objects
To add objects from other applications, such as bitmaps of your company logo, standard note text from a
file, and so on, click Insert, Object.
You can either create a new object or insert one from a file. Objects can be linked or embedded in drawing
sheet files.
You can overwrite standard formats or create custom formats. Sheet format files have extension .slddrt
and are located in <install_dir>\data.
3. Click Save.
Custom properties in the document are saved with the sheet format and added to any new documents
that use the format.
11-6
Linking Notes to Document Properties
To automatically insert information in a drawing, you can link note text in the drawing sheet or drawing sheet
format to document properties. For the procedure to add a link in a note, see Link to Property.
All SolidWorks documents have the following system-defined properties:
*The formats of the dates are language and region dependent. For details, see Start/Settings/Control Panel/
Regional Settings/Date on your computer.
Additionally, drawings have the following system-defined properties:
You can link a note to the properties of the model shown in the drawing (the SW-File Name property, for example, or
a user-defined custom property in the model document).
While you are editing the sheet format, a variable for the property name is displayed (in the form $PRP: "<property
name>"). When you return to editing the sheet, the value of the property, if found, is displayed. If the property value
cannot be found, the note displays ERROR!<variable name>. To show or hide the error message, click View, Show
Annotation Link Errors.
A linked note can include additional text, and it can include links to more than one property. For example, to display
the current sheet number and the total number of sheets, you can add this note:
SHEET $PRP:"SW-Current Sheet" OF $PRP:"SW-Total Sheets"
On the sheet, the property values are displayed:
SHEET 1 OF 2 (on the first sheet of a two-sheet drawing)
11-8
• When Dynamic drawing view activation is cleared, double-click anywhere within a view’s boundary to
activate the view, or right-click within the boundary and select Activate View. To de-activate a view, either
double-click again, activate a different view, or right-click and select Activate Sheet.
View Boundaries
When the pointer passes over the edge of a drawing view, the view boundary is highlighted. The size of the view
boundary is calculated automatically, based on the size, shape, and orientation of the model shown in the view. You
can adjust the size of the view boundary (enlarging the view boundary may make it easier to select or activate a
view). You cannot make the view boundary smaller than the model displayed in the view. View boundaries, and the
views they contain, can overlap.
Scales in Drawings
Scales in drawings apply to sheets or views. The scale for the active drawing sheet appears in the status line at the
bottom of the window, and the scale for the active view appears in the view PropertyManager. You can also scale a
drawing when you print it.
Setting Scales
Autoscaling
• Automatically scale new drawing views in the Drawings Options controls the scaling of new views as
follows:
o When selected, the SolidWorks software automatically scales the views to best fit on the drawing
sheet, and the scale of the drawing sheet becomes the same as the scale of the views.
o When cleared, the views are inserted at the scale of the drawing sheet.
When you insert Projected Views, Auxiliary Views and Section Views, the scale is set to Use
parent scale. If you change the scale of a parent view, the scale of all child views that use the
parent scale is updated.
• If a drawing sheet contains multiple Predefined Views, the views are scaled automatically when a model is
inserted. If a drawing sheet contains only one Predefined View, the view uses the Custom Scale, if
specified, or (if no scale is specified) the drawing sheet scale.
Dimension Type
Dimensions in drawings are either:
• True. Accurate model values.
• Projected. 2D dimensions.
The dimension type is set when you insert a drawing view. You can view and change the dimension type in drawing
view PropertyManagers.
The rules for dimension type are:
• SolidWorks specifies Projected type dimensions for standard and custom orthogonal views and True type
dimensions for isometric, dimetric, and trimetric views.
• If you create a projected or auxiliary view from another view, the new view uses Projected type dimensions,
even if the original view used True type dimensions.
• When inserting views in other orientations, such as custom views that are not orthogonal, you are prompted
for the dimension type.
• The dimension type does not change if you change the orientation of a named view.
Crosshatch in Drawings
Crosshatch is added to drawings of section views, including section views of multibody parts and weldments.
You can add a crosshatch pattern to a model face or a closed sketch profile in drawings with area hatch/fill.
To set options for crosshatch patterns, in a part document click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Material
Properties.
Crosshatch patterns alternate between components in assemblies, or between bodies in multibody parts and
weldments.
Crosshatch identifiers are language-independent, so you can save a drawing in one language and open it in a different
language, the crosshatch patterns are recognized.
2D Sketching in Drawings
You can create drawing geometry using 2D sketched geometry only, without reference to existing models or
assemblies. This sketched geometry can be controlled by relations (collinear, parallel, tangent, and so on), as well as
parametric dimensions.
To display a grid, right-click the active drawing sheet and select Display Grid.
11-10
Sketch tools and sketch relations work the same way in a drawing document as they do in a part or assembly
document. The only difference is that instead of sketching on model planes or faces, you sketch on the drawing sheet
or in an active view.
For information about using sketch tools and sketch relations, see Sketching in SolidWorks and Geometric
Relations.
Empty View
You can create an empty drawing view to contain your sketch geometry. When this view is activated, all sketch
geometry added belongs to this view. The sketch geometry can then be scaled, moved, and deleted as a group while
still retaining the editability of the individual sketch entities.
2D Emulator
The SolidWorks software includes an add-in application that allows you to create sketch entities by entering
commands in text form. For more information, see 2D Emulator.
Quality in Drawings
Drawings take advantage of lightweight assemblies and optimized drawing files to improve performance in opening
drawings and creating drawing views, especially for large assembly drawings. Drawings can be:
• High Quality. All model information is loaded into memory.
• Draft Quality. Only minimum model information is loaded into memory. Used in Lightweight and
Detached drawings. Some edges may appear to be missing, and print quality may be slightly degraded. You
can annotate views in draft quality without resolving the model.
A drawing can contain views in both modes.
The SolidWorks software sets the options so that most drawing views are created in High Quality, but views for
assemblies in Large Assembly Mode are created in Draft Quality.
and when the pointer hovers over the part in the graphics area.
11-12
Types of Drawing Documents
Drawing Documents
Drawings are normally created with the model resolved; that is, all information about the model is available in the
drawing document. You can improve performance in creating, opening, and working in drawing documents with the
following:
• Detached Drawings. The model is not loaded into memory. Create when saving drawings. You can add
detailing without the model. You are prompted when the model is required. When you load the model, it
loads completely. You can save drawings as either resolved or detached, so you can save a detached drawing
as a regular drawing and vice versa.
• Lightweight Drawings. A subset of model data is loaded into memory; the remaining model data is loaded
as needed. In a new drawing, create a lightweight drawing by specifying draft quality views. For existing
drawings, select Lightweight when opening the drawing. Opening a lightweight drawing is faster than
opening the same drawing with fully resolved models. You can toggle between resolved and lightweight
mode while in a drawing. Lightweight is the default mode for Large Assembly Mode.
• Reduced display data drawing files. Tessellated data for shaded and draft views is not saved with drawing
documents when you clear the drawing option, reducing file size. The data is available in the model file.
Detached Drawings
Detached drawings are designed so you can open and work in drawing files without the model files being loaded into
memory or even being present.
1. Click Save on the Standard toolbar (for a new drawing) or File, Save As (for drawing that has been
saved previously).
2. In the Save As dialog box, select Detached Drawing (*.slddrw) for Save as type.
3. Specify the file name, then click Save.
You can save regular drawings as Detached drawings, and vice versa.
Detached drawings can be in Draft Quality, but they cannot be Lightweight drawings.
View borders in Detached drawings are blue. When the referenced model is loaded into memory, the view borders
change to the regular view border color. To see the view borders, select Display drawing view borders in Tools,
Options, System Options, Drawings.
In the FeatureManager design tree, the icons for Detached drawings display a broken link:
Drawing icon for Detached drawing
Drawing view icon for Detached drawing with model not loaded
If the referenced model is needed for an operation within a Detached drawing, you are prompted to load the model
file. You can load the model manually by right-clicking a view and selecting Load Model.
When you create a drawing of a large assembly, a dialog box appears asking if you would like to use Detached format
for the drawing because of improved performance. You can choose to use Detached format or continue with no
change in format.
When a Detached drawing is out of sync with its model, it prints with a watermark that states:
SolidWorks Detached - Out-of-Sync Print
Performance
The time required to open a drawing in Detached format is significantly reduced because the model files are
not loaded. Because the model data is not loaded into memory, more memory is available to process drawing
data, which has significant performance implications for large assembly drawings. You have control over
when to load the model, which takes time to load and update the drawing.
File Size
The Detached format requires storing more edge data and less surface data. Therefore, some files are larger
when converted to Detached, while others are smaller. In general, if your drawings have section views, the
file size should decrease. If the drawings do not have section views, the file size may increase. File size is
directly related to the number of visible edges in the drawing. For example, if your parts have patterns of
features with many instances, it is more likely that the file size will increase when converted to Detached
format.
Updating Views
Some changes, such as changes to a section line, detail circle, scale, or projection angle, require a view
update. When a drawing view requires an update, the view is displayed with a crosshatch pattern.
11-14
To load the model:
1. Right-click a view containing the model you want to load, and select Load Model.
The Confirm Load Model dialog box appears.
2. Select the Don't prompt me again in this or any future session check box if you want to prevent this
message from appearing again.
3. Click Yes to continue loading the model.
Lightweight Drawings
Lightweight drawings are analogous to lightweight assemblies. When a drawing is lightweight, only a subset of its
model data is loaded in memory. The remaining model data is loaded as needed.
Performance of drawings of large assemblies is improved significantly with lightweight drawings. Loading a
lightweight drawing is faster than loading the same drawing with fully resolved parts.
Lightweight drawings are efficient because the full model data is loaded only as it is needed. Only parts that you
select, and parts that are affected by changes that you make in the current editing session, become fully resolved.
and when the pointer hovers over the part in the graphics area.
A feather in the FeatureManager design tree also indicates lightweight views .
Lightweight drawings use Draft Quality views. You can specify new views to be Draft Quality in Tools, Options,
System Options, Display Style. If you insert a view into a lightweight drawing as High Quality, you are prompted to
convert the view to Draft Quality so that the drawing can remain lightweight.
Detached drawings cannot be lightweight drawings.
11-16
With lightweight drawings, you can:
• Create all types of drawing views
• Attach annotations to models in views
• Specify edge properties
• Highlight and dynamically select edges and vertices
• Set drawings of sub-assemblies to lightweight or resolved
If you print a lightweight drawing when it is out of synchronization with its model, the drawing prints with a
watermark:
SolidWorks Lightweight - Out-of-Date Print
Standard 3 View
Model View
Relative View
Predefined View
Empty View
Standard 3 View
The Standard 3 View option under Insert, Drawing View creates three related default orthographic views of a part
or assembly displayed at the same time. For information on the orientation of the Standard 3 View, see First Angle
and Third Angle Projection.
The alignment of the top and side views is fixed in relation to the front view. The top view can be moved vertically,
and the side view can be moved horizontally.
The top and side views are linked to the front view. Right-click a top or side view and select Jump to Parent View.
The parent view can be on the same sheet or another sheet.
For more information about arranging views on a sheet, see Moving Views and Rotating Views.
There are several ways to create a Standard 3 View drawing.
4. With the Projected View PropertyManager open, place the two other views, then click OK .
3. Click Standard 3 View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Standard 3 View.
11-18
Standard 3 View PropertyManager
Insert a part or assembly model into a drawing as a Standard 3 View.
1. In a drawing document, click Standard 3 View on the Drawing toolbar or click Insert, Drawing View,
Standard 3 View.
2. Select a part or assembly document under Open documents
- or -
Click Browse and browse to a file.
3. Click OK .
Model View
The Model View PropertyManager appears when you create a new drawing, or when you insert a model view into
a drawing document.
You select an orientation for the view from the view names in the model document:
• Standard views (Front, Top, Isometric, and so on)
• Current Model View (available only for open models and only until you place the view)
• Custom views that you created by zooming and rotating the model, enabling Perspective if desired,
then saving the view by name. The entire model is displayed, even if the selected view orientation displays a
partial, zoomed-in view. You cannot activate a perspective view or add dimensions or annotations it.
1. Click Model View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Model.
2. In the Model View PropertyManager, select an Open document under Part/Assembly to insert, or
browse to a part or assembly file.
If you click Standard 3 View , the PropertyManager changes to Standard 3 View, and the list of
open documents is available. Select a model and click OK to insert a Standard 3 View.
3. Click Next .
You can also click Standard 3 View at this point, then click OK to insert a Standard 3 View
of the selected model.
4. Specify the view orientation, scale, and so on, then place the view.
When you place the model view, if you selected an orthogonal view orientation, the Projected View
PropertyManager appears. You can place any number of projected views for any orthogonal view in the
drawing. To prevent the Projected View PropertyManager from appearing, clear Auto-start projected view
under Options in the Model View PropertyManager.
5. Click OK .
11-20
Model/Predefined/Empty View PropertyManager
This PropertyManager opens when you insert a Model View, a Predefined View, or an Empty View into a drawing,
or when you select an existing Model, Predefined, or Empty View. The properties available depend on the type of
view selected.
Part/Assembly to insert
Select a document from Open documents or click Browse and browse to a part or assembly file.
The list of Open documents includes saved models (parts and assemblies) open in SolidWorks windows, plus
models that already appear in drawing views, whether open in a window or not.
Thumbnail Preview
View a preview of the model selected in Open documents.
Options
Start command when creating new drawing. Available when inserting a model into a new drawing. The Model
View PropertyManager appears whenever you create a new drawing.
When you create a drawing with Make Drawing from Part/Assembly in a part or assembly
document, the Model View PropertyManager appears even if you clear this check box.
Auto-start projected views. Available when inserting an orthogonal view. The Projected View PropertyManager
appears when you place an orthogonal model view.
View Orientation
View Orientation. Double-click a view orientation in the list to change the orientation of the selected view.
Preview. Select to see a preview of the model while inserting a view. When cleared, only the outline of the
view boundaries is shown.
Insert Model
For Predefined Views only. Select a model from the list under Part/Assembly of models open in the
SolidWorks session, or click Browse and browse to a model file.
Reference Configuration
For sheet metal flat patterns only. Select a model configuration name from the list.
Display Style
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality. Model resolved.
• Draft quality. Model lightweight, used for faster performance with large assemblies.
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Choose the scale for the view to be the same as the sheet scale or its own custom scale. For a custom scale, select Use
custom scale and edit the values.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected (2D) or True (model value).
More Properties
After you create a view or select an existing view, you can click More Properties to open the Drawing
View Properties dialog box.
Specify the angled face as Front Specify the front face as Left Place the resulting view
11-22
To insert a relative view:
1. Click Relative View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Relative To Model. The
pointer changes to .
2. Select the model, using one of the methods described in Standard 3 View.
3. Under Orientation, First orientation in the PropertyManager, select an orientation (Front, Top, Left,
and so on), and select the face in the graphics area for that orientation in the drawing view.
4. Under Second orientation, select another orientation, orthogonal to the first, and select another face in the
graphics area for that orientation in the drawing view.
A relative view can show one body or all the bodies in a model. To show one body, select both faces
from the same body.
7. Click OK .
If the angle of the face in the model changes, the views update to maintain the orientation as originally
specified.
Display Style
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality
• Draft quality
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Use sheet scale.
Use custom scale. Set a scale for the views.
Bodies
When placing a view of a model with multiple bodies, choose:
• Selected body. The body from which you have selected faces.
• All bodies. All bodies in the model document.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected or True.
More Properties
After you create the new view or select an existing view, you can click More Properties to open the Drawing View
Properties dialog box.
Orientation
Select two faces in different orientations to define the orientation of the body in the relative view. To create a relative
view of one body, select faces from the same body.
• First orientation. Select the orientation, then select a face in the graphics area.
• Second orientation. Select the orientation, then select another face in the graphics area.
Predefined Views
You can define any orthogonal, projected, or named view in a drawing sheet and the populate the view. You can save
a drawing document with predefined views as a document template.
1. In a drawing document, click Predefined View , or click Insert, Drawing View, Predefined.
2. Click in the graphics area to place the view.
3. In the Predefined View PropertyManager, select a View Orientation and specify other options such
as Display Style, Scale, or Dimension Type.
4. Click OK .
You can populate the view as you insert it, or you can populate it later.
11-24
You can add Projected Views to a predefined view. For example, if you insert a front view, you can project top and
right views to create a predefined Standard 3 View. Projected views are automatically oriented and aligned to the
original view.
You can copy and paste predefined views.
file. The view and all its related views (such as projected views) are populated when you click OK .
• Select. Select a predefined view. In the Predefined View PropertyManager, under Insert Model, select a
name from the Part/Assembly list of models open in the current session. The view and all its related views
When you populate predefined views, the scale of the views is determined as follows:
o If a drawing sheet contains more than one predefined view, the views are scaled automatically.
o If a drawing sheet contains only one predefined view, the view uses the Custom Scale, if specified,
or (if no scale is specified) the drawing sheet scale.
Empty Views
You can insert Empty Views into drawing documents. Empty views are often used to contain sketches in drawings.
Projected View
Auxiliary View
Detail View
Crop View
Broken-out Section
Broken View
Section View
Projected View
Projected views are created with the following tools:
Standard 3 Views. The Front view is a model view and the other two views are projected views, using
First angle or Third angle projection as specified in Sheet Properties.
Model View. When inserting an orthographic model view, the Projected View PropertyManager
appears so you can insert projected views from any orthographic views on the drawing sheet.
1. Click Projected View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Projected.
The Projected View PropertyManager appears.
2. Select a view from which to project.
The pointer shape changes to .
3. To display an arrow indicating the direction of projection, select Display View Arrow. Type a label to be
displayed with the parent view and the projected view.
To select the direction of projection, move the pointer to the appropriate side of the selected view.
A preview of the view is displayed, snapped to the nearest projection. To override the snapping behavior,
hold Ctrl as you move the preview. To resume the snapping behavior while dragging, release Ctrl.
You can project to the left, right, above, or below (in this example, the user moved the pointer to the right of
the selected view).
11-26
4. To place more than one Projected View, click Keep Visible .
5. When the view is where you want it to be, click to place the view.
The projection view is placed on the sheet, aligned to the view from which it was created. By default, you can move a
projection view only in the direction of the projection. For information about changing the alignment of views, see
View Alignment and Display.
Projection Views are linked from the child view to the parent. Right-click the Projection View and select Jump to
Parent View.
Arrow
Arrow. Select to display a view arrow indicating the direction of the projection.
Label . Type text to be displayed with both the parent view and the projected view.
Display Style
Use parent style. Clear to select style and quality settings different from those of the parent view.
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality. Model resolved.
• Draft quality. Model lightweight, used for faster performance with large assemblies.
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Choose the scale for the view to be the same as the parent scale, the same as the sheet scale, or its own custom scale.
For a custom scale, select Use custom scale and edit the values.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected (2D) or True (model value). Projected is set automatically for projected views.
More Properties
For an existing Projected View, click More Properties to open the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
Auxiliary View
An Auxiliary View is similar to a Projected View, but it is unfolded normal to a reference edge in an existing view.
1. Click Auxiliary View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Auxiliary.
The Auxiliary View PropertyManager appears.
2. Select a reference edge (not a horizontal or vertical edge, which would create a standard Projection View).
The reference edge can be an edge of a part, a silhouette edge, an axis, or a sketched line. If you sketch a
line, activate the drawing view first.
NOTE: Auxiliary views are not available from entities of section or detail views of parts in the
FeatureManager design tree.
As you move the pointer, a preview of the view is displayed. You can control the alignment and orientation
of the view as follows:
o Alignment. To override the default alignment as you place the auxiliary view, hold Ctrl as you
move the preview. To resume the snapping behavior while dragging, release Ctrl.
o Orientation. You can toggle the view orientation (front or back) by dragging the view across the
reference edge. An arrow shows the view orientation, which is useful when the Show contents
while dragging view option is cleared. After you place the view, you can toggle the view
orientation by double-clicking the arrow or by selecting Flip direction in the PropertyManager.
3. Move the pointer until the view is where you want, then click to place the view.
For information about changing the alignment of views, see View Alignment and Display.
The view arrow (or set of arrows, if you use the ANSI dimensioning standard) indicates the orientation of the
projection.
11-28
To remove the arrow, select the Auxiliary View. In the PropertyManager, select or clear the Display view arrow
check box and enter a label if desired (maximum of two characters).
Auxiliary Views are linked to their parent views. Right-click the Auxiliary View and select Jump to Parent View.
The parent can be on the same sheet or another sheet.
Center Marks in Auxiliary Views are oriented to the viewing direction such that one of the lines of the Center Mark
is parallel to the view direction.
If you used a sketched line to create an Auxiliary View, the sketch is absorbed so you cannot delete it inadvertently.
You can delete sketch entities while editing the sketch.
Arrow
Arrow. Select to display a view arrow indicating the direction of the auxiliary view.
Label . Type text to be displayed with both the parent view and the auxiliary view. Specify the label display in
Tools, Options, Document Properties, View Labels.
Display Style
Use parent style. Clear to select style and quality settings different from those of the parent view.
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality. Model resolved.
• Draft quality. Model lightweight, used for faster performance with large assemblies.
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Choose the scale for the view to be the same as the parent scale, the same as the sheet scale, or its own custom scale.
For a custom scale, select Use custom scale and edit the values.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected (2D) or True (model value). Projected is set automatically for auxiliary views.
More Properties
For an existing Auxiliary View, click More Properties to open the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
Detail View
You create a Detail View in a drawing to show a portion of a view, usually at an enlarged scale. This detail may be of
an orthographic view, a 3D view, or a Section View.
You cannot create a Detail View from the following:
• a named view that shows the model with perspective turned on
• another Detail View
• a Crop View
Detail views expand in the FeatureManager design tree so that all components and features are available.
You can create a detail view of an exploded assembly view.
2. Click Detail View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Detail.
The Detail View PropertyManager appears and the Circle tool is active.
3. Sketch a circle.
NOTE: To create a profile other than a circle, sketch the profile before clicking the Detail View tool. Using
a sketch entity tool, create a closed profile around the area to be detailed. You can add dimensions or
relations to the sketch entities to position the profile precisely relative to the model.
NOTE: If you plan to create a Broken View, you are advised to relate the sketch to the model.
As you move the pointer, a preview of the view is displayed.
4. When the view is where you want it to be, click to place the view.
The note on the detail view includes the letter label and view scale, if the scale is different from the sheet scale.
Detail views are not aligned to other views by default, and may be moved freely to any location on the drawing sheet.
If you wish to remove any sketches that are imported to the drawing, edit the model and hide any sketches that
interfere with the Detail View.
Detail Views are linked to their detail circles. Right-click the circle and select Jump to Detail View, which can be on
the same sheet or another sheet. Right-click the Detail View and select Jump to Parent View.
11-30
Example of Detail View
The active view on the left shows the sketched profile (a circle) and the profile label (A). The Detail View on the right
shows the Detail View note, which displays the label (A) and the scale (1:1).
Circle Options
• Style . Select either Circle or Profile. If you select Circle, various circle styles are available.
• Label . Edit the letter associated with the detail circle and detail view. To specify the label format, click
Tools, Options, Document Properties, View Labels.
• Font. To choose a font for the detail circle label other than the document's font, clear the Document's font
check box and click Font. If you change the detail circle label font, a message appears asking if you wish to
also apply the new font to the detail view label.
View Options
• Full outline. Select to display the profile outline in the detail view.
• Pin position. Select to prevent the detail view from moving if the parent view changes size.
• Scale hatch pattern. Select to scale the hatch pattern based on the scale of the detail view.
Display Style
Use parent style. Clear to select style and quality settings different from those of the parent view.
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality. Model resolved.
• Draft quality. Model lightweight, used for faster performance with large assemblies.
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Choose the scale for the view to be the same as the parent scale, the same as the sheet scale, or its own custom scale.
For a custom scale, select Use custom scale and edit the values.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected (2D) or True (model value). Projected is set automatically for detail views.
More Properties
For an existing Detail View, click More Properties to open the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
2. In the Detail View PropertyManager, select Custom Scale, enter a new scale ratio, and click OK .
The Detail View scale is displayed in the note if its scale is different from the sheet scale.
11-32
To change the text of the label on the detail profile:
Double-click the label and edit the text in place. Click outside the label to exit.
- or -
Select the detail circle or label. The Detail View PropertyManager appears. Under Circle Options, modify
the text and font.
The Detail View note text also updates. A message appears asking if you want to apply the font change to
the Detail View as well.
GOST -
Broken Circle
With Leader
No Leader
Connected
Crop View
You can crop any drawing view except a Detail View, a view from which a Detail View has been created, or an
exploded view. Crop View can save steps because you do not create a new view. For example, instead of creating a
Section View and then a Detail View, then hiding the unnecessary Section View, you can crop the Section View
directly. You cannot create a Detail View from a Crop View.
To crop a view:
1. Activate an existing view.
2. Draw a closed profile with a sketch tool such as a circle.
3. Click Crop View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Tools, Crop View, Crop.
The view outside the profile disappears.
A circle is drawn on this Section View After cropping, only the view inside the circle is displayed.
Broken-out Section
A broken-out section is part of an existing drawing view, not a separate view. A closed profile, usually a spline,
defines the broken-out section. Material is removed to a specified depth to expose inner details. Specify the depth by
setting a number or by selecting an edge in a related view.
You cannot create a broken-out section on an exploded detail, section, or alternate position view.
11-34
To create a broken-out section:
1. Click Broken-out Section on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Broken-out
Section.
The Broken-out Section PropertyManager appears with the pointer showing that the spline tool is
active. You are prompted to sketch a closed spline.
If you want a profile other than a spline, create and select a closed profile before clicking the Broken-
out Section tool.
2. Sketch a profile.
3. In the PropertyManager, set the depth.
4. Click OK .
Right-click the broken-out section in the graphics area (the pointer changes to when it is over a
broken-out section) or in the FeatureManager design tree and select one of the following.
• Delete.
• Edit Definition. In the Broken-out Section PropertyManager, change the depth, then click
OK .
• Edit Sketch. Select the sketch entity and edit it. Select the sketch entity again and click
Rebuild .
• Depth Reference . Select geometry, such as an edge or an axis, in the same or a related view. The entity
name appears in the Depth Reference selection box.
Preview. When selected, the broken-out section is displayed as you change the depth. When cleared, the broken-out
section is applied when you exit from the PropertyManager.
Auto hatching. For assemblies only. If selected, the software adjusts automatically for neighboring components to
alternate crosshatch patterns in 90 degree increments. If there are still adjacent section faces with the same pattern,
the pattern spacing is adjusted.
Broken View
You can use a broken (or interrupted) view on the drawing of a long part. Broken views make it possible to display
the part in a larger scale on a smaller size drawing sheet. Reference dimensions and model dimensions associated
with the broken area reflect the actual model values.
You can specify the gap between the break lines and the extension of the lines beyond the part geometry in Tools,
Options, Document Properties, Detailing. The gap between the break lines is the gap when the break lines are first
inserted, and also the gap after the view has been broken. You can specify the line font for the break lines in Tools,
Options, Document Properties, Line Font.
You can apply the Break View and Un-Break View commands to multiple views.
2. Drag the break lines with the pointer to the places on the part where you want the breaks to occur.
3. Right-click inside the highlighted boundary and select Break View.
The part is displayed with a gap in the part geometry. In addition to model geometry, broken views also
support cosmetic threads and axes.
NOTE: When you break the view, any sketch entities that are between the break lines are deleted. Dimensions that
are between the break lines become dangling.
11-36
Broken View Break Line Styles
Broken View break lines can be in one of four styles.
Straight Curved
2. Click Section View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Section.
The Section View PropertyManager appears, and the Line tool is active.
3. Sketch a section line.
NOTE: To create a multi-line section view, or to use a centerline as the section line, sketch the section line
before clicking the Section View tool.
If the section line does not completely cut through the bounding box of the model in the view, you are asked
if you want this to be a partial section cut. If you click Yes, the Section View is created as a partial section
view.
As you move the pointer, a preview of the view is displayed. By default, the view is aligned in the direction
of the arrows on the section line. To override the default alignment as you place the view, press Ctrl. To
return to the default alignment while dragging, release Ctrl.
The orientation of the section view toggles as you drag the pointer over the section line.
If the section line has multiple segments, the view is aligned to the sketch segment that was selected when
you clicked the Section View tool.
4. Click to place the view.
In its default alignment, a section view can only move in the direction of the section arrows. For information about
changing the alignment of views, see View Alignment and Display.
Multiple section lines can have the same label. A warning message appears if the drawing standard you are using
does not allow it.
Section Views are linked to their section lines. Right-click the section line and select Jump to Section View, which
can be on the same sheet or another sheet. Right-click the Section View and select Jump to Parent View.
Line Options
• Label . Edit the letter associated with the section line and section view.
• Font. To choose a font for the section line label other than the document's font, clear the Document's font
check box and click Font. If you change the section line label font, you can apply the new font to the section
view label.
11-38
View Options
• Partial section. If the section line does not completely cross the view, a message states that the section line
is smaller than the view geometry and asks if you want it to be a partial section cut.
o Yes. The section view is a partial section view and the check box is selected.
o No. The section view appears but is not cut. You can select the check box later to create a partial
section view.
• Display only surface. Only the surfaces cut by the section line appear in the section view.
• Auto hatching. Crosshatch patterns alternate between components in assemblies, or between bodies in
multibody parts and weldments.
Display Style
Use parent style. Clear to select style and quality settings different from those of the parent view.
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality. Model resolved.
• Draft quality. Model lightweight, used for faster performance with large assemblies.
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Choose the scale for the view to be the same as the parent scale, the same as the sheet scale, or its own custom scale.
For a custom scale, select Use custom scale and edit the values.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected (2D) or True (model value). Projected is set automatically for section views.
More Properties
For an existing Section View, click More Properties to open the Drawing View Properties dialog box.
Edit the sketch as needed. Then select one sketch entity and click Rebuild to update the section view.
• To change the cut direction as indicated by the arrows, double-click anywhere along the section line, or
select the section line and select Flip Direction in the Section View PropertyManager.
• To modify the crosshatch pattern, right-click a face, or hold Ctrl and select multiple faces, and select
Properties. See Crosshatch Properties.
• To modify the length of a centerline, drag the endpoints. Centerlines are automatically added where needed
(holes, circular extruded bosses or cuts, and revolved features) in section views. You can specify the default
distance for the centerline to extend beyond the model edge in Detailing Options. To remove centerlines,
you can either delete them from the Section View, or you can turn the display of them on and off by clicking
View, Axes.
2. Click Section View or Aligned Section View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing
View, Section or Aligned Section.
The Section Scope tab of the Section View dialog box appears.
3. In the active drawing view, or in the same view in the FeatureManager design tree, click the components that
you want to exclude from the section view. The selected components are listed in the Excluded components
box.
To remove a component from the list, select the component again, or select the component in the list and
click Delete.
4. If a selected component is used more than once in the assembly (for example, if it is a member of a pattern,
or if it is used as a component of more than one sub-assembly):
• To exclude all the instances of the selected component, click the component name in the Excluded
components list, and select the Don’t cut all instances check box. In the resulting view, all
instances of the selected component will be left uncut.
• To exclude only the selected instance, leave the Don’t cut all instances check box cleared. In the
resulting view, only the selected instance will be uncut; all others will be cut.
5. Click OK.
In the resulting section view, excluded components are not cut. They are shown in the view, or you can
remove them from the view by setting the section line property Display only surface cut.
11-40
To control auto hatching:
If you want the software to automatically adjust for neighboring components with the same crosshatch
pattern, select the Auto hatching check box in the Section Scope dialog box. The angle used in the pattern
automatically alternates in 90 degree increments. If there are still adjacent section faces with the same
pattern, the pattern spacing is adjusted.
If you do not use auto hatching, you can manually adjust the angle and spacing on adjacent components. See
Crosshatch Properties.
NOTE: A Detail View created from an assembly Section View inherits the crosshatch patterns of its parent
view.
Section Scope
In a drawing, you can specify which components are to be left uncut in a section view of an assembly. The Section
Scope dialog box appears when you create a section view in an assembly drawing. The Section Scope tab also
appears in the Drawing View Properties dialog box for a section view. Section Scope controls the following items.
Excluded components
• If you are creating a new section view, click the components to leave uncut in the parent drawing view on
the sheet or in the FeatureManager design tree.
• If you are editing an existing section view, click the components in the section view itself.
• To remove a component from the list, click the component again, or click it in the Excluded components
list and press Delete.
Auto hatching
• Click Auto hatching if you want the software to automatically adjust for neighboring components with the
same crosshatch pattern.
• If you do not use Auto hatching, you can manually adjust the angle and spacing on adjacent components.
See Area Hatch/Fill Properties.
5. Click Section View or Aligned Section View and place the view.
- or -
5. Click Aligned Section View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Aligned Section.
11-42
NOTE: If you are in an assembly, the Section View Section Scope dialog box appears.
The Section View PropertyManager appears.
You cannot change the angle of the line that you selected to align the view; however, you can change the
position of the view.
As you move the pointer, a preview of the view is displayed. By default, the view is aligned in the direction
of the arrows on the selected segment of the section line. To override the default alignment as you place the
view, press Ctrl. To return to the default alignment while dragging, release Ctrl.
The orientation of the view flips as you drag the preview across the the section lline. You can also select Flip
direction in the PropertyManager.
The view is aligned to the sketch segment that was selected when you created the section line; the cut faces
from the other segments are projected into the same plane.
6. When the view is where you want it to be, click to place the view.
In its default alignment, an aligned section view can move only in the direction of arrows on the selected segment.
For information about changing the alignment of views, see Drawing View Alignment and Display.
1. Click Alternate Position View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Insert, Drawing View, Alternate
Position.
The Alternate Position PropertyManager appears. You are prompted to select a drawing view in which to
insert the alternate position.
2. Under Configuration, choose either:
• New configuration - to create a new Alternate Position configuration. Accept the default name or
type a name of your choice.
• Existing configuration - to choose an existing configuration in the assembly document. Select a
configuration from the list.
5. Click OK to close the Move Component PropertyManager and return to the drawing.
The alternate position of the assembly configuration appears in the drawing view in phantom lines, and the
Alternate Position PropertyManager closes.
Configuration
• New configuration - A default name appears in the box. You can accept the default name or type a name of
your choice.
• Existing configuration - Choose from existing assembly configurations that appear in the list.
11-44
OLE Items in Drawings
If any part of an active OLE item in a drawing is covered, the item does not redraw when it is uncovered. This
behavior may occur, for example, when you move a stencil across an active Visio item.
• Select the view, then click Edit, Update View, or click Update View on the Drawing toolbar.
(Use Tools, Customize to add the Update View icon to your toolbar, if necessary.)
• Right-click the view, and select Update View.
Press Ctrl to select more than one view at a time for updating.
Manipulating Views
• Drawing View Properties
• Updating Views
• Moving a Drawing
• Moving Views
• Aligning Views
• Rotating Views
• Copying and Pasting Views
Displaying
• Drawing View Display Modes
• Component Line Font
• Line Format
• Layers
Manipulating Views
Depending on the type of changes you have made, it may be necessary to click Update View or
Rebuild .
11-46
Multiple Views PropertyManager
Display Style
Select a display type:
Wireframe
Shaded
Select a display quality:
• High quality
• Draft quality
Set options for drawing view display style in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Scale
Use parent scale. Available for related views (projected, auxiliary, section, detail, and so on)
Use sheet scale.
Use custom scale. Set a scale for the views.
Dimension Type
Select either Projected or True.
Updating Views
To control the update behavior of the views in an active drawing, specify the Automatic view update mode. If
selected, drawing views update as you change the model. You can also set an option to specify whether views are
updated when opening drawings.
NOTE: You cannot activate or edit a drawing view that needs to be updated.
• Click Rebuild or Edit, Rebuild to update any views that need to be updated.
• Select the view, then click Update View on the Drawing toolbar, or click Edit, Update View.
(Use Tools, Customize to add the Update View icon to the toolbar, if necessary.)
• Right-click the view, and select Update View.
You can select the view either in the FeatureManager design tree or on the drawing sheet for either
method. You also can hold down Ctrl and select several views at once to update in this way.
Move Drawing
You can move all of the entities of a drawing in relation to the drawing sheet. Entities that are on the drawing sheet
(drawing views, annotations, and so on) or in the drawing sheet format are moved.
11-48
Aligning Views
You can change the alignment of views that are not aligned by default, or views whose alignment you have broken.
You can also break view alignments and return alignments to their defaults.
Rotating Views
You can rotate a view to orient a selected edge either horizontally or vertically. You can also rotate a view around its
center point to orient the view at any angle.
1. Click Rotate View on the View toolbar, or right-click the view and select View, Rotate View.
The Rotate Drawing View dialog box appears.
2. Drag the view to the desired rotation. The view snaps to 45° increments, but you can drop the view at any
angle. The angle appears in degrees in the dialog box.
- or -
In the dialog box, type the angle in the Drawing view angle box, select or clear the Dependent views
update to change in orientation check box, and click Apply to see the rotation.
3. Click Close to close the dialog box.
1. Select a drawing view (optional), and click Rotate View on the View toolbar. You can also right-click
a view, and select View, Rotate View.
The Rotate Drawing View dialog box appears.
2. Rotate the view in one of these ways:
• Drag the view on the sheet. The view snaps to 45 degree increments, but you can drop the view at
any angle.
• Specify the Drawing view angle. (Select a view before entering an angle, if you did not pre-select
a view.)
• Use the left and right arrow keys. The increment value specified for the arrow keys (under Tools,
Options, System Options, View Rotation) is used.
3. Select Dependent views update to change in orientation if you also want to update any views that were
created from the view you are rotating (projected views, for example).
4. Select Rotate Center Marks with view if you want center marks to rotate with the view. You can rotate
center marks in the Center Mark PropertyManager.
5. Click Apply to update the views. You can rotate other views if needed, then click Close when you are
finished.
6. To restore the view to its original rotation, right-click the view and select Alignment, Default Rotation.
11-50
3. Change to the target sheet or drawing document, click where you want to paste the view, and click Paste
or Edit, Paste.
To hide/show views:
1. Right-click the view on the sheet or in the FeatureManager design tree, and select Hide View.
If the view has dependent views (Detail, Section, and so on), you are asked if you want to hide the dependent
views as well.
If the view was active when you hid it, the active view boundary (gray shadowed) is displayed. Otherwise,
the view and boundary are invisible.
To see where hidden views are placed on the sheet without displaying them, click View, Show Hidden
Views. The boundaries of hidden views are displayed with an X.
The pointer changes to and the view boundary highlights when the pointer passes over a hidden view.
2. To show the view again, right-click the view, and select Show View.
If the view has dependent views (Detail, Section, and so on), you are asked if you want to show the
dependent views as well.
1. Select an edge and click Hide Edge on the Line Format toolbar, or right-click an edge and select Hide
Edge.
The edge is removed from the display, but it still is highlighted when the pointer passes over it.
2. To display the edge again, select the edge and click Show Edge , or right-click the edge and select Show
Edge.
If you cannot select the hidden edges, click Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings. Make sure that the Select
hidden entities check box is selected.
Showing or hiding an edge is a valid operation only if the edge would be shown in the view mode. For example, if the
edge is hidden and the view mode is Hidden Lines Removed, you cannot show or hide the edge.
11-52
To show or hide hidden edges in the Drawing View Properties dialog box:
1. Right-click the drawing view and select Properties.
2. Select the Show Hidden Edges tab.
3. Select a feature or component from either the drawing view or the FeatureManager design tree to add it to
the list of items to be shown with hidden lines.
4. Click Apply to see the effect of your selection.
5. To hide the hidden lines again, select an item from the list and press Delete.
- or -
Select the feature or component in the drawing view or the FeatureManager design tree.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Hide/Show Components
You can hide or show components in an assembly drawing.
A quick selection method for hiding components is Hide Behind Plane.
You can set an option in Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings to list hidden components automatically when
you create a drawing view. New drawing views with the Automatic hiding of components on view creation check
box selected display the list of hidden components on the Hide/Show Components tab in the Drawing View
Properties dialog box.
You can access Hide/Show Components in two ways.
To show or hide a component from the shortcut menu:
Right-click a component in the drawing view or in the FeatureManager design tree and select Show/Hide,
Hide Component.
If the component is hidden, you can show it again by right-clicking the component in the FeatureManager
design tree (not in the drawing view) and selecting Show/Hide, Show Component.
To show or hide a component in the Drawing View Properties dialog box:
1. Right-click the drawing view and select Properties.
2. Select the Hide/Show Components tab.
3. Select a component from either the drawing view or the FeatureManager design tree to add it to the list of
items to be hidden.
4. Click Apply to see the effect of your selection.
5. To show the component again, select the component in the Hide/Show Components list and press Delete.
- or -
Select the component in the FeatureManager design tree.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
NOTE: You can hide or show surfaces in part and assembly documents without affecting their drawings. In a part or
assembly document, right-click a surface and select Hide Surface Body. The surface remains visible in the
associated drawing. To show the surface again, right-click the surface in the FeatureManager design tree and select
Show Surface Body.
The plane in the isometric view will hide components in the direction of
the arrow. The plane and arrow are also displayed in the other views to aid
in locating the components to be hidden.
The resulting
isometric view.
11-54
Displaying
Wireframe
Shaded
When in Hidden Lines Visible or Hidden Lines Removed mode, you can select a style for Tangent
Edge Display.
Shaded mode is available for the following types of view:
• Model View
• Standard 3 View
• Projected View
• Auxiliary View
• Section View
• Relative View
You can set the default display mode for drawings in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Line Format
You can specify the color, thickness, and style in drawings for:
• System settings for new sketch entities
• Entities in layers
• Properties of existing lines, edges, and sketch entities
You can specify the color for notes and other annotations in either layers or with the Line Color tool.
The settings for the line formats are either:
• globally controlled - set in either:
o Layers
o Tools, Options, System Options, Colors and Display Style
• explicitly controlled - set by the Line Format tools
The following settings apply if the Default check box in a Line Format tool dialog box is:
• Selected
o Layer settings - if the entity is in a layer
o System settings - if the entity is not in a layer
• Cleared
o Line Format tool settings - set explicitly for the entity
When you add new sketch entities to a drawing, the line format follows the Layer settings. If no layer is active, the
line format follows the system settings.
For existing lines, edges, and sketch entities, the line format tool settings override layer specifications and system
settings. Another method of setting line properties for assembly components in drawings is with Component Line
Font.
Format tools
The tools on the Line Format toolbar change the following formats.
• Layer Properties. Set layer properties (Color, Thickness, and Style), move entities into layers, and
select a layer for new entities.
• Line Color. Choose a color from the palette, or select Default. You can toggle between the specified
color and the system default colors with the Color Display Mode tool (below).
• Line Thickness. Choose a thickness or Default from the menu. As you move the pointer over the
menu, the thickness name (Thin, Normal, Thick, and so on) is displayed in the Status bar. Corresponding
line weights for printing are defined in File, Print, Line weights.
• Line Style. Choose a style or Default from the menu. As you move the pointer over the menu, the
corresponding line style name (Solid, Dashed, Phantom, and so on) is displayed in the Status bar.
• Color Display Mode. Click this tool to toggle between aesthetic colors (colors chosen in layers or with
Line Color) and the system status colors (fully defined, under defined, and so on). Sketch endpoints and
dangling dimensions are always in the system status color.
11-56
To specify the format for new sketch entities in the current and future drawings:
1. Click outside the drawing sheet to activate the Line Format tools.
2. Click a tool on the Line Format toolbar and select a format from the menu.
3. Sketch entities of any type (lines, centerlines, circles, and so on) that you add to the drawing use the
specified formats, until you select a different format.
Tangent edges are always Visible in Isometric, Trimetric, and Dimetric oriented views.
In new installations, when you insert views into drawings, a dialog box appears so you can set the
tangent edge display for the current view and future views.
• Views - to set the display for an individual view in a drawing, right-click the view in either the graphics area
or the FeatureManager design tree and select Tangent Edge, then choose one of the three tangent edge
display modes.
The default in this dialog box is the default in the system options in Tools, Options, System Options, Display Style.
Your choice in the dialog box becomes the new system option. You can control the default in either the dialog box or
the system options.
Don't ask me again. Select to prevent this dialog box from appearing each time you insert a drawing view.
Layers
You can create layers in a SolidWorks drawing document. You assign a line color, line thickness, and line style for
new entities created on each layer. New entities are automatically added to the active layer. You can hide or show
individual layers. You can move entities from one layer to another.
• Dimensions and annotations (including notes, area hatch, blocks, break lines, cosmetic threads, detail
circles, section lines, and tables) can be moved onto layers; they use the color specified for the layer.
• Sketch entities use all the properties of the layer.
• Components, in either part or assembly drawings, can be moved onto layers. The Component Line Font
dialog box includes a list for selecting a named layer for the component.
• If you import a .dxf or .dwg file into a SolidWorks drawing, layers are created automatically. The layer
information (names, properties, and entity locations) specified in the system where the .dxf or .dwg file
originated is retained.
• If you export a drawing with layers as a .dxf or .dwg file, the layer information is included in the file. When
you open the file in the target system, the entities are on the same layers and have the same properties unless
you use mapping to redirect the entities to new layers.
1. In a drawing, click Layer Properties on either the Layer toolbar or the Line Format toolbar.
The Layers dialog box appears.
2. Click New, and enter the Name of a new layer.
NOTE: If you save the drawing as a .dxf or .dwg file, the layer name may be changed in the .dxf or .dwg
file as follows:
• All characters are converted to uppercase.
• The name is truncated to 31 characters.
• All spaces in the name are converted to underscores.
3. Specify the line format for entities on that layer as follows:
• To add a description, double-click in the Description column and type text.
• To specify the line color, click the Color box, select a color, and click OK.
• To specify the line style or thickness, click in the Style or Thickness column, and select the desired
style or thickness from the list.
Active. An arrow indicates which layer is active. To activate a layer, double-click beside the layer name.
Visible. A yellow lightbulb appears with any layer that is visible. To hide a layer, double-click its lightbulb. The
lightbulb turns gray, and all the entities on the layer are hidden. To turn the layer back on, double-click the lightbulb
again.
Move. To move entities to the active layer, select the entities in the drawing and click Move.
Delete. To delete a layer, select the layer name and click Delete.
11-58
12
Detailing
Detailing Overview
Detailing Overview
You can add much of the necessary detailing of your models in part and assembly documents. This includes
dimensions, notes, symbols, and so on. Then you can insert the dimensions and annotations from the model into a
drawing.
Once in the drawing, you can add reference dimensions, other annotations, and a bill of materials if required.
Annotations and reference dimensions added in a drawing do not affect the part or assembly document.
For drawings, sheet formats, and drawing views see Drawings.
2. Click Model Items on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Model Items.
The Insert Model Items dialog box appears.
3. Select the All types check box, or select individual types of items to insert:
• Annotations - Cosmetic thread (assemblies only), Datums, Datum targets, Dimensions, Geometric
tolerances, Notes, Surface finish, Welds. If you select Dimensions, you have the option of also
inserting Instance/Revolution counts if those dimensions exist in the part or assembly, Hole
Wizard Profiles, and Hole Wizard Locations. Select Marked for drawing to insert only those
dimensions that are marked in parts for drawings.
• Reference Geometry - Axes, Curves, Planes, Surfaces, Routing points, Origins.
4. Choose other options as required:
• Layers - Select a layer from the Layers list (available if your drawing has layers) for the
items to be inserted only in the specified layer.
• Import from - If you have preselected a component or feature, you can select one of the following
options:
o Entire model. Displays all of the selected item types that exist in the model.
o Selected component. If this drawing is of an assembly, displays the items that exist on the
selected component only.
o Selected feature. Displays the annotations existing on the selected feature only.
o Only Assembly. When selected, annotations in the assembly are inserted. Annotations
that were created in parts or subassemblies are not inserted. Reference dimensions created
in the assembly, dimensions referring to mates, and dimensions referring to in-context
features created in assemblies are inserted.
• Include items from hidden features - To prevent the insertion of annotations that belong to hidden
model items, clear the Include items from hidden features check box. Annotations on features
that are completely hidden by other geometry are not inserted. The insertion operation is slower
when the software filters out hidden features, but the resulting views do not contain inappropriate
annotations.
12-2
• Import items into all views - Change the selection of views if necessary. To insert dimensions into
selected views, clear the Import items into all views check box, then click the desired views in the
graphics area or FeatureManager design tree. The selected views are listed in the Import into
views box. Click the views again to remove them from the list; right-click the drawing sheet, and
select Clear selections to remove all the views from the list.
NOTE: When Selected Feature or Selected Component is checked, annotations for the item are
displayed only in the view where you selected the item. You cannot select a different view or all
views.
• Eliminate duplicate model dimensions - When the Eliminate duplicate model dimensions
check box is selected, duplicate dimensions are not inserted into drawings when model dimensions
are inserted. The default for this check box follows the Eliminate duplicate model dimensions on
insert option in Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings.
5. Click OK.
Attachment points of imported annotations can be dragged, but not re-attached to another edge, face, vertex, and so
on.
You can toggle the visibility of individual reference geometry items. Right-click the item, and select Hide or Show.
Imported annotations display in the default Imported Annotations (Driving) or Imported Annotations (Driven)
color; reference annotations (added in the drawing) are displayed in the default Imported Annotations (Driven)
color. These colors are specified in Tools, Options, System Options, Colors.
Favorites
You can define favorite styles, similar to paragraph styles in word processing documents, for dimensions and various
annotations (Notes, Geometric Tolerance Symbols, Surface Finish Symbols, and Weld Symbols). With favorites, you
can:
• Save any dimension or annotation property as part of a favorite.
• Name favorites so that they can be referenced.
• Apply favorite styles to multiple dimensions or annotations.
• Add, update, and delete favorite styles.
• Save and load favorite styles. You can also load styles saved from other documents and located in other
folders.
The functionality of favorites includes:
• When adding a dimension or annotation, you can preselect an item that uses a favorite, and that favorite
becomes the default for the new item. If you click a location first, no favorite is used for new items.
• You cannot apply favorites to dimensions created by Hole Callouts.
• When you insert dimensions from a part or assembly into a drawing with Insert Model Items, the
dimensions' favorites belong to the original model. Therefore, you cannot assign drawing favorites to the
inserted dimensions. You can load the part or assembly favorites into drawings. Changes to the favorites in
the drawings change the favorites in the part or assembly document.
The extensions for favorites are:
Dimensions .sldfvt
Notes .sldnotfvt
Geometric Tolerance Symbols .sldgtolfvt
Surface Finish Symbols .sldsffvt
Weld Symbols .sldweldfvt
12-4
To save a favorite:
To load a favorite:
3. Click Open.
The loaded favorites appear in the Set a current favorite list.
To delete a favorite:
1. Select a style from Set a current Favorite.
Selecting a favorite of <NONE> unlinks the dimension or annotation from the favorite, but the item
retains the properties already applied. To reset the dimension or annotation properties, use Apply the
default attributes to selected items. The <NONE> designation indicates that the dimension is not linked to
any favorite, so any future changes to favorites are not applied.
Dimensions in Drawings
Dimensions Overview
Dimensions in a SolidWorks drawing are associated with the model, and changes in the model are reflected in the
drawing.
Model Dimensions. Typically, you create dimensions as you create each part feature, then insert those dimensions
into the various drawing views. Changing a dimension in the model updates the drawing, and changing an inserted
dimension in a drawing changes the model.
Mark for Drawings. When creating dimensions in part sketches, you can specify whether the dimension should be
included when inserting model dimensions into drawings. Right-click the dimension and select Mark for drawing.
You can also specify that dimensions marked for drawings be inserted automatically into new drawing views. Click
Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing and select Dimensions marked for drawings under Auto insert
on view creation.
Reference Dimensions. You can also add dimensions in the drawing document, but these are reference dimensions,
and are driven; you cannot edit the value of reference dimensions to change the model. However, the values of
reference dimensions change when the model dimensions change.
Color. By default, model dimensions are black. This includes dimensions that are blue in the part or assembly
document (such as the extrusion depth). Reference dimensions are gray and appear with parentheses by default. You
can specify colors for various types of dimensions in Tools, Options, System Options, Colors and specify Add
parentheses by default in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Dimensions.
Arrows. Circular handles appear on dimension arrows when dimensions are selected. When you click on an
arrowhead handle (on either handle if there are two for the dimension), the arrows flip outside or inside. When you
right-click on a handle, a list of arrowhead styles appears. You can change the style of any dimension arrowhead
individually by this method.
Selection. You can select dimensions by clicking anywhere on the dimension, including dimension and extension
lines and arrows.
Hide and Show Dimensions. You can hide and show dimensions with Hide/Show Annotations on the
Drawing toolbar or View menu. You can also right-click a dimension and select Hide to hide the dimension.
Hide and Show Lines. To hide a dimension line or extension line, right-click the line and select Hide Dimensions
Line or Hide Extension Line. To show hidden lines, right-click the dimension or a visible line and select Show
Dimension Lines or Show Extension Lines.
Angular Dimension Display. You can change a dimension from diameter to radius or linear display and vice versa in
the Dimension Properties dialog box or on screen. On screen, right-click an angular dimension and select:
• Display As Diameter
• Display As Radius
• Display As Linear
12-6
Slant. When you insert or select dimensions, handles appear so you can drag the dimension to slant the extension
lines. See the section on Display Options for removing the slant.
Display Options. Right-click a dimension and select Display Options. The choices available depend on the type of
dimension and other factors and can include the following:
• Remove Slant
• Center Dimension
• Offset Text
• Change Plane
• Align Ordinate
• Add to Ordinate
• Jog
• Re-Jog Ordinate
• Show Parentheses
• Show as Inspection
Link external dim text. You can right-click the top-level icon in a drawing FeatureManager design tree and select or
clear Link external dim text to control whether text added to a dimension is displayed. Text added to a dimension in
a drawing becomes an attribute of the dimension. The default is to have the option enabled.
Dimension PropertyManager
In the Dimension PropertyManager, you can specify the display of dimensions. If you select multiple dimensions,
only the properties that apply to all the selected dimensions are available.
Dimension Favorite
• Apply the default attributes to selected dimensions . Reset the selected dimension or dimensions to
the document defaults.
• Add or Update a Favorite . Opens the Add or Update a Favorite dialog box.
• Save a Favorite . Opens the Save As dialog box with favorite (.sldfvt) as the default file type to save
an existing favorite.
• Load Favorites . Opens the Open dialog box with favorite (.sldfvt) as the active file type. You can use
Ctrl or Shift to select multiple files.
• Set a current Favorite. Choose a favorite style from the list to apply to the selected dimension or
dimensions, or to delete or save the favorite.
Tolerance/Precision
Tolerance Type . Select from the list (None, Basic, Bilateral, Fit, and so on). The list is dynamic. For
example, types for chamfer dimensions are limited to None, Bilateral, and Symmetric.
Primary Unit Precision . Select the number of digits after the decimal point from the list for the dimension
value.
Tolerance Precision . Select the number of digits after the decimal point for tolerance values.
Classification . Available only for Fit, Fit with tolerance, or Fit (tolerance only) types. Classification can be
User Defined, Clearance, Transitional, or Press. Select a classification from the list. When you select either Hole
Fit or Shaft Fit (below), the list for the other category (Hole Fit or Shaft Fit) is filtered based on the classification.
Hole Fit and Shaft Fit . Available only for Fit, or Fit with tolerance, or Fit (tolerance only) types. Select
from the lists, or type any text.
NOTE: Bilateral tolerances (Maximum Variation and Minimum Variation) and parentheses are available in the Fit
with tolerance or Fit (tolerance only) type if you specify Hole Fit or Shaft Fit, but not both.
Fit tolerance display. Available only for Fit or Fit with tolerance types. Choose from:
Linear display
Show parentheses. Parentheses are available for Bilateral, Symmetric, and Fit with tolerance tolerance types.
When selected, parentheses bracket the tolerance values.
12-8
Second Tolerance/Precision
A second Tolerance/Precision section is available for Chamfer Dimensions. Fit and Fit with tolerance
types are not available for chamfer dimensions.
Dimension Text
Text. The dimension appears automatically in the center text box, represented by <DIM>. Click to place the pointer
in any of the text boxes and type text. The three boxes represent a line of text above the dimension, the middle line
containing the dimension (plus prefixes, suffixes, and any other text), and a line or lines below the dimension. If you
delete <DIM>, you can reinsert the value by clicking Add Value
If you delete or modify the dimension, a message warns that overriding the dimension value text
<DIM> disables tolerance display. You can continue with the modified value, but you cannot add tolerances
to the dimension.
For some types of dimensions, additional text appears automatically. For example, a Hole Callout for
a counterbore hole or a hole with blind depth displays the diameter and depth of the hole (represented by
<MOD-DIAM><DIM><HOLE-DEPTH>xx). Hole Callouts for holes created in the Hole Wizard display
information from the Hole Wizard. You can edit the text and insert variables from the Variables dialog box.
Justify. You can justify text horizontally and, for some standards such as ANSI, you can justify the leader vertically.
Distance , or Chamfer (available only for chamfers with 45° angles, generally used in JIS standard).
Arrows
Placement. Click Outside , Inside , or Smart .
The type of arrows and leaders available depends on the type of dimension selected. For example, the
following types are available for Chamfer Dimensions:
Horizontal Text
Angled Text
Style. Select an arrow style from the list. The default style is the specified style for the dimensioning standard (ISO,
ANSI, and so on).
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
You can choose for the extension lines to break only when crossing arrowheads. Click Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Dimensions and select Break around arrow head only. For ANSI standard, the
check box is selected by default.
Use document's gap. Select to use the document default set in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Dimensions.
Gap. Enter a value if you do not use the document's default.
When the dimension lines are broken, they break around lines that are nearby. If a dimension is moved
significantly, it may not break around the new nearby dimensions. To update the display, unbreak the
dimension lines and then break them again.
More Properties
Click More Properties to open the Dimension Properties dialog box.
Symbol
Inserts a symbol into a dimension, a note, a geometric tolerance symbol, and so on.
The libraries include ANSI, GOST, ISO, JIS, hole, key, modifying, and flag symbols. Flag symbols contain:
• A letter or number
• A period or no period
• A border (a circle, a square, both a circle and a square, a triangle, or a rotated triangle)
The symbol is represented by its name in the Note text preview box, but the actual symbol appears in
the drawing note.
For dimensions, you can delete symbols in the Dimension PropertyManager. For a Note, you can
double-click the note and delete the symbol code in the on-screen editor.
Dimension Properties
12-10
The following options are available for all dimensions:
Depending on the type of dimension (linear, radius, reference, and so on) or the type of document, the following
options may be available:
Value
The current value of the dimension.
To change the value, either type a new value or use the arrows to increment the value.
(Not available if you select multiple dimensions.)
Name
The name of the dimension (used in equations and design tables).
To change the name, type a new name.
(Not available if you select multiple dimensions.)
Full Name
The dimension name plus the name of the feature or sketch the dimension is associated with.
(Read only. Not available if you select multiple dimensions.)
Units
Either select Use document’s units, as defined in the Dimension Options, or clear this check box and click Units to
specify the unit type for the selected dimension.
The available options depend on the type of dimensions that you selected. For example, an Angular Unit can be Deg,
Deg/Min, Deg/Min/Sec, or Radians. A Length Unit can be Angstroms, Nanometers, Microns, Millimeters,
Centimeters, Meters, Microinches, Mils, Inches, Feet, or Feet & Inches. For feet and inch units, you can choose
Decimal or Fraction; if Fraction, you can specify the Denominator.
Font
Either select Use document’s font, as defined in the Dimensions Options, or clear this check box and click Font to
select a new font type, style, and size for the selected items.
Arrow Style
You can change an arrow style in either the Dimension PropertyManager or the Dimension Properties dialog box.
• In the Dimension PropertyManager, under Arrows, select a style from the list.
• In the Dimension Properties dialog box, under Arrow style, select or clear Use document's style.
o Select to use the style in Arrows Options.
o Clear to choose a new style from the lists.
Two lists of arrow styles appear in the Dimension Properties dialog box. You can choose separate styles for each
arrow when there are two arrows for a dimension. This feature supports the JIS dimensioning standard. Two lists
appear in the Dimension PropertyManager only when separate styles are specified by the dimensioning standard.
Arrows
You can specify placement of arrows with respect to the dimension extension lines: Inside, Outside, Smart, or
Document (uses the document defaults, as defined in the Detailing Options).
Smart specifies that arrows automatically appear outside of extension lines if the space is too small to accommodate
the dimension text and the arrowheads.
Circular arrowhead handles appear on dimension arrows when you select dimensions. The pointer changes to
when it is over the arrowhead handles. When you click on arrowhead handle (either handle if there are two for
the dimension), the arrows flip outside or inside.
You can change arrow styles.
Read only
Specifies that the dimension cannot be changed.
Dimension Precision
Enter the number of decimal places for the precision of the dimension:
• Value
• Tolerance
for the type of units:
• Primary Units
• Alternate Units (in dual dimension display)
• Angular Units
In the Dimension Options dialog box, all unit types are available. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, only
those unit types that are appropriate for the selected dimensions are visible. In the Dimension PropertyManager, only
the primary dimension and tolerance are visible.
You can choose Same as nominal for the tolerance precision, so that if the precision of the dimension value changes,
the precision of the tolerance changes with it.
In the Dimension Properties dialog box and Dimension PropertyManager, (Document) after the precision indicates
that the precision is the same as the document option.
12-12
Dimension Display
The Dimension Display dialog box controls the display of extension lines and leader lines. To access this dialog
box, click Display in the Dimension Properties dialog box.
• Extension Lines. Select to display the first or second extension lines, or both.
• Dimension Lines. Select to display the first or second dimension lines, or both.
• Smart display of extension lines. Clear to enable manual placement of extension lines.
• Use document's bend length. Clear so you can specify the dimension bent leader length. Type a value in
the box.
• Center between extension lines. Select so that dimensions are automatically centered between extension
lines.
• Dimension display. Select Use document's dimension display, or select one of the display styles available.
Driven
Specifies that the dimension is driven by other dimensions and conditions, and cannot be changed.
Diameter dimension
Specifies that the dimension on an arc or circle displays the diameter, not the radius.
To convert a diameter dimension to a radius dimension, clear this checkbox.
Foreshortened radius
12-14
Dimension to inside of arc
Specifies that the dimension arrow is inside the arc. Use this option in combination with the Arrows setting (either
Inside or Outside) to meet your drawing standards.
Linear Radial
Layer
To move the dimension to a different layer, select the name of the layer in the Layer list.
Dimensioning to Midpoints
Reference Dimensions
Reference dimensions show measurements of the model, but they do not drive the model and you cannot change their
values. However, when you change the model, the reference dimensions update accordingly. Reference dimensions of
features are suppressed when the features are suppressed.
Reference dimensions are enclosed in parentheses by default. To prevent parentheses around reference dimensions,
clear the Add parentheses by default check box in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Dimensions.
You can control the color of reference dimensions in Tools, Options, System Options, Colors. Select Imported
Annotations (Driven) and click Edit.
You can use the same methods to add parallel, horizontal, and vertical reference dimensions to a drawing as you use
to dimension sketches. For more information, see Dimensioning in Sketches.
Ordinate Dimensions and Baseline Dimensions are both types of reference dimensions in drawings. Ordinate
dimensions in sketches are driving dimensions.
Reference dimensions are automatically hidden when a feature is suppressed. The dimensions are shown again when
the feature is unsuppressed.
You can dimension to a silhouette edge. Point to the silhouette edge, and when the pointer
appears, click to dimension.
12-16
Parentheses
Reference dimensions are shown in parentheses by default.
To specify the default use of parentheses for all reference dimensions in the current document, click Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Dimensions. Select the Add parentheses by default check box.
Baseline Dimensions
Baseline dimensions are reference dimensions. You cannot change their values or use the values to drive the model.
Baseline dimensions are automatically grouped, and they are spaced at the distances specified in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Dimensions under Offset distances.
1. Click Baseline Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations toolbar, or click Tools, Dimensions, Baseline.
2. Click the edge or vertex you want to use as a baseline.
3. Click each of the edges or vertices you want to dimension.
4. Click to place the dimensions.
If you select an edge, dimensions are measured parallel to the selected edge. If you select a vertex, dimensions
are measured point-to-point from the selected vertex.
Ordinate Dimensions
Ordinate dimensions are a set of dimensions measured from a zero ordinate in a drawing or sketch. In drawings, they
are reference dimensions and you cannot change their values or use the values to drive the model.
Ordinate dimensions are measured from the axis you select first. The type of ordinate dimension (horizontal, vertical,
or angular) is defined by the orientation of the points you select.
Chain removed
You can dimension to edges, vertices, and arcs (centers and minimum and maximum points).
Ordinate dimensions are automatically grouped to maintain alignment. When you drag any member of the group, all
the members move together. To disconnect a dimension from the alignment group, right-click the dimension, and
select Break Alignment.
You can drag the zero dimension to a new position, and all the ordinate dimensions update to match the new zero
position.
If adjacent dimensions are very close together, the leaders are automatically jogged as needed to prevent overlapping
text. Drag handles are displayed at the bends when you select an ordinate dimension with a bent leader. You can
remove the bend, or add a bend to a different ordinate dimension.
You can specify that the leaders not be automatically jogged by clearing Automatically jog ordinates
in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Dimensions.
12-18
To modify ordinate dimensions:
You can modify ordinate dimensions using commands on the shortcut menu. Right-click an ordinate dimension,
select Display Options, then choose from these options:
• Align Ordinate. Aligns all the dimensions along the ordinate with the 0.0 ordinate.
• Add to Ordinate. Adds more dimensions later, along the same ordinate.
• Jog. Bends the leader line of a dimension and allows you to reposition the dimension.
• Re-jog Ordinate. Applies the automatic jogging algorithm to the selected ordinate dimensions.
• Show Parenthesis. Adds parentheses around the selected dimensions.
• Show as Inspection. Shows the selected dimensions as inspection dimensions.
1. With a drawing or sketch active, click Horizontal Ordinate Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations
toolbar, or click Tools, Dimensions, Horizontal Ordinate.
2. Click the first item from which all others will be measured, and click again to place the dimension.
3. Click an item to dimension, then click to place its dimension. Repeat this step until all the remaining items are
dimensioned. The dimension tool remains in ordinate mode until you select another mode or another tool.
1. With a drawing or sketch active, click Vertical Ordinate Dimension on the Dimensions/Relations
toolbar, or click Tools, Dimensions, Vertical Ordinate.
2. Click the first item from which all others will be measured, and click again to place the dimension.
3. Click an item to dimension, then click to place its dimension. Repeat this step until all the remaining items
are dimensioned.
The dimension tool remains in ordinate mode until you select another mode or another tool.
Parallel Dimensions
When the preview shows the desired dimension type, you can lock the type by right-clicking.
To override the snap behavior before selecting the points to dimension, select either Horizontal
Chamfer Dimensions
You can dimension chamfers in drawings. In addition to the usual dimension display properties, chamfer dimensions
have their own options for leader display, text display, and X display. X display is the size of the X in a chamfer
dimension with two numbers, such as 1 X 45° (Length X Angle), 45° X 1 (Angle X Length) or 1 X 1 (Length X
Length).
Tolerance types for chamfer dimensions are limited to None, Bilateral, and Symmetric.
You can set document default for chamfer dimension leader display, text display, and X display in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Dimensions, Leaders.
To insert chamfer dimensions into a drawing:
You must select the chamfered edge first. However, the dimension does not appear until you
subsequently select one of the lead-in edges.
The Dimension PropertyManager appears, and the tool remains active for you to dimension other
chamfers.
12-20
Dimension Leaders/Text
By default, the display of dimension text with respect to the leaders follows the selected dimensioning standard. You
can override the default display.
Chamfer Dimensions
• Leader display:
o Horizontal Text
o Horizontal, Underlined Text
o Angled Text
o Angled, Underlined Text
• Text display:
o Distance X Distance
o Distance X Angle
o Angle X Distance
o Chamfer (available only for angles of 45 degrees)
• X display:
o Uppercase X
o Lowercase x
Leader Display
Use the display specified in the document properties options, or choose from:
Horizontal Text
Angled Text
You can also select these display types in the Dimension PropertyManager.
Text display
Use the display specified in the document properties options, or choose from:
• 1 X 1 (Distance X Distance)
• 1 X 45° (Distance X Angle)
• 45° X 1 (Angle X Distance)
• C1 (Chamfer distance, available only for angles of 45°)
You can also select these display types in the Dimension PropertyManager.
X Display
Use the display specified in the document properties options, or choose from:
• X (Uppercase)
• x (Lowercase)
Aligning Dimensions
To select a group of dimensions:
You can select a group of dimensions in a drawing view either by holding the left mouse button and
dragging a box around the dimensions or by holding Ctrl while selecting them. The selected dimensions
must be of the same type.
You can align dimensions:
• Parallel/Concentric
• Collinear/Radial
See also Ordinate Dimensions.
12-22
To center dimension text between extension lines:
• Right-click a dimension (linear, radial, or angular), and select Display Options, Center Dimension.
• If the text is inside the extension lines (or inside the circle, in the case of a radial or diameter dimension), it
snaps to the center, and is locked in position between the extension lines. If the text is outside the extension
lines, it remains outside.
• To unlock the text position, right-click the dimension, and select Center Dimension again to toggle the option.
• You can also drag the text toward the center of the extension lines to snap it to the center. When you center
dimension text this way, its position is not locked between the extension lines, so you can move it freely.
To offset dimension text from its arrows:
• Right-click a dimension (linear, linear radial, or angular), and select Display Options, Offset Text.
• A leader is attached to the dimension text, and you can drag the text to a new location. When you select an
offset dimension, a handle is displayed where the leader attaches to the arrows so you can move the arrows
away from the model if needed.
• To restore the dimension to its position between the arrows, right-click the dimension again, and select
Offset Text again to toggle the option.
2. Drag a handle to the desired position or to a vertex (watch for the inferencing pointer ).
If you choose a vertex, the default extension line gap is used. In sketches, the value of the dimension
changes to reflect the new attachment point. In drawings, you can move attachment points only for
reference dimensions, and the value is not updated.
To return the extension line to its original position, right-click the dimension and select Display
Options, Default Extension Snap.
12-24
To slant dimension extension lines:
When you insert or select a dimension, handles appear so you can drag the dimension to slant the
extension lines. Drag a handle at the end of the extension line nearest the arrow (the pointer changes to
To return the dimension to its original position, right-click the dimension and select Display Options,
Remove Slant. You can also drag the handle until the dimension snaps back to its original position.
Select the dimension, then click the handle at the bend in the leader (the pointer changes to when it is
over the handle).
If you delete or modify the dimension, a message warns that overriding the dimension value
text <DIM> disables tolerance display. You can continue with the modified value, but you cannot
add tolerances to the dimension.
2. To add a symbol, place the cursor in the text box where you want the symbol to appear. Click the symbol
buttons on the left,
- or -
Click Add Symbol. Select a library from the Symbol Libraries list. Select a symbol name from the list, and
click OK.
The symbol’s name is displayed in the Dimension Text box, but the actual symbol appears in the Preview
box and in the drawing.
3. To replace the dimension value if it was deleted, click Add Value.
4. Click OK to return to the Dimension Properties dialog box.
You can observe the resulting dimension text in the Preview box as you add text and symbols.
Modify Dimension
You can change a dimension in a part, sketch, assembly, or drawing in the Modify dialog box.
To change a dimension:
1. Double-click a dimension.
The Modify dialog box appears.
2. Change the dimension value with the arrows or by typing in the dimension box.
NOTE: You can use the dimension box as a calculator by entering values and arithmetic symbols directly.
3. If the model has multiple configurations, you can apply the new value to This configuration only or to All
configurations, or you can Specify configurations.
4. Use the buttons as follows:
Rebuild the model with the current value. Rebuild is available in drawings if the model is not
being edited in another document.
Reset spin increment value.
Mark dimension to be imported into drawing. Available only in part and assembly documents.
When you Insert Model Items into a drawing, you can insert all dimensions or only those marked.
12-26
Specify Configurations
When you modify a dimension in a model with multiple configurations, you can specify the configurations to modify
from the Modify or Dimension Properties dialog boxes.
To modify a dimension in specified configurations from the Dimension Properties dialog box:
NOTE: This procedure applies only when you modify a sketch dimension.
1. Right-click the dimension to modify and select Properties.
2. In the Dimension Properties dialog box:
a. Change the dimension Value.
b. Click Specify Configs.
A dialog box appears.
3. Click Specify configurations.
4. Select the configurations to modify.
NOTE: Click Reset Selection to revert to the configuration that you modified.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK again to close the Dimension Properties dialog box.
Increment
Linear Measure: Specifies the number of units added or subtracted when you click a spin box arrow to change a
linear dimension value.
Angular Measure: Specifies the number of degrees added or subtracted when you click a spin box arrow to change
an angular dimension value.
Select the Make Default check box to make your new specification the default for dimension increments.
Hide/Show Annotations
Hide/Show Annotations allows you to toggle the visibility of individual annotations (dimensions and cosmetic
threads) in a drawing. Hiding a dimension has a different effect than deleting it:
• If you hide a dimension, it is still present in the view. Therefore, it is not restored if you import dimensions
again.
• If you delete a dimension, it may be restored if you import dimensions again (if it does not already appear in
another view).
1. Click Hide/Show Annotations on the Drawing toolbar, or click View, Hide/Show Annotations.
All dimensions and cosmetic threads are displayed; hidden dimensions and cosmetic threads are in gray.
2. Click the dimensions and cosmetic threads that you want to show or hide.
You can also right-click a dimension and select Hide. To show the dimension again, use the method
described above.
Dimension Tolerance
The Dimension Tolerance dialog box appears in both Dimensions Options and in the Dimension Properties dialog
box. It controls the dimension tolerance values and the display of non-integer dimensions. The options available
depend on the type of tolerance selected and whether you are setting options or applying the specifications to selected
dimensions. A window previews the dimension and the tolerances.
Tolerance type
Select one of the following from the list: None, Basic, Bilateral, Limit, Symmetric, MIN, MAX, or Fit,
Fit with tolerance, or Fit (tolerance only).
Tolerance values
Specify the Maximum Variation and/or Minimum Variation values as appropriate for the type of
tolerance that you selected.
Show parentheses
Select for parentheses around the tolerances for Bilateral, Symmetric, or Fit with tolerance types.
12-28
Fit tolerance display
Choose either Stacked with line display , Stacked without line display , or Linear Display .
Fit Tolerances
Fit tolerances are available for dimensions in the Dimension PropertyManager. Fit tolerances are used typically for
shafts in holes.
Tolerance Types
You can choose from the following types for showing Fit tolerances:
• Fit
• Fit with tolerance
• Fit (tolerance only)
Classification
You can choose from the following classifications. The shaft and hole tolerances available are filtered to
correspond to the classification.
• User Defined
• Clearance
• Transitional
• Press
or Shaft Fit icon and type values in the Maximum Variation and Minimum Variation boxes.
Linear display
With Fit (tolerance only), the Fit standards are not displayed.
Parentheses
The Show parentheses check box is available for Fit with tolerance, but not for Fit or Fit (tolerance
only).
12-30
Annotations
Annotations Overview
Annotations behave like dimensions in each type of SolidWorks document. You can add annotations in a part or
assembly document, then insert them to the drawing views, or you can create annotations in the drawing.
For information on inserting annotations from models into drawings, see Inserting Model Items into Drawings.
For information on setting options for annotations, see Annotations Options Overview.
You can select annotations tools either from the Insert menu or from the Annotations toolbar.
The Align tools are available for aligning annotations. See Aligning Annotations.
You can change the arrowhead style on annotations by right-clicking the arrow to access a menu of styles.
When you select an annotation, the geometry to which the annotation is attached is highlighted. You can select
annotations by clicking any portion of them, including leaders and arrows.
You can create multiple annotations without closing the dialog box or PropertyManager. This functionality applies to
Notes, Surface Finish Symbols, Datum Feature Symbols, and Geometric Tolerancing. See Multiple
Annotations.
You can hide annotations and then show them again. For drawings, see Hide/Show Annotations. For parts and
assemblies, click View, All Annotations to toggle the display.
Some annotations also have PropertyManagers or Properties dialog boxes for applying changes to individual
annotations or a group of annotations. To access a PropertyManager, select the annotation. To access a Properties
dialog box, right-click the annotation (or hold down Ctrl while selecting a group of annotations, then right-click one
annotation) and select Properties.
Annotation Properties
Lets you select the types of annotations that you want to display and set text scale and other annotations options.
Datums Notes
Reference dimensions
- or -
Select Display all types to show all kinds of annotations available for that part or view.
3. Change the values in the Text scale edit box to change the scale of the text used in the annotations.
NOTE: Always display text at the same size must be cleared, to specify a scale for the default size of
annotation text.
4. Select from the following options:
• Always display text at the same size. When checked, all annotations and dimensions are
displayed at the same size regardless of zoom. Note that drawings have this option disabled and
always zoom the text height.
• Display items only in the view orientation in which they are created. When checked, any
annotation is displayed only when the model is viewed in the same orientation as when the
annotation was added. Rotating the part or selecting a different view orientation removes the
annotation from the display.
• Display annotations / Display assembly annotations. When checked, all annotation types that are
selected in the Display filter are displayed. For assemblies, this includes not only the annotations that
belong to the assembly, but also the annotations that are displayed in the individual part documents.
• Use assembly’s setting for all components. When checked, the display of all annotations matches
the setting for the assembly document, regardless of the setting in the individual part documents.
Use this option along with Display assembly annotations to display different combinations of
annotations.
• If you use JIS dimensioning standards, specify the JIS surface finish size (1,2,3 characters) or
Scale.
5. Click OK to accept your changes; click Cancel to exit the dialog without saving the changes.
12-32
Multiple Annotations
The term multiple annotations refers to:
• Creating multiple instances of a type of annotation
• Copying and pasting any combination of annotations and other entities
Combinations of annotations
You can move or copy multiple annotations as follows:
• You can select any combination of annotations, dimensions, drawing views, and sketch entities. You can
select items individually or by box selection.
• You can cut and paste or drag multiple items in drawings, or you can use the Move or Copy tool. Any
individual item can be moved, deleted, and so on at the new location.
• When you paste multiple items, the paste point is the center of all the selected items. All pasted items retain
their relative positions.
• You can cut or copy items from one drawing sheet and paste them on another sheet.
• You can cut or copy items that belong to different views. When pasted, the items are all attached to the active
view.
Aligning Annotations
You can align annotations by inferencing or by using the Align tools.
Inferencing
You can control the snap behavior of detail items that you move. Click Tools, Options, System Options, Drawings.
Under Detail Item Snapping, you have these options:
• Infer when dragging corner. When checked, you drag the selected item by the corner handles to infer to
the corner of another detail item.
• Infer when dragging center. When checked, you drag the center of the item to infer to the center of another
detail item.
• To ignore all inferences, and to prevent the display of inferencing lines, press the Alt key while dragging
detail items.
To align an annotation with a neighboring annotation, drag the item (note, balloon, and so on) until inferencing lines
appear. The item snaps to align with its neighbor.
Align Tools
You can access the Align tools in three ways:
The left edges of all selected annotations line up at left edge of the
Leftmost
leftmost one.
The right edges of all selected annotations line up at right edge of the
Rightmost
rightmost one.
The top edges of all selected annotations line up at top edge of the
Uppermost
uppermost one.
Space evenly across The space is the largest space between selected annotations.
Space evenly down The space is the largest space between selected annotations.
The centers of the annotations line up with the center of the leftmost
Center Horizontal
annotation.
The edges of the annotations line up with each other in the horizontal
Compact Horizontal
direction. The leftmost annotation does not move.
The edges of the annotations line up with each other in the vertical
Compact Vertical
direction. The uppermost annotation does not move.
12-34
Multi-jog Leaders
You can use the Multi-jog Leader in drawings to create leaders with as many bends as required, or to create simple
arrows or block diagrams. For example, a multi-jog leader can point a note to an entity in a drawing that is difficult to
reach with a straight or bent leader. Some items to note about multi-jog leaders are as follows:
• You can attach multi-jog leaders to annotations, sketch entities, or model edges or faces, or you can insert a
leader without attaching it to anything.
• A preview of each segment of the leader appears as you move the pointer.
• You can add jog points and branches to multi-jog leader segments.
• You can start a multi-jog leader anywhere on a drawing sheet. You can end a leader anywhere on a drawing
sheet by double-clicking. When a leader is not attached to an entity, the arrow at the endpoint follows the
Unattached option in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Arrows. You can manually select a different
arrow at the endpoint with a shortcut menu.
• Multi-jog leaders inference to geometry. If you click a multi-jog leader point at an entity (for example, an
edge or a face), the leader attaches to the entity with an smart arrow, and the leader is complete. To avoid
inferencing and to prevent attaching to an entity, press Tab. The Tab key toggles between smart attachment
and no attachment.
• You can attach a multi-jog leader to a dock point of an annotation (Note, Surface Finish Symbol,
Geometric Tolerance Symbol, Weld Symbol, or Balloon).
• Multi-jog leaders attached to annotations or sketch entities move with the annotations or entities.
• When you specify a bent leader for an annotation, the length of the bent leader is set in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Dimensions. For documents in ANSI standard, bent leader is the default.
1. Click Multi-jog Leader on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Multi-jog Leader.
2. Click the drawing sheet, at a dock point on an annotation, or at a point on a sketch entity.
3. Move the pointer and click in the graphics area for each jog point.
4. Complete the leader by clicking an entity such as an edge, or double-click the drawing sheet.
To add a jog point:
Right-click a segment of the leader (the pointer changes to when it is over a segment) and select Add
Jog Point. The jog point is added at the midpoint of the segment. You can drag the jog point.
Right-click the jog point (the pointer changes to when it is over a jog point) and select Delete Jog
Point.
Right-click the endpoint (the pointer changes to when it is over an endpoint) and select an arrowhead
style from the menu.
To add a branch:
Right-click a jog point and select Insert New Branch. Move the pointer and click to add segments to the
branch.
Notes
A note can be free floating or placed with a leader pointing to an item (face, edge, or vertex) in the document. It can
contain simple text, symbols, parametric text, and hyperlinks. The leader can be straight, bent, or multi-jog.
To set Note options for the current document, click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Notes.
To create notes:
7. Click OK .
12-36
To edit note text:
Double-click the note and edit the text in place.
NOTE: During on-screen editing of notes, Pan, Zoom, and Rotate operations are not available.
Hyperlinks in Notes
You can add an embedded hyperlink in a note, or you can add a floating hyperlink in any SolidWorks document. The
hyperlink can be to a document on the Internet, on your local network, or on your own hard drive.
If the link is to a web site, selecting the hyperlink launches a web browser, if one is not already running, and opens the
associated URL (web site). If the link is to a SolidWorks document, clicking the link opens the document. If the link
is to another type of document, such as a Word or Excel file, clicking the hyperlink launches the appropriate
application, and opens the document.
The actual path of a hyperlink embedded in a note does not appear in the note text. A hyperlinked note is displayed in
blue; when the pointer moves over a note that contains a hyperlink, the pointer changes to a hand , and the tooltip
Move the hyperlink pointer over the note until a box appears around the text. Point to a corner of the box. When
the note pointer is displayed, drag the note to move it, or right-click the note to edit its properties.
1. Create a note, and click Insert Hyperlink in the Note PropertyManager. You can also add a hyperlink
while editing a note’s properties.
2. Enter the path (or browse to the document) to which you want to link the note text. For a World Wide Web
location, enter the website name in the format www.website.com. (You do not need to enter HTTP://)
3. Click Use relative path for hyperlink if you want to the specify a directory path relative to the current
location instead of the full pathname.
4. Click OK to accept the path.
Note PropertyManager
Use the Note PropertyManager to insert a Note, or to edit an existing note or balloon note. You can create a free-
floating note or a note with a leader.
• You can place multiple notes without closing the Note PropertyManager. You can change the text and other
properties for each note.
• To edit text after creating a note, double-click the note and edit in place.
• You can also edit note properties in the Note Properties dialog box.
Note Favorite
In addition to the functionality described in Favorites, notes have two types of favorites:
• With text. If you type text in a note and save it as a favorite, the text is saved the with note properties. When
you create a new note, select the favorite, and place the note in the graphics area, the note appears with the
text. If you select text in the document and then select a favorite, the properties of the favorite are applied
without changing the selected text.
• Without text. If you create a note without text and save it as a favorite, only the note properties are saved.
Text Format
Alignment. Choose Left Align , Center Align , or Right Align .
Add Symbol . Place the pointer in the Note text box where you want the symbol to appear, then click Add
Symbol. In the Symbol dialog box, select a library from the Symbol library list, then select a symbol name from the
list, and click OK. The symbol’s name is displayed in the text box, and the actual symbol appears in the note.
Use document's font. When selected, the text is in the font specified in Tools, Options, Document Properties,
Notes.
Font. When Use document's font is cleared, click Font to open the Choose Font dialog box and select a new font
style, size, and effect.
Block Settings
The Block Settings section is available only when editing block definitions.
Text appears in the Tag name box for notes with attributes imported from AutoCAD. You can also type tag names for
notes created in the SolidWorks block definition editor.
You can choose for a tag to be Read only, Invisible, or both.
The Tag name and its attributes are shown in the Attributes editor, which you can access in the Block Instance
PropertyManager.
Border
Style. Specifies the shape of the border (geometric shapes that enclose the text), or None.
Size. Specifies either Tight Fit to the text, or a fixed number of characters.
12-38
Leader
Click Leader , No Leader , or Auto Leader . Auto Leader inserts a leader if you attach the note to an
entity.
Click Straight Leader , Bent Leader , or Underlined Leader . You can add a Multi-jog Leader from
the shortcut menu as you create a note.
Select an arrowhead style from Arrowhead Style. Smart Arrowhead applies the appropriate arrowhead
( to a face, to an edge, for example, depending on the detailing standard).
Select Apply to all to apply a change to all of the arrowheads of the selected note. If the selected note has multiple
leaders, and Auto Leader is not selected, you can use a different arrowhead style for each individual leader.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Note Properties
You can use the Note Properties dialog box to edit the properties of a Note or balloon note.
After you have created a note and closed the Note PropertyManager, you can edit the text by double-clicking the
note and editing in place, or by right-clicking the note and selecting Properties to open the Properties dialog box.
You can also select a note and edit its properties in the Note PropertyManager.
You can specify the following properties in the Note Properties dialog box.
Add Symbol
To add a symbol to the note text, place the pointer in the Note text box where you want the symbol to appear, then click
Add Symbol. Select a library from the Symbol library list, then select a symbol name from the list, and click OK.
The symbol’s name is displayed in the text box, and the actual symbol appears in the note.
Layer
To move the note to a different layer, select the name of the layer in the Layer list.
Angle
Type the text angle in the Angle box, or use the arrows to set the value.
Text justification
Text can be justified Left, Center, or Right. Text justification is not available for Balloons or Stacked Balloons.
Stack Data
For Stacked Balloons only. You can stack the balloons Up, Down, Left, or Right.
Leader
• Choose one of the following:
o Always show leaders.
o Automatic leaders. Adds a leader if you click an entity when you place the note; no leader if you
click on the sheet or view.
o No leaders.
• Style. If the selected note has a leader or if you select Always show leaders, you can choose the leader style
to be Straight, Bent, or Underlined. NOTE: For balloons, the Underlined style is available under Border
Style.
• Display with bent leader. If the note is a balloon note and has a leader, you can choose the leader line to be
bent.
• Arrow style. When the Smart check box is selected, the arrow styles specified in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Detailing, Arrows are used. To choose a different arrow style, clear the check box
and select a style from the list.
• Leader anchor. Choose a default position: Closest, Left, or Right.
• Apply to all arrowheads. If the selected note has multiple leaders, and Smart is not selected, you can use
a different arrowhead style for each individual leader. To apply a change to all of the arrowheads of the
selected note, select this check box.
Border
• Style. Specifies the shape of the border (various geometric shapes that enclose the text), or None.
• Size. Specifies either Tight Fit to the text, or a fixed size to accommodate a specified number of characters.
Font
• If you want to use the font you selected in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing, Notes for note
text, leave the Use document’s font check box selected.
• If you want to use a different font, clear the Use document’s font check box, and click Font to choose from
various font styles and sizes.
Hyperlink
Click Insert Hyperlink if you want to include a Hyperlink in the note.
Tag
For notes in Blocks only. Text appears in the Tag name box for notes with attributes imported from AutoCAD. You
can also enter tag names for notes created in the SolidWorks block definition editor.
You can choose for a tag to be Read Only, Invisible, or both.
The Tag name and its attributes are shown in the Attributes editor, which you can access in the Block Instance
PropertyManager.
12-40
Multiple Leaders
Link to Property
You can link the value of a document property, a custom property, or a configuration specific property to the text of a
note. If the value of the property changes, the note text changes automatically.
Balloons
You can create balloons in a drawing document. The balloons label the parts in the assembly and relate them to item
numbers on the bill of materials (BOM).
However, you do not have to insert a BOM in order to add balloons. If the drawing has no BOM, the item numbers
are the default values that the software would use if you did insert a BOM. If there is no BOM on the active sheet, but
there is a BOM on another sheet, the numbers from that BOM are used.
To set the default BOM balloon properties, click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Balloons. If the default BOM
balloon Style is Circular Split Line, you can choose what type of text to display in both the Upper and Lower portions
of the balloon. For other styles, only Upper is available. Type of text can be Item Number, Quantity, or Custom.
Balloons are automatically suppressed when the components they reference are suppressed.
You can also add balloons in assembly documents. To import balloons from an assembly document into a drawing
view, select Notes in the Insert Models Items dialog box.
You can attach balloons to sketch entities. This is useful when sketches (with no extrusions) are combined to form an
assembly and then taken into a drawing.
12-42
If you change the Item Number in a balloon, the item number in the bill of materials also changes.
To change an Item Number in a table-based BOM, clear Do not change item numbers in the
Bill of Materials PropertyManager. To return to assembly order after changing item numbers, click
To insert balloons:
4. Click OK .
To move the balloon or leader arrow, select and drag the balloon, or drag the leader by the handle.
Balloon PropertyManager
The Balloon PropertyManager opens when you insert Balloons into a drawing or assembly document, or when you
select an existing balloon. You can insert multiple balloons without closing the PropertyManager. Change the settings
in the PropertyManager as necessary and click in the graphics area to place the balloons.
The PropertyManager controls the following properties:
Style
Select a style for the shape and border of the balloon from the list. The style None displays the balloon text with no
border.
Size
Select a size from the list, either a specified number of characters or Tight fit, which adjusts automatically to the text.
Balloon text
Select the type of text for the balloon, or for the upper section of a split balloon, from the list.
• Item Number - The Item Number in the Bill of Materials
• Quantity - The quantity of this item in the assembly
• Custom - The Custom Text box opens for you to type text
Lower text
If you select the Circular Split Line style, this box is available to specify the text for the lower section. You have the
same options as in the Balloon text section.
More Properties
When you select an existing balloon, you can click More Properties to open the Note PropertyManager.
Stacked Balloons
Stacked balloons have only one leader for a set. You can stack the balloons vertically or horizontally. You can insert
stacked balloons in drawings of assemblies and in assembly documents.
To import balloons from an assembly document into a drawing view, select Notes in the Insert Model Items dialog
box.
To set default stacked balloon properties, click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Balloons. Under Stacked
balloons, set Style and Size. Under Balloon text, choose the type of text: Item Number, Quantity, or Custom.
You can insert a stacked balloon without selecting a component, so you can annotate an item that is part of an
assembly but not actually modeled, such as glue or a liquid.
If you change the Item Number in a stacked balloon, the item number in the bill of materials also changes.
To change an Item Number in a table-based BOM, clear Do not change item numbers in the
Bill of Materials PropertyManager. To return to assembly order after changing item numbers, click
12-44
To insert stacked balloons:
1. Click Stacked Balloon on the Annotation toolbar or click Insert, Annotations, Stacked Balloon.
Changes to properties apply only to selected balloons. To change all balloons in the stack, select all of
them.
Balloon Settings
Style. Select a style for the shape and border of the balloons from the list. If you select Circular Split Line, the
Lower Text window opens for the lower half of the balloons.
Size. Select a size from the list, either a specified number of characters or Tight fit, which adjusts automatically to
the text.
Balloon text. Select the type of text for the balloons, or for the upper section of split balloons, from the list.
• Item Number. The Item Number in the Bill of Materials
• Quantity. The quantity of this item in the assembly
• Custom. The Custom Text box opens for you to type text
Lower text. If you select the Circular Split Line style, this box is available to specify the text for the lower section.
You have the same options as in the Balloon text section.
Balloons per line. Set the number of balloons to stack in one line before starting the next line.
Stack Right , Stack Left , Stack Down , Stack Up . Click for the direction of the stack with
respect to its leader.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
More Properties
For existing stacked balloons, click More Properties to open the Note PropertyManager.
AutoBalloons
Insert a set of balloons into one or more drawing views. Balloons are inserted into the appropriate views without
duplicates. You can specify that balloons be inserted when creating new drawing views.
Example of AutoBalloon
Square Circular
Top Bottom
12-46
Left Right
AutoBalloon PropertyManager
Set the properties when inserting autoballoons into a drawing.
Balloon Layout
Select:
Square
Circular
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Ignore multiple instances. Applies a balloon to only one instance for components with multiple instances.
Balloon Settings
Sets the properties to apply to all the balloons.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Center Marks
You can place center marks on circles or arcs in drawings. The center mark lines can be used as references for
dimensioning.
Single center mark Single center mark with Extended lines in Single center mark
extended lines centerline font rotated 45°
Linear pattern with Linear pattern with Linear pattern with Linear pattern with
default size marks specified mark size extended lines connection lines
Circular pattern with Circular pattern with base Circular pattern with Circular pattern with
extended lines center mark circular lines radial lines
12-48
Some items to note about center marks are as follows:
• The axis of the circle or arc must be normal to the drawing sheet.
• Center marks are available as single marks, in linear patterns, or in circular patterns. Linear patterns can include
connecting lines. Circular patterns can include circular lines, radial lines, and base center marks. Display
attributes include mark size, extended lines, and specifying the centerline font for the center mark lines.
• You can set an option so that center marks are inserted automatically in new drawing views.
• You can insert a center mark manually into one circle or arc in a pattern and then propagate center marks to
all entities in the pattern.
• Center marks propagate or insert automatically into patterns if the pattern is created from a feature and not a
face or body.
• You can rotate center marks individually, specifying the rotation in degrees. In the Rotate Drawing View
dialog box, you can choose to have center marks rotate automatically when the view is rotated.
• Center marks in Auxiliary Views are oriented to the viewing direction such that one of the lines of the
center mark is parallel to the view arrow direction.
1. Click Center Mark on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Center Mark.
4. If you selected Linear Pattern or Circular Pattern , click Propagate to apply center marks
to all entities in the pattern.
5. Click OK .
To edit center marks:
1. Select a center mark (the pointer changes to when it is over a center mark).
2. Edit the center mark properties in the Center Mark PropertyManager.
3. Click OK .
The default center mark font is typical for The centerline font used for center mark
ANSI standard. lines is typical for ISO standard.
Options
Single Center Mark. Insert a center mark into a single circle or arc. You can change the Display Attributes
and rotation Angle of the center mark.
Linear Center Mark. Insert center marks into a linear pattern of circles or arcs. You can select Connection
lines and Display Attributes for linear patterns.
Circular Center Mark. Insert center marks into a circular pattern of circles or arcs. You can select Circular
lines, Radial lines, Base center mark, and Display Attributes for circular patterns.
Example
Display Attributes
Clear Use document's defaults to change the following attributes:
• Mark size. Enter a value. Set the default in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing.
• Extended lines. Display extended axis lines, with a gap between the center mark and the extended lines.
• Centerline font. Display the center mark lines in the centerline font.
12-50
Angle
Displays the current angle of a single center mark. If the center mark is rotated because the view is rotated, the
rotation angle appears here. Enter a new value if desired. Not available for linear or circular pattern center marks.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Centerline Annotations
You can insert centerlines into drawing views automatically or manually. The SolidWorks software avoids duplicate
centerlines.
1. In a drawing document, click Centerline on the Annotations toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations,
Centerline.
The Centerline PropertyManager appears.
NOTE: You can select either the tool or an entity first.
3. Click OK .
Hole Callouts
Hole callouts are available in drawings. If you change a hole dimension in the model, the callout updates
automatically.
Hole callouts use Hole Wizard information when a hole has been created by the Hole Wizard. The default formats for
the Hole Wizard types are stored in installation directory\lang\<language>\calloutformat.txt. A second file,
calloutformat_2.txt, is a simplified version. You can edit either file. If you want to use the second file, you must
rename the file to calloutformat.txt, which is the file name the SolidWorks software references. You can set the
location of the default folder for Hole Callout Format File in Tools, Options, System Options, File Locations.
The number of instances is included in the hole callout if multiple holes with the same format are created in the Hole
Wizard.
1. Click Hole Callout on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Hole Callout.
12-52
2. Click the edge of a hole.
A Hole Callout is inserted and the Dimension PropertyManager appears. The callout contains a diameter
symbol and the dimension of the hole diameter. If the depth of the hole is known, the callout also
contains a depth symbol and the dimension of the depth. If the hole is created in the Hole Wizard, the
callout contains additional information (the dimensions of a countersink or number of hole instances, for
example).
3. Click in the graphics area to place the hole callout.
4. Edit the callout in the Dimension PropertyManager.
You can specify precision, select an arrow style, or add text (for example, the number of places where the
hole occurs). However, you should retain the dimensions and symbols for the size and type of hole.
If the hole has been created by the Hole Wizard, you can also click Variables in the Dimension
PropertyManager to access a list of Hole Wizard variables to insert into the hole callout.
If you attach a hole callout to a tapped hole in ANSI inch standard and the current drawing units are
millimeters, the drill diameter and hole depths are reported in mm but the thread description retains the
ANSI inch size designation. You might want to replace the thread description with other variables from the
Hole Callout Variable dialog box.
If you manually change a portion of the callout text, you might break that portion's link with the model.
SolidWorks displays a warning message if you are about to break a link.
These menu items are available only when holes have been created using the Hole Wizard.
If you select a variable from the list that is not appropriate for the hole for which you are editing the hole callout, a
value of zero is displayed in the hole callout.
Cosmetic Threads
A cosmetic thread represents the inner diameter of a thread on a boss or the outer diameter of a thread on a hole and
can include a hole callout.
12-54
To insert cosmetic threads:
1. On a cylindrical feature (a boss, a cut, or a hole), select the circular edge where the thread begins. If the
feature is a conical hole, select the major diameter. If the feature is a conical boss, select the minor diameter.
You can also select the feature after you click the tool.
2. Click Cosmetic Thread on the Annotations toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Cosmetic Thread.
3. Set the properties in the Cosmetic Thread PropertyManager.
4. Click OK .
2. Make the necessary changes in the Cosmetic Thread PropertyManager, and click OK .
To specify the line style and weight for cosmetic threads in the active drawing document:
1. Click Tools, Options. On the Document Properties tab, select Line Font.
2. In the Type of edge section, select Cosmetic Thread.
3. Choose a Style and Thickness from the lists.
The Preview box shows the results.
Thread Settings
Circular Edges . Select a circular edge in the graphics area.
End Condition. The cosmetic thread extends from the edge selected above to the end condition:
• Blind. A specified depth. Specify the depth below.
• Through. Completely through the existing geometry.
• Up to Next. To the next entity that intercepts the thread.
Thread Callout.
Type text to appear in the thread callout.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
For ISO and related drafting standards, you can specify Display symbols per 2002 in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Detailing to display surface finish symbols per 2002 standards.
1. Click Surface Finish on the Annotations toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Surface Finish Symbol.
2. Set the properties in the PropertyManager.
3. Click in the graphics area to place the symbol.
• Multi-jog Leader. Before placing the symbol, right-click and select Use Multi-jog Leader to add
a multi-jog leader. Click in the graphics area to place the arrow end of the leader, then move the
pointer and click to add each jog point. To complete the leader and place the symbol, either double-
click or right-click and select End Leader.
• Multiple instances. Click as many times as necessary to place multiple copies.
• Editing each instance. You can change text and other items in the dialog box for each instance of
the symbol.
• Leaders. If the symbol has a leader, click once to place the leader, then click a second time to place
the symbol.
• Multiple leaders. While dragging the symbol and before placing it, press Ctrl. The note stops
moving and a second leader is added. While still holding Ctrl, click to place the leader. Click as
many times as necessary to place additional leaders. Release Ctrl and click to place the symbol.
4. Click OK .
Drag
You can drag a surface finish symbol with a leader to any location. If you attach a leaderless symbol to an edge, then
drag it off the model edge, an extension line is created.
Edit
To edit a surface finish symbol, select the symbol.
Rotate
You can rotate surface finished symbols attached to sketch entities by 180°. Right-click the symbol and select Rotate
by 180.
Rotate by 180 is not available for model edges or faces, it is not available in ANSI standard, and the
symbol must not have a leader.
Multiple Leaders
You can add more leaders to an existing symbol by holding down Ctrl and dragging a leader attachment point.
12-56
Surface Finish PropertyManager
Edit properties of surface finish symbols.
Symbol
Select a symbol style. The symbols available vary depending on the drafting standard specified. For ISO and related
standards, the symbols available also vary depending on whether you select display of surface finish symbols using
2002 standards. Specify both options in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing.
Basic
Machining Required
Machining Prohibited
Local
All Around
JIS Basic
JIS Grind
JIS No Machining
If you select JIS Basic or JIS Grind, several surface textures are available.
Symbol Layout
For ANSI symbols and symbols using ISO and related standards prior to 2002, specify:
• Maximum Roughness
• Minimum Roughness
• Material Removal Allowance
• Production Method/Treatment
• Sampling Length
• Other Roughness Values
• Roughness Spacing
• Lay Direction
For symbols using ISO and related standards from 2002, specify:
• Manufacturing Method
• Texture Requirement 1
• Texture Requirement 2
• Texture Requirement 3
• Machining Allowance
• Surface Lay and Orientation
For JIS symbols, specify:
• Roughness/Ra
• Roughness Rz/Rmax
Format
Use document font. To specify a different font for the symbol and text, clear and click Font.
Select:
Upright
Rotated/Perpendicular
Leader
Select a leader style:
Leader
No Leader
Auto Leader
Straight Leader
Bent Leader
Select an Arrow Style.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
1. Click Datum Feature Symbol on the Annotations toolbar, or Insert, Annotations, Datum Feature
Symbol.
2. Edit the options in the Datum Feature PropertyManager.
3. Click in the graphics area to place the attachment and then the symbol.
4. Continue inserting as many symbols as needed.
5. Click OK .
If you drag a datum feature symbol off the model edge, an extension line is added.
To edit a datum feature symbol, select the symbol.
NOTE: If you use ANSI dimensioning standards, you can display datum feature symbols in the 1982 style. To select
this option for the active document, click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing. In the Dimensioning
standard section, select ANSI from the list, then select the Display datums per 1982 check box.
12-58
Datum Feature PropertyManager
The PropertyManager controls properties of datum feature symbols.
Settings
Label . The text appears in the datum feature box.
Use document style. The document style follows the standard (ANSI, ISO, and so on) specified in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Detailing. Clear to select a different style of box and attachment. Each style of box has a
different set of attachment styles.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Datum Targets
You can attach a datum target and symbol to a model face or edge in any document.
1. Click Datum Target on the Annotations toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Datum Target.
2. Set the properties in the PropertyManager.
3. Click in the graphics area to place the target and then the symbol. You can insert multiple symbols.
4. Click OK .
To move the datum target symbol (the balloon, the crosshatch area, or the point), select the symbol and drag the item.
To edit the datum target symbol, select the symbol.
In a drawing, you can dimension to the center of a datum target area. Activate the view, then click either the symbol
or the area to add the dimension.
Settings
Target symbol. Select the target symbol style:
Target symbol
Target symbol with area size outside
No target symbol
Target area. Select the target area display:
X target area
Circular target area
Rectangular target area
Do not display target area
Target area size . Specify Width and Height (for rectangles) or Diameter (for X's and circles).
Datum references . Specify up to three references.
Leader
Select a leader style:
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Geometric Tolerancing
The SolidWorks software supports the ANSI Y14.5 Geometric and True Position Tolerancing guidelines.
• You can place geometric tolerancing symbols, with or without leaders, anywhere in a drawing, part,
assembly, or sketch, and you can attach a symbol anywhere on a dimension line.
• A geometric tolerance symbol can have any number of frames.
• The pointer changes to when it is near the handle of an arrow of a geometric tolerancing symbol on a
dimension.
• You can add multiple symbols without closing the dialog box.
• You can display multiple leaders. The leaders can be straight, bent, or perpendicular.
• When you drag the leader of a geometric tolerance symbol off a model edge, an automatic witness line is
created.
12-60
Example of Geometric Tolerance Symbols
Multiple frames
Perpendicular leaders
2. Enter a tolerance value in the Tolerance 1 box, and click to include a Diameter symbol.
3. Click MC to choose the material condition symbol for Tolerance 1, and click OK.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for Tolerance 2.
5. Enter datum names and material condition symbols for the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary datums.
6. For additional frames, increment the number in Frames and repeat steps 1 through 5 for each frame.
Composite frame. To create a composite frame, select Composite Frame and enter values and material condition
symbols.
Between two points. Select if the tolerance value applies to a measurement between two points or entities, and type
the labels of the points in the boxes.
GTol Favorite
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Additional Properties
To specify styles for leaders, arrows, anchors, and fonts, click Options.
Attached leader
• Choose one of the following:
o Always show leaders.
o Automatic leaders. Adds a leader if you click an entity; no leader if you click on the sheet or view.
o No leaders.
• Display with bent leader. With this selected, you can also select an All Around leader.
• Perpendicular leaders.
• All Around. Indicates that the profile tolerance extends all the way around the feature to which the tolerance
applies.
12-62
Arrow
Select Smart to use the default arrow style (specified in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing)
for the type of item the symbol is attached to. To select a different arrow style, clear this check box and
select an arrow style from the Arrow list.
Anchor
Choose the location of the leader anchor from Closest, Left, or Right sides.
Font
Select Use document’s font to use the default font, or clear the check box and click the Font button to
choose from various font styles and sizes.
Click OK to return to the Geometric Tolerance Properties dialog box.
1. Click Dowel Pin Symbol , or click Insert, Annotations, Dowel Pin Symbol, and select a circular
edge.
- or -
Select one or more circular edges and click Dowel Pin Symbol or click Insert, Annotations, Dowel
Pin Symbol.
Dowel pin symbols appear in the selected holes, and the Dowel Pin Symbol PropertyManager appears. You
can continue to select circular edges to insert additional dowel pin symbols.
2. Under Display Attributes, select Flip symbol if desired. The dowel pin symbols currently selected rotate
90°.
NOTE: To flip a dowel pin symbol after it has been inserted, right-click the symbol (the pointer changes to
3. Click OK .
Weld Symbols
When you create a weld bead in an assembly, a weld symbol is created automatically on the weld bead component,
representing the parameters you specify. You can also construct weld symbols independently in a part, assembly, or
drawing document. When creating or editing a weld symbol, you can:
• Add secondary weld fillet information to the weld symbol for certain types of weld (Square or Bevel, for
example).
• Choose a Leader anchor of None and add a Multi-jog Leader later.
• Choose the text font for each weld symbol.
2. Click Weld Symbol on the Annotations toolbar, or click Insert, Annotations, Weld Symbol.
The Weld Symbol Properties dialog box appears for ISO, BIS, DIN, JIS, and GB standards. Different
dialog boxes appear for ANSI and GOST standards.
3. Type in values and select symbols and options. A preview is displayed.
Click OK to close the dialog box and place the symbol.
Many of the properties are available both above and below the weld symbol line and are described in order from
the line. A preview of the symbol is displayed in the graphics area.
Peripheral. Adds to indicate that the weld is applied all around the contour.
Field/Site. Adds to indicate that the weld is applied in the field or on-site.
Weld symbol. Click and select a symbol from a symbol library. Other options become available, depending on the
symbol chosen. Type dimensions to the left and right of the Weld symbol button.
Specification process. Type text in the large box at the right, in any number of lines, to appear in the tail of the
symbol.
Contour. Applies a contour shape above the symbol.
2nd fillet. The 2nd fillet is available for only certain weld symbols (Square or Bevel, for example). Type dimensions
in the fields to the left and right of the check box.
Symmetric. Properties on one side of the symbol line also appear on the other side.
12-64
Stagger. Fillet weld symbols above and below the line are staggered.
Identification line on top. Moves the dashed identification line above the symbol line.
Font. To specify a font for text and size of symbols, clear Use document's font and click Font.
Leader anchor. Anchor the leader to the specified location on the weld symbol.
Layer. In a drawing with named layers, choose a layer from the list.
Weld Symbol Favorite.
Many of the properties are available both above and below the weld symbol line and are described in order from
the line. A preview of the symbol is displayed in the graphics area.
Around. Adds to indicate that the weld is applied all around the contour.
Field/Site. Adds to indicate that the weld is applied in the field or on-site.
Weld Symbol. Click and select a symbol from a symbol library. Other options become available, depending on the
symbol chosen. Type dimensions to the left and right of the symbol.
Specification process. Type text in the box, in any number of lines, to appear in the tail of the symbol.
Contour. Select None, Flat, Convex, or Concave.
Finishing method. Select None, Chipping, Grinding, Hammering, Machining, Rolling, or Unspecified.
Stagger weld. Fillet weld symbols above and below the line are staggered.
2nd fillet. Type dimensions.
Root opening. Type a dimension. Arrow. Offset text.
Groove angle. Type an angle in degrees. Inside. Text placed inside the weld symbol.
Joint with spacer. Choose None or one of the types (Double V Groove Spacer and so on).
Font. To specify a font for text and size of symbols, clear Use document's font and click Font.
Leader anchor. Anchor the leader to the specified location on the weld symbol.
Layer. In a drawing with named layers, select a layer from the list.
Weld Symbol Favorite.
Around. Adds to indicate that the weld is applied all around the contour.
Other Side. Move the arrow from the upper to the lower side of the leader.
Leader anchor. Anchor the leader to the specified location on the weld symbol.
Layer. In a drawing with named layers, choose a layer from the list.
Smooth Diameter
Surface Finish Symbol. To add surface finish information to the symbol, under SF Symbol, select Top or Bottom to
place the symbol above or below the horizontal leader. Enter the information in the Surface Finish Symbol dialog
box, and click OK. To modify the surface finish information, click Details for the side you want to modify.
Font. To specify a font for text and size of symbols, clear Use document's font and click Font.
Weld Symbol Favorite.
Area Hatch/Fill
You can apply a crosshatch pattern or solid fill to a model face or to a closed sketch profile. Area hatch can be applied
only in drawings. Some characteristics of area hatch include the following:
• If you choose the area hatch to be solid fill, the default color of the fill is black. You can change the color
• When the pointer is over an area hatch or fill, the pointer changes to .
To set options for Area Hatch/Fill, click Tools, Options, System Options, Area Hatch/Fill.
12-66
Example of Area Hatch/Fill and Crosshatch
Select a face or closed sketch profile and click Area Hatch/Fill on the Drawings toolbar, or click
Insert, Area Hatch/Fill.
graphics area and clicking Line Color on the Line format toolbar.
• To remove crosshatch, select None.
Pattern. Select a material from the list.
Layer. Select an existing layer from the list.
Scale. Set a value for the scale of the pattern.
Angle. Set a value for the angle of the pattern.
Material crosshatch. Uses the pattern, scale, and angle for the material specified in the part document.
Apply To. If the crosshatch is on a section face, select one of the following levels:
• View. All instances in the currently active section view (lowest priority, overrides only the document
default).
• Component. All section faces on the currently selected component in an assembly.
• Region. The currently selected surface only (highest priority, overrides all other specifications).
Always show dialog on creation. Clear to prevent the dialog box from appearing whenever you insert area hatch or
solid fill.
12-68
Blocks
You can make, save, edit, and insert blocks for drawing items that you use often, such as standard notes, title blocks,
label positions, and so on. Blocks can include text, any type of sketch entity (except points), balloons (except stacked
balloons), imported entities and text, and area hatch. You can attach blocks to geometry or to drawing views, and you
can insert them into sheet formats. Blocks can be used only in drawing documents.
Example of Blocks
Title block
Pointers
When the pointer is over block entities, the pointer changes to . When the pointer is over blank spaces in a
Base Points
Blocks have a base point. When you insert or paste a block, the block instance is located so that its base point is at the
insertion or paste point. Block instances are scaled and rotated about their base points.
When you select a block instance, the base point is displayed in blue . You can change the position of a block base
point in the block definition editor.
Leaders
Block leaders have an anchor point (the end anchored to the block) and an attachment point (the end attached to a
model or the drawing sheet). You can add a leader to a block instance, and you can drag the leader anchor point
anywhere within the block.
Note leaders that are attached to a model are frozen when included in a block. Leaders on notes within
blocks do not adjust to attach to any model or sketch entity.
Layers
You can move sketch entities and annotations onto layers before making blocks. You can also move them onto layers
in the block editor.
If you change properties of layers while in the block editor, the changes apply to all entities in the layers, not just the
entities in the block.
Selecting a layer in the Insert Block PropertyManager or Block Instance PropertyManager applies to the block
leader and arrow.
3. Close any sketches or PropertyManagers and click OK to close the block definition editor and add the
block to the FeatureManager design tree.
The block name appears under the Blocks folder in the FeatureManager design tree. You can edit the block
name in the FeatureManager design tree. The block name appears in the list of available blocks when you
insert a block instance (see below). You can also save the block to file (see below).
12-70
To create a new block from entities in a drawing:
1. In a drawing, sketch the entities that make up the block. To add text, use the Note tool.
2. Box-select all the entities.
3. Click Tools, Block, Make.
If you select entities for the block that belong to one view, the block belongs to the view. If you select
entities for the block that belong to more than one view, the block then belongs to the sheet.
If you link a note to a system or custom property, the block stores the system variable ($PRPMODEL, for
example) that identifies the entity to which the note is attached and resolves the link when block instances
are attached to the model, view, sheet, or document. It also stores and later resolves the system or custom
variable name ("SW-Created Date", for example).
The block name appears under the Blocks folder in the FeatureManager design tree. You can edit the block
name in the FeatureManager design tree. The block name appears in the list of available blocks when you
insert a block instance (see below). You can also save the block to file (see below).
4. Click OK .
To save a block:
Right-click the block and select Save to File.
- or -
Select the block and click Tools, Block, Save to File.
The Save As dialog box appears. The default extension for block files is .sldblk. The SolidWorks software
still supports .sldsym for inserting blocks and editing blocks, but all new blocks saved to external files use
the .sldblk extension.
NOTE: Properties of the block (scale and rotation angle) are saved in the file.
You can insert files with extensions .sldblk, .sldsym, .dwg, and .dxf. If desired, select Create external
reference to file to link the definition in the document to the file definition.
3. Click in the graphics area as many times as necessary to place as many copies of the block as you want. The
block is positioned so that the block base point is at the point in the graphics area where you click.
The block base point snaps to grid points if Snap to points is enabled in Tools, Options, Document
Properties, Grid/Snap, and to sketch entities and annotations.
If you press Esc while inserting blocks, all instances created in the current operation are lost.
4. Click OK .
You can edit block notes either for all instances or for each instance individually. Edit the text in the Block
Definition PropertyManager to apply the change to all instances. To enable editing of each instance, give the note a
tag name in the definition and then edit the note attribute in the Block Instance PropertyManager. You cannot double-
click a block note to edit it on screen.
4. Click OK .
To explode a block:
1. Right-click the block in the graphics area and select Explode.
- or -
Select the block and click Tools, Block, Explode.
2. To remake the block, select the entities to include and click Tools, Block, Make.
The name of the new block appears in the FeatureManager design tree with the next sequence number.
If you explode a block that is on a layer, the entities retain their old colors when you move them to a
new layer. To reset the colors so that the entities inherit the color of the new layer, first select the entities,
click Line Color on the Line Format toolbar, select Default, and click OK.
The base point of the block is identified in the graphics area of the block definition editor by . The
pointer changes to .
2. Drag the base point to any position in the editor's graphics area.
- or -
Under Base Point in the Block Definition PropertyManager, enter relative values in the X Coordinate
and Y Coordinate boxes.
3. Click OK .
12-72
To change the position of the leader attachment point and leader anchor point:
1. Select a block instance.
2. In the Block Instance PropertyManager, under Arrow/Leader, select Display leader.
NOTE: The block must have a leader in order for you to change the position of the leader attachment point
and anchor point. The leader attachment point appears by default at the lower left corner of the block, on top
of the anchor point.
3. In the graphics area, select the leader attachment point (the pointer changes to when it is over the
point) and drag it anywhere on the drawing sheet.
The leader anchor point is now visible.
4. Select the leader anchor point (the pointer changes to when it is over the point) and drag the point to
another position within the block.
To insert a block:
Source
Select the block to insert by one of the following methods:
• Name. Select a block name from the list of blocks in the document.
• Browse. Browse to a block file (.sldblk, .sldsym, .dwg, .dxf).
Location
As you move the pointer, the coordinates of the block base point appear in the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate
boxes. Click in the graphics area to place the block. You can enter values for X Coordinate and Y Coordinate
Blocks snap to grid if snap is enabled in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Grid/Snap, and to
sketch entities and annotations. If the block has a leader, place the leader first, then the block.
Block Display
Block Scale . Enter a positive non-zero number. If you enter an invalid number (zero or negative), the scale is
reset to the previous valid number.
Block Rotation . Enter a value in degrees. A positive value rotates the block counterclockwise.
Leader
Display leader. Select to attach a leader to the block.
Bent leader. Select to add a horizontal segment at the block end of the leader.
Arrowhead Style. Select a style from the list.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer that applies to the block leader and arrow.
Block Display
Block Scale . Enter a positive non-zero number. If you enter an invalid number (zero or negative), the scale is
reset to the previous valid number.
Block Rotation . Enter a value in degrees. A positive value rotates the block counterclockwise.
Text Display
Select one of the following for display of note text:
• Normal. Notes are displayed based on their visibility settings.
• All. All text is displayed, regardless of visibility settings.
• None. No text is displayed.
Attributes. Click to edit values of note attributes.
Leader
Display leader. Select to attach a leader to the block.
Bent leader. Select to add a horizontal segment at the block end of the leader.
Arrowhead Style. Select a style from the list.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer that applies to the block leader and arrow.
Move sketch entities and annotations onto layers in the block definition, or before making the block.
Attributes
You can edit the values of Block attributes in this editor. Changes apply to the current instance of the block.
Attributes can be created automatically when you import blocks from AutoCAD files, or manually when you assign a
Tag name (and specify Invisible or Read Only, or both) when you insert a note into a block definition.
NOTE: Attributes in SolidWorks drawings can have multi-line values (note text). However, if you plan to export
blocks to AutoCAD, you should use only single-line values.
To access the editor, select a block instance in a drawing document and click Attributes in the Block Instance
PropertyManager.
The following columns appear in the editor:
• Name. The name of the attribute (Tag name in the Note PropertyManager).
• Value. The value, or text, of the attribute. You can edit the value if the attribute is not Read Only.
• Invisible. This column contains an X if the attribute is invisible (information only).
• Read Only. This column contains an X if the attribute is read only (information only).
NOTE: Values that are linked to file properties or custom properties display the link path and variable name
($PRP:"SW-File Name", for example) during editing but show the values of the properties (WIDGET, for
example) when block instances are inserted into drawings.
12-74
Block Definition PropertyManager
Edit the block definition and specify the properties described below.
The block is in exploded form in the definition editor. When you click OK to exit from the editor, the block
definition is automatically remade.
You can move sketch entities and annotations onto layers. Changes you make to layer properties while in the
block editor apply to all entities in the layer, not just the block entities.
Block Name
Type to edit the block name. The name appears in the FeatureManager design tree.
Base Point
Drag the base point (designated by , initially at the lower left corner of the block) to a new relative position or
enter values for its relative X Coordinate and Y Coordinate . The position of the base point when the editor
External Reference
If you selected the Create external reference to file check box in the Open dialog box when you inserted the block
into the drawing document from a file, Link to file is selected automatically and the file name appears in the box.
If you select Link to file after you open the block definition editor, the local definition updates to reflect any changes
in the selected file definition. When you exit from the definition editor, the local definition is still linked to the
specified file and reflects any subsequent changes to the file definition.
When Link to file is selected, you cannot edit the block definition. To edit the file definition, select the file name in
the FeatureManager design tree and click Tools, Block, Edit File.
Tables
Annotation Tables
Tables are available on the Annotation toolbar for:
• Bills of Materials
• Hole Tables
• Revision Tables
• Weldment Cut Lists
All tables have the following functionality:
• Drag with the pointer
• Snap to an anchor point that you can set
• Snap to lines, points, and vertices in the sheet format
• Use standard or custom templates
• Add columns and rows and adjust their dimensions
• Select and delete tables, columns, and rows
• Split or merge tables
• Merge or split cells
• Sort the contents of columns
• Zoom to selection
• Control color in layers
Selecting the title bar selects the whole table for such operations as dragging, formatting, and adjusting column
width or row height.
To drag a table:
1. In the table PropertyManager, clear Attach to anchor.
2. Hold Alt and drag the table from anywhere inside the table
- or -
Drag the table title bar.
12-76
To select or delete a table, column, or row:
Right-click in the table and choose Select or Delete, then Table, Column, or Row.
To split a table:
Right-click in the table and select Split:
• Horizontally Above
• Horizontally Below
• Vertically Left
• Vertically Right
To merge a table that has been split, right-click in a section of the table and select Merge.
Editing Tables
• If you edit items in a table, automatic controls do not change them. To edit text, double-click the text and edit
on screen. The Note PropertyManager appears, allowing you to format the text in addition to editing it.
• If the cell value is parametrically linked to a part or assembly document, a message warns you that editing
the value will sever the link. To restore the link in the future, delete the user-defined text from the cell.
PropertyManagers
Each table has PropertyManagers for:
• Table Properties
• Table Format
• Column Properties
• Cell Properties
Buttons for the other PropertyManagers appear at the bottom of each PropertyManager, as appropriate.
Table Anchors
Each type of annotation table has its own anchor point in a drawing sheet format.
Table Templates
Standard templates for Bills of Materials, Hole Tables, Revision Tables, and Weldment Cut Lists are available in
<install_dir>\lang\<language>. You can specify a different folder, and you can save and use custom templates.
Custom templates contain headings and formatting, but not table contents.
The table PropertyManagers remember the last used template.
12-78
Custom Table Templates
You can customize standard table templates to save for future use.
To add a column:
1. Right-click in a table column and select Insert, Column Right or Column Left.
2. In the Column PropertyManager, select from the list of Column Properties.
To select a custom property, the property must be available in the model documents. For properties in
the various types of tables, see the Column PropertyManager topic for Bill of Materials, hole tables,
revision tables, or weldment cut lists.
To add a row:
Right-click in a table row and select Insert, Row Above or Row Below.
See Annotation Tables for procedures to adjust column width or row height, split or merge a table or cells, sort
columns, and so on.
Header
Title. Edit the table header title if Display title is selected.
Display title. Displays the text in Title in a header row across the width of the table.
Position. The header can be at the Top or the Bottom of the table.
Border
Click Box Border , Grid Border , or All Borders , then select a corresponding thickness.
Text Format
Table text format for the document is set in Tools, Options, Document Properties, Annotations
Font. You specify formatting for individual tables in this PropertyManager and override formatting for
individual cells in the Table Cell PropertyManager.
• Click Left Justify , Center Justify , or Right Justify to justify text horizontally.
• Click Top Justify , Middle Justify , or Bottom Justify to justify text vertically.
• Use document's font. When selected, the text is in the font specified for Tables in Tools, Options,
Document Properties, Annotations Font.
• Font. When Use document's font is cleared, click Font to open the Choose Font dialog box and select a
new font style, size, and effect to apply to the table. You can specify a different font for cells.
Layer
In drawings with named layers, select a layer.
Table Properties
Click to access the table properties.
Cell Properties
Click to access the Table Cell PropertyManager.
Column Properties
Click to access the table column properties.
BOM Contents
In a Bill of Materials, click to access the Bill of Materials Contents dialog box.
Table text format is set in the Table Format PropertyManager. You override formatting for individual cells in
this PropertyManager.
Text Format
• Click Left Justify , Center Justify , or Right Justify to justify text horizontally.
• Click Top Justify , Middle Justify , or Bottom Justify to justify text vertically.
12-80
Column Properties
Click to access the table column properties.
Table Properties
Click to access the table properties.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
Bill of Materials
You can insert Bills of Materials into assembly drawings.
A drawing can contain a table-based Bill of Materials or an Excel-based Bill of Materials, but not both.
You can specify a starting Item Number, but the increment is always a single integer (1, 2, 3 ..., or 100, 101, 102 ...,
for example).
You can change the text in any cell by double-clicking and editing on screen, but if you edit data generated by
SolidWorks (Item Number, Quantity, and so on), you break the link between the data and the Bill of Materials.
1. Click Bill of Materials on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Tables, Bill of Materials.
2. Select a drawing view to specify the model.
12-82
Bill of Materials PropertyManager
Specify properties for Bills of Materials.
1. Click Bill of Materials on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Tables, Bill of Materials.
Table Template
Click Browse for template to choose a standard or custom template. This option is available only during table
insertion.
Table Anchor
Set the Anchored corner to:
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Attach to anchor. Attaches the specified corner to the table anchor.
BOM Type
Select:
• Top level only. List parts and sub-assemblies, but not sub-assembly components.
• Parts only. Does not list sub-assemblies. Lists sub-assembly components as individual items.
• Indented assemblies. Lists sub-assemblies. Indents sub-assembly components below their sub-assemblies
without item numbers.
Configurations
Lists quantities in the Bill of Materials for all selected configurations. Select configurations manually, or click Select
To see the configuration name in the PART NUMBER column, go to the part document. On the
Configuration tab, right-click each configuration, and select Properties. Under Part number displayed
when used in a bill of materials, select Configuration Name.
Item Numbers
Start at. Type a value for the beginning of the item number sequence. The sequence increases by single digits.
Click Follow assembly order for the item numbers to follow the order in which the assembly appears in the
FeatureManager design tree. For components with multiple instances, the first instance appears in the order of the
FeatureManager design tree, and subsequent instances increment the quantity.
Click Do not change item numbers to keep the item numbers with their components when reordering rows
(manually in BOM Contents, by sorting, or when you click Follow assembly order, for example).
BOM Contents
Click to access the Bill of Materials Contents dialog box.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
Cell Properties
Click to access the Table Cell PropertyManager.
Column Properties
Click to access the Bill of Materials Column PropertyManager.
Toggle row visibility . Click the icon to hide or show the row.
Row up or Row down . Select a row and click to move the row up or down.
To keep the item number with its component when reordering rows, click Do not change item
numbers in the Bill of Materials PropertyManager.
Group and Ungroup . Select two or more rows to group the components under one item number. To
dissolve the group, select a member and click Ungroup.
12-84
Bill of Materials Column PropertyManager
Specify the columns to be included in a Bill of Materials and their position in the table.
To add a new column to the table, right-click in a table column and select Insert, Column Right or Column
Left. You cannot add columns from within the PropertyManager.
Column Properties
For the selected column, choose one of the following column types, listed with its header title. You can edit the
header in the Title box below.
• Item Number. ITEM NO.
• Part Number. PART NUMBER
• Quantity. QUANTITY
• User Defined. Select a document property under Custom Property.
Custom Property. Document's custom properties, available when you specify User Defined under Column
Properties.
Use Title Summary. In Part Number, use the data in the Title field of File, Properties, Summary Information in
part documents.
Title. Edit the text of the column header.
Column position. Click Move Column Left or Move Column Right to move the selected column.
Cell Properties
Click to access the Table Cell PropertyManager.
Table Properties
Click to access the Bill of Materials PropertyManager.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
BOM Contents
Click to access the Bill of Materials Contents dialog box.
Sort by
Select the name of a column and either Ascending or Descending for the primary sort.
Then by
Select the name of a column and either Ascending or Descending for a secondary sort.
Then by
Select the name of a column and either Ascending or Descending for a tertiary sort.
Group items
Assemblies, Parts, Other. Select one or more category to sort rows within the category. If you select more than one
category, order them by selecting one and clicking Up or Down. Other is user-defined data (oil or grease, for
example).
Item numbers
Do not change item numbers. Select to keep the item numbers with the configuration row.
Hole Tables
Hole tables in drawing documents measure the positions of selected holes from a specified origin datum. The
software labels each hole with a tag that corresponds to a row in the table.
Non-circular holes such as rectangles and slots are recognized as holes. The table lists the X and Y coordinates
of the entities, but you must enter the size.
In addition to the functionality for all tables, you can specify in options and in the Hole Table PropertyManager:
• Tags to be alphabetic or numeric
• Tag leaders to be visible
• Cells with the same tags to be combined
• Cells for holes of the same size to be combined
• Precision of hole locations
12-86
To set options for hole tables in the active document:
1. Click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Tables.
2. Set the options under Hole Table, then click OK.
1. Click Hole Table on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Tables, Hole Table.
2. In the graphics area, select a vertex to specify the origin datum.
You can select an X axis and Y axis to define a vertex for the datum. You can also drag the origin
datum into position after you place the table.
3. Select hole edges, or select a model face to include all the holes on the face.
To see a preview leader without adding a visible leader, hold the pointer over the tag for a few
seconds. The leader and arrow appear in red.
• Under Layer, in drawings with named layers, select a layer.
3. Click OK .
Table Anchor
Set the Anchored corner to:
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Attach to anchor. Attaches the specified corner to the table anchor.
Alpha/Numeric Control
Specify the tags identifying the holes to be letters or numbers.
Scheme
Combine same tags. Combines rows with holes in the same pattern, which also combines holes with the same sizes.
The columns of location values are removed.
Combine same sizes. Available only if Combine same tags is cleared. Merges cells for holes of the same size. The
columns of location values remain.
12-88
Hole Location Precision
Specify the number of significant digits for the hole location values.
Visibility
Select to hide any or all of the following:
• Hide origin indicator
• Hide hole centers
• Hide hole tags
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
4. Click OK .
You can drag the origin datum to a new location in the graphics area. The location values in the table update.
1. Click Hole Table on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Tables, Hole Table.
Table Template
Click Browse for template to choose a standard or custom template. This option is available only during table
insertion.
Table Anchor
Set the Anchored corner to:
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Attach to anchor. Attaches the specified corner to the table anchor.
Datum
During insertion, Origin is ready for you to select a vertex. To define the origin with an X axis and Y axis, click X
Axis Direction Reference and select a horizontal model edge in the graphics area, then click Y Axis Direction
Reference and select a vertical model edge.
After the table has been created, you can drag the datum origin to another position. The location values in the table
update.
To edit the origin datum, select it in the graphics area, or right-click in the FeatureManager design tree and select Edit
datum definition.
Holes
Select individual hole edges, or select a model face to include all the holes in the face.
After the table has been created, right-click the hole table in the FeatureManager design tree and select Add Holes.
To add a new column to the table, right-click in a table column and select Insert, Column Right or Column
Left. You cannot add columns from within the PropertyManager.
Column Properties
For the selected column, choose one of the column types, listed with its header title. You can edit the header in the
Title box below.
• X. XLOC
• Y. YLOC
• Hole. TAG
• Quantity. QUANTITY
• Size. SIZE
• Custom. Type a header under Title.
Title. Edit the text for the column header.
Column position. Click Move Column Left or Move Column Right to move the selected column.
Cell Properties
Click to access the Table Cell PropertyManager.
Table Properties
Click to access the Hole Table PropertyManager.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
12-90
Revision Tables
Insert a revision table into a drawing to track document revisions, including revision symbols. In addition to the
functionality for all tables, you can select:
• Revision symbol shapes
• Alphabetic or numeric sequence
The latest revision also appears under REV in the lower-right corner of a sheet format.
1. Click Revision Table on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Tables, Revision Table.
Revision Symbols
You can add revision symbols (the revision letter or number enclosed in a circle, triangle, square or hexagon) to the
drawing.
• If you select Enable symbol when adding new revision under Options in the Revision Table
PropertyManager, you can click in the graphics area to place symbols when you add a revision to the table.
• If you clear Enable symbol when adding new revision or to add a symbol later, right-click in a row of the
revision table and select Revisions, Add Symbol, then click in the graphics area to place symbols.
• If you edit revision text, the symbols update.
2. Click Note on the Annotation toolbar and click in the graphics area to place the note.
Table Template
Click Browse for template to choose a standard or custom template. This option is available only during table
insertion.
Table Anchor
Set the Anchored corner to:
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Attach to anchor. Attaches the specified corner to the table anchor.
Circle
Triangle
Square
Hexagon
12-92
Options
Enable symbol when adding new revision. Allows you to click in the graphics area to place revision symbols when
you add a revision to the table.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
To add a new column to the table, right-click in a table column and select Insert, Column Right or Column
Left. You cannot add columns from within the PropertyManager.
Column Properties
For the selected column, choose one of the column types, listed with its header title. You can edit the header in the
Title box below.
• Zone. ZONE
• Revision. REV.
• Description. DESCRIPTION
• Date. DATE
• Approved. APPROVED
• Custom Properties. Select a document property under Properties.
Properties. Document's custom properties, available when you specify Custom Properties under Column
Properties.
Title. Edit the text for the column header.
Column position. Click Move Column Left or Move Column Right to move the selected column.
Cell Properties
Click to access the Table Cell PropertyManager.
Table Properties
Click to access the Revision Table PropertyManager.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
Applies to Excel-based Bills of Materials. A drawing can contain an Excel-based Bill of Materials or a table-
based Bill of Materials, but not both.
You can insert a bill of materials (BOM) into the drawing of an assembly. If you add or delete components in the
assembly, the bill of materials automatically updates to reflect the changes if you select the Automatic update of
BOM option under Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing. Such changes include adding, deleting, or
replacing components, changing component names or custom properties, and so on.
• If you do not select Automatic update of BOM, you must delete and re-insert the BOM to update it
NOTE: To insert a bill of materials in a drawing, you must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on
your computer.
• Rows in bills of materials are combined when all fields (except for Item Number) are the same. However,
bills of materials in drawings created in releases prior to SolidWorks 2000 are not automatically updated to
combine rows.
• You can insert balloons or stacked balloons that label the parts in an assembly and relate them to item
numbers in the bill of materials.
• If you change the Item Number in a balloon, the item number in the bill of materials also changes.
• SolidWorks includes several BOM templates in the following directory: \install_directory\lang\english.
• You can embed dimensions and mass property parameters into values of custom properties in part
documents. You can then include the custom properties in a bill of materials. The values in the BOM
update automatically if the part dimensions or mass properties change.
To hide a bill of materials:
Right-click the bill of materials in the graphics area or in the FeatureManager design tree and select Hide
Bill of Materials.
NOTE: To show the bill of materials again, right-click the bill of materials in the FeatureManager design
tree (expand the drawing view if necessary) and select Show Bill of Materials.
Bomtemp-Material.xls MATERIAL
Bomtemp-Vendor.xls VENDOR NO
Bomtemp-Weight.xls WEIGHT
You must add the custom properties into the parts of your assembly in order to take advantage of the additional
columns in these templates.
12-94
Bill of Materials - Inserting
The Configuration tab in the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box specifies basic display properties of a bill of
materials. The other tabs available in the dialog box are Contents and Control. The software remembers your
selections from session to session.
The Configuration tab controls the following properties.
• Use summary info title as part number. If you assigned a part identifier number in the title box of the
Summary Info for the part, you can use that identifier in the bill of materials.
• Use the document’s note font when creating the table. When selected, the BOM uses the text font
specified for notes, under Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing, Notes, Font. Otherwise, the
font specified in the BOM template is used.
• Choose one of the following to specify the way to list sub-assemblies and their components in the bill of
materials:
o Show parts only. Select this option to list only parts in the bill of materials. Subassemblies are not
listed; their components are listed as individual items.
o Show top level subassemblies and parts only. Select this option to list parts and subassemblies in
the bill of materials. Each subassembly type is an item; the individual subassembly components are
not listed.
o Show assemblies and parts in an indented list. Subassemblies are listed as items; subassembly
components are shown below the subassembly to which they belong, but without item numbers.
• Anchor point. Select or clear Use table anchor point. The standard templates supplied with the software
include an anchor point for placing the BOM in a specific location on the sheet. To use the point, select this
option, then select which corner of the BOM table to make coincident with the point (top left, bottom right,
and so on). If you do not use the anchor point, the BOM is placed on the sheet near the selected view.
• Add new items by extending top border of table. New components are always added at the bottom of the
table, and the rest of the table shifts upward. The last row of the table remains in the same position on the
drawing sheet. This option applies only when you do not use an anchor point.
The Contents tab in the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box specifies which items appear in the bill of materials,
and allows you to reverse the order of the list. The other tabs available in the dialog box are Configuration and
Control.
The Contents tab controls the following properties:
• Select which items to include in the table. A green check mark in the ITEM NO. column means that the item
is displayed in the table. Clear the check mark to hide the item. This has the same effect as hiding the row in
the Excel worksheet.
• To move the header row to the bottom of the table, and to list the items in order from bottom to top, clear the
Display labels at top check box.
• To sort the items alphanumerically by a column (for example, to sort by part number), hold down the Ctrl
key, and click the box at the top of the column. The item numbers are re-assigned so that the first line is still
Item 1, and the remaining item numbers are in order.
NOTE: If you do not hold down the Ctrl key, the item number for each line stays with the original item,
resulting in a list with item numbers out of order.
The Control tab in the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box specifies how row numbers are assigned, what
happens when a component is deleted, and how to split long BOM tables. The other tabs available in the dialog box
are Configuration and Contents.
The Control tab controls the following properties:
Row numbers
• Row numbers follow assembly ordering. Select to use the item numbers assigned by the software. Clear to
assign the item numbers in Excel, and override the system-defined item numbers.
NOTE: When you select this check box:
o Any sorting other than by Item No. is not preserved in the Bill of Materials.
o If you try to change an item number in a balloon, a message appears stating that you cannot change
the item number.
• Reserve row numbers for missing components. Specify what happens if a component is removed from the
assembly.
o No. The rows for the removed components are deleted from the table.
o Yes. Specify how the row is displayed: Display with zero quantity, Hide, or Display with strike
through text.
Split Tables
• Split tables into multiple sections. Select to allow the table to split.
• Table height before splitting. Specify a value for the height.
• Split direction for new sections. Select Left or Right from the list.
If the BOM exceeds the height you specify, the table splits and continues in another column to the Left or
Right.
12-96
Bill of Materials - Edit Text
You can display a name other than the document name in the part number column of the BOM. For example, you can
use a stock number specified by your company, or the configuration name for a part or sub-assembly that has more
than one configuration. To do so, it may be necessary to edit the Advanced properties of the configuration.
1. In the part or sub-assembly document, click the Configuration tab at the lower left of the window to
change to the ConfigurationManager view.
2. Right-click the configuration you want to edit, and select Properties.
3. In the Configuration Properties dialog box, under Part number displayed when used in a bill of
materials, select one of the following:
• Document name.
• Configuration name.
• User-specified name. Type a name in the box.
4. If you always want a sub-assembly to be listed as a single component in the bill of materials, select the
Don’t show child components in BOM when used as sub-assembly check box.
When cleared, child components are listed individually in the BOM, when Show parts only or Show
assemblies and parts in an indented list is selected in the Bill of Materials Properties dialog box.
5. Click OK.
You can specify how to list component configurations in a BOM. When multiple configurations of the same
component are used in an assembly, there are some additional considerations.
• In the Item No. column, you can list the configurations as a separate entries with individual item numbers,
or you can group all the configurations as a single entry with one item number.
• In the Part No. column, you can display a user-defined name, the configuration name, or the document
name for each item.
In the component document, you need to perform certain steps to achieve the desired results. The steps vary,
depending on how you create the configurations
12-98
If you create configurations manually:
To edit the Add Configuration/Configuration Properties, right-click the configuration name, and select
Properties.
When the Configuration Properties are not defined in the same way for all the configurations of the components,
the following order of precedence applies:
• User-defined name or configuration name (if Use name below is selected)
• Summary Information Title (if the option is selected, and if Title is defined for the component)
• Document name
You can add more information such as Material, Vendor_Number, Cost, and so on to the open part or sub-assembly
document by clicking File, Properties, and selecting the Custom tab or the Configurations specific tab. (See
Summary Info - Custom and Configuration Specific for information about specifying properties.)
SolidWorks provides several templates for bills of materials in the directory \install_directory\lang\english.
Columns in the templates are populated automatically as follows:
Custom properties can include model dimensions and mass properties, which update automatically in the BOM if
they are changed in the model.
12-100
13
Import/Export
This section describes these SolidWorks file import and export topics:
• CADKEY® • Pro/ENGINEER®
• DXF 3D • STEP
• DXF™/DWG • STL
• eDrawings • TIFF™
• HOOPS® • VDAFS
• IGES • Viewpoint®
• JPEG • VRML
You can import files to the SolidWorks software from other applications. You can export SolidWorks documents to a
number of formats for use with other applications. The following table displays the data translation methods available
for SolidWorks documents:
NOTE: X = This option is available. A blank box = This option is not available.
13-2
Importing Documents
Before you import a document to the SolidWorks software, make sure that you have the import options set for your
purposes.
Importing Geometry
You can import surfaces, solids, sketches, curves, and graphics models (CATIA CGR, STL, or VRML files only)
from ACIS, CATIA CGR, IGES, Parasolid, STEP, STL, VDAFS, or VRML files as reference geometry into part
documents.
1. In a part document, click Imported Geometry on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Features,
Imported.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse to the desired file, and click Open.
NOTE: For ACIS, IGES, STEP, STL, VDAFS, or VRML files, you can click Options to set the import
options
One or more features are imported, and the Imported features are added to the part. The features are
positioned relative to the origin, using the coordinates in the imported file.
NOTE: Wireframe geometry and curves are ignored when importing surfaces as reference geometry.
You can replace an imported feature with geometry from a new file.
If you had added features to the imported body before selecting Edit
Feature, SolidWorks attempts to rebuild these features whenever possible.
For example, this STEP file contains an imported feature. You need to add a
feature to the imported body.
1. Select the bottom face of the imported body.
2. Click Chamfer .
The Chamfer PropertyManager appears.
OK .
The imported body now shows the additional chamfer feature on
the bottom face.
13-4
Open - Match Faces and Edges of Imported Features
The Match faces and edges check box appears in the Open dialog box when you edit the definition of an imported
feature.
Import Diagnosis
Use the Diagnosis tool to diagnose and repair gaps and bad faces on imported features. Use the Diagnosis tool when
you have:
• An imported solid or surface body that has rebuild errors.
• An imported surface that was not able to knit into a solid body.
If you try to fix gaps but all the gaps cannot be healed, try fixing the faces to fix the gaps.
4. Click OK .
To simplify entities with a tolerance greater than 1.0e-8 meters and less than 1.0e-5 meters, you must manually select
the relevant faces, then click Fix. The example has some plane-like and cylinder-like faces, but they are not in
analytical forms.
1. Select the two faces in the graphics area.
2. Click Fix.
If two faces are meant to be one (for example, the two halves of a cylindrical face), the two faces merge.
The diagnosis performs an in-depth check on all the entities in a model. The number of faults or faulty
faces may differ from those found by the more generic Tools, Check command. This detailed check is
required to heal the faulty entities.
3. Click OK .
If the imported body still shows rebuild error markers even though a body check and the Import
Diagnosis PropertyManager report no surface problems, the body is probably valid. Click Rebuild to
clear the rebuild error markers.
The Import Diagnosis PropertyManager appears when you import a file, right-click the imported body, and select
Diagnosis. The PropertyManager controls the following properties:
Gaps
• Diagnose. Checks the imported body for gaps and reports the number of gaps found.
View/Close Gaps
• Next. Views the next gap. An arrow points to the gap or gap edge in the graphics area.
• Previous. Views the previously viewed gap.
• Healing Preview. Zooms in to the next or previous gap and displays a preview of the proposed fix.
• Accept (Available only when Healing Preview is selected). Accepts the fix for the currently viewed gap.
The number of gaps found updates.
• Close All. Fixes all gaps and updates the number of gaps found.
Faces
• Diagnose. Checks the imported body for bad faces. Diagnosis reports the problem and faces under Faces to
be fixed/removed.
• Faces to be fixed/removed . Reports the bad faces found when you click Diagnosis. Hover over the
face name for a tooltip that describes the problem with the face. You can manually select faces in the
graphics area to add to this list. You can also select multiple faces to merge.
13-6
Click the selected face in Faces to be fixed/removed to view normal to that face. Click the
selected face in the list again to flip the face 180 degrees and view it from the opposite direction. This is use-
ful when manually fixing faces.
• Fix. Fixes the bad faces.
• Remove. Removes the bad faces. You can use surface creation functionality to try to create new surfaces to
fill gap, then try to knit again.
• All selected. Fixes all faces listed in Faces to be fixed/removed . Clear this option to fix faces
individually or manually.
You can set the general import options when you import IGES, STEP, SAT (ACIS), VDAFS, or Inventor Part files.
If you move the pointer over General, a tooltip displays the file formats that the General item
controls.
3. Select from the following options:
• Surface/solid entities. Imports surface and solid entities. You must also select one of the following
options:
o Try forming solid(s). Tries to form solids. Additionally, you can select the following option:
• B-REP mapping. Attempts to import the model by directly mapping topologies
using boundary representation (BREP) data. In general, this mode is faster than
knitting, especially for complex models. If you select the Try forming solid(s)
option, but do not select the B-REP mapping option, the SolidWorks application
attempts to knit the surfaces into solid(s).
o Knit surface(s). Imports as surfaces and attempt to knit the imported surfaces.
o Do not knit. Imports as surfaces and prevent surfaces from knitting.
• Free point/curve entities. Imports free points and free curve entities. You must also select one of
the following options:
o Import as sketch(es). Imports data as 2D and 3D sketch data. If you want to import free
curves, SolidWorks strongly recommends you select this option, for performance reasons.
Free points and 2D sketches import as 2D sketches. 2D curves, 3D curves, and 3D sketches
import as 3D sketches.
o Import as 3D curves. Imports data as 3D curves data. 2D and 3D curves import as curves.
Free points and 2D sketches import as 2D sketches.
• Import multiple bodies as parts (STEP and ACIS files only). Imports a multibody part as an
assembly document. The multiple bodies are imported as part documents contained in the
assembly. With this option cleared, the multibody part imports as a part document that contains
multiple imported bodies.
• Perform full entity check and repair errors. Checks and repairs errors (default is selected). With
this option selected, import performance is slower because the software spends more time checking
and repairing the model entities wherever possible. If the quality of the imported data is good, you
may not have to select this option.
• Customize curve tolerance. Customizes the tolerance when you import models with very small
entities (smallest values on the order of 1.0e-6 to 1.0e-7 meters). With this option cleared,
SolidWorks uses internal tolerance settings which are too large to properly import and display these
small models. Enter the desired tolerance in the box.
• Unit. Set the units of measure for the imported file. You must select one of the following options:
o File specified unit. Use the units of measure from the imported file.
o Document template specified unit. Use the units specified in the SolidWorks template files
under Tools, Options, System Options, Default Templates.
• IGES - Show IGES levels. Displays the IGES-In Surfaces, Curves, and Levels dialog box if
there are curves or different levels (or layers) in the IGES file.
• STEP - Map configuration data. Applies to STEP files only. Imports STEP file configuration
data plus geometric data. Leave this option cleared to import only geometric data.
4. Click OK to return to the Open dialog box.
5. Select the file to open, then click Open to import the file as a SolidWorks document.
You can set the import options when you import STL or VRML files as SolidWorks documents. The VRML
translator supports explicit normals, crease angle smooth shading, and color per vertex, which results in smooth
blending of colors.
To set the STL and VRML import options:
13-8
Exporting Documents and Setting Options
When you export a document from the SolidWorks application, you can set the options for the new file you create.
The options vary, depending on the type of file.
To export a SolidWorks document as another file type:
1. Select one of the following:
• The face or surface of a part in the graphics area
• A solid body or surface body from the Solid Bodies or Surface Bodies folder in the
FeatureManager design tree
• The components of an assembly
NOTE: If you do not select any entities, the entire part or assembly is exported.
2. Click File, Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Set Save as type to the desired file type, then click Options.
The Export Options dialog box appears with the desired file type selected on the File Format tab.
4. Set the appropriate options for the target file type. See the target file type below for the available options:
• ACIS (*.sat)
• DXF/DWG (*.dxf, *.dwg)
• eDrawing (*.eprt, *.easm, or *.edrw)
• IGES (*.igs)
• Parasolid (*.x_t, *.x_b)
• STEP (*.step)
• STL (*.stl)
• Tif (*.tif)
• VDAFS (*.vda)
• VRML (*.wrl)
5. In the File name box, type a name. The extension for the selected format is added automatically when you
save the document.
6. Click Save.
NOTES:
• If you export an assembly that contains lightweight parts, the Resolve Lightweight Parts dialog
box appears. You must resolve any lightweight parts before you can export an assembly.
• If you export an assembly that contains hidden or suppressed parts, a message box appears asking if
you want to resolve these parts. To export these parts, you must resolve them.
• If you select any faces, surfaces, solid bodies or surface bodies of a part, the Export dialog box
appears verifying if you want to export only the selected objects. Click Selected face(s) to export
only the selected faces, Selected bodies to export only the selected bodies, or All bodies to export
all solid bodies.
13-10
eDrawings Export Options
You can set the export options when you export SolidWorks documents as eDrawing files.
• Surface representation/System preference. The IGES entity types that compose the trimmed
surfaces depend on the export format chosen. The Surface representation table shows the IGES
entity types that compose the trimmed surfaces.
• Export 3D Curve features. Includes 3D curve features in the exported file.
• Export sketch entities. Includes sketch entities in the exported file. All 2D and 3D sketch entities
are included.
• Use high trim curve accuracy. Exports using high trim curve accuracy; the file size is larger than
if the check box is cleared. This setting affects files exported both with Trimmed surfaces and
with 3D curves. High trim curve accuracy can sometimes help if the target system has trouble
importing the IGES file, or cannot knit the surfaces into a useful solid.
• IGES assembly structure
o Save all components of an assembly in one file (assemblies only). Saves all assembly
components, sub-assemblies, and sub-assembly components in one file. Otherwise, the
assembly components and the sub-assembly components are saved as individual IGES
files in the same directory.
o Flatten assembly hierarchy (assemblies only). Flattens the assembly to one level of only
part bodies. A flattened file contains a top-level assembly and a series of parts that contain
imported features.
• Output coordinate system. Select a coordinate system to apply for export. If you select
-- default --, no transformation matrix is applied.
5. Click OK, then click Save to export the document.
Surface Representation
STANDARD 144, 142, 128, 126, 122, 120, 110, 102, 100
ALIAS 144, 142, 128, 126, 122, 120, 110, 102, 100
NOTE: If the system you are exporting to is not listed, refer to the documentation for that system to see
which entities are supported, and choose an appropriate setting.
13-12
Parasolid Export Options
You can set the export options when you export SolidWorks part or assembly documents as Parasolid files.
To set the Parasolid export options:
1. Open the SolidWorks document that you want to export as a Parasolid file.
2. Click File, Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Set Save as type to Parasolid (*.x_t) or Parasolid Binary (*.x_b), then click Options.
The Export Options dialog box appears with Parasolid selected on the File Format tab.
4. Select from the following options:
• Version. Select the type supported by the target system.
• Flatten assembly hierarchy (assemblies only). Flattens the assembly to one level of only part
bodies. A flattened file contains a top-level assembly and a series of parts that contain imported
features.
• Output coordinate system. Select a coordinate system to apply for export. If you select
-- default --, no transformation matrix is applied.
5. Click OK, then click Save to export the document.
As you move the two sliders, the corresponding concentric circles adjust
accordingly. The circles show, approximately, how the tessellation will vary as a
result of the settings. (See the Preview option below.)
o Show STL info before file saving. Displays a SolidWorks dialog box (when you click
Save in the Save As dialog box) that contains the following information: Triangles
(number), File Size, File Format, and the directory path and file name.
o Preview. Displays a faceted model preview in the graphics area and display the Triangles
(number) and File size information in the Export Options dialog box.
• Do not translate STL output data to positive space. Makes exported parts maintain their original
position in global space, relative to the origin.
• Save all components of an assembly in a single file (assemblies only). Saves the assembly and
each of its components in a single .stl file.
• Check for interferences (assemblies only). Performs an interference check on an assembly
document prior to saving. Export of an assembly with coincident or interfering bodies to a single
.stl file produces a file that may be unsuitable for some rapid prototyping systems. It is
recommended that you check for interference between the components prior to saving the assembly
document. For more information, see Interference Detection.
• Output coordinate system. Select a coordinate system to apply for export. If you select
-- default --, no transformation matrix is applied.
5. Click OK, then click Save to export the document.
13-14
TIFF Export Options
You can set the export options when you export SolidWorks documents as TIFF files.
To set the TIFF export options:
1. Open the SolidWorks document that you want to export as a TIFF file.
2. Click File, Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Set Save as type to Tif (*.tif), then click Options.
The Export Options dialog box appears with TIF selected on the File Format tab.
4. Select from the following options:
• Image type. Select either RGB full color, or Black & white (bilevel) image.
• Compression scheme. Select the type supported by the target system:
o Uncompressed.
o Packbits. Results in the smallest color image.
o Group 4 Fax. Results in the smallest file size of the three formats, but can only be used
for a black and white image.
• Capture type. Select either Screen capture or Print capture.
o Screen capture. Captures the image at the resolution of the screen display.
o Print capture (drawings only). Enables the options under For drawings. Capture the
image at a user-defined DPI (dots per inch) and Paper size. The drawing Width and
Height information update automatically. Select the Scale to fit check box to scale the
drawing automatically, or set the scale manually in the Scale box.
5. Click OK, then click Save to export the document.
When you export a multibody part document as another file type, you have the option to export selected solid bodies
or all solid bodies.
To export a multibody part document:
1. With a multibody part document open, select at least one face or solid body in the graphics area, or one solid
body from the Solid Bodies folder in the FeatureManager design tree, and click Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
2. Set the Save as type to the desired file type and click Save.
The Export dialog box appears.
NOTE: If you select a solid body, the Selected face(s) option in the Export dialog box is unavailable.
3. Click one of the following:
• Selected face(s). Exports only the selected faces.
• Selected bodies. Exports only the selected bodies.
• All bodies. Exports all solid bodies.
4. Click OK to export the multibody part document.
Print3D
Print3D is a web portal linked to the SolidWorks software. You can contact rapid part and prototype vendors to
request price quotes and place orders for the current part document through the Print3D web portal.
Print3D automates the prototype request process, eliminating the need to save parts as STL files, FTP parts to
vendors, or perform other operations.
You can also access the Print3D web portal from the Save As dialog box. Select STL (*.stl) in Save as
type and click Try Print3D.
13-16
File Types
Import
The ACIS translator imports ACIS part or assembly files as SolidWorks part or assembly documents. If the units of
length are not explicitly specified in the ACIS file, a dialog box gives you the opportunity to specify the units. Files
created with early versions of the ACIS modeler do not contain information about the units of length. The default
import mode is knitting.
SolidWorks supports import of generic named attributes (integer, position, real, string, and vector) associated with
bodies and faces from ACIS (.sat) files. These attributes are displayed as features in the FeatureManager design tree.
Their values are accessible only through the SolidWorks Application Programming Interface (API).
Export
The ACIS translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents as ACIS files. When you export parts, you can
export faces or bodies as separate ACIS files. You can select to export individual parts or subassemblies from an
assembly tree, limiting export to only those parts or subassemblies. If you select a subassembly, all of its components
are automatically selected. The ACIS translator does not support assembly hierarchy.
Version Information
The ACIS translator supports all SAT versions up to and including version 8.0.
Version Information
The Inventor translator supports all Autodesk Inventor versions up to and including Autodesk Inventor 5.3.
CADKEY Files
The CADKEY® translator imports CADKEY part and assembly files as SolidWorks part or assembly documents. All
CADKEY files have the same .prt file extension.
The CADKEY translator is integrated into the SolidWorks software and is always available under Files of type in the
Open dialog box.
Version Information
The CADKEY translator supports import of surface or solid entities from CADKEY version 19 part or assembly
files.
Import
The CATIA Graphics translator imports CGR files as SolidWorks part documents. CGR files contain only graphical
information and are for viewing only.
System Requirements: Windows NT® or Windows 2000 or above.
Export
The CATIA Graphics translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents as CATIA graphics files that users
can view in CATIA, CATweb, and DMU Navigator.
Version Information
The CATIA Graphics translator supports CATIA version 5, release 1 through release 9.
DXF 3D Files
The DXF 3D translator extracts ACIS information from a DXF file, if that information exists in the file, and imports
it into a SolidWorks part document. If a DXF file contains multiple bodies or an assembly, SolidWorks creates an
assembly document.
Note the following translator limitations:
• It is not a 2D to 3D converter.
• It does not import 2D or wireframe data from DXF files.
The DXF 3D translator is integrated into the DXF/DWG translator in the SolidWorks software and is always
available when you select DXF (*.dxf) under Files of type in the Open dialog box.
13-18
To open a DXF 3D part:
1. Click File, Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Set Files of type to DXF (*.dxf).
3. Browse to the desired file, and click Open.
The Conversion Unit dialog box appears.
4. Select the unit in which the original model was created, or click Other and type the scale in the Unit Scale
box.
5. Click OK.
Version Information
The DXF 3D translator supports DXF 3D files including, but not limited to, versions AutoCAD® R14 and above.
Import
The DXF/DWG translator imports DXF or DWG files, including Mechanical Desktop files, as SolidWorks part or
drawing documents, according to the option settings in the DXF/DWG Import Wizard. This translator also imports
DXF 3D files without the wizard. In a drawing document, you can import the geometry to the drawing sheet or the
drawing sheet format. Entities in either paper space or model space are imported.
When you import drawings, the most popular AutoCAD SHX or True Type fonts are supported, even though you
may not have the fonts installed. See AutoCAD Font Support.
If you import a DXF or DWG file that contains a large number of blocks (more than 200), you are prompted to enable
the Explode Blocks option. Explode the blocks to improve import performance.
The DXF/DWG translator imports:
• AutoCAD Mechanical annotations, known as proxy entities, (such as surface finish symbols or GTOL
frames) and automatically drawn objects (such as cams and springs) when you import DXF or DWG files as
SolidWorks drawing documents. The translator converts these imported items to equivalent SolidWorks
objects, or creates them as blocks of primitive geometry, as appropriate.
• Associative and non-associative crosshatches as area hatches.
• XREFs in AutoCAD DWG files.
• DWG files with multiple sheets.
When you import DWG files, you can now see a thumbnail image of the file in the Preview panel of the Open dialog
box. Previews appear for DWG files created by both SolidWorks and AutoCAD. In AutoCAD, the bitmap preview
option must be enabled when the file is last saved. The Open dialog box remembers the Preview check box state
from the last time you opened a DWG file.
The SolidWorks software fully supports the import of AutoCAD block definitions and instances with properties and
attributes.
When you import AutoCAD DWG files saved in paper space (layout mode) as SolidWorks drawing documents, the
DXF/DWG Import Wizard converts each AutoCAD viewport into a separate SolidWorks drawing view. Drawing
view data is selectable if you activate the drawing view.
Data that does not belong to a viewport is imported to the drawing sheet. Drawing sheet data is selectable if you
activate the drawing sheet. If Dynamic drawing view activation is enabled, you must lock sheet focus to select
drawing sheet data.
The DXF/DWG translator alerts you to problems encountered when importing a DXF or DWG file.
To import an AutoCAD 2004 DXF or DWG file, you must save the file in AutoCAD 2004 as "AutoCAD 2000/
LT2000." SolidWorks warns you if you try to import AutoCAD 2004 DXF or DWG files that are not saved in this
format.
You can import entire DWG sheets as view only SolidWorks drawing sheets, which allows the direct display of the
original DWG entities inside SolidWorks drawing documents. You can view, pan, zoom, and print these sheets.
Select View only in the DWG Import - Drawing Layer Mapping dialog box to import DWG sheets as view only
sheets.
Export
The DXF/DWG translator exports only drawing documents as .dxf or .dwg files. When you export a drawing as a
.dxf or .dwg file, the drawing's sheet scale is used for the new file. All entities (such as edges, annotations, and
assembly components) on layers are exported to the assigned layer.
SolidWorks crosshatch patterns are translated into AutoCAD hatch patterns when you export SolidWorks documents
as DXF or DWG files. The SolidWorks software translates the SolidWorks crosshatch patterns as non-associative
hatch definitions, and preserves the layer and color of the original crosshatch. The SolidWorks application also
supports crosshatch export when you map layers with a mapping file.
You have the option to map only those items whose layers are not otherwise defined when you export SolidWorks
drawing documents as DXF or DWG files. All entity types that you can assign to AutoCAD layers through the
mapping file support layering in the SolidWorks drawing format.
The DXF/DWG translator supports line thickness, hidden sketches, and auto-centerlines.
Version Information
The DXF/DWG translator supports importing and exporting of OLE objects through DXF/DWG files of version 13
and higher.
13-20
4. Set the values in the PropertyManager to manage link references. Use the PropertyManager to enable and
manage the external reference between the view only sheet and its source DWG file.
5. Click OK .
The DXF file entities are inserted into the SolidWorks part document as a sketch on the selected face.
Now you can use the inserted sketch to modify the part.
8. Click OK .
The imported DXF sketch creates the cut on the SolidWorks part, resulting in the finished part document.
AutoCAD file entities AutoCAD file entities pasted into SolidWorks document
Attach Dimensions
You can attach the dimensions to the nearest reasonable sketch entities all at once.
To attach dimensions:
With an imported .dxf or .dwg drawing document active, click Tools, Dimensions, Attach Dimensions.
13-22
Constrain All
You can set relations on the sketch entities of an unconstrained imported .dxf or .dwg file.
The sketch entities must lie entirely within the drawing view border.
5. Make your part or assembly the active window, and notice the sketch entities have been inserted into the
open sketch.
DXF/DWG Mapping
You can map selected SolidWorks entities or colors to different layers or colors in a .dxf or .dwg file. You create map
files in the SolidWorks software to assign selected items to designated layers or colors in the .dxf or .dwg file.
To create a map file:
1. Open the SolidWorks drawing document for which you want to create a map file.
2. Click File, Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Set Save as type to Dxf (*.dxf) or Dwg (*.dwg), then click Options.
The Export Options dialog box appears with DXF/DWG selected on the File Format tab.
4. Do the following:
a. Select the Custom Map SolidWorks to DXF check box.
b. Click to clear the Don’t show mapping on each save check box.
c. Click OK to close the Export Options dialog box.
5. Type a name for the drawing file in the File name box, then click Save.
The SolidWorks To DXF/DWG Mapping dialog box appears.
6. Define the layers then map the entities, or map the colors you want to map in the .dxf or .dwg file. Select the
Keep existing SolidWorks drawing layers for entities check box to apply the mapping file settings only to
those entities whose layers are not defined and to preserve existing SolidWorks drawing file layers in the
exported file. If you do not select this option, the mapping file definitions overwrite all of the current
SolidWorks drawing file layers.
7. Click OK to save the SolidWorks drawing with mapping applied to the document.
See also Define Layers, Map Entities, or Color Mapping.
To save a map file:
1. Click Map File Settings in the SolidWorks To DXF/DWG Mapping dialog box.
The Map File Settings dialog box appears.
2. Select the Save map file check box, and clear the Load map file check box.
3. Type a path and name for a new map file in the box, or browse to an existing file.
4. Click OK.
To use a previously saved map file:
1. Click Map File Settings in the SolidWorks To DXF/DWG Mapping dialog box.
The Map File Settings dialog box appears.
2. Select the Load map file check box, and clear the Save map file check box.
3. Browse to an existing file, and click OK.
NOTE: Previously saved map files can contain information for each of the mapping tabs. Review all tabs
prior to saving the SolidWorks drawing document.
eDrawings
eDrawings lets you animate and view models and drawings. It also allows you to create a document convenient for
sending to others.
Two tools are available on the eDrawings 2004 toolbar:
• Animate an eDrawing 2004 . Also available by clicking View, Modify, Animate. Begins continuous
animation of the model in shaded mode. To stop the animation, click the Animate an eDrawing 2004 tool
again, or click View, Modify, Animate again.
• Publish an eDrawing 2004 . Also available by clicking File, Publish eDrawing 2004. Opens the
eDrawings Viewer, which has tools for viewing, shading, animating, hyperlinking, and arranging drawing
views.
NOTE: If the eDrawings 2004 toolbar is not visible, click View, Toolbars, eDrawings 2004.
You can:
• Create eDrawing files from SolidWorks part, assembly, and drawing documents.
• Open SolidWorks documents in the eDrawings Viewer.
• Save eDrawing data to SolidWorks documents in the eDrawings Viewer.
You can view any SolidWorks document from SolidWorks 97Plus and later. If the document does not contain
eDrawings data, in the SolidWorks application:
• Select Save eDrawings data in SolidWorks document in Tools, Options, System Options, General
before you save the document
-or-
• Select Save eDrawing data in the Save As dialog box
Saving the eDrawings data in the SolidWorks document enables functionality in the eDrawings Viewer, such as:
• Configurations
o Component names in the Component tree
o Multiple configurations (only the last saved configuration is visible)
• Explode in assembly documents
• Hole information for Measure
• Hyperlinks in drawing views
• Mass properties
• OLE objects
• Shaded information and animation in drawing documents
13-24
To save a SolidWorks document as an eDrawing file:
1. With a SolidWorks document open, click File, Save As.
The Save As dialog box appears.
2. In the Save as type list, select one of the following:
• eDrawing (*.eprt). Part documents.
• eDrawing (*.easm). Assembly documents.
• eDrawing (*.edrw). Drawing documents.
NOTE: SolidWorks displays the correct eDrawing file type based on the SolidWorks document
type.
3. Click Save to create the eDrawing file.
eDrawings Professional
With the optional eDrawings Professional tools, you can:
• Mark up files
• View cross sections
• Measure dimensions
• Move assembly components
• View exploded views
• Display mass properties
For more information, click Help, eDrawings Help Topics in the eDrawings Viewer, or visit the web site at
www.solidworks.com/edrawings.
2. Click Publish an eDrawing 2004 on the eDrawings toolbar, or click File, Publish eDrawing 2004.
The Sheets to Save to eDrawing dialog box appears.
3. Select one of the following:
• Current sheet. Save the current sheet only.
• All sheets. Save all sheets.
• Selected sheets. Select the sheets to save from the list displayed below.
4. Click OK to publish the eDrawing file.
A progress bar reports the publication process. The eDrawings Viewer opens and lists the selected sheets on
the Sheets tab in the eDrawing Manager
5. To display a different sheet in the graphics area, double-click the sheet on the Sheets tab, or click the tab
with the sheet name below the graphics area.
6. In the eDrawings Viewer, click Save to save the eDrawing file with the sheets.
2. Click Publish an eDrawing 2004 on the eDrawings toolbar, or File, Publish eDrawing 2004.
The Configurations to Save to eDrawing dialog box appears.
3. Select one of the following:
• Current configuration (default). Save the current configuration only.
• All configurations. Save all configurations.
• Selected configurations. Select the configurations to save from the list displayed below.
4. Click OK to publish the eDrawing file.
A progress bar reports the publication process. The eDrawings Viewer opens with images of the saved
configurations displayed on the Configurations tab. You can click the images to display the different
configurations.
5. In the eDrawings Viewer, click Save to save the eDrawing file with the configurations.
Version Information
The HCG translator exports SolidWorks documents as CATIA version 5, release 9 files.
13-26
HOOPS Files
The HOOPS translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents as HOOPS (.hsf) files. HOOPS files are
streaming graphics files that download details piece by piece to a web page, which is helpful when you display large
files. You can view HOOPS files over the Internet using the HOOPS viewer. See www.hoops3d.com for information
about the HOOPS viewer.
NOTE: The exported files contain graphical information only; you cannot edit these files.
The HOOPS translator is integrated into the SolidWorks software and is always available under Save as type in the
Save As dialog box.
Version Information
The HOOPS translator exports SolidWorks documents as HOOPS version 8.0 files.
Import
If there is wireframe geometry in an imported file, the software reads the IGES data and forms curves for the IGES
wireframe entities. The 2D geometry is imported into a sketch rather than imported as reference curves.
If you want the software to try to form a solid from imported IGES data, export the solid or surfaces from the source
system as trimmed surfaces (Entity type 144) or as untrimmed surfaces (Entity types 128, 122, 120, 118, 114). Also,
set the number of significant digits (precision) as high as possible to ensure accurate translation.
You can import 3D curves in an IGES file as 3D sketch entities. In the Import Options dialog box, select the Free
point/curve entities check box and click Import as sketch(es).
The IGES translator supports colors when you import curves.
You can select the levels to import for IGES files that contain multiple levels. Select the Show IGES levels option in
the Import Options dialog box to display the IGES-In Surfaces, Curves, and Levels dialog box.
Export
The IGES translator exports SolidWorks part and assembly documents as IGES files. Parts and surfaces exported to
IGES format retain their part or surface color, and are displayed in color when in Shaded mode.
You can export both surfaces and solids in the same IGES file.
If you export a SolidWorks assembly document that has hidden or suppressed components to IGES format, a dialog
box appears asking if you want to resolve these components.
• Click Yes, and all the components, including the hidden or suppressed ones, are exported.
• Click No, and the hidden or suppressed components are not exported.
13-28
IGES Levels
If there are curves in the IGES file or if there are different levels (or layers) in the IGES file, the IGES-In Surfaces,
Curves, and Levels dialog box appears. Levels are sometimes used by other systems to separate assembly
components or to separate IGES entity types.
IGES 3D Curves
JPEG Files
The JPEG translator takes a snapshot of anything displayed in the graphics window of a SolidWorks part, assembly,
or drawing document, and exports it as a .jpg file. A .jpg file is an image file that you can open in most image
viewers. The .jpg file displays only the information from the graphics window; toolbars and other areas of the
SolidWorks window do not appear.
The JPEG translator is integrated into the SolidWorks software and is always available under Save as type in the
Save As dialog box.
Version Information
The MDT translator supports the following MDT versions:
• MDT4.0 or higher (MDT4.0 with Windows 2000 or Windows® XP is not supported)
• MDT5.0 only with Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows NT (Windows 98 must have MDT5.0 Service
Pack 1 or later)
• MDT 6.0 only with Windows® 98, Windows® 2000, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0 (with Service Pack
5 or later), or Windows® XP Professional.
To open an MDT file:
1. Click File, Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Set Files of type to DXF (*.dxf) or DWG (*.dwg).
3. Browse to the desired file, and click Open.
The MDT File Import dialog box appears.
NOTE: If you do not have Mechanical Desktop installed, the DXF/DWG Import Wizard appears instead
of the MDT File Import dialog box.
4. Do one of the following:
• To import the MDT file as a part document using the MDT translator:
1. Click Import as a part with MDT translator, then click OK.
The DXF/DWG Import - Document Settings dialog box appears with the most
appropriate options automatically selected. You can change the options if desired.
2. Select from the following options:
• Units of imported data. Select the unit in which the imported model was
created.
• MDT Options, Component Import Options. Click one of the following
options:
o Use Feature Import. Imports individual features that you can edit.
o Use Geometry Import. Imports one solid part that you cannot directly
edit.
• MDT Options, If file with the same name exists. Click one of the following
options:
o Use existing. Uses the existing SolidWorks file and does not import the
new part or assembly file.
o Overwrite. Overwrites the existing SolidWorks file.
o Save with new name. Prompts you to save the file with a new name.
13-30
3. Adjust the following Preview box options to change the preview displayed as desired:
• Select from the following viewing options:
o Previous view
o Rotate , Pan
o Select a view from the pulldown menu
• White background. Select this check box to display the model with a white
background color.
• Import this sheet. Select this check box to import drawing views.
• Model tab. Select this tab to display the part data of the imported model. This tab
is selected by default when you import MDT files as parts.
4. Click Finish to import the MDT file as a part document.
The Mechanical Desktop to SolidWorks Converter dialog box reports on the
conversion process. The MDT translator imports the MDT file as a SolidWorks document.
• To import the MDT file as a drawing document using the DXF/DWG translator (MDT does not need to
be installed in this case):
1. Click Import as a drawing with the DXF/DWG translator, then click OK.
The DXF/DWG Import - Drawing Layer Mapping dialog box appears with the most
appropriate options automatically selected. You can change the options if desired.
2. Select from the following options:
• Import to drawing. Imports the MDT file as a drawing and creates two sheets,
one with the model outline and another with the drawing data. This option is
selected by default when you import MDT files as drawings.
• Import to part. Imports the MDT file as a part, creating one part with 3D solid
data and a sheet.
• Show Layers. Select one of the following options:
o All selected layers. Shows all the layers being imported to either the
drawing sheet or the sheet format. If a layer is not selected, the entities
on that layer are ignored for import and not included in the drawing, as
shown in the preview image.
o Layers selected for drawing sheet. Shows the subset of layers whose
entities are imported to the drawing sheet.
o Layers selected for sheet format. Shows the subset of layers whose
entities are imported to the sheet format. Drawing sheet layers and sheet
format layers are mutually exclusive; entities cannot be directed to both
the drawing sheet and the sheet format at the same time.
NOTES:
• The layers themselves are always present in the resulting drawing. Depending on
the option you selected, the layer entities may be ignored, and the initial status of
the layer may be off.
• These options allow you to direct or redirect entities by layer to either the
drawing sheet or the sheet format, or to completely block out the entities of a
specific layer.
3. Adjust the following Preview box options to change the preview displayed as desired:
• Select from the following viewing options:
o Previous view
o Rotate , Pan
o Select a standard view from the pulldown menu
• White background. Select this check box to display the model with a white
background color.
• Import this sheet as. This check box is selected by default when you import
MDT files as drawings. The name of the selected sheet appears in the box to the
right. You can rename the sheets you import and the new names appear in the
new SolidWorks document.
• Model tab. Select this tab to display a preview of the model space from the
imported model. This tab is selected by default when you import MDT files as
drawings.
• Layout tab. Select this tab to display a preview of the drawing layout and to
display the tab name in the box next to Import this sheet as. The tabs match the
tabs shown when you have the DXF or DWG file open inside the AutoCAD
application.
4. Do one of the following:
• Click Finish to accept the remaining default options and import the MDT file as
a part document.
• Click Next to set the document settings.
The DXF/DWG Import - Document Settings dialog box appears.
5. Set the following options:
• Input file properties. Set the Data units. You can set the units to Angstroms
(1.0e-10 meters), Nanometers (1.0e-9 meters), Microns (1.0e-6 meters),
Microinches (1.0e-6 inches), or Mils (1.0e-3 inches), in addition to the standard
Feet, Inches, and Meters units.
• Output file properties. Set the following options:
o Paper size. Sets the drawing sheet size. Select User Defined to specify
the Width and Height.
o Width. Sets the width of the drawing sheet.
o Height. Sets the height of the drawing sheet.
o Document template. Sets a document template for the imported
entities. If Paper size, Width, and Height are specified in the sheet
format of the template, these settings update accordingly. This template
information is saved in the registry for DXF files, and used in future
DXF file imports, unless you change the template.
• Geometry scaling. Sets the scale for the imported drawing. The default is 1:1.
• Geometry positioning. Sets the position of the geometry on the sheet. Click one
of the following:
o Move entities onto the sheet. Moves the lower left corner of the
imported drawing to the origin of the SolidWorks drawing sheet.
o Center in sheet. Centers the imported drawing in the drawing sheet.
o Position (default). Specifies where to place the origin position of the
imported drawing on the SolidWorks drawing sheet. Input X and Y
coordinates to place the origin of the imported drawing.
6. Click Finish to import the MDT file as a drawing document.
13-32
Parasolid Files (*.x_t, *.x_b)
• Data exported to or imported from Parasolid format retains its color when displayed in Shaded mode.
• Component names in assemblies are retained for both import and export.
• The Parasolid translator does not support the import or export of point data.
• The Parasolid translator supports import and export of curves and wireframes.
Import
• The Parasolid translator imports Parasolid text files or binary files as SolidWorks documents.
• The Parasolid translator imports files with the extension .x_t, .x_b, .xmt_txt, or .xmt_bin.
Export
The Parasolid translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents as Parasolid text files or binary files. Binary
files are smaller than text files, but binary files are not supported in some target applications. Select the type
supported by the target application.
If you export a SolidWorks assembly document that has hidden or suppressed components to a Parasolid text or
binary file, a dialog box appears asking if you want to resolve these components.
• Click Yes, and all the components, including the hidden or suppressed ones, are exported.
• Click No, and the hidden or suppressed components are not exported.
Version Information
The Parasolid translator supports all Parasolid versions up to and including version 15.0.
PDF Files
This add-in module exports SolidWorks part, assembly, and drawing documents as Portable Document Format (PDF)
files.
Pro/ENGINEER Files
The Pro/ENGINEER translator imports Pro/ENGINEER® files into SolidWorks and exports SolidWorks documents
as Pro/ENGINEER files. The Pro/ENGINEER translator is integrated into the SolidWorks software and is always
available as a file type in the Open and Save As dialog boxes.
NOTE: Pro/ENGINEER accepts only ASCII characters in its file names. When you save a SolidWorks document as
a Pro/ENGINEER file, any non-ASCII characters are replaced by an underscore (_).
More Information
Click the links below for details about these topics:
• Importing Pro/ENGINEER assembly files into SolidWorks
• Exporting SolidWorks part or assembly documents as Pro/ENGINEER files
13-34
• Features. Imports the model and attempts to recognize features. Attempt to correct invalid
features attempts to correct problems such as reversed extrusions.
• Body. Attempts to import the model as a solid using Knitting. The Attempt to correct invalid
feature check box has no effect if you click Body.
• Generate translation report. If you select Features, generates a report that includes the features
plus the recognition and import status.
6. Select Feature or Body to import the part.
If you selected Generate translation report, the Translation Report dialog box appears.
7. Click one of the following:
• Print
• Copy. Copies the translation report to the clipboard so you can paste it into another file.
8. Close the dialog box to import the part.
o Knitting. Attempts to knit surfaces during import. Select Try forming solid model(s) to
try to form solids using Knitting mode. Otherwise, the models are imported as surface
bodies.
• Analyze the model completely. Determines the number of features that SolidWorks can recognize
and import.
• Import material properties
• Import sketch/curve entities
7. Click OK.
If you select Import geometry directly, SolidWorks imports the model. If you select Analyze the model
completely, SolidWorks parses the imported file and redisplays the Pro/Engineer to SolidWorks
Converter dialog box with the following options:
• Features. Imports the model and attempts to recognize features. Attempt to correct invalid
features attempts to correct problems such as reversed extrusions.
• Body. Attempts to import the model as a solid using Knitting. The Attempt to correct invalid
feature check box has no effect if you click Body.
• Generate translation report. If you select Features, generates a report that includes the features
plus the recognition and import status.
8. Select Feature or Body to import the model component.
If you selected Generate translation report, the Translation Report dialog box appears.
9. Click one of the following:
• Print
• Copy. Copies the translation report to the clipboard so you can paste it into another file.
10. Close the dialog box.
SolidWorks imports the component. The Pro/ENGINEER to SolidWorks Converter dialog box prompts
you to import the next component.
11. Continue importing components until you have imported the entire assembly.
13-36
To open a Solid Edge part or assembly:
1. Click File, Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Set Files of type to one of the following:
• Solid Edge Part (*.par)
• Solid Edge Assembly (*.asm)
3. Browse to the desired file, and click Open.
Version Information
The Parasolid translator imports Parasolid information from Solid Edge parts up to and including the most current
version of Solid Edge.
Import
The STEP translator imports:
• STEP files as SolidWorks part or assembly documents.
• Body geometry, body, face, and curve colors, and topology information from an AP214 STEP file.
• Wireframe geometry from STEP AP203 and AP214 files.
• STEP configuration data. You have the option to import this data by selecting the Map configuration data
check box under STEP in the Import Options dialog box.
Export
• The STEP translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents to STEP files.
• You can select to export individual parts or subassemblies from an assembly tree, limiting export to only
those parts or subassemblies. If you select a subassembly, all of its components are automatically selected. If
you select a component, its ascendants are partially selected, preserving the assembly structure.
• SolidWorks supports exporting the unit of length of a part or assembly document to a STEP AP203 or
AP214 file.
• You can set export options in the STEP Export Options dialog box.
Version Information
• STEP Application Protocol AP203 is supported for both import and export.
o For import, Conformance Classes 1, 2 (surface data only), 4, 5, and 6 of AP203 are supported.
o For export, Conformance Classes 1, 4, and 6 are supported.
• STEP Application Protocol AP214 is supported for both import and export.
Import
The STL translator imports STL files as SolidWorks part documents. SolidWorks assembly files that you export as
STL files import into SolidWorks as part documents. You have the option to import STL files as graphical data,
solids, or surfaces. When you import STL files as graphical data, you can select the Import texture information
check box to import texture information if this data exists.
Export
The STL translator exports SolidWorks part and assembly documents as STL files. Click Try Print3D to open the
Print3D web portal linked to the SolidWorks software. Print3D automates the prototype request process, eliminating
the need to save parts as STL files. You can contact rapid part and prototype vendors to request price quotes and place
orders for the current part document through the Print3D web portal.
Import
You can insert a TIFF image as a background into part or assembly documents. See Inserting TIFF Files for more
information.
NOTE: The SolidWorks application does not support LZW format compression for TIFF files.
Export
The TIFF translator exports any SolidWorks document as a TIFF image. You can capture the image as it appears on a
normal view (screen), or you can capture the image as it appears on a print preview. For drawing documents, you can
select the sheet size and scale factor.
The SolidWorks application does not support LZW format compression for TIFF files.
13-38
Unigraphics II Files
The Unigraphics translator imports the Parasolid information of a Unigraphics® II part or assembly into a SolidWorks
part or assembly document. Only the Parasolid information is extracted, not the proprietary feature information of a
Unigraphics II part.
You can import Unigraphics II compressed files.
The Unigraphics translator is integrated into the SolidWorks software and is always available under Files of type in
the Open dialog box.
Version Information
You can import parts and assemblies from Unigraphics II version 10 and higher.
Import Options
The VDA translator imports VDAFS part files as SolidWorks part documents.
Export Options
The VDA translator exports SolidWorks part documents as VDAFS files. You can set the following option:
• Output coordinate system. Select a coordinate system to apply for export. If you select -- default --, no
transformation matrix is applied.
Viewpoint Files
This add-in module exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents to Viewpoint (.mts) files. You can view
Viewpoint files over the Internet using the Viewpoint viewer. The Viewpoint files contain the compressed geometry
of the model.
The Viewpoint (MTS) translator also creates an .mtx file, which is in XML. This is the animation and attribute file of
the model.
The exported files contain graphical information only; you cannot edit these files.
Version Information
The Viewpoint translator exports SolidWorks documents as Viewpoint version 3.0.11 files.
Import
The VRML translator imports all VRML files as SolidWorks part documents. SolidWorks assembly files that you
export as VRML files import into SolidWorks as part documents. The VRML translator attempts to knit the VRML
polygons into a solid. There are no contoured surfaces in the imported file; all surfaces are planar. This import option
is intended as a last resort for importing data into SolidWorks. In many cases (especially complex models) the data
does not knit into a usable solid, and is useful for viewing purposes only.
You have the option to import VRML files as graphical data, solids, or surfaces. When you import VRML files as
graphical data, you can select the Import texture information check box to import texture information if this data
exists.
Export
The VRML translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents as VRML files. When you export as a VRML
file, the SolidWorks software takes the View, Display, Section View option into account. If Section View is on, only
the visible geometry is exported to the VRML file. This is different from the way the software behaves when you
save documents as IGES, STEP, Parasolid, or ACIS files. When you export SolidWorks documents as VRML files,
you can choose the version to export, VRML 1.0 or VRML 2.0 (VRML 97).
Version Information
The VRML translator supports all versions of VRML files up to and including VRML version 2.0 (VRML 97).
ZGL Files
The ZGL translator exports SolidWorks part or assembly documents as RealityWave's ZGL file format. After you
export the document, you must save the ZGL file into a RealityWave® database (VizStream Server). This converts the
ZGL file into RealityWave’s streaming format that you can view over the Internet with the RealityWave viewer.
The exported files contain graphical information only; you cannot edit these files.
The ZGL translator is integrated into the SolidWorks software and is always available under Save as type in the Save
As dialog box.
Version Information
The ZGL translator exports SolidWorks documents as RealityWave version 2.0 files.
13-40
14
Library Features and the Feature Palette Window
A library feature is a frequently used feature, or combination of features, that you create once and then save in a
library for future use.
You can create commonly used features, such as holes or slots, in common sizes, and save them as library features to
use whenever you need them. You can use several library features as building blocks to construct a single part. This
can save time, and it can help ensure consistency in your models.
The Feature Palette™ window helps you organize and use library features, sheet metal forming tools, piping
components, and other commonly used parts. The Feature Palette window gives you quick access to the items you use
most, by simply dragging them into the SolidWorks window.
This topic describes:
• Creating and editing library features
• Adding library features to parts
• Organizing library features, forming tools, piping components, and other parts in the Feature Palette
window
• Inserting palette items in parts and assemblies
• Palette Features and Library Features - Similarities and Differences
You can also use the Feature Palette window to add parts to an assembly. You can organize parts in logical groups,
and you can see a miniature graphical view of each palette part.
You can add fittings to piping assemblies by dragging them from the Feature Palette window. For more information,
see SolidWorks Piping Help Topics.
The Feature Palette window is also used to apply forming tools to sheet metal parts. Forming tools are special parts
that punch, stretch, or shape the sheet metal part, to create embossments, lances, flanges, louvers, ribs, and so on.
Limitations
In library features, you cannot have relations to silhouette edges or axes.
Mandatory References
Feature Limitations
Because of the limitation of a single reference, lofts, sweeps, and shape features are allowed only in certain cases:
• For lofts, the single mandatory reference is the sketch plane of one of the profiles. This must be the face or
plane where you drop the feature. Additional sketch planes must be offset from this plane, or from each
other. The library feature must include the planes.
• For sweeps, the sweep path is the single mandatory reference. This must be a model edge. The sketch plane
for the sweep section must be a Normal to Curve plane, with the model edge as the curve (when you select
the edge, click near the vertex where the plane should be placed). Include this plane in the library feature.
Then, when you drop the palette feature in the target part, drop it on the edge that is the sweep path, near the
appropriate vertex.
• For shape features, the shape must not be constrained to any entities. The definition can include only
variations in Pressure, Bend, and Stretch (on the Controls tab of the Shape Feature dialog box).
Library Features
Library Features
A library feature can contain one or more features. Most feature types are supported, some with certain limitations.
You can edit a library feature once it has been inserted into a part. After a library feature is added to a part, there is no
associativity between the target part and the library feature part. If you edit a library feature part, the change is not
propagated to parts that contain the library feature.
Usually, library features consist of features added to a base feature, but not the base feature itself. Because you cannot
have two base features in a single part, you cannot insert a library feature that includes a base feature into a part that
already has a base feature. However, you can create a library feature that includes the base feature and insert it in an
empty part.
NOTE: A base feature is either the first solid feature or a solid feature not attached to another feature.
You can only add a library feature to a part, or while editing a part in the context of an assembly. You cannot add a
library feature to an assembly itself.
14-2
This section describes:
• Creating a Library Feature
• Adding a Library Feature to a Part
• Editing a Library Feature
• Adding Color to a Library Feature
• Dissolving a Library Feature
To select more than one feature, hold down the Ctrl This library
key while you select. To select several features in a feature has three
row, click the first feature, hold down the Shift key, features: a boss, a
then click the last feature. hole, and a fillet.
The part icon beside the part name in the FeatureManager design tree changes to the library feature icon ,
and each feature that is included is marked with a letter L.
NOTE: To create a library feature from an existing part, open the part, select those features that you want to
use in your library feature, and save them as a library feature part (*.sldlfp).
You can create a library feature part that excludes some of the features of the source part, or one that contains all the
features in the source part (with the exception of the base feature). It is important to note that excluding some features
may cause rebuild errors in the library feature part because of unresolved dependencies.
5. Select any optional references. As you click each item in the Reference list, notice that the corresponding
entity is highlighted in the library feature window. Select the corresponding entity in the target part window.
To deselect an entity, either double-click the check mark or click Deselect All.
6. Click OK.
14-4
Insert Library Feature Wizard
1. Select the entity on the target part that corresponds to the Reference item listed as Mandatory.
2. If you are placing a library feature that includes a Base feature in an empty part, select the plane where you
want to place the library feature. (You cannot add a library feature that includes a Base feature to a part that
already has a Base feature.)
NOTE: A base feature is either the first solid feature or a solid feature not attached to another feature.
3. As you click each item in the Reference list, the entity is highlighted in the library feature window. Select
the corresponding entity in the target part window.
4. Select entities for Reference items listed as Optional, if desired. If you select the wrong entity, double-click
the item in the Reference list to deselect it, or click Deselect All.
5. When you are satisfied, click OK.
Change Dimensions
After inserting a feature from the Feature Palette, you can modify its dimensions.
Adding Color
You can apply color to a library feature either in its own document or in a target part.
14-6
Go Backward Back up through the list of folders
• Back
• Forward
• Reload
Folders
• You add individual items to a folder by placing parts, assemblies, forming tools (.sldprt) or library feature
parts (.sldlfp) in the appropriate folder.
• A folder can contain individual palette items, and other folders. You can have as many folders, and as many
levels of folders, as you want.
• You can store palette items anywhere you want; the folders do not have to be located in the default path. You
can have folders on different disk drives on your system, or on different computers on a network.
3. Click OK. If you change the paths while the Feature Palette window is open, click Reload to update
the paths.
The icons in the Feature Palette window identify the type of item that the folder contains (with large icons
only).
14-8
To add a palette item from a hyperlink in Internet Explorer:
1. Display the Feature Palette window, and navigate to the folder where you want to store the palette item.
2. In Internet Explorer (version 4.0 or later), navigate to a location that contains hyperlinks to SolidWorks
palette items.
For example, on the SolidWorks web site, in the Gallery, Model Library section, navigate to the Solid
Modeling Library page. You may also be able to obtain SolidWorks palette items from third-party vendors.
3. Drag a hyperlink from the Internet Explorer window, and drop it in the Feature Palette window. The
document is saved in the specified folder.
NOTE:You can also just open a hyperlinked item, without adding it to the palette.
To open the document, drag it to an empty area of the SolidWorks window. Then you can decide if you want
to add the item to the palette, save it to a different folder, or close it without saving.
See also Forming Tools when using the Feature Palette window with sheet metal parts.
Thumbnail Graphics
When you save a palette item, the thumbnail graphic reflects the view when the document is saved. Be sure to orient
the part or assembly so that the thumbnail graphic looks the way you want it to look.
To make it clear which features are included in a palette feature, consider changing the color in the library feature
part. Thumbnail graphics use a palette of 16 colors; if the color you choose for the feature is not available, the
software replaces it with a similar color in the thumbnail graphic. See Adding Color.
NOTE: In the target part, palette features that consist of more than one feature use the color specified for Library
Features under Tools, Options, on the Document Properties tab, select Colors.
Palette features that consist of a single feature are automatically dissolved when you add them. Therefore they use the
color specified for the individual feature type.
Another way to emphasize the features is to select them, then click Zoom to Selection before you save the
library feature part. That way, the thumbnail graphic provides a close-up view of the included features.
3. Click Reload on the toolbar in the Feature Palette window to update the folders.
14-10
4. Click Modify Sketch on the
Sketch toolbar, and move or rotate
the sketch as needed. See Modify
Sketch for more information.
If the feature has locating
dimensions, they are left dangling,
and are displayed in brown.
5. Re-attach the dangling dimensions. Select a dimension, then drag the red handle on the dimension line.
The pointer has the shape until it is over a suitable entity for re-attachment. When you release the
handle over an edge or vertex, the dimension re-attaches and the handle turns green.
You can also add geometric relations to control the position of the sketch.
6. Adjust the values of the locating dimensions. (Double-click the dimension, change the value, and press
Enter.) You can also adjust the locating dimensions in the next step, or later, by editing the appropriate
sketch.
7. Click Next in the Edit This Sketch dialog box.
The Change Dimensions dialog box appears.
The Name and Value of each available dimension is displayed. If the dimensions are named in the part
where you created the library feature, those names are used. Otherwise, the default dimension names D1
through Dn are used.
Some dimensions of the feature may be unavailable, because they are specified as Internal Dimensions.
See Dimension Access.
9. When you are satisfied with the dimension values, click Finish.
If the palette item consists of more than one feature, a library feature icon appears in the FeatureManager
design tree. If the palette item consists of a single feature, the item is automatically dissolved, and the
appropriate icon for the feature type appears in the FeatureManager design tree. In either case, the name of
the feature is the name of the item in the Feature Palette window.
1. Click Modify Sketch on the Sketch toolbar, and move or rotate the sketch as needed.
2. Re-attach any dangling dimensions (displayed in brown). Select a dimension, drag the red handle on the
dimension line, and drop it on a suitable entity for re-attachment (edge or vertex).
3. Adjust the values of the locating dimensions. You can either do this now (by double-clicking and editing the
dimensions), or later.
NOTE: If the palette feature does not include dimensions that locate the feature on the face, you can use the
• To move a dimension from one list to the other, click the name, then click the left or right
arrow button. As you click each name, the dimension is displayed in the model.
Internal Dimensions
For some types of parts, such as sheet metal forming tools and library feature parts, you may want to prevent other
users from changing certain dimensions.
When you drag one of these items into a part document (from the Feature Palette window, or from Windows
Explorer, or from a hyperlink in Internet Explorer), the dimensions are displayed, and available for editing. To
prevent other users from making unwanted changes when they use these items, you can control the access to each
dimension.
14-12
15
Sheet Metal
Sheet Metal
Sheet metal parts are generally used as enclosures for components or to provide support to other components.
You can design a sheet metal part on its own without any references to the parts it will enclose, or you can design the
part in the context of an assembly that contains the enclosed components.
This chapter introduces the SolidWorks sheet metal functionality and describes:
• Designing Sheet Metal with Sheet Metal-Specific Features
• Designing a Solid Body, Then Converting it to a Sheet Metal Part
• Comparing Sheet Metal Design Methods
• Other Sheet Metal Topics:
o Adding and Editing Bends
o Bend Allowance and Bend Deduction
o Flattening Bends in a Sheet Metal Part
o Adding and Editing Auto Reliefs
o Inserting Rips
o Making Lofted Bends
o Creating Sketched Bends
o Adding Hems
o Creating Jogs
o Breaking Corners
o Mirroring a Sheet Metal Part
o Creating Flat Pattern Configurations
o Using Forming Tools with Sheet Metal
o Creating Drawings of Sheet Metal Parts
Base Flange
A base flange is the first feature in a new sheet metal part. When you add a base flange feature to a SolidWorks part,
the part is marked as a sheet metal part. Bends are added wherever appropriate, and sheet metal specific features are
added to the FeatureManager design tree.
Some additional items to note about a base flange feature:
• The Base-Flange feature is created from a sketch. The sketch can be a single open, a single closed, or
multiple-enclosed profiles.
• There can be only one base flange feature in a SolidWorks part.
• The thickness and bend radius of the Base-Flange feature become the default values for the other sheet metal
features.
2. Click Base-Flange/Tab on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Base Flange.
The controls on the Base Flange PropertyManager update according to your sketch. For example, the
Direction 1 and Direction 2 boxes do not appear for a sketch with a single closed profile.
3. If necessary, under Direction 1 and Direction 2, set the parameters for the End Condition and Depth .
4. Under Sheet Metal Parameters:
• Clear Use relief ratio and set a value for Relief Width and Relief Depth .
7. Click OK .
15-2
When Flat-Pattern1 is:
• suppressed, all new features are inserted above it in the FeatureManager design tree
• unsuppressed, all new features are inserted below in the FeatureManager design tree and are not shown in
the folded part
Edge Flange
The Edge Flange feature adds a flange to your sheet metal part at an edge that you select.
Here are some items to note about an edge flange feature:
• The selected edge must be linear.
• The thickness is automatically linked to the thickness of the sheet metal part.
• One sketch line of the profile must lie on the selected edge.
1. In an open sheet metal part, click Edge Flange on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet
Metal, Edge Flange.
The Edge-Flange PropertyManager appears.
2. In the graphics area, select the edge where you want to place the feature.
For example, if you select Blind, you must set the Length and Outer Virtual Sharp or Inner
Virtual Sharp to determine where the length is measured from. You can also click Reverse Direction
• Set the bend position to Material Inside , Material Outside , Bend Outside , or
Bend from Virtual Sharp . See Bend Positions for a description of each of these selections.
• To remove extra material in neighboring bends, select the Trim side bends check box.
• To offset the flange from the sheet metal body, select the Offset check box. Then, set the Offset
End Condition and its corresponding parameters.
7. To use something other than the default bend allowance, select the Custom Bend Allowance check box,
and set a bend allowance type and value.
8. If you want relief cuts added automatically, select the Custom Relief Type check box, then select the type of
relief cut. If you select Rectangular or Obround, then you must specify a Relief Ratio.
9. Click OK .
Profile Sketch
You can edit the profile sketch of an edge flange. The profile sketch has the following requirements:
• One sketch line of the profile must lie on the edge you selected when creating the Edge Flange. This
sketched line does not have to be the same length as the selected edge.
• The profile can be a single open, a single closed, or multiple-enclosed profiles.
Miter Flange
A miter flange feature adds a series of flanges to one or more edges of a sheet metal part.
Some items to note about a miter flange feature:
• The sketch for a miter flange must adhere to the following requirements:
o The sketch can contain lines or arcs.
If you use an arc to create a miter flange, the arc cannot be tangent to the thickness edge. The
arc can be tangent to the long edges, or by putting a small sketch line between the arc and the
thickness edge. Click here for an example of creating a sketch for a miter flange with arcs.
o The Miter Flange profile can contain more than one continuous line. For example, it can be an
L-shaped profile.
o The sketch plane must be normal to the first edge where the Miter Flange is created. Click here for
instructions to create a sketch for a miter flange.
• The thickness is automatically linked to the thickness of the sheet metal part.
• You can create a miter flange feature on a series of tangent or non-tangent edges. Click here for an
illustration of each.
• Instead of creating a miter flange across the entire edge of a sheet metal part, you can specify an offset of the
flange.
15-4
2. Click Miter Flange on the Sheet Metal
toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Miter Flange.
The first edge for the Miter Flange feature is
selected and a preview of the Miter Flange appears
in the graphics area.
3. In the graphics area, select the edges to miter for Along Edges .
To select all of the edges tangent to the selected edge, click Propagate that appears at the
midpoint of the selected edge.
Bend Radius .
• Set the Flange position to Material Inside , Material Outside , or Bend Outside .
See Bend Positions for a description of each of these selections.
• Select Trim side bends to remove extra material in neighboring bends.
• Set Gap distance to use something other than the default gap.
5. If necessary, specify the offset distances for a partial miter flange:
• Under Start/End Offset set a value for Start Offset Distance and End Offset Distance
. (If you want the miter flange to span the entire edge of the model, set these values to zero.)
• Select Custom Relief Type, and select a Relief type of: Rectangular, Tear, or Obround. If you
selected Rectangular or Obround:
o Select Use relief ratio and set a value for Ratio.
- or -
o Clear Use relief ratio and set a value for Relief Width and Relief Depth .
• To use something other than the default bend allowance, select Custom Bend Allowance, and set
a bend allowance type and value.
6. Click OK .
The miter flange is added to the sheet metal
part.
Valid sketch: Arc is tangent Valid sketch: Line is coincident to Invalid sketch: Arc is
to long edge thickness edge, and arc is tangent tangent to thickness edge
to line
15-6
Miter Flange - Edge Selection
Tangent Edges
Non-tangent Edges
Bend Positions
In a Miter Flange, Edge Flange, Sketched Bend, Hem, or Jog, you have to select a bend position. The following table
explains your choices.
No preview available.
Bend Centerline . The bend line is placed
such that it equally splits the bend region in the
flattened part. This is available only for
Sketched-Bend features.
15-8
Sheet Metal Tab
A Tab feature adds a tab to the sheet metal part. The depth of a Tab feature is automatically set to the thickness of the
sheet metal part. The direction of the depth automatically coincides with the sheet metal part to prevent a disjoint body.
Here are some additional items to note about a Tab:
Sketched Bend
You can add bend lines to the sheet metal part while the part is in its folded state with a sketched bend feature. This
allows you to dimension the bend line to other folded-up geometry.
Some items to note about a sketched bend feature:
• Only lines are allowed in the sketch. You can add more than one line per sketch.
• The bend line does not have to be the exact length of the faces you are bending.
A Sketched Bend feature is commonly used with a Tab feature to bend the tab.
if necessary.
6. To use something other than the default bend radius, clear
8. Click OK .
Hem
The Hem tool adds a hem to your sheet metal part at a selected edge.
Here are some additional items to note about the Hem tool:
• The selected edge must be linear.
• Mitered corners are automatically added to intersecting hems.
• If you select multiple edges to add a hem, the edges must lie on the same face.
1. In an open sheet metal part, click Hem on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Hem.
2. In the graphics area, select the edges where you want to add a hem.
• Select Material Inside or Bend Outside to specify where to add the material.
• Click Reverse Direction to create the hem on the opposite side of the part.
15-10
4. Under Type and Size:
a. Click a hem type:
o Closed
o Open
o Tear Drop
o Rolled
b. Set:
5. Under Miter Gap, set Rip Gap if you have intersecting hems. Mitered corners are
automatically added to intersecting hems, and you can set the gap between these hems.
6. To use something other than the default bend allowance, select Custom Bend Allowance, and set
a bend allowance type and value.
7. Click OK .
Closed Corner
You can create a Closed Corner feature to extend one face of a Butt rip so it overlaps the other face of the Butt rip.
This is shown as follows:
Here are some additional items to note about a Closed Corner feature:
• You can close more than one corner at a time. Select the faces for all of the rips that you want to close.
• You can select only planar faces to close. The planar faces must be perpendicular to each other.
• A closed corner cannot be applied in some cases where flange angles are not 90°.
To close a corner:
or Underlap .
5. Click OK .
The face is extended to close the corner.
15-12
Designing a Solid Body, then Converting it to Sheet Metal
Bend Types
Three types of bends are available when converting a solid body to a sheet metal part. These bends are: sharp bends,
round bends, and flat bends.
Sharp Bends
A sharp bend is created by adding bends to a model that has sharp corners and a uniform thickness.
Round Bends
A round bend can be created by adding bends to a model that has filleted or rounded corners and a uniform thickness.
Round bends can also be created from cylindrical and conical faces.
Flat Bends
A flat bend is created from a bend line sketched in the flattened sheet metal part. These lines are sketched in
Flat-Sketch1 under Process-Bends1 in the FeatureManager design tree. The lines across the model in the illustration
below on the left are sketched bend lines.
7. Click OK .
A bent sheet metal part is created whose dimensions in the flattened
state reflect the specified bend allowance and radius values.
2. Click OK .
3. Click Insert Bends on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Bends.
4. In the PropertyManager, under Bend Parameters, set the following:
a. Fixed Face or Edge . In the graphics area, click a fixed face on the model. The fixed face
remains in place when the part is flattened.
b. Bend Radius . Set the value to zero, because the radius is propagated from the Bend Radius
under Thin Feature.
5. Under Bend Allowance, select from: Bend Table, K-Factor, Bend Allowance, or Bend Deduction.
6. If you selected K-Factor, Bend Allowance, or Bend Deduction, set a value.
7. If you want relief cuts added automatically, select Auto Relief, then
choose the type of relief cut. If you choose Rectangular or
Obround, set a Relief Ratio.
The options and values you specify for bend radius, bend
allowance, and auto relief are shown as the default settings for the
next new sheet metal part that you create.
8. Click OK .
A bent sheet metal part is created whose dimensions in the flattened
state reflect the specified bend allowance and radius values.
15-14
Creating Sheet Metal Parts with Conical Faces
Parts with conical faces can also be made of sheet metal.
To create a sheet metal part with conical faces:
1. Create a thin feature part with one or more conical faces:
7. Click OK .
NOTE: Only parts with exact analytic conical faces can be unfolded. Oblong or non-right angle cones are not
supported. As a test, try to insert an axis on the conical face. If you can insert an axis, the model is an exact cone. If
you cannot insert an axis, then the model is not an exact cone and cannot be unfolded. However, sheet metal parts
created with the Lofted Bends feature avoid this limitation and unfold appropriately.
You cannot add walls to cylindrical or conical faces on sheet metal parts.
2. Select a linear edge of a planar face on the model to attach the wall to, and click Convert Entities on
the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Sketch Tools, Convert Entities.
3. Drag the vertices near existing bends a small distance away from the bends to allow for the bend radius.
4. Click Extruded Boss/Base on the Features toolbar, or click Insert, Boss/Base, Extrude.
5. In the PropertyManager, under Direction 1:
a. Select Blind in End Condition.
6. Under Thin Feature, set Thickness to the same value as the base part.
7. Click OK .
If a message appears warning of a disjoint body, click Reverse Direction under Thin Feature, then
click OK again.
15-16
Sheet Metal Features
When you click Insert Bends or Insert, Sheet Metal, Bends, two distinct stages are applied to the sheet metal
part.
• The part is flattened and a bend allowance is added. The developed length is calculated, based on the bend
radius and bend allowance.
• The flattened part is restored to the folded state to create the bent version of the part.
Three features appear in the FeatureManager design tree that are specific to sheet metal operations. These three
features represent a process plan for the sheet metal part:
Sheet-Metal contains the definition of the sheet metal part. This feature stores
the default bend parameter information (thickness, bend radius, bend allowance,
auto relief ratio, and fixed entity) for the entire part.
The imported parts must be of uniform thickness to fold and unfold properly.
2. Click Insert Bends on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Bends.
4. Click OK .
The part converts to a SolidWorks sheet metal part. The FeatureManager design tree contains Sheet-Metal1
, Flatten-Bends1 , and Process-Bends1 features. The part can now be flattened and bent as a
sheet metal part by toggling the suppression state of the Process-Bends feature.
When you create a part initially out of sheet metal you use two features: Base-Flange and Miter Flange.
However, if you build a solid, then convert it to sheet metal, you need more features: Base Extrude, Shell,
Rip, and Insert Bends. It is much faster to create a part as sheet metal instead of creating a part, then
converting it to sheet metal.
15-18
Design a Part from a Solid, Then Convert it to Sheet Metal
It is possible to create a solid part, then convert it to sheet metal to add the bends and sheet metal features.
3. To bend the part, rip the block between the edges of the tabs
8. To restore the part to the bent state, drag the rollback bar to the
bottom of the FeatureManager design tree.
Design a Part from the Flattened State, Then Convert it to Sheet Metal
It is possible to create a flattened part, then convert it to sheet metal to add the bends and sheet metal features.
15-20
4. Convert the part to sheet metal by clicking Insert Bends ,
or Insert, Sheet Metal, Bends.
5. Bend the sheet metal part by adding bend lines to the Flat-
Sketch. Sketch three lines on the Flat-Sketch as shown.
6. Close the sketch. The sheet metal part bends on the lines you
sketched.
7. Once the sheet metal part is in its folded state, you can still
add features to the part by dragging the Rollback Bar before
the Sheet-Metal features in the FeatureManager design tree.
This insures that the new features appear in both the bent and
flattened states.
already in the model. Using Insert Bends is your best option for converting the imported file to a
SolidWorks sheet metal part.
• Conical Bends. Conical bends are not supported by the sheet metal-specific features, such as Base Flange,
Edge Flange, and so on. Therefore, you must build the part using extrusions, revolves, and so on, then
convert it to add bends to a conical sheet metal part.
where:
where:
15-22
K-Factor
K-Factor is a ratio that represents the location of the neutral sheet with respect to the thickness of the sheet metal part.
When you select K-Factor as the bend allowance, you can specify a K-Factor bend table. The SolidWorks application
also comes with a K-Factor bend table in Microsoft Excel format. This is located in
<installation_directory>\lang\English\Sheetmetal Bend Tables\kfactor base bend table.xls.
Bend allowance with a K-Factor is calculated as follows:
BA = Π ( R + KT )A ⁄ 180
where:
BA = bend allowance
R = inside bend radius
K = K-Factor, which is t / T
T = material thickness
t = distance from inside face to neutral sheet
A = bend angle in degrees (the angle through which
the material is bent)
When you share your part with a colleague, you When you share your part with a colleague, your
must remember to share your bend table as well. bend table is automatically included because it is
embedded.
Text tables can be edited in a variety of Excel spreadsheets can be edited in Microsoft
applications. Excel only.
NOTES:
• It is recommended that you use the Excel spreadsheet unless you have legacy bend tables from SolidWorks
2000 or earlier.
• If you edit a bend table that has multiple bend thickness tables, the radii and angles must be the same. For
example, if you insert a new bend radius value into a bend table with multiple bend thickness tables, you
must insert the new value in all of the tables.
You can edit a bend table in a separate Excel window. Click Edit, Bend Table, Edit Table in New Window.
If you get a message that says inserting a bend table may cause the developed length of the flat pattern
to change, click Yes.
2. In the dialog box:
a. Select an item in Units to set the unit of measurement.
b. Select an item in Type to set the bend allowance or bend deduction.
c. Type a path for File name, or click Browse to locate a path where you want to save the bend table.
d. Click OK.
An embedded Excel window, containing the bend table spreadsheet, appears in the SolidWorks window. The
bend table spreadsheet contains default radius, thickness, and angle values.
3. Type the bend allowance or bend deduction values to the spreadsheet, depending on your choice for Type in
step 2.
4. Click outside the table, but within the SolidWorks graphics area, to close the spreadsheet.
15-24
Bend Allowance Value
You can specify an explicit bend allowance for any sheet metal bend by entering the value when you create the bend.
NOTE: By definition, the bend allowance is the arc length of the bend as measured along the neutral axis of the
material.
Forming Tools
Forming tools act as dies that bend, stretch, or otherwise form sheet metal. The SolidWorks software includes some
sample forming tools to get you started. They are stored in
<install_dir>\data\Palette Forming Tools\<folder_name>.
You can only insert forming tools from the Feature Palette window and you can apply them only to sheet metal
parts. A sheet metal part has the Sheet-Metal1 feature in the FeatureManager design tree. You can create your own
forming tools using many of the same steps you use to create any SolidWorks part. You apply forming tools to sheet
metal parts to create form features such as louvers, lances, flanges, and ribs.
Examine the sample forming tools before creating your own. You may find that by editing a sample forming tool, you
can create a forming tool that meets your needs.
When you apply a forming tool to a sheet metal part, the origin lies where you drop the forming tool.
3. Extrude the profile for the base feature
upwards as shown.
NOTES:
The horizontal plane is the stopping surface of the forming tool. Therefore, the entire forming tool must lie
below the stopping surface.
The minimum radius of curvature of the forming tool must be greater than the thickness of the sheet metal
part to which it is applied. To determine the minimum radius of curvature of the forming tool, click Tools,
Check.
6. Remove the base feature of the
forming tool, so only the form feature
remains:
a. Open a sketch on the bottom
face of the base feature, and
15-26
Creating Openings on Forming Tools
Some types of form features, such as louvers and lances, create openings on sheet metal parts. To indicate which
forming tool faces create openings, change the color of these faces to red.
To create an opening on a forming tool:
1. Right-click the face designed to create an opening, and select Properties under Face.
2. In the dialog box, set Red to 255, Green to 0, and Blue to 0.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Rebuild .
1. Open a sketch on the top face of the boss feature on the forming tool.
2. Create a profile to locate the form feature on the sheet metal part.
One method to create a profile is to click Convert Entities on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools,
Sketch Tools, Convert Entities.
3. Click Reload on the toolbar in the Feature Palette window to update the folders.
15-28
Relief Ratio
The distance d represents the width of the Rectangular or Obround relief cut and the depth by which the side of the
Rectangular or Obround relief cut extends past the bend region. The distance d is determined by the following
equation:
d = (relief ratio) * (part thickness)
The bend region is represented by the dark gray area of the diagram.
The value of the relief ratio must be between 0.05 and 2.0. The higher the value, the larger the size of the relief cut
added during insertion of bends.
Depth , or select Use relief ratio and set a value for Relief Ratio.
4. Click OK .
You cannot edit relief cuts in sheet metal parts created in versions prior to SolidWorks 99.
Rip
Creates a rip feature along the selected model edges. A rip feature is commonly used in sheet metal parts, but you can
add a rip feature to any part.
2. Click Rip on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Rip.
The Rip PropertyManager appears.
3. On the model, select the internal linear edges to rip.
Note the arrows that appear on each selected edge. By default, rips are inserted in both directions. To insert a
rip in only one direction, click the name of the edge listed under Edges to Rip, and click Change Direction.
The rip direction toggles every time you click Change Direction to one direction, then the other direction,
then back to both directions.
4. To change the gap distance, clear the Use default gap check box, and type a value in the Rip Gap box.
5. Click OK .
Both directions:
One direction:
15-30
Bends
The Bends PropertyManager allows you to create a sheet metal part. When you use the Insert Bends tool, you must
create a solid body, then use Insert Bends to convert the part to sheet metal. Alternatively, you can create a part
directly out of sheet metal with a Base-Flange.
1. In a part made of uniform thickness, click Insert Bends on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert,
Sheet Metal, Bends.
The Bends PropertyManager appears.
2. Under Bend Parameters, do the following:
6. If desired, select an edge to rip under Rip Parameters , and do the following:.
• Click Change Direction if you want to reverse the direction of the rip.
• Clear the Use default gap check box if you want to set a gap distance, and type the value in the Rip
Gap box.
7. Click OK .
The bends are added, and the part is converted to sheet metal.
Edit Bends
You can edit the bend parameters for a single bend, for a group of bends, or for your entire sheet metal part. The bend
parameters include the default bend radius, and the bend allowance or bend deduction values. Select from the
following:
• Edit a single bend.
• Edit a group of bends.
• Edit all the bends in your sheet metal part.
Reorder Bends
You can reorder the bends in a sheet metal part in which bends have been inserted.
If you created the sheet metal part with the Insert Bends feature, right-click Process-Bends1, and
select Reorder Bends.
2. In the dialog box, click a bend name in the list, then click Move Up or Move Down to change the bend
order.
3. Repeat step 2 to move additional bends.
4. Click OK.
When you flatten the entire part in this manner, corner treatments are applied to create a clean,
flattened sheet metal part.
• To flatten the entire part, if the Process-Bends1 feature is present, suppress Process-Bends1, or click
Flattened on the Sheet Metal toolbar.
For faster system performance, only unfold the bends that you need for the task that you are
performing. For example, when you add a cut across a bend, only unfold that one bend.
No Bends
You can roll back all bends from a sheet metal part in which bends have been inserted so that you can make additions,
such as adding a wall. This is available only in sheet metal parts with Flatten-Bends1 and Process-Bends1 features.
To roll back all bends from a sheet metal part:
This step is not necessary if you start your sheet metal part from a Base Flange feature.
15-32
2. Under Bend Allowance, select from the following: Bend Table, K-Factor, Bend Allowance, or Bend
Deduction.
3. If you selected K-Factor, Bend Allowance, or Bend Deduction, set a value.
4. If you want relief cuts added automatically, select Auto Relief, then select the type of relief cut. If you
selected Rectangular or Obround, then you must set a Relief Ratio.
5. Click OK .
4. Click OK .
The entire part is mirrored as well as the sheet metal
bends.
1. In an existing sheet metal part, click Unfold or Insert, Sheet Metal, Unfold.
The Unfold PropertyManager appears.
3. Click OK .
The selected bend only is unfolded.
4. Sketch a closed profile across the flattened bend, and Extrude the
cut Through All.
5. To restore the part to the bent state, click Fold or Insert, Sheet
Metal, Fold.
The Fold PropertyManager appears.
7. Click OK .
The selected bends fold.
15-34
Normal Cut
When adding a cut to a folded sheet metal part, you can select the Normal cut check box to ensure that the cut is
created normal to the sheet metal thickness. The Normal cut check box is selected by default for sheet metal features,
and is located in the Cut-Extrude PropertyManager. The effect of a Normal cut is illustrated below:
Break Corner/Corner-Trim
The Break Corner tool cuts away material from a folded sheet metal part on an edge or a face. The Corner-Trim
tool cuts material away from a flattened sheet metal part on an edge or a face.
If you use the Corner-Trim tool when your sheet metal part is in Flattened mode, the SolidWorks software
suppresses the feature when the part is folded.
2. Click Break-Corner/Corner-Trim on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Break
Corner.
The Break Corner PropertyManager appears. If the part is flattened, the Corner-Trim PropertyManager
appears.
3. Under Break Corner Options select from:
• Corner edges . In the graphics area, click the corner edges to which you want to apply relief
cuts.
A preview of the relief cuts appears in the graphics area. The preview is not an exact
representation of the geometry.
• Relief type. Select a relief type to apply to the corner edge. If you select Circular or Bend Waist,
set the Radius . If you select Square, set the Side length .
5. Click OK .
The selected corners are broken.
Jog
The Jog tool adds material to a sheet metal part by creating two bends from a sketched line.
Some additional items to note about the Jog tool:
• The sketch must contain only one line.
• The line does not need to be horizontal or vertical.
• The bend line does not have to be the exact length of the faces you are bending.
15-36
To create a jog feature on a sheet metal part:
.
• Select Fix projected length if you want the face of the jog to stay the same length.
6. Under Jog Position, select: Bend Centerline , Material Inside , Material Outside , or
Bend Outside .
9. Click OK .
Original part Fix projected length selected Fix projected length cleared
Lofted Bend
You can create a lofted bend in sheet metal parts. A lofted bend, similar to a loft feature, uses two sketches that are
connected by a loft. The Base-Flange feature is not used with the Lofted Bend feature.
Begin with two open profile Use Lofted Bends to create a solid Lofted bend is complete.
sketches. feature.
The SolidWorks software contains several pre-made sheet metal parts created with lofted bends. These parts are
located in <install_dir>\data\Palette Parts\sheetmetal\lofted bends.
NOTES:
• When a lofted bend is represented with a lofted surface (B-spline), as is created by a square to circle profile,
it cannot use K-Factor or Bend Allowance in the sheet metal calculations.
• When a lofted bend is represented as a conical or cylindrical bend, such as a loft between concentric circular
arcs, then it behaves in the same way as a cylindrical or conical bend in that it uses K-Factor or Bend
Allowance to calculate the bends.
• Lofted bends cannot be mirrored.
15-38
4. Examine the path preview. If necessary, click Move
7. Click OK .
Bend Deviation
When you create a lofted bend, you can examine the surface area and curve lengths of the bend. These items are
located in the Bend Deviation PropertyManager.
2. Click OK .
15-40
7. If you want relief cuts added automatically, select the Auto Relief check box, then choose the type of relief
cut. If you choose Rectangular or Obround, then you must specify a Relief Ratio.
NOTE: The options and values you specify for bend radius, bend allowance, and auto relief are shown as
the default settings for the next new sheet metal part that you create.
8. Click OK .
NOTE: Only parts with exact analytic cylindrical faces can be unfolded. As a test, try to insert an axis on the
cylindrical face. If you can insert an axis, the model is an exact cylinder. If you cannot insert an axis, then the model
is not an exact cylinder and cannot be unfolded. However, sheet metal parts created with the Lofted Bends feature
avoid this limitation and unfold appropriately.
If the PropertyManager does not appear, click Model View on the Drawing toolbar, or click
Insert, Drawing View, Model.
3. Click Next .
6. Click OK .
If you want to toggle the suppression of additional features in a flat pattern, create a part
configuration of a flat pattern, then select a drawing view for it.
1. In the drawing window, expand Drawing View in the FeatureManager design tree to show the
Flat-Pattern feature. Expand the Flat-Pattern feature.
To toggle the visibility of the bend region lines in a flat pattern view:
Flat Pattern
The Flat-Pattern1 feature is intended to be the last feature in the folded sheet metal part. All features before
Flat-Pattern1 in the FeatureManager design tree appear in both the folded and flattened sheet metal part. All features
after Flat-Pattern1 appear only in the flattened sheet metal part.
Some items to note about the flat-pattern feature:
• New features in folded part. When Flat-Pattern1 is suppressed, all features that you add to the part
automatically appear before this feature in the FeatureManager design tree.
• New features in flattened part. You flatten the entire sheet metal part by unsuppressing Flat-Pattern1. To
add features to the flattened sheet metal part, you must first unsuppress Flat-Pattern1.
• Reorder features. You cannot reorder sheet metal features to go below Flat-Pattern1 in the FeatureManager
design tree. So, you cannot order a cut with the Normal cut option underneath Flat-Pattern1.
• Modify parameters. You can modify the parameters of Flat-Pattern1 to control how the part bends, to
enable or disable corner options, and to control the visibility of the bend region in the flattened sheet metal
part.
To modify the parameters of the Flat-Pattern1 feature:
1. Right-click Flat-Pattern1 in the FeatureManager design tree, and select Edit Feature.
2. In the PropertyManager, under Parameters:
• In the graphics area, select a face that does not move as a result of the feature for Fixed face .
• Select Merge faces to merge faces that are planar and coincident in the flat pattern.
When selected, no lines are shown in the bend regions.
• Select Simplify bends to straighten curved edges in the flat pattern.
3. Under Corner Options:
• Select Corner Treatment to apply smooth edges in the flat pattern.
• Select Add Corner-Trim to apply relief cuts in the flat pattern. When selected, you can choose
from:
o Break corners. Cuts away material from an edge or a face. Click Chamfer or Fillet
as the Break type and set the Distance or Radius .
o Relief type. Sets the relief type for any relief cuts needed.
o Radius or Side length. Set the Radius or Side length for the Relief type.
o Ratio to thickness. Sets the relief type radius to a specified ratio of the sheet metal
thickness. When selected, set the Ratio of radius/distance to sheet metal thickness.
4. Click OK .
15-42
Merge Faces
When you select the Merge faces check box, no lines are shown in bend regions of the flat pattern. Here is an
example of merged faces:
Simplify Bends
When you select the Simplify bends check box, curves are straightened out in the flat pattern. When this option is not
selected, complex edges remain in the flat pattern. Here is an example of simplified bends:
Corner Treatment
When you flatten a sheet metal part by unsuppressing the Flat-Pattern feature, corner treatments are automatically
applied to create a clean, flattened sheet metal part. The corner treatments are applied so the flat pattern is correct for
manufacturing. To turn off corner treatments, right-click Flat-Pattern1, and select Edit Feature. In the
PropertyManager, clear Corner Treatment. Here is an example of corner treatments:
Add Corner-Trim
Circular relief type Square relief type Bend waist relief type
To ensure that all features are shown in a flat pattern, you should create the flat pattern configuration after the
entire design pattern of the part is complete.
15-44
Unfold/Fold
With the Unfold and Fold tools, you can flatten and bend one, more than one, or all of the bends in a sheet metal part.
This combination is useful when adding a cut across a bend. First, add an Unfold feature to flatten the bend. Next, add
your cut. Lastly, add a Fold feature to return the bend to its folded state.
For faster system performance, unfold and fold only the bends that you need for the task that you are
performing.
1. In a sheet metal part, click Unfold on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Unfold.
2. In the graphics area, select a face that does not move as a result of the feature for Fixed face .
3. Select one or more bends as the Bends to unfold , or click Collect All Bends to select all the
appropriate bends in the part.
4. Click OK .
The selected bends unfold.
1. In a sheet metal part, click Fold on the Sheet Metal toolbar, or click Insert, Sheet Metal, Fold.
2. In the graphics area, select a face that does not move as a result of the feature for Fixed face .
3. Select one or more bends as the Bends to fold , or click Collect All Bends to select all the appropriate
bends in the part.
4. Click OK .
The selected bends fold.
15-46
16
Weldments
Weldments Toolbar
Weldment
Structural Member
Gusset
End Cap
Fillet Bead
Trim/Extend
When you add the first structural member to an existing layout sketch, adding the structural member defines the
model as weldment feature.
The weldment feature sets up a design functionality environment. It is not a feature in the same context as a fillet is a
feature in the SolidWorks environment.
When you insert a weldment feature, it activates the multibody environment by clearing the Merge result check box
in the PropertyManager of features that add material.
The weldment feature also acts as a placeholder for common custom properties that are inherited by all cut list items.
All structural members include the following attributes:
• Structural members use profiles, for example an angle iron.
• Profiles are identified by Type, Size, and Standard (iso and ansi inch). Each profile Type includes multiple sizes.
• Structural members can include multiple segments, but all segments can use only one profile.
• Multiple structural members, each with a different profile, can belong to the same weldment part.
• Two structural members can only share a single point.
Using linear sketch entities, you can create multiple 2D sketches with planes, create a 3D sketch, or
combine 2D and 3D sketches.
2. Click Structural Member on the Weldments toolbar, or click Insert, Weldments, Structural Member.
16-2
As you select the structural members, Settings appears. Under Settings you can:
• Apply a corner treatment, or clear Apply corner treatment to specify a corner treatment later.
For example, you can apply the corner treatment when you trim the structural members.
You can also modify the corner treatment, allowing you to specify multiple corner treatments per
structural member.
• Change Rotation Angle so that the structural member turns by a set number of degrees
relative to the adjacent structural member.
• Click Locate Profile to change the pierce point between the adjacent structural members. The
default pierce point is the sketch origin.
5. Click OK .
This clears Path segments, and allows you to apply additional, consecutive structural members.
6. Select the second set of structural members. If necessary, you can apply a different Standard, Type, and
Size.
7. Click OK to clear the Path segments, and to create additional structural members.
5. Click OK .
16-4
3. Click the corner you want to modify.
The Corner treatment pop-up toolbar appears.
5. Click OK .
You can trim structural members with planar faces so they butt up correctly in the weldment part.
• To trim a structural member with a planar face, such as a square tube, select one structural member as the
Bodies to be Trimmed and another structural member as the Trimming Boundary.
• To trim a structural member with a non-planar face, such as a pipe, use other trim tools such as Extruded
Cut .
1 - Bodies to be Trimmed
2 - Trimming Boundary
Selecting Planar Face as the Trimming Boundary is normally more efficient and offers better
performance.
• Select an adjacent structural member in the graphics area as Face/Bodies.
5. Click OK .
16-6
Weldments - Adding Gussets
Gussets reinforce the area between two, intersecting structural members with planar faces. There are two types of
gussets:
• Triangular Profile
Triangular Profile
Under Supporting Faces:
• Select Faces . Select adjacent planar faces from two intersecting structural members.
• Flip Profile D1 and D2 Parameters . Flip the values between Profile Distance1 and
Profile Distance2.
Under Profile:
Set a value for Profile Distance1, and for Profile Distance2.
Profile Locates at Start Point Profile Locates at Mid Point Profile Locates at End Point
• Polygonal Profile
Polygonal Profile
Under Supporting Faces:
Profile Locates at Start Point Profile Locates at Mid Point Profile Locates at End Point
16-8
To add gussets:
o Inner Side
o Both Sides
o Outer Side
6. Click OK .
You can add full length, intermittent, or staggered fillet weld beads between any intersecting weldment entities such
as structural members, plate weldments, or gussets.
1. Click Fillet Bead on the Weldments toolbar, or click Insert, Weldments, Fillet Bead.
Annotation:
4 - Bead size. Radius of the fillet bead
3 - Bead length. Length of each bead segment. Only with Intermittent or Staggered.
6 - Bead pitch. Distance between the start of each bead. Only with Intermittent or Staggered.
Staggered. Creates fillet bead on both the Arrow Side and the Other Side.
Although you must select planar faces for the face sets, fillet weld beads can follow non-planar,
tangent contours when you select Tangent propagation.
16-10
f. Click in Face Set2 , then select a second, intersecting face.
The system assigns Virtual edges based on your selections for Face Set1 and Face Set2 .
A fillet weld bead preview appears along the edges between the intersecting faces.
4. Click Other Side.
If you selected Staggered as the Bead type, the Other Side is already displayed. With Staggered as
the Bead Type, apply the fillet weld bead to the opposite side.
Annotation:
4 - Bead size. Radius of the fillet bead
3 - Bead length. Length of each bead segment. Only with Intermittent or Staggered.
6 - Bead pitch. Distance between the start of each bead. Only with Intermittent or
Staggered.
Staggered. Creates fillet bead on both the Arrow Side and the Other Side.
e. Click in Face Set2 , and select the second, intersecting face for the Arrow Side.
The system assigns the Virtual edges based on your selections for Face Set1 and Face Set2 .
A fillet weld bead preview appears along the edges between the intersecting entities.
5. Click OK .
Fillet weld bead between structural Fillet weld bead between structural
member and gusset member and plate weldment
16-12
Weldments - End Caps
You can add end caps only to profiles with linear edges.
1. Click End Cap on the Weldments toolbar, or click Insert, Weldments, End Cap.
You can apply end caps to different open structural members. The opening
depends on the structural member and the corner treatment you applied.
Select Face
4. Under Offset:
a. Click Use thickness ratio to specify the offset distance of the end cap as a ratio of the thickness of the
structural member that is being capped.
5. Click OK .
Repeat steps 3 through 5 to cap any remaining open profiles.
Creating Sub-Weldments
You create sub-weldments to segment complex weldment models into more manageable entities. After you create
sub-weldments, you can create the cut lists used in drawings. Any changes made to a sub-weldment model are
reflected in the weldment model from which you created the sub-weldment.
Sub-weldments can include any entity listed in the Solid Bodies folder, including structural members, end caps,
gussets, weld fillet beads, and structural members trimmed with the Trim/Extend tool.
To create a sub-weldment:
1. In the FeatureManager design tree of the weldment model, expand the Solid Bodies folder.
2. Select the entities to include in the sub-weldment, using Shift or Ctrl to group-select.
The selected entities highlight in the graphics area.
3. Right-click and select Create sub-weldment.
A sub-weldment folder containing the selected entities appears under the Solid Bodies folder.
Weldment Drawings
16-14
Example of Weldment Cut List
To insert a weldment cut list in a drawing, first create cut list items in the weldment part document. Cut lists are
tables.
Example
To create cut list items:
1. In a weldment part document, under Solid Bodies, select bodies or sub-weldments to be included in a cut list
item.
You can group similar bodies, and sub-weldments, into one cut list item.
2. Right-click and select Create cut list item.
The bodies become absorbed features of the cut list item. The cut list item displays an instance number, plus
the number of its weldment items in parentheses.
Only top level items (bodies and sub-weldments) are listed in the cut list.
1. In a drawing, click Weldment Cut List on the Annotation toolbar, or click Insert, Tables, Weldment
Cut List.
2. Select a drawing view.
3. Specify properties in the Weldment Cut List PropertyManager, then click OK .
4. If you did not select Attach to anchor in the PropertyManager, click in the graphics area to place the cut list
Configurations
Weldments have two default configurations: Default <As Machined> and Default <As Welded>, where Default is
a user-specified name.
Different sizes of the same weldment are handled by configurations. The top level (a particular size of the body) is an
<As Machined> configuration. Underneath the top level is a derived state that is an <As Welded> configuration.
Weldment cut lists are always based on the Welded State configuration.
Custom Properties
Weldment cut lists include the item number (ITEM NO.) and quantity (QTY.) and cut list custom properties.
Custom properties for cut lists are different from custom properties at the document level. In weldment parts,
properties are included with cut list items created from structural members with Feature Palette profiles:
• DESCRIPTION
• LENGTH
You can add properties to the cut list items.
Table Template
Click Browse for template to choose a standard or custom template. This option is available only during table
insertion.
Table Anchor
Set the Anchored corner to:
16-16
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Attach to anchor. Attaches the specified corner to the table anchor.
Configurations
Cut lists are usually based on the Welded State configuration.
Item Numbers
Start at. The cut list starts with the number displayed.
Do not change item number. Click for item numbers to remain with their rows when columns are sorted or re-
ordered.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
Specify the columns to be included in a weldment cut list and their position in the table.
To add a new column to the table, right-click in a table column and select Insert, Column Right or Column
Left. You cannot add columns from within the PropertyManager.
To access the Column PropertyManager, click at the head of a column when the pointer changes to .
Column Properties
For the selected column, choose one of the following column types, listed with its header title. You can edit the
header in the Title box below.
• Item number. ITEM NO. Data in the Item Number custom property for the cut list items populates the
column.
• Quantity. QTY. Data in the Quantity custom property for the cut list items populates the column.
• Cut list item name. The name of the cut list item (Cut-List-Item1, for example) in the part document
populates the column.
• User defined. Edit <New Column> in Title for the column header. Enter data into the column manually.
• Cut list item property. Custom properties for cut list items in the part document. Select a property from
the list below and edit text for the column header in Title. Properties such as DESCRIPTION and
LENGTH are available automatically for bodies created through the Feature Palette. You can add other
custom properties for cut list items.
Properties. List of document's custom properties, available when you specify Cut list item property under Column
Properties.
Title. Edit the text of the column header.
Column position. Click Move Column Left or Move Column Right to move the selected column.
Cell Properties
Click to access the Table Cell PropertyManager.
Table Properties
Click to access the Weldment Cut List PropertyManager.
Table Format
Click to access the Table Format PropertyManager.
In a weldment part, the custom properties for the weldments feature and for the cut list represent a different list from
the custom properties that are stored at the document level. The list of optional custom property names is located:
lang\<language>\weldments\weldmentproperties.txt.
The profile library parts may carry any commonly used custom properties. For example, profiles supplied with the
SolidWorks application include the custom property Description.
In case of naming conflicts between the weldment feature and the weldment profile, the profile name takes pre-
cedence.
• Weldment feature. Properties assigned to the weldment feature are propagated to all cut list items. This
capability enables you to assign a property with a default value, which you can later edit for each cut list
item. For example, you can add the Property Cost with a value in the appropriate monetary denomination.
• Cut-List-Items . Cut list items inherit custom properties from the profile sketch and from the weldment
feature. You can assign new properties or you can edit existing properties. For example, you can add the
property Weight, and link that property to the model's mass properties. Creating the link between the two
enables the SolidWorks application to calculate the weight of the first solid body in the cut list item. The
system also computes and adds the property LENGTH for bodies generated by structural member features.
The LENGTH property is not editable.
Since the weight of only the first item is calculated from the cut list, the cut list should only include
identical items.
16-18
Custom Property Values
Values that you assign as custom properties can be
• Constant. For example, the material assigned when creating the structural member profile.
• Derived.
o Linked to dimension values.
o Linked to mass properties.
Custom properties are required to generate a cut list with associative balloons for a multibody part.
To assign custom properties at the highest propagation level, right-click the Weldment feature.
2. In the dialog box:
a. To assign a new name, type a value for Name,
-or -
To assign an existing name, select one from the Name list.
b. Select an item in Type.
c. Type a value that is compatible with Type for Value.
- or -
Select an item in Linked to value to associate the Value.
3. Click OK.
The custom property is added.
16-20
17
SolidWorks Options
• Click Grid/Snap on the Sketch toolbar. The Options dialog box appears with the Grid/Snap page of
the Document Properties tab active.
System Options
Some third-party applications may require that you clear this option.
• Show thumbnail graphics in Windows Explorer. Displays a thumbnail graphic instead of an icon
in Windows Explorer for each SolidWorks part or assembly document. The graphic is based on the
view orientation of the model when the document was last saved. A palette of 16 colors is used; if
the model uses a color that is not available, a similar color is substituted. The thumbnail graphics
are also used in the Open and Save As dialog boxes.
If you do not see thumbnail graphics in the Open or Save As dialog boxes, you may have to
open, then save your documents. When you re-open these dialog boxes, you will see the thumbnail
graphics.
• Use system separator for dimensions. Specifies that the default system decimal separator is used
when displaying decimal numbers.
o To set the system default, use the Windows Control Panel.
o To set a decimal separator different from the system default, clear the option, and type a
symbol that you want to use (usually a period or a comma).
• Use English language menus. If you specified the use of another language when installing the
SolidWorks software, and the regional options in the Windows Control Panel are set to that
language, select this option to change menus to English.
You must exit and re-start SolidWorks for this change to take place.
17-2
• Use English language feature and file names. Displays feature names in the FeatureManager
design tree and automatically created file names in English. Existing feature and file names in a
foreign language do not update when you select this option.
If you select Save eDrawings data in SolidWorks document, you can override this option
when you save your document. To override this option, click File, Save As, and clear Save
eDrawing data.
Your company may have several SolidWorks and SolidWorks Office licenses. If you use
SolidWorks (not SolidWorks Office), and you save an eDrawings file, SNL searches for an
available SolidWorks Office license so that you can save the file as review-enabled.
Clear if:
You use SolidWorks (not SolidWorks Office) and have a SolidNetWork License (SNL). If you use
eDrawings without a SolidWorks Office license, eDrawings files are not saved as review-enabled.
The notification message appears each time you save the eDrawings file unless Notify if SNL
could not be obtained for eDrawings Save is cleared.
• Custom property used as component description. Set or type a name to define a custom
description label. For example, the Open dialog box has a Description label that displays the
model description. Instead of displaying the Description label, you can display a label that you
specify.
If you change the Custom property used as component description in a document that has
already been saved, you must manually add the new description to the Summary Information
dialog box.
Drawings Options
You can set options for all drawings.
17-4
Display sketch entity points. When selected, the endpoints of sketch entities are displayed as filled circles in
drawing sheets and drawing sheet formats, but not in drawing views.
Save tessellated data for drawings with shaded and draft quality views. If cleared, file size is reduced by not
saving tessellated data in drawing documents with shaded and draft quality views. If needed, the data is read from the
model file. In view-only mode and in eDrawings, nothing appears in the drawing view. For drawings with high
quality and other display types, tessellated data is not used, so file size cannot be reduced.
Print out-of-date drawing views with crosshatch. Specifies what happens when you Print (or Print Preview) a
drawing that contains out-of-date views, with Automatic view update cleared. (If Automatic view update is
selected, the views update automatically, and the crosshatch is removed whenever you print the drawing.)
• Prompt (default). Notifies you if the drawing contains out-of-date views, and asks how to proceed. When
the dialog box appears, click Yes to print the drawing with crosshatch on the out-of-date views, or click No
to print the drawing without crosshatch.
• Always. The printed drawing always includes crosshatch on out-of-date views.
• Never. The printed drawing never includes crosshatch on out-of-date views.
Detail view scaling. Specifies the scaling for detail views. The scale is relative to the scale of the drawing view from
which the detail view is generated.
Custom property used as Revision. Specify a document custom property to be regarded as the revision data when
checking a document into PDMWorks (a SolidWorks Office Professional product).
System Colors
Lets you set the system defaults for colors used in drawings, assemblies, sketches, grid lines, background colors, and
so on. You can also change the color scheme of the FeatureManager design tree or change the skin displayed in the
PropertyManager.
System colors
Displays a list of colors used for sketches, highlighting, and so on. Select an item in System colors, then click Edit to
change the color.
• PropertyManager Color. Sets the background color for the PropertyManager.
• PropertyManager Skin. Sets the background skin (image) for the PropertyManager.
Skins take precedence over a color scheme in the PropertyManager. If you want the same color from
the PropertyManager Color box to appear in the PropertyManager, set PropertyManager Skin to None.
• Reset All To Defaults. Resets all system colors back to the system default values.
• Save As Scheme. Saves the set of colors you defined for the SolidWorks display. After you save a color
scheme, you can select it from the Current Color Scheme list.
17-6
Additional Options
• Current Color Scheme. Displays the color scheme applied to the SolidWorks software. If you define a
color scheme by saving your color choices with Save As Scheme, the color scheme appears in this list. Click
Delete to delete a color scheme. After you click Delete, the path is gone. Click Cancel to undo the deletion,
if necessary.
• Use gradient background. Displays a gradient background for SolidWorks documents. Set System colors
to Top Gradient Color or Bottom Gradient Color, then specify a color.
• Match graphics area and FeatureManager backgrounds. Applies the same background color to the
graphics area and FeatureManager design tree.
• Use specified color for Shaded With Edges mode. Applies the specified color to model edges when the
model is in Shaded With Edges mode. Set System colors to Edges in Shaded With Edges Mode,
then specify a color. If you clear this option, the edges are slightly darker than the model color.
• Use specified colors when editing parts in assemblies. Applies the specified color to the faces, features,
and bodies of a part while it is being edited in an assembly. Set System colors to Assembly, Edit Part, then
specify a color.
• Go To Document Colors (parts and assemblies only). Opens the Document Properties - Colors dialog box
to set document-specific colors.
Sketch Options
Lets you set the default system options for sketching.
Over defined and dangling points are always displayed, regardless of this option.
• Infer from model. Displays inferencing lines that relate to the lines and vertices of the underlying
model when you are sketching on the face of an extruded part.
• Prompt to close sketch. Displays a dialog box with the question, Close Sketch With Model Edges? if
you create a sketch with an open profile, then click Extruded Boss/Base to create a boss feature. Use
the model edges to close the sketch profile and select the direction in which to close the sketch.
• Create sketch on new part. Opens a new part with an active sketch on the Front Plane.
• Override Dims on Drag/Move. Overrides dimensions when you drag sketch entities or move the
sketch entity in the Move or Copy PropertyManager. The dimension updates after the drag is
complete.
This option is also available in Tools, Sketch Settings, Override Dims on Drag/Move.
• Automatic relations. Automatically creates geometric relations as you add sketch elements.
• Display plane when shaded. Displays the sketch plane when you edit a sketch in Shaded With Edges
or Shaded mode.
If the display is slow due to the shaded plane, it may be because of the Transparency options.
With some graphics cards, the display speed improves if you use low transparency. To set a low
transparency, click Tools, Options, System Options, Performance and clear High quality for normal
view mode and High quality for dynamic view mode.
• Display virtual sharps. Creates a sketch point at the virtual intersection point of two sketch entities.
Dimensions and relations to the virtual intersection point are retained even if the actual intersection no
longer exists, such as when a corner is removed by a sketched fillet or a sketched chamfer. (To set the
display options for virtual sharps, click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Virtual Sharps.)
• Over defining dimensions:
o Prompt to set driven state. Displays a dialog box with the question, Make Dimension Driven?
when you add an over defining dimension to a sketch.
o Set driven by default. Sets the dimension to be driven by default when you add an over defining
dimension to a sketch.
Use Prompt to set driven state alone or with Set driven by default. Depending on your
selections, one of four actions occur when you add an over defining dimension to a sketch:
• A dialog box appears that defaults to driven.
• A dialog box appears that defaults to driving.
• The dimension is driven.
• The dimension is driving.
17-8
Part/Assembly tangent edge display
Controls how tangent edges are displayed when the model is in Hidden Lines Removed or Hidden Lines Visible
mode.
• As visible. Tangent edges displayed.
• As phantom. Tangent edges display using the Phantom style line font ( ).
• Removed. Tangent edges are not displayed.
Use the slider to adjust the transparency level for Force assembly transparency. Move the slider to
the right to make components more transparent.
Highlight all edges of features selected in graphics view. Specifies that all edges on the selected feature are
highlighted when you click it.
Dynamic highlight from graphics view. Specifies whether model faces, edges, and vertices are highlighted when
you move the pointer over a sketch, model, or drawing.
Show open edges of surfaces in different color. Makes it easier to differentiate between the open edges of a surface
and any tangent edges or silhouette edges.
To specify the edge color, click Tools, Options, System Options, Colors. Select Surfaces, Open Edges in
System colors.
Anti-alias edges. Smooths out jagged edges in Shaded With Edges, Wireframe, Hidden Lines Removed, and
Hidden Lines Visible modes.
To specify the anti-alias edge color, click Tools, Options, System Options, Colors. Select Edges in Shaded
With Edges Mode in System colors. You must also select Use specified color for Shaded With Edges mode to use
the color you selected.
You can customize the color of the edges. If you do not specify a color, the edges are slightly lighter or darker
than the model color.
Display shaded planes. Displays transparent shaded planes with a wireframe edge that have different front and
back colors.
To specify the shaded plane colors, click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Plane Display. Under Faces,
click Front Face Color or Back Face Color to change the colors. Use the slider to adjust the transparency level for
the planes. Move the slider to the right to make the planes more transparent.
Enable selection through transparency. When selected, you can select opaque objects behind transparent
objects in the graphics area. When cleared, you can select the nearest object regardless of transparency. Press Shift
when you select objects to temporarily override the option.
Display reference triad. Displays a reference triad to help orient you when viewing models. The reference triad is
for display purposes only; you cannot select it or use it as an inference point.
To specify the triad colors, click Tools, Options, System Options, Colors. Select any of the three axes to
change: X axis of Reference Triad, Y axis of Reference Triad, or Z axis of Reference Triad in System colors.
Performance Options
Lets you set system options related to performance.
Changes to these settings do not affect documents that are already open. They only affect documents that are
opened after the setting has been changed.
Verification on rebuild
Contols the level of error checking when you create or modify features. For most applications, the default setting (off)
is adequate, and results in a faster rebuild of the model.
17-10
Transparency
High-quality transparency is similar to looking through clear glass. Low-quality transparency (the default) is similar
to viewing an object through a mesh or screen.
• High quality for normal view mode. While the part or assembly is not moving or rotating, the transparency
is high quality. When moved or rotated with the pan or rotate tools, the application switches to low-quality
transparency, enabling you to rotate the model faster. This is important if the part or assembly is complex.
• High quality for dynamic view mode. High-quality transparency is retained while moving or rotating the
model with the pan or rotate tools. Depending on your graphics card, this option may result in slower
performance.
If the display is slow when using transparent planes in Shaded With Edges or Shaded mode, it may
be because of the Transparency you specified. With some graphics cards, the display speed improves if you
do not use high-quality transparency.
Curvature generation
Select one of the following options:
• Only on demand. Initial curvature display is slower, but uses less memory.
• Always (for every shaded model). Curvature displays more quickly on the first display, but extra memory
is always used (RAM and disk) for every part that you create or open.
Assemblies
• Automatically load components lightweight. Loads all the individual components in assemblies that you
open as lightweight. Sub-assemblies are not lightweight, but the parts that they contain are lightweight. For
more information, see Lightweight Parts.
• Remove detail during zoom/pan/rotate. Removes small components and faces (both interior and exterior)
from the graphics area when you zoom, pan, or rotate the model to improve system performance.
When Remove detail during zoom/pan/rotate is enabled, the Optimize Zoom/Pan/Rotate option is
available if you change the model. Click View, Display, or right-click in the graphics area and select View,
Optimize Zoom/Pan/Rotate, to recalculate which components and faces should be hidden.
Remove detail during zoom/pan/rotate is automatically disabled when you move or rotate a component,
during mate animation, and during drag-and-drop animation.
You can temporarily disable Remove detail during zoom/pan/rotate by holding down the Alt key.
• Check out-of-date lightweight components. Lets you specify how you want the system to load lightweight
components that are out-of-date.
o Don’t check. Loads the assemblies without checking for out-of-date components.
o Indicate. Loads the assemblies and marks them with an icon if the assemblies contain an out-
of-date component, even if the assembly is not expanded. You can right-click an out-of-date top-
level assembly and select Set Lightweight to Resolved.
o Always Resolve. Resolves all out-of-date assemblies during load.
• Resolve lightweight components. Some operations require certain model data that is not loaded in
lightweight components. This option controls what happens when you request one of these operations in an
assembly that has lightweight components. See also Loading Additional Model Data.
o Prompt. Resolves lightweight components each time one of these operations is requested. In the
dialog box that appears, click Yes to resolve the components and continue, or click Cancel to
cancel the operation. If you select Always resolve (before you click Yes or Cancel), the option is
set to Always.
o Always. Automatically resolves lightweight components.
• Rebuild assembly on load. Lets you specify whether you want assemblies to be rebuilt, so components are
updated when you open them.
o Prompt. Asks if rebuild is desired each time an assembly is opened. Click Yes or No in the dialog
box that appears when you open the assembly. If you select Don’t ask me again (before you click
Yes or No), the option is updated to reflect your choice (Yes changes the option to Always, No
changes the option to Never).
o Always. Always rebuilds assemblies when opening.
o Never. Opens assemblies without rebuilding.
• Automatically convert drawing views to draft quality when unloading components. Changes drawing
views from high quality to draft quality when you set the model views to lightweight.
• Mate animation speed. Enables animation of mates and controls the speed of the animation. When you add
a mate, click Preview or OK in the PropertyManager to see an animation of the mate you just created.
Move the slider to Off to disable mate animation.
If you select Use Software OpenGL, SolidWorks changes some of your options settings for optimum software
performance. Click here to see the options that change. You can override any of these settings if desired.
This option is automatically selected and unavailable for change if your graphics card does not support hardware
acceleration, or does not support it for the current combination of resolution, number of colors, refresh rate, and so
forth.
Go To Image Quality
Click Go To Image Quality to switch to the Document Properties - Image Quality dialog box to set image quality
options.
17-12
Performance Settings
Use Software OpenGL selected
• Turn on:
o High quality for normal view mode
• Turn off:
o High quality for dynamic view mode
o Display shaded planes
o Use gradient background
o Display plane when shaded
o Shadows
Use Software OpenGL cleared
• Turn on:
o High quality for normal view mode
o High quality for dynamic view mode
o Use gradient background
o Display shaded planes
o Shadows
• Turn off Display plane when shaded
Assembly Options
Lets you set the behavior for dragging components in an assembly.
with the Move with Triad function or the Move Component and Rotate Component tools.
3. Click OK.
General Options
• Large assembly threshold. This is the number of resolved components above which Large Assembly Mode
activates or sends a message, depending on your settings.
If you have already activated Large Assembly Mode, the threshold is ignored.
o Indicate. Load the assemblies and mark them with an icon if the assemblies contain an out-of-
date part, even if the assembly is not expanded. You can right-click on an out-of-date top level
assembly and select Set Out-of-date Lightweight to Resolved.
o Always resolve. All out-of-date components are resolved during loading.
• Automatically load components lightweight. Loads your assembly with lightweight components.
• Update mass properties while saving document. Recalculates the mass properties on save. Clear to
improve performance.
• Save auto recover info every. Specify how often to automatically save model information. Clearing this
check box improves performance, but disables automatic save of your model.
Display Options
Drawings Options
To improve performance do the following:
• Clear:
o Show contents while dragging drawing view.
o Smooth dynamic motion of drawing view.
o Automatically load models for detached drawings.
• Select:
o Automatic hiding of components on view creation.
17-14
• Select Hidden Lines Removed, Shaded, or Shaded with Edges in Default display style for new views.
• Select Draft Quality in Default display quality for new views.
External References
• Open referenced documents with read-only access. Specifies that all referenced documents will be
opened for read-only access by default.
• Don’t prompt to save read-only referenced documents (discard changes). Specifies that when a parent
document is saved or closed, no attempt will be made to save its read-only, referenced documents.
• Allow multiple contexts for parts when editing in an assembly. You can create external references to a
single part from more than one assembly context. However, any individual feature or sketch within the
assembly may only have one external reference.
• Load referenced documents. Specifies whether to load the referenced documents when you open a part
that is derived from another document (such as a base part, derived component part, part with a cavity
feature, and so on.)
o Prompt. Ask about loading externally referenced documents each time you open a document with
external references.
o All. Opens all of the externally referenced documents.
o None. Does not open any of the externally referenced documents. External references may be
shown as out of context until you open the externally referenced documents.
o Changed Only. Opens only the externally referenced documents that have changed since the last
time you opened the original document.
• Search file locations for external references. Specifies that SolidWorks should search the Referenced
Documents list of folders in the File Locations Options dialog box. When cleared, the list is ignored.
• Update out-of-date linked design tables to. Determines what happens to linked values and parameters if
the model and the design table are out-of-sync.
o Prompt. The software prompts you when you open a document with a design table that is out-of-
sync with the model.
o Model. The design table updates with the model's values.
o Excel. The model updates with the design table's values.
Assemblies
• Automatically generate names for referenced geometry. When this option is off, you can mate to parts for
which you have read-only access because you are using the internal face IDs of the parts. Unless you will
use component replacement, leave this option off, especially in a multi-user environment.
When this option is on, you automatically create surface identifiers (for example: Face1, Face2) at the time
you mate the part, therefore you need write access to the part, in most cases. Turn this option on if you intend
to do component replacement using the same surface identifiers, remembering that you need write access to
the parts you are using. (Rename the corresponding edges and/or faces on the replacement component to
match the edge/face names on the original part.)
• Update component names when documents are replaced. Clear this option only if you use the
Component Properties dialog box to assign a component name in the FeatureManager design tree that is
different from the filename of the component.
Default Templates
You can specify the folder and template file for automatically created parts, assemblies, and drawings. For example,
when you import a file from another application or create a derived part, the default template is used for the new
document.
3. To change the folder for one of the template types, click the browse button next to the path display
window.
In the New SolidWorks Document dialog box, select the new default template, then click OK.
If you need to add a template that does not appear in this dialog box, add the template location with the File
Locations option.
4. Select one of the following options:
• Always use these default document templates
• Prompt user to select document template
5. Click OK.
File Locations
Lets you specify and locate referenced documents. Folders are searched in the order in which they are listed in the
Folders list.
If one or more folders are selected in the Folders list, you can Delete existing folders and use Move Up or Move
Down to change the folder search order. You can always Add new folders.
When you select a file location for Macros, and then you run a macro, the software looks for a macro
in the specified location. For instance, when you click Tools, Macro, Run, the Run Macro dialog box
opens to the file location you specified.
2. Click OK.
17-16
To add a folder for a file location:
1. Click Tools, Options, System Options, File Locations.
2. Select a folder type in Show folders for.
3. Click Add to add a new directory path to the list.
4. Browse in the Browse For Folder dialog box to locate the folder.
5. Click OK.
To delete a folder from a file location:
1. Click Tools, Options, System Options, File Locations.
2. Select a folder type in Show folders for.
3. Select the path in Folders and click Delete.
After you click Delete, the path is gone. Click Cancel to undo the deletion, if necessary.
The paths for Referenced Documents are searched only if Search file locations for external
references is selected in Tools, Options, System Options, External References.
The paths for Palette Parts, Palette Forming Tools, Palette Features, Blocks, Custom Property Files,
Macros, Macro Feature Files, and SolidWorks Journal Files are always searched, whether Search file
locations for external references is selected or not.
FeatureManager Options
Lets you set the default system options related to the FeatureManager design tree.
FeatureManager Options
• Scroll selected item into view. Specifies that the FeatureManager design tree should automatically scroll to
display the feature icon that is related to the selected items in the graphics area.
If you have a very complex part or assembly, you may want to turn this option off. Then, when you want the
FeatureManager design tree to scroll to a feature you can right-click the feature and select Go To Feature
(in Tree).
• Name feature on creation. When you create a new feature, the feature name in the FeatureManager design
tree is automatically selected and ready for you to enter a name of your choice.
• Arrow key navigation. Lets you use the arrow keys to traverse the FeatureManager design tree, and expand
or collapse the design tree and its contents, as follows:
Length increments
Specifies the number of units added or subtracted when you click a spin box arrow to change a linear dimension
value. You can set the values in English units or Metric units.
Angle increments
Specifies the number of degrees added or subtracted when you click a spin box arrow to change an angular dimension
value.
Arrow keys
Specifies the angle increment for view rotation when you use the arrow keys to rotate the model.
Mouse speed
Sets the speed of rotation when you use the mouse to rotate the model or assembly component. To get finer control
and slower rotation, move the slider to the left.
17-18
View animation occurs when you change views, including the following:
• View orientation commands (For example, Front, Isometric, and so forth)
• Zoom to Area, Zoom to Fit, Zoom to Selection
• Shift+ arrows to rotate 90 degrees
• Any command where the system changes the view orientation automatically, such as extruding the first
sketch of a part
NOTE: View animation might not always work for extremely large-sized or complex documents.
Backup Options
Lets you choose how often you want to make backup copies of your files and where you want to store the backups.
Type the path or use click to browse to the directory to use. This option is disabled if Save
backup files in the same location as the original is selected.
4. Click OK to accept the changes. Click Reset All to return to the installed system defaults, or click Cancel to
discard the changes and exit the dialog box.
NOTE: You should examine backup directories occasionally to make sure your backup copies do not use
too much space.
Document Properties
Detailing Options
Set options for detailing in the active document. You can also set the detailing options in Document Templates.
Dimensioning Standard
Select a dimensioning standard from the list: ISO, ANSI, DIN, JIS, BSI, GOST, or GB. The standard affects some
detailing styles, such as weld symbols, surface finish symbols, and dimension arrows.
Dual dimensions display. When selected, dimensions are displayed in two kinds of units. Choose whether the
second dimension is displayed On top or On the right.
Fixed size weld symbols.
When cleared (default), the size of the weld symbol is scaled according to the dimension font size, and the size of the
weld symbol changes if the dimension font size changes.
When selected, the size of the weld symbol is dependent on the selected dimensioning standard, and the size of the
weld symbol remains constant regardless of changes to the dimension font size.
Display datums per 1982. Select this checkbox to use the 1982 standard for the display of datums.
This option is available only if you use the ANSI dimensioning standard.
Alternate section display. The section line does not display across the drawing view; the arrow lines stop at the
boundaries of the section cut.
Centerline extension. This value controls the centerline’s extension length beyond the section geometry when it is in
a drawing view. The default value is set according to standards, but you can change it. Select the value in the edit box
and enter a new value. When a centerline length is modified, the new length is used the next time the section is
rebuilt.
Extension lines
Gap. Set a value for the distance between the model and dimension extension lines.
Beyond dimension line. Set a value for the length of the extension line beyond the dimension line.
Example
17-20
Datum features
Display type. Select a default (Per Standard, Square, or Round (GB)) to appear in the Datum Feature
PropertyManager.
Next label. Type a letter to start the labels for datum feature symbols. Successive labels are in alphabetic order. Only
uppercase letters are accepted.
Center marks
Size. Specifies the size of Center Marks, used with arcs and circles in drawings.
Extended lines. Specifies whether the center mark lines are displayed.
Centerline font. When selected, the lines in the center mark use the font specified for centerlines.
Break lines
Specify the following properties of break lines in a Broken View in a drawing.
• Gap. The distance between the break lines when they are inserted and after you break the view.
• Extension. The length of the break lines beyond the model geometry.
Automatic update of BOM. When selected, if a Bill of Materials exists in a drawing, it automatically updates when
relevant changes are made to the model. If you edit linked custom properties in a BOM and then rebuild the drawing,
the properties are reset to the values in the Summary Info dialog box when this option is selected. Some manual edits
are lost when the BOM is updated.
Dimensions Options
You can set options for dimensioning in the active document.
Check Boxes
Add parentheses by default. Reference dimensions in drawings are displayed within parentheses.
Snap text to grid. The placement of dimension text snaps to the grid in a drawing or a sketch.
Center between extension lines. Dimension text is centered between its extension lines.
Include prefix inside basic tolerance box. For ANSI standard, any prefix added to a dimension with basic tolerance
appears inside the tolerance box.
Automatically jog ordinates. Ordinate dimensions are automatically jogged when inserted.
Offset distances
Specify values for the distances between baseline dimensions.
• From last dimension (B). The distance between dimension lines. This value is used for baseline dimensions
and for Align Parallel/Concentric . SolidWorks automatically doubles the offset distance for
dimensions displayed with tolerances.
• From model (A). The distance between the model and the first dimension for baseline dimensions. (Not
used with Align Parallel/Concentric).
Arrows
Style. Specify the default style of dimension arrows by selecting from the illustrated list.
Outside, Inside, or Smart. Specify the placement of dimension arrows in relation to the extension lines.
Smart arrows appear outside of extension lines if the space is too small to accommodate the dimension
and the arrowheads.
Display 2nd outside arrow (Radial). Check this option to specify that two outside arrows be displayed with radial
dimensions.
Arrows follow position of text (Radial).
• Arrow placement must be set to Smart.
• When you drag radial dimensions inside or outside arcs or circles, the arrowheads move inside or outside
with the dimensions.
Text alignment
Select Horizontal and Vertical default alignment for multiple lines of dimension text. Vertical alignment specifies
where the leader is located relative to the text and applies only to certain standards, such as ANSI.
Angle/linear-angled Display
ANSI standard only. Select Use bent leaders to use bent leaders for:
• Dimensions of angles
• Angular display of linear dimensions
Leaders
Specify the alignment of dimension text with respect to the leaders.
Precision
Specify the dimension precision for the dimension value and tolerance values for Primary Units, Angular Units,
and Alternate Units.
17-22
Tolerance
Specify the type of tolerance, variation, font, and so on. See Dimension Tolerance Properties.
You can set Tolerance display to None and then set the variations and font to defaults for the current document.
When you modify the properties of a dimension, the default tolerance settings will be those set in these options.
Notes Options
You can set note options for the active document.
To set note options for the active document:
1. Click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Notes.
2. Choose from the following options, then click OK.
Text alignment
Select Left, Right, or Center alignment for note text.
Leader anchor
Specify to which side of the note the leader should attach: Left, Right, or the side Closest to the attachment
point.
Leader style
• Leader style. Select Straight, Bent, or Underlined.
• Leader length. Specify the distance between the leader bend and the text of the note for bent leaders.
Border
• Style - Select a style from the list. None results in text with leader, if a leader is specified, but no border
enclosing the text.
• Size - Select Tight Fit, expandable to tightly fit the text, or select a size to accommodate from one to five
characters.
Balloons Options
Set the default properties of balloons.
Single balloon
Style. Select a style from the list. None results in text with leader, but no border enclosing the balloon.
Size. Select a balloon size of Tight Fit, expandable to tightly fit any custom text you type in, or select a size to
accommodate from one to five characters.
Stacked balloons
Style. Select a style from the list. None is not available for Stacked balloons.
Size. Select a balloon size of Tight Fit, expandable to tightly fit any custom text you type in, or select a size to
accommodate from one to five characters.
Balloon text
Upper. Select Item Number, Quantity, or Custom from the list for the upper section of a Circular Split Line
balloon or for the whole balloon of all other styles.
Lower. If the balloon style is Circular Split Line, the Lower box is available for you to select Item Number,
Quantity, or Custom from the list.
If you select Custom text, a window opens in the Balloon or Stacked Balloon PropertyManager for typing your
text.
Bent leaders
Use bent leaders. Select for balloons to use bent leaders by default.
Leader length. Enter a default value for the length of the leader nearest the balloon.
AutoBalloon Layout
Select a layout as the default for inserting autoballoons:
Square
Circular
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Arrows Options
You can set display options for arrows. The default options vary depending on the drafting standard specified in
Tools, Options, Document Properties, Detailing.
Size
Specify the Height and Width of arrowheads, and the Length of the complete arrows, for leaders on dimensions,
notes, and other annotations.
Section/View Size
Specify the Height and Width of arrowheads, and the Length of arrows, for section view lines and on view arrows
(in auxiliary views, for example).
17-24
Attachments
Specify the arrowhead styles to be used depending on where the leader is attached.
Text scale (For part and assembly documents). When Always display text at the same size is cleared, you can
specify a scale for the default size of annotation text.
The font for Detail applies to the label on the detail circle, but not to the label on the detail view. The
font for Section applies to the label on the section line, but not to the label on the section view. The labels for
detail and section views are Notes and use the font for Note.
Tables Options
Set options for tables in the active drawing document.
Hole Table
Origin indicator . Specify the appearance of the indicator of the origin from which the software calculates
hole positions by selecting a standard.
Standard. Select a specific standard or Per Standard (the standard set in Detailing Options).
Tag angle/Offset from profile center. Specify the position from the hole profile center of the tag that the software
generates to identify each hole.
17-26
• Angle . Angle from a vertical line through the center of the hole.
Revision Table
Symbol shapes. Select from a circle, square, triangle, or hexagon for the revision symbol.
Alpha/numeric control. Specify whether the revision is alphabetic or numeric.
• Start from where user left. If you change control from alphabetic to numeric or vice versa, previous
revisions remain as they are.
• Change all. If you change control from alphabetic to numeric or vice versa, previous revisions (except any
you have edited) change to the new format.
The options for each type of view are the same except for the text under Name, which is DETAIL, SECTION,
or AUXILIARY.
Delimiter. Select the delimiter between the two scale numbers and whether the scale appears in parentheses. If you
select #X, the number in (#) can be an integer or a real number.
Display. Display the view label with name and label stacked on top of the scale (Stacked), or all data on the same line
(In-line).
1. Click Grid/Snap on the Sketch toolbar, or click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Grid/Snap.
2. Select from the options described below.
3. Click OK.
Grid
• Display grid. Turns the sketch grid on or off.
• Dash. Toggles between solid and dashed grid lines.
• Automatic scaling. Automatically adjusts the display of the grid when you zoom in and out.
• Major grid spacing. Specifies the space between major grid lines.
• Minor-lines per major. Specifies the number of minor grid lines between major grid lines.
Snap
• Snap only when grid is displayed. Turns on grid snap only when Display grid is selected.
• Snap to points. Turns snap on. When snap is on, points that you sketch or drag snap to the nearest
intersection of grid lines (or to intermediate points, if Snap points per minor is greater than 1).
• Snap points per minor. Sets the number of snap points between minor grid lines.
• Snap to angle. Specifies that sketched lines snap to a pre-defined angle. Specify the angle to which sketched
lines should snap. The inferencing pointer displays the specified angle as you sketch.
Units Options
Lets you specify units for the active part, assembly, or drawing document.
If you use small units such as angstroms, nanometers, microns, mils, or microinches, it is helpful to create templates
as the basis for documents that use the units. The templates could include settings such as:
• grid spacing
• dimension witness line gap and bent leader length
• dimension offset distances
• note bent leader length
• balloon bent leader length
• arrow size and section view arrow size
• text scale and Always display text at the same size
• material density
17-28
To set units for the active document:
1. Click Tools, Options, Document Properties, Units.
2. Select from the options described below.
3. Click OK.
Unit system
Displays a unit system:
• MKS (meter, kilogram, second)
• CGS (centimeter, gram, second)
• MMGS (millimeter, gram, second)
• IPS (inch, pound, second)
• Custom. Lets you set the Length units, Dual units, Angular units, Density units, and Force.
Length units
Displays the length units. If you set Unit system to Custom, select the units and set the Decimal places. Otherwise,
you can only set Decimal places.
If you select microinches, mils, inches, or feet & inches, select Decimal or Fractions. If you select Fractions, the
following options are available:
• Round to nearest fraction
• Denominator (Only dimensions that are evenly divisible by this denominator are displayed as fractions.)
If you select feet & inches, you can select Convert from 2'4" to 2'-4" format. The format for feet & inches in the
SolidWorks software is 2'-4". If you import a document in the 2'4" feet & inches format, you can convert the
document to 2'-4".
Once you have converted the document to 2'-4" format, you cannot convert back to the 2'4" format.
Dual units
Displays a second type of units just as you specify the Length units.
To show dual units in the SolidWorks software, select Dual dimensions display in the Detailing options.
Angular units
Displays the angular units. If you select Degrees or Radians, set the Decimal places.
Density units
Displays the Mass and Per unit volume units.
Force
Displays the force units.
Document Colors
Lets you set model, feature, and view mode colors for the active part or assembly document.
NOTE: Document Colors is not available when you have a drawing document active.
To set model, feature, and view mode colors:
1. Click Tools, Options.
2. On the Document Properties tab, select Colors.
3. In the Model\Feature colors box, select the feature type or view mode type for which you want to edit the
color representation.
If you are working with an assembly, the only color choices are Shading and Hidden. These are the display
colors for Shaded mode and Hidden Lines Visible mode.
4. Click Edit to change the color used to display the selected item. Select a color from the Color palette or
click Define Custom Colors and define a new color.
5. Click OK and view the selection in the preview box.
6. In an assembly, if you selected a color to display in Hidden mode, the Advanced button is available. You
can select additional display qualities such as Shininess, Transparency, and so on.
7. Additionally, you have the following options:
• Reset All To SolidWorks Defaults. Click this button to restore the original default color settings.
• Apply same color to wireframe, HLR and shaded. Select this check box to use the same color
for these view modes. (This option is available only for parts.)
• Ignore feature colors. Select this check box to specify that feature colors are not used. (This option
is available only for parts.)
• Curvature. Click this button to define the colors associated with the radii of curvature.
• Go To System Colors. Click this button to switch to the System Options - Colors dialog box.
8. Click OK to accept your changes, or click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the changes.
17-30
6. Click OK.
NOTE: You can also change the Density from the Measurement Options dialog box. Click Tools, Mass
Properties, Options, to access this dialog box.
Type of edge
Select an edge type from the list: Visible Edges, Hidden Edges, Sketch Curves, and so on.
Style
Choose a style from the list: Solid, Dashed, Phantom, Chain, and so on.
Thickness
Choose a thickness from the list: Normal, Thin, Thick, and so on.
Preview
Displays the selected line font.
Image Quality
Lets you select the display quality that is most efficient for you.
in slower model rebuilding but more accurate curves. When Draft Quality HLR/HLV is turned on, the
Shaded settings control Shaded With Edges , Shaded , Hidden Lines Removed , Hidden
This option causes slower system performance and increased file size.
• Apply to all referenced part documents (assemblies only). Applies the settings to all of the part
documents referenced by the active document.
• Save tessellation with part document (parts only). Saves disk space and decreases save time
when the part has detailed surfaces where the tessellation data is larger than the size of the
geometry on disk.
When you clear this option, nothing is displayed when the part is opened in:
o View-Only mode
o SolidWorks Viewer
o eDrawings (if you open the part directly in eDrawings)
Additionally, re-opening the part could take longer because the display is regenerated.
Controls the image quality of model edges in drawings. When Draft Quality HLR/HLV is turned off,
the Wireframe settings control Hidden Lines Removed , Hidden Lines Visible , and Wireframe
views.
Low (faster) High (slower). Increases image quality. Move the slider to Low (faster) if you want to redraw
the screen more quickly and the display quality is not of great importance; move the slider to High (slower)
for high display quality, but a slower redraw.
If you notice problems with your HLR image display, move the slider to the right.
Go To Performance
Click Go To Performance to switch to the System Options - Performance dialog box.
Plane Display
You can set the following plane display options for part and assembly documents:
• Face color
• Transparency
• Intersection display and color
NOTE: You must enable the Display shaded planes option to display shaded planes.
17-32
1. Open a part or assembly document.
2. Click Tools, Options. On the Document Properties tab, click Plane Display.
3. Under Faces, set the following options:
• Front Face Color. Displays the Color dialog box that you use to set the front face color of planes.
• Back Face Color. Displays the Color dialog box that you use to set the back face color of planes.
• Transparency. Controls the plane transparency (0% displays a solid face color; 100% displays no
face color).
NOTE: Edges take the same color as the front and back faces, are not transparent, and are always
displayed.
4. Under Intersections, set the following options:
• Show intersections. Select or clear the Show intersections check box to display or hide the
intersection of planes
• Line Color. Displays the Color dialog box that you use to set the plane intersection line color.
5. Click OK to accept the changes, or Cancel to discard the changes and exit the dialog box.
17-34
Index
Index-2
mirror components 9-51 2D to 3D conversion 2-22
molds 8-2 hide and show 11-51
options 17-13 label display 17-27
patterns 9-26, 9-49, 10-12 axes 5-12
performance 9-61, 17-13 broken views 11-35
Physical Dynamics 9-75 hide 5-12
Physical Simulation 9-33, 9-35 hole table datum origin 12-89
PropertyManager 9-10 reference 5-12
reorder 9-53 show 5-12
reorganize 9-37, 9-38, 9-39, 9-61
roll back 9-53 B
save 9-6, 9-7, 9-46 background image 13-38
send 2-20 backups 2-2
show 9-67 automatic 2-2
sketches 3-11, 9-54 options 17-19
SmartMates 9-25 balloons 12-42
statistics 9-9 auto insert 17-19
sub-assemblies 9-37, 9-39 autoballoons 12-46
suppress 9-28, 9-63, 9-64, 10-27 bill of materials 12-42, 12-81
top-down design 9-1 options 17-23
transparency 9-48 stacked 12-44
weld beads 9-58 base 6-44
Assembly toolbar 2-24 center mark 12-50
at angle planes 5-2 extrude 6-45
attach dimensions 13-22 flange 15-2
attachment point 12-24 part 7-22
dimension extension lines 3-38, 12-24 revolve 6-132, 6-151
leaders 12-35, 12-36, 12-41, 12-60, 12-69, 17-24 scale 13-10
auto explode 9-69 base point 12-69
auto hatching 11-35, 11-38, 11-40 baseline dimensions 12-17
auto insert on view creation 12-6, 12-46, 12-48, 12-51, 17-19 bend allowance 15-22, 15-25
auto reliefs 15-28, 15-29 bend deduction 15-22, 15-25
autoballoons 12-46, 17-23 bend deviation 15-39
AutoCAD 2-91, 13-10 bend table 15-24
copying and pasting from 13-22 bends 15-31
DXF/DWG files 13-19 edit 15-23, 15-29, 15-31, 15-32
font support 13-10 Excel file 15-23, 15-24
Mechanical annotation 13-19 flat bends 15-13, 15-32
moving from AutoCAD 2-91 inserting 15-31
proxy entities 13-19 lofted 15-38
XREFs 13-19 no bends 15-32
Autodesk Inventor files 13-17 positions 15-13
autodimension 3-39 reordering 15-31
automatic 2-2 round bends 15-13, 15-14
autoballoons 17-19 sharp bends 15-13
backups 2-2 simplify 15-43
center mark insertion 12-48, 17-19 sketched bends 15-9
centerline annotation insertion 12-51, 17-19 text file 15-23, 15-24
dimension insertion 17-19 bent leader length 17-21
drawing view update 11-45, 11-47 bilateral tolerance 12-28
Fit tolerance 12-8, 12-29 bill of materials 12-81
inferencing 3-14 anchor point 11-5, 12-77
jog ordinates 12-17, 17-21 balloons 12-42
relations 3-40 child components 10-31
save 17-19 configurations 12-83
solve 3-14 contents 12-84
update of BOM 17-19 custom properties 12-85
automatic mates. See SmartMates 9-25 edit text 12-97
autosize reference geometry 5-10 Excel-based 12-94, 12-99
auto-start projected view 11-19 insert 12-95
autotransitioning 3-8 options 17-26
auxiliary views 11-28, 11-51 part numbers 12-98
Index-4
print documents 2-15 dimensions 12-23
sketch status 3-43 mates 9-14, 9-20
system options 17-6 relations 3-42
tables 12-76 ConfigurationManager 10-1
use assembly 9-72 activate 10-1
combine parts 6-213 split panel display 2-48
combine same sizes 12-88 configurations
combine same tags 12-88 activate 10-8
combined features, MDT files 13-29 alternate position views 11-43
CommandManager 2-24 assemblies 10-10, 10-12
commands 2-83 base parts 10-28
comments 10-29 bill of materials 12-83
configurations 10-4 create manually 10-4
design tables 10-29 create with design tables 10-18
equations 7-16 delete 10-13
summary info 7-33 derived 10-6
component line font 11-55 descriptions 2-45
component names 17-15 dimensions 10-11, 12-26
generate names for referenced geometry 17-15 edit 10-11
update 17-15 end conditions 10-10
components 9-4 equations 10-30
assemblies 9-4, 9-10 parts 10-8
Collision Detection 9-74 previews 10-2
colors 9-72 properties 10-4
configuration descriptions 2-45 sheet metal flat patterns 11-21
configuration names 2-45 sketch dimensions 10-8
configurations 10-26 sketch planes 10-9
copy 9-51 sketch relations 10-9
derived 7-23 STEP files 13-37
descriptions 2-44 weldment cut lists 16-15
drawings 11-17, 11-40, 11-55, 11-58 confirm delete 2-35
Dynamic Clearance 9-76 confirmation corner 2-9, 17-2
envelopes 9-65, 9-66 conformance classes in STEP 13-37
fix 9-11 conical 15-40
float 9-11 faces in sheet metal parts 15-15
hide 9-62, 9-67, 11-53 holes for cosmetic threads 12-54
interference detection 9-74 mates with conical features 9-26
layers 11-58 connectors 6-9, 6-106
lightweight 9-61 constrain all 3-19, 13-22
loading additional data 9-64 constraints. See relations 3-41
mates 9-3, 9-13 construction geometry. See also reference geometry 3-21
mirror 9-51 contents, bill of materials 12-84
molds 8-2 contour map 6-201
names 17-15 contour selection 3-19
part numbers 10-28 contour types for features 3-16, 3-17
patterns 9-49 conversion wizard 2-89
Physical Dynamics 9-75 convert 2-89
properties 9-9, 9-62, 9-67, 9-72 2D to 3D 4-1
reorganize 9-37, 9-38, 9-39 detached drawings 11-13
replace 9-7 entities 3-22
resolved 9-63, 9-64 lightweight drawings 11-16
select 9-66, 9-68 older SolidWorks files 2-89
shared documents 2-42 sketch lines to construction geometry 5-15
show 9-62, 9-67 coordinate systems 5-13
SmartMates 9-25 3D sketches 3-74
suppress 9-63, 9-64 scale parts 6-141
visibility 9-62, 9-65 translate 5-13
weld beads 9-58 copy 2-35
composite curves 5-21 blocks 12-69
composite frames 12-62 components 9-51
compression scheme in TIFF 13-15 drag 2-7
concentric 3-42 drawing views 11-50
Index-6
view alignment 11-49 split parts 10-32
view rotation angle 11-49 suppress 10-27
defined in context relations 3-45 user notes 10-33
definition 12-69, 12-75 detach segment on drag 3-22
deform detail circles 11-33
curve to curve deformation 6-9, 6-12 detail views 11-30
point deformation 6-19, 6-21 copy with parent view 11-50
delete 2-35 detailed previews 6-215
area hatch 12-66 hide with parent view 11-51
assembly components 9-6 label display 17-27
background image 13-38 modify 11-32
body 6-214 pin position 11-32
configurations 10-13 profile display 11-32, 17-4
confirm 2-35 scale 11-32, 17-4
design tables 10-21 detailing 12-1, 17-19
equations 7-15 diagnostic tools 3-16, 3-45, 3-52, 9-28
faces 6-177 diameters 3-36
holes 6-179 circular dimensions 3-36
layers 11-58 dimensions 12-6, 12-10
mates 9-28 holes 6-86
patterns 6-128 holes for cosmetic threads 12-54
relations 3-44 in revolve features 6-132
spline points 3-49 dimensions 3-33, 12-6
surfaces 6-177 access 14-12
tables 12-76 align 12-22, 12-23, 12-24
density 17-30 angular 3-37
dependent 2-46 arcs 3-35, 3-38
documents 9-42 baseline 12-17, 17-21
drawing views 11-26, 11-28, 11-37 chain 12-10, 12-14, 12-17
derived 3-11 chamfer 12-20
configurations 10-6 circles 3-36, 3-38
drawing views 11-26 configurations 10-11, 10-25, 12-26
sketches 3-11 copy 12-22
derived parts 7-21 detached drawings 11-14
base 7-22 Dimension/Relations toolbar 2-26
components 7-23 dispaly 2-43
edit 7-26 display 12-6
mirror 7-22 driven 12-10
palette parts 14-10 dual 12-10, 17-19
design methods in assemblies 9-1 equations 7-14
design tables extension lines 3-38, 12-6, 12-24
base parts 10-28 favorites 12-4
colors 10-33 foreshortened radius 12-10
components 10-26, 10-27 hide/show 12-6, 12-27
configuration parameters 10-21, 10-23, 10-24 hole callouts 12-52
create 10-14, 10-18 horizontal 3-34, 3-35, 12-19
custom properties 10-32 increment value 12-26
delete configurations 10-13 inserting into drawings 12-3
delete tables 10-21 internal 14-12
dimensions 10-25, 10-32 layers 11-58
edit 10-21, 10-36 leaders 12-21
Excel 10-14 linear 3-34, 3-35, 12-10, 12-24
expand sub-assemblies in BOMs 10-31 lines 12-6
formatting 10-19 link/unlink values 7-17
in drawings 10-35 lock type 3-34, 12-19
lighting 10-31 mark for drawings 12-26, 17-19
MDT files 13-29 midpoints 12-16
numerical configuration name 10-21 modify 3-33, 12-26
options 17-2 move 12-22
properties 10-5, 10-32 options 12-7, 17-2, 17-7, 17-19, 17-21, 17-25
PropertyManager 10-17 ordinate 12-17, 12-19
saving 10-22 overdefining 17-7
Index-8
isometric or projected dimensions 11-46 import 13-3
lock focus 11-8 imported entities 13-22
model 11-19 insert 13-21
perspective 11-19 layer map export 13-10, 13-23
predefined 11-24 layers 11-58
projected 11-26 line styles 13-10
properties 11-46 mapping 13-23
relative to model 11-22 View only 13-20
rotate 11-49, 11-50 dynamic 7-3
scales 11-9 drawing view activation 11-8, 17-4
section 11-37, 11-41 feature editing 7-3
select 11-1, 11-8 highlighting 2-59, 2-60
standard 11-17 previews 2-68
standard 3 views 11-17 transparency 2-79
update 11-45, 11-47 Dynamic Clearance 9-76
drawings 11-1, 11-13
2D sketches 11-10 E
annotations 12-2 edge display and selection 17-8
assemblies 11-8 edge display in drawings 17-5
component line font 11-55 edge flange 15-3
construction geometry 3-21 edges 17-8
design tables 10-35 baseline dimensions 12-17
detached 11-13 display options 17-8
display modes 11-55 hidden edge selection 17-8
edge display 17-5 highlighting 17-8
file size 11-13, 17-4 in drawings 11-51, 17-5
formats, sheets, and views 11-5 properties 7-8
hide behind plane 11-53 edit 7-1
hide edges 11-51 auto reliefs 15-29
hide/show components 11-53 bend parameters 15-29, 15-32
inferencing 3-14 blocks 12-69
insert model items 12-2 colors 7-7
layers 11-58 configurations 10-11
lightweight 11-16 crop views 11-33
lines 11-55, 11-56, 17-31 definition 7-1
move 11-48 derived parts 7-26
names 11-3 design tables 10-21, 10-36
new 11-3 dimension access 14-12
OLE objects 11-45 equations 7-14, 7-15
options 11-2, 17-4 exploded views 9-69, 9-71
parts 4-4, 11-8 features 7-1, 7-3
print 2-15, 2-16 file locations 9-8
reference geometry 12-2 forming tools 14-9
save 11-1 imported features 13-4
scales 11-9 joined parts 9-57
send 2-20, 11-12 library features 14-5
sheet metal parts 15-41 macros 2-93
show hidden edges 11-52 mates 9-8, 9-19
windows 11-8 OLE objects 2-95
driven dimensions 12-6, 12-10 parts 7-20, 9-48
duplicate entities in IGES 13-11 planes 3-12
DXF/DWG files 13-19 seed features 6-129
attach dimensions 13-22 sketches 3-2, 3-10, 3-12
block import 12-69 tables 12-76
constrain all 3-19, 13-22 weld beads 9-58
copy/paste from AutoCAD 13-22 eDrawings 13-11, 13-24, 13-25, 13-26
DWG preview 13-19 ellipses 3-57
DXF 3D files 13-18 email. See send mail 2-20
export 13-9, 13-10 embed bitmaps in sheet formats 11-5
export fonts 13-9, 13-10 empty drawing views 11-10, 11-25
export options 13-9, 13-10 end conditions 6-39, 6-42, 10-10
export version 13-9, 13-10 entities 7-8
Index-10
conventions 2-46 thin 6-46, 6-94, 6-191
display by dependencies 9-2 time-dependent 9-49
display by features 9-2 work 13-29
displaying mates with components 9-2 wrap 6-216
drawings 11-8 Features toolbar 2-27
external references 9-42 file name extensions 2-52
flyout 2-49 favorites 12-4
options 2-49 sheet formats 11-6
select drawing views 11-50 table templates 12-78
select from 2-50 file size 17-4
sheet metal parts 15-17 detached drawings 11-13
split panel display 2-48 drawings 17-4
zoom to selection 11-8 eDrawings 13-24
features 6-1 to send electronically 11-12
accepting 2-9 files 2-53
assemblies 9-55, 9-56 blocks 12-69, 12-75
boss/base 6-44, 6-132 external references 7-28
chamfer 6-7 insert models into drawings 11-17
circular pattern 6-119 layers 11-58
colors 7-7 locations 9-8, 17-16
combined 6-213, 13-29 names in notes 11-7
contours 3-16 new 2-52
copy 2-7, 7-4 open 2-53
curve pattern 6-110 properties 7-33
cut 6-47 save 2-34
deform 6-8, 6-9, 6-12, 6-19, 6-21 sheet format files 11-6
descriptions 2-43, 2-44 fill 12-66, 17-6, 17-30
detailed preview 6-215 fill surface 6-164
dome 6-30 fillets 6-57
draft analysis 6-198, 6-201 constant radius 6-58
drafts 6-32, 6-35, 6-37, 6-38, 6-50 face blends 6-70, 6-71, 6-73
drag 2-7 overflow type 6-59
edit 7-1, 7-2, 7-3 radius 6-60
extrude 4-7, 6-39, 6-42, 6-44, 6-46, 6-50 round corner 6-61
fillets 6-57, 6-58, 6-60, 6-61, 6-62, 6-64, 6-67, 6-70, 6-71, setback 6-62
6-73 sketch 3-31
guide curves 6-97, 6-99, 6-101, 6-187, 6-189 surfaces 6-159
hide and show bodies 6-175 variable radius 6-64, 6-67
holes 6-74 filter. See selection filter 2-63
in-context 9-42 find 2-50
keep features 6-56 in FeatureManager design tree 2-50
linear pattern 6-114 referenced documents 9-44
lofts 6-95, 6-96, 6-97, 6-99, 6-101, 6-104, 6-192 first angle projection 11-4, 11-19
mirror 6-108, 6-125, 6-129 first arc condition 12-10
move 2-7, 6-208 Fit tolerances 12-8, 12-28, 12-29
out-of-context 9-42 fix component 9-11
parting lines 6-35, 6-37 fix relation 3-42
patterns 6-108, 6-109, 6-123, 6-125, 6-126, 6-127 flag symbols 12-10
revolve 6-132 flange 15-2
ribs 6-135, 6-138, 6-139 base flange 15-2
scale 6-141 edge flange 15-3, 15-4
scope 9-56 miter flange 15-4, 15-6, 15-7
seed features 6-129 flatten 15-32
shape 6-142, 6-144 assembly hierarchy in IGES 13-9, 13-11
shells 6-145, 6-146 assembly hierarchy in Parasolid 13-9
sketch driven pattern 6-121 sheet metal parts 15-32
suppress and unsuppress 7-21 flatten-bends 15-32, 15-44
sweeps 6-182, 6-183, 6-187, 6-189, 6-190, 6-193 flexible sub-assemblies 9-41
table driven patterns 6-123 flip direction 11-40
tangency 6-190, 6-191, 6-193 dowel pin symbols 12-63
tapped hole 13-29 flat pattern view in drawings 11-21
thicken 6-195 section views in drawings 11-40
Index-12
fasteners 6-86 STEP files 13-7
favorites 6-80, 6-81 STL files 13-8
features 6-74, 6-77 VDAFS files 13-7
hole type 6-86 VRML files 13-8
legacy 6-89 improve geometry. See simplify geometry 13-6
parameters 6-80, 6-86 inches 17-28
pipe tap 6-88 in-context features 3-45, 9-42, 9-46, 9-47, 9-55
placement 6-79 inferencing 3-14
property 6-80 annotations 12-34
series 6-81 lines 3-6, 3-14
simple 6-74 pointers 3-6
standards 6-86 to the assembly origin 9-6
tap 6-87 inflection points 3-52
wizard 6-77, 12-52 insert 12-2
hollow feature. See shell 6-145 blocks 12-69, 12-73
HOOPS files 13-27 components into assemblies 9-4
horizontal 3-34 configuration design tables 10-16
align drawing views 11-49 dimensions into drawings 12-2, 12-3
breaks 11-35 DXF/DWG files 13-21
dimensions 3-34 imported geometry 13-3
ordinate dimensions 12-19 model items into drawings 12-1, 12-2
rotate views 11-49 SolidWorks data into other applications 2-97
hyperlinks 2-42 spline points 3-49
in notes 12-37 inspection dimensions 12-10
into drawings 11-17 instances 12-69
blocks 12-74
I components in section views 11-40
icons 2-3 holes in hole callouts 12-52
documents 2-2 interference detection 9-74
FeatureManager 2-46 internal dimensions 14-12
OLE objects 2-96 Internet open address 2-42
rebuild 2-50 interrupt regeneration 7-32
IGES files 13-27 intersection curves 3-24
2D geometry 13-27 invalid edges or faces 7-29
BREP export 13-11, 13-27 invalid solution found in sketches 3-43
edit imported features 13-4 invisible 12-38, 12-69
entity types 13-28 isometric views 2-75
export 13-9 iso-parametric. See face curves 3-23
export options 13-9, 13-11 item numbers 12-42
exported curves 13-29 balloons 12-42
exported surfaces 13-12 bill of materials 12-83, 12-85
import 13-3 weldment cut lists 16-16, 16-17
import hints 13-27
import options 13-7 J
import surfaces 13-3 JIS standard 17-19
import units 13-7 arrowhead style 12-8, 12-12
levels 13-29 surface finish size 12-32, 12-57, 17-25
open 2-53 jog 15-36
image quality 9-72, 17-31 lines 9-71
image type in TIFF 13-15 ordinate dimensions 12-17, 17-21
import 13-1 points 12-35
diagnosis 13-6 sheet metal parts 15-36
drawings into parts 4-4 joined parts 9-56
files 13-1, 13-2, 13-3 create 9-56
formats 13-2 edit 9-57
geometry 13-3 identify 9-58
sheet metal parts 15-17 JPEG files 13-29
surfaces 13-3 jumps 11-17
import options 13-3, 13-7 auxiliary views to parent views 11-28
ACIS files 13-7 detail views to parent views 11-30
general 13-7 projected views to parent views 11-26
IGES files 13-7 section views to parent views 11-37
Index-14
view focus 11-8 diagnostics 9-28
lofted bends 15-38 distance 9-14, 9-21, 9-23
lofts 6-90 entities 9-15
add sections 6-104 errors 9-31
centerlines 6-101 feature-based 9-26
guide curves 6-97, 6-99, 6-101 FeatureManager design tree 9-2
maintain tangency 6-93 gear 9-23
non-planar profiles 6-95, 6-99 geometry-based 9-25
planar profiles 6-97 limit 9-23
simple 6-91 mate reference 9-17
split lines 6-96 mategroups 9-18
surfaces 6-153 parallel 9-14, 9-21
synchronization 6-106 pattern-based 9-26
tangent 6-101, 6-103, 6-192 perpendicular 9-14, 9-21
loop selection 2-65 replace entities 9-8
loops 2-61 SmartMates 9-25
standard types 9-14, 9-15
M suppress mates 9-28
Macro toolbar 2-30 symmetry 9-24
macros tangent 9-14, 9-22
customize 2-93 viewing 9-3
customize buttons 2-84 maximum 7-29
debug 2-93 edge gap 7-29
edit 2-93 radius of curvature 7-29
folder 2-93 vertex gap 7-29
hot keys 2-93 MDT. See Mechanical Desktop files 13-29
menus 2-93 measure 7-18
new 2-92 measurement options 7-19, 7-38
pause 2-92 Mechanical Desktop files 13-29
record 2-92 menus 2-8, 2-86
run 2-93 assign macros 2-93
stop recording 2-93 customize 2-85, 2-86
mail. See send mail 2-20 shortcut 2-8, 2-18
mandatory references 14-2 merge tables 12-76
manual update of drawing views 11-45 Metastream files. See Viewpoint 13-39
manufacturing network 2-90 mid surface 6-162
map file in DXF/DWG 13-10 middle mouse button functions 2-78
mark for drawings 12-6, 12-26, 17-19 midpoints 2-63, 5-15
mark size 12-50 dimensioning to 12-16
mass properties 7-38 relations 3-42
match faces and edges 13-5 select 2-63, 5-15
mategroups 9-18 minimum radius of splines 3-53
material properties 7-5, 7-9 mirror 6-108
options 17-30 components 9-51
parts 7-5, 7-9 features 6-129
setting default 2-53 parts 7-22
material shrinkage (scaling factor) 8-4 patterns 6-125
materials 2-69 sketch entities 3-27
RealView graphics 2-72 miter flange 15-4, 15-6, 15-7
supported graphics cards 2-71 model views 11-21
Materials Editor PropertyManager 2-38 models 2-2
mathematical relations 7-14 geometry 7-29, 7-30
mating 9-13 in detached drawings 11-14
alignment condition 9-17 modify 12-26
angle 9-14, 9-19, 9-23 dimensions 3-33, 10-11, 12-26
animation 17-10 mates 9-8, 9-19
assembly components 9-13 perspective 2-73
automatic 9-25 section line properties 11-42
cam-follower 9-22 sketches 3-9, 3-15
coincident 9-14, 9-20 mold tools 8-2
concentric 9-14, 9-20 cavity 8-11
delete mates 9-28 parting lines 8-4
Index-16
display style 17-5 line thickness 11-56
drawings 11-2, 17-4 margins 2-15
edge display 17-5, 17-8 palette features 14-6
export 13-9, 13-10, 13-11, 13-13, 13-14, 13-15 add to assemblies 14-12
external references 17-15 add to palette 14-8
FeatureManager 2-49 add to parts 14-10
file locations 17-16 comparison with library features 14-1
fonts 17-26 derived parts 14-10
grid 17-28 forming tools 15-28
image quality 17-31 limitations 14-1
import 13-7, 13-8 mandatory references 14-2
large assembly 17-13 sheet metal parts 15-28
line font 17-31 pan 2-79
material properties 17-30 paper 2-13
notes 17-23 margins 2-15
performance 17-10 size 11-4
sketch 17-7 parabolas 3-61
snap 17-28 parallel 12-19
spin box increments 17-18 dimensions 12-19
system 17-2 mates 9-14, 9-21
tables 17-26 relations 3-42
twist control 6-193 parallel plane at point 5-2
units 17-28 parallelograms 3-65
view labels 17-27 parameters 10-33
view rotation 17-18 color 10-33
virtual sharps 17-25 configurations 10-21, 10-23, 10-24
wizard 2-90 holes 6-80
ordinate dimensions 12-17, 17-21 Parasolid files 13-33
orientation 2-75 edit imported features 13-4
aligned section views 11-42 export 13-9
auxiliary views 11-28 export options 13-9
relative to model views 11-22 export version 13-9
section lines 11-42 import 13-3
section views 7-35, 11-37 import surfaces 13-3
view 2-75 open 2-53
origins 5-14 parent scale 11-9
coordinate systems 5-13 parent/child relations 2-43, 2-46, 7-20
datum for hole table 12-88, 12-89 parentheses 12-6, 12-17, 12-29, 17-21
inferencing in assemblies 9-6 part configuration 10-4, 10-8
rotate views 2-79 part numbers 10-28
sketches 3-5 balloons 12-42
orthographic 11-17 bill of materials 12-83
model views 11-19 components 10-28
projected views 11-26 partial ellipse 3-57
relative to model views 11-22 partial sections 11-41, 11-42
standard 3 views 11-17 parting lines 6-35
views in drawings 11-19 drafts 6-35
out-of-context features 9-42 face blend fillet 6-71
output coordinate systems 5-13, 13-9 molds 8-4
over defined 3-43 split lines 5-20
sketch dimensions/relations 3-43 step drafts 6-37
sketch geometry 3-43 parting surfaces 8-7
sketches 3-43 parts 7-1
overflow type 6-59 annotations 7-32
overlapping parts. See interference detection 9-74 assemblies 9-4, 9-47, 9-48
overlay views. See alternate position views 11-43 base parts 7-22
override dimensions on drag 3-30 check 7-30, 7-31
colors 7-4, 7-7
P configurations 10-1, 10-8
page setup curvature 7-39
drawing colors 2-15 derived 7-21, 7-22, 7-23, 7-26
headers and footers 2-83 dimensions 7-17
Index-18
3D 13-16 STL files 13-14
background 2-13 quick tips 2-91
break lines in broken views 11-35
documents 2-13 R
drawings 2-15, 17-4 radial center mark lines 12-50
eDrawings 13-24 radial dimensions 12-19, 12-22, 12-24
headers and footers 2-83 radians 17-28
line weights 2-14 radiate surface 6-175
margins 2-15 radius 12-10
preview 2-18 arc dimensions 3-35
references 9-46 circular sketch step and repeat 3-19
selection 2-16 control points 6-67
setup 2-13 dimension display 12-6, 12-10
printer settings 2-13 fillets 3-31, 6-60
Pro/ENGINEER files 13-33 of curvature 7-31, 7-39, 7-40
profiles 11-30 range, print 2-15
crop views 11-33 rapid prototyping files 13-37
detail circles 11-33 read-only 17-15
detail views 11-30, 11-32 block settings 12-38, 12-69
lofts 6-95, 6-97, 6-99 dimensions 12-10
sketch 15-4 drawing view properties 11-46
sweep sections 6-187, 6-189 external references 17-15
projected curves 5-15 open 2-53
replace a sketch 5-19 reload/replace 2-42
sketch onto face 5-18 realign drawing views 11-49
sketch onto sketch 5-18 RealView graphics 2-72
projected dimensions in drawings 11-10 rebuild 2-36
projected tolerance zone 12-62 interrupt 7-32
projected views 11-26 models 2-36
projection 11-19 symbol 2-50
during view rotation 11-49 updating drawing views 11-47
first and third angle 11-4, 11-19 record macro 2-92
split lines 5-20 rectangles 3-64
propagate 12-48, 12-51 redo 2-36
properties 7-2 redraw 2-36
annotations 9-73, 12-32 reference axis 5-12
assemblies 9-9, 9-73 reference dimensions 12-16
bill of materials 12-95 baseline 12-17
components 9-9, 9-67 ordinate 12-17
configurations 10-4, 12-98 parentheses 12-17, 17-21
custom 7-33, 12-41 reference edges for auxiliary views 11-28
datum targets 12-60 reference geometry 5-1
design tables 10-5, 10-32 axes 5-12
documents 11-7 composite curves 5-21
drawing sheets 11-4 convert sketch entities 5-15
drawing views 11-46 curves 5-15
files 7-33 helix 5-17
layers 11-58 insert into drawings 12-2, 12-4
OLE objects 2-97 planes 5-2
sub-assemblies 9-9 points 5-22
PropertyManager 2-4 spiral 5-17
auto-show 17-2 Reference Geometry toolbar 2-31
overview 2-4 reference plane normal to edge 3-13
skin 17-6 reference points 5-22
split panel display 2-48 reference points in sketch driven patterns 6-123
proportional splines 3-47 referenced documents 17-15
PTZ. See projected tolerance zone 12-62 load 17-15
publish eDrawings 13-24 open read-only 17-15
save read-only 17-15
Q search for 9-44
quality 13-14 referenced files 17-16
drawing view display 11-11, 11-16 in assemblies 9-8
Index-20
sketches 3-27 silhouettes 3-8
text of annotations 12-32, 17-25 sketch entities 2-60
scaling factor in mold design 8-4 tables 12-76
scan equal 3-45 tangency 2-65
schematic 11-44 through transparency 2-66, 17-8
scope 9-56 views 11-8
assembly features 9-56 selection 2-64
Collision Detection 9-74 box 2-64
multibody parts 9-56 loop 2-65
Physical Dynamics 9-75 partial loop 2-61
section views of assemblies 11-41 tangent 2-65
screen redraw 2-36 selection criteria for components 9-68
screws 9-77, 9-79 selection filter 2-63
scroll. See pan 2-79 hot keys 2-63
search 9-44 toolbar 2-63
file locations for external references 9-44 send mail 2-20
results for assemblies 9-46 assemblies 2-20
second arc condition 12-10 drawings 11-12
second arrow 12-10 parts 7-32
second outside arrow 12-10 service packs 2-91
section display types 17-21 set up drawing sheet 11-4
section lines 11-37 setback fillets 6-62
modify 11-40 shaded 2-74
stepped 11-37 cosmetic threads 12-54, 17-25
straight 11-37 preview 2-68, 17-10
troubleshooting 11-41 sketch planes 3-12, 5-8
section properties 7-38 views 2-59, 2-74, 17-5
section scope in drawings 11-40, 11-41 shaded with edges 2-75
section views 11-37 shaft Fit 12-8, 12-29
aligned 11-42 shape 6-142, 6-144
assemblies 7-35, 11-40 feature adjustment controls 6-144
auto hatching 11-38 features 6-142
broken-out 11-34 pressure and curve influence sliders 6-144
copy with parent view 11-50 resolution slider 6-145
create 2-73, 11-37 stretch and bend sliders 6-145
display only surface cut 11-42 shared files 2-42
drawings 11-37 shared values 7-17
hide with parent view 11-51 sheet formats 11-3
modify 11-40 anchor points 11-5, 12-77
partial 11-37 custom 11-5
parts 7-35 lines 11-5
planes 7-37 link notes to properties 11-7
section line properties 11-42 new 11-3
Section View PropertyManager 2-74 new drawings 11-3
selection 7-36 note text 11-5
troubleshooting 11-41 save 11-6
VRML files 13-40 sheet metal parts
seed faces 6-161 auto reliefs 15-28, 15-29
seed features 6-110, 6-114, 6-119, 6-123, 6-129 base flange 15-2
select 2-60 bends 15-9, 15-12, 15-13, 15-14, 15-22, 15-23, 15-24, 15-25,
area of drawing to print 2-15 15-29, 15-31, 15-32, 15-34
chain 2-62 break corner 15-35
contours 3-19 conical faces 15-15
drag select 2-60 cuts 15-34, 15-35
from FeatureManager design tree 2-50 cylindrical faces 15-40
hidden entities 11-51, 17-4 design methods 15-18, 15-19, 15-20, 15-21
in graphics area 2-60 drawings 11-21, 15-41
loops 2-65 edge flange 15-3, 15-4
midpoints 2-63, 5-15 FeatureManager design tree 15-2, 15-17
multiple items 2-60 flat pattern 15-32, 15-42
other 2-63 flat pattern configuration 11-21, 15-44
select using envelope 9-66 flatten 15-32
Index-22
geometry 3-14, 3-21 fundamentals 2-1
grids 3-13 service packs 2-91
imported 13-22 subscription service 2-91
in drawings 11-10, 11-28, 11-30, 11-37, 11-40, 11-42, 11-52, SolidWorks API 2-91
11-56 SolidWorks Office toolbar 2-33
inferencing 3-6, 3-14 SolidWorks web site 2-92
modes 3-7, 3-8 solve 3-14
move 3-9, 3-15 equations 7-14
new 3-2, 3-6 mategroups 9-18
no solve move 3-15 move/copy 3-15
options 17-7 relations in imported drawings 3-19
origins 3-5 sketch geometry 3-14
parts 3-3 sort 12-76
paste 3-8 space handles 3-75
patterns 3-17, 3-25, 6-123 spin box increments 3-33, 12-26, 17-18
planes 3-12, 3-13, 10-9 spiral 5-17
relations 3-40, 3-42, 3-43, 3-44, 10-9 splines 3-46
repair 4-10 3D 3-71
rotate 3-27 curvature combs 3-52
scale 3-27 fit spline 3-48
select chain 2-62 inflection points 3-52
splines 3-49 insert points 3-49
starting a sketch 3-3, 3-4, 3-5 minimum radius 3-53
status 3-43 moving frames 3-49
status bar 3-5 proportional 3-47
skins 2-87, 17-6 simplify 3-49
slant extension lines 12-6, 12-24 Spline Tools toolbar 2-33
SldTrans 1.0 (Pro/ENGINEER) 13-33 split 2-48
SldUG 1.0 (Unigraphics II) 13-39 bar 2-4
Smart Fasteners 9-77 entities 3-32
add nuts and washers 9-86 hole series 9-87
bolt patterns 9-89 panel display 2-43, 2-48
bottom stack 9-78, 9-86 parts 7-23
change type 9-85 tables 12-76
configurations 9-89 split lines 5-20
defaults 9-78, 9-90 balloon style 12-42
edit 9-85, 9-86, 9-87 drafts 6-35, 6-37
flip 9-85 fillets 6-71, 6-73
holes 9-77, 9-83 lofts 6-96
insert 9-78 projection 5-20
overview 9-77 silhouette 5-20
part numbers 9-88 surfaces 5-20
patterns 9-83 spot lights 7-49
PropertyManager 9-78 springs 9-34
top stack 9-78, 9-86 stacked balloons 12-44, 12-46, 17-23
unsupported hole types 9-83 standard 3 views 11-17, 11-19
update 9-90 standard mates 9-14, 9-15
SmartMates 9-25 Standard toolbar 2-33
feature-based 9-26 Standard Views toolbar 2-40
geometry-based 9-25 standards 17-19
moving components 9-27 ANSI 1982 12-58
pattern-based 9-26 ANSI basic tolerances 17-21
snap 17-28 holes 6-80, 6-86
3D sketches 3-69 surface finish symbols 12-56, 12-57, 17-19
blocks 12-69 welds 9-58
dimension text 17-21 start command when creating new drawing 11-21
notes 12-36 statistics, assembly 9-9
software OpenGL 17-10 status bar 2-10, 3-5
Solid Edge files 13-36 STEP files 13-37
solid fill 12-66 edit imported features 13-4
SolidWorks 2-1 export 13-9, 13-13
basic concepts 2-2 import 13-3
Index-24
mates 9-14, 9-22 Font 2-29
selection 2-65 Layer 2-29
sketch relations 3-42 Line Format 2-29
sweeps 6-190, 6-193 Macro 2-30
tangent edge display 11-57, 17-5 Mold Tools 2-30
tangent to surface planes 5-5 Reference Geometry 2-31
tap holes 6-87 Selection Filter 2-63
templates 2-52 Sheet Metal 2-31
bill of materials 12-78 Simulation 2-32
create 2-52 Sketch 2-32
default 2-53 SolidWorks Office 2-33
file types 2-52 Spline Tools 2-33
predefined views 11-24 Standard 2-33
schematic 11-44 Standard Views 2-40
tables 12-78, 12-79 Surfaces 2-40
tabs 2-52 Tools 2-41
view reference geometry 5-1 View 2-41
temporary axes 5-12 Web 2-41
text 17-25 Weldments 2-43
dimensions 12-22 tooling split 8-9
extruded text on part 3-65 tools 2-41
notes 12-36 check 7-31
size of annotations 12-32, 17-25 curvature 7-39
sketch 3-65 equations 7-14
textures 2-39, 2-77 mass properties and section properties 7-38
thicken surfaces 6-195 measure 7-18
thickness 11-56, 11-58 Tools toolbar 2-41
thin features 6-45, 6-46, 6-94, 6-191 tooltips 2-10
third angle projection 11-19 top 2-40
third party products. See add-ins 2-89 gradient color 17-6
threads, cosmetic 12-54 orientation 2-75, 3-4
through lines/points planes 5-2 views 11-17
thumbnail graphics 14-9 top-down assembly design 9-1
palette items 14-9 trailing zeros 17-19
TIFF files 13-38 transitional 12-8, 12-29
export 13-9, 13-15 translate sketches 3-15
export options 13-9, 13-15 translators 13-2
import 13-38 ACIS 13-7, 13-9, 13-17
tile graphics windows 2-3 Autodesk Inventor 13-17
time-dependent features 9-49 CADKEY 13-17
tip of the day 2-10 CATIA Graphics 13-18
tolerances 12-28 DXF 3D 13-18
chamfer dimensions 12-20 HCG 13-26
dimensions 12-28 HOOPS 13-27
Fit 12-8, 12-28, 12-29 IGES 13-7, 13-11, 13-27, 13-28, 13-29
geometric tolerancing 12-60 JPEG 13-29
include prefix 17-21 Mechanical Desktop 13-29
options 17-21 Parasolid 13-13, 13-33
simplify splines 3-49 PDF Files 13-33
toolbars Pro/ENGINEER 13-33, 13-34, 13-35, 13-36
2D to 3D 2-22 Solid Edge 13-36
Align 2-22 STEP 13-7, 13-13, 13-37
Annotations 2-23 STL 13-8, 13-14, 13-37
arrange 2-21 Unigraphics 13-39
Assembly 2-24 VDAFS 13-7, 13-39
Curves 2-25 Viewpoint 13-39
customize 2-86 VRML 13-8, 13-15, 13-40
Dimensions/Relations 2-26 ZGL 13-40
dispaly or hide 2-21 transparency 2-66, 2-79, 3-12, 5-8, 9-48, 9-62, 17-8, 17-10
Drawing 2-26 triad 9-11, 9-12
Explode Sketch 2-27 move 9-11
Features 2-27 rotate 9-12
Index-26
W Weldments toolbar 2-43
walls in sheet metal parts 15-16 What's this? 2-10
washers 9-82, 9-86 What's wrong? 2-12
watermarks 11-13, 11-16 windows 2-2
web folders cascade 2-3
change URL 2-58 close all 2-2
copy referenced files to server 2-58 drawings 11-8
opening files from 2-57 new 2-3
overview 2-57 tile 2-3
saving files to 2-57 Windows Explorer 2-55
Web support 2-42 wireframe 2-78, 17-5
open address 2-42 witness lines. See extension lines 12-24
stop jump 2-41 wizards 2-90
Web toolbar 2-41 conversion 2-89
weld beads 9-58 copy options 2-90
automatic weld symbols 9-60 holes 6-77
create 9-58 work features, MDT files 13-29
edit 9-58 wrap 6-216
select faces 9-60
standards 9-58 X
types 9-58 X display 12-20
weld symbols 12-64 x_b or x_t files (Parasolid) 13-33
ANSI 12-65 xmt_bin or xmt_txt files (Parasolid) 13-33
display 17-19 XREFs 13-19
edit 12-64
favorites 12-4 Z
fonts 17-26 zebra stripes 7-42, 7-44
GOST 12-66 zeros 17-19
insert 12-64 color default 10-33
options 17-19 configuration parameter default 10-24
properties 12-64 leading 17-19
weldment cut lists 16-15 trailing 17-19
anchor 12-77 ZGL files 13-40
configurations 16-15 zig zag break line cut style 11-37
custom properties 16-15 zone 12-93
item numbers 16-16 zoom 2-81
templates 12-78 in/out 2-81
weldments 16-1 to area 2-80
corner treatments 16-4 to fit 2-80
custom properties 16-18 to selection 2-81, 11-8
cut lists 16-15
end caps 16-13
fillet weld beads 16-10
gussets 16-7
structural members 16-1
sub weldments 16-14
trim and extend 16-5
weldment drawings 16-14